Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications \ '--j CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH ... i -l Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements Prepared by: - Cubellis Project No.070662FLAR City of Sunny Isles Beach Bid No. 08-05-02 Dade County Building Department Process No. M2008000342 April 11 , 2008 "" J ". ~ \ ) CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH '\. Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements Prepared by: II Cubellis Project No.070662FLAR City of Sunny Isles Beach Bid No. _ 08-05-02_ Dade County Building Department Process No. M2008000342 April 11, 2008 CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements Contract Documents and Specifications - Cubellis Project No. 070662FLAR City of Sunny Isles Beach Bid No._ 08-05-02 Dade County Building Department Process No._M2008000342 April 11, 2008 01731 01732 01770 01781 01782 Cutting and Patching Selective Demolition Closeout Procedures Project Record Documents Opereation and Maintenance Data DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK NOT USED DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 03301 03331 03410 03450 03521 03532 03930 Cast in Place Concrete Cast in Place Concrete for Limited Applications Cast in Place Architectural Concrete Precast Concrrete Architectural Precast Concete Lightweight Insulating Cioncrete Floor Topping Concrete Concrete Rehabilitatuion DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04720 04902 Cast Stone Stone Restoration and Cleaning DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 05210 05310 05400 05500 05511 05521 05700 05721 05730 05811 Structural Steel Steel Joists Steel Deck Cold Formed Metal Framing Metal Fabrications Metal Stairs Pipe and Tube Railings Ornamental Metal Ornamental Railings Ornamental Formed metal Architectural Joint Systems DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Final Version NOT USED ii TABLE OF CONTENTS Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements Cubellis Project No. 070662FLAR City of Sunny Isles Beach Bid No. 08-05-02 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00020 00100 00300 00401 00402 00403 00420 00500 00600 00601 00650 00700 00800 00900 Notice to Bidders Instructions to Bidders Bid Form Bid Bond Public Entity Crimes Affidavit Trench Safety Act Information Required from Bidders EJCDC Standard Form of Agreement Payment Bond Performance Bond Acknowledgment of Conformance with O.S.H.A. Standards General Conditions Supplementary Conditions Addenda SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 01100 01125 01210 01230 01250 01270 01290 01310 01320 01322 01330 01400 01420 01500 01524 01600 01700 Final Version General Requirements Summary Summary of Multiple Contracts Allowances Alternates Contract of Modification Procedures Unit Prices Payment Procedures Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Photographic Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References Temporary Fascilities and Controls Construction Waste Product Requirements Execution Requirements DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07115 07131 07132 07133 07141 07142 07180 07190 07210 07240 07241 07243 07270 07412 07510 07511 07512 07530 07531 07540 07550 07551 07552 07561 07591 07610 07620 07710 07720 07811 07821 07841 07842 07920 Bituminous Dampproofing Self Adhering Sheet Waterprtoofing Elastometric Sheet Waterproofing Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing Cold Fluid Applied Waterproofing Hot Fluid Applied Waterproofing Traffic Coatings Water Repellents Building Insulation EIFS Polymer Based EI FS Water Drainage EIFS Air Barriers Metal Wall Panels Built Up Bituminous Roofing Built Up Asphalt Roofing Built Up Coal-Tar Roofing Elastometric Membrane Roofing EPDM Roofing Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing APP Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Fluid Applied Membrane Roofing Membrane Reroofing Preparation Sheet metal Roofing Sheet metal Flashing and Trrim Manuf. Roof Specialties Roof Accessories Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Board Fire Protection Through-Penetration Firestop Systems Fire-Resistive Joint Systems Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 08125 08311 08411 08515 08520 08710 Final Version Steel Doors and Frames Interior Aluminum Frames Access Doors and Frames Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts Windows Aluminum Windows Door Hardware iij DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09111 09210 09215 09220 09250 09265 09511 09680 09681 09720 09771 09841 09911 09912 Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing Gypsum Plaster Gypsum Veneer Plastering Portland Cement Plaster Gypsum Board Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Carpet Carpet Tile Wall Coverings Fabric Wrapped Panels Acoustical Wall Panels Exterior Painting Interior Painting DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10531 Awnings DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHING NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRCUTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEM NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL NOT USED DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Final Version NOT USED iv SECTION 00020 NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the CITY COMMISSION of THE CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH is seeking sealed bids for the following work as specified. City Hall Improvements Cubellis Project No. 070662FLAR City of Sunny Isles Beach Bid No. 08-05-02 Sealed bids for the construction of the: 1. New storefront glass enclosure for existing east stair, 1 st floor. 2. New concrete roof over existing Post office, 1 st floor. 3. New vestibule entrance for existing Council Chambers, 1 st floor. 4. New storefront glass in front of existing elevator doors, 2nd floor. 5. New floor drains installed into existing concrete slab, 3rd floor. 6. New galvanized steel canopy over exiting elevator doors, 3rd floor. 7. New entrance into existing building, connecting 3rd floor parking with 3rd floor offices. 8. New entrance into existing Generator Room, 1st floor. will be received by the Owner, City of Sunny Isles Beach. Bids shall be on a unit price basis; segregated bids will not be accepted. Sealed bids will be received by the City Clerk until 10:45 am, Monday, May 19, 2008 at the City of Sunny Isles Beach, City Hall located at 18070 Collins Avenue, Sunny Isles Beach, Florida, 33160. Bids received after this time will be returned unopened. Bids submitted will be opened publicly and read aloud at this time. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference is scheduled for 11:00 am, Wednesday, May 7, 2008 at the City of Sunny Isles Beach, City Hall located at 18070 Collins Avenue, Sunny Isles Beach, Florida 33160, (305) 947-0606. Bidders may obtain complete sets of Bidding Documents from the City of Sunny Isles Beach at 18070 Collins Avenue, Sunny Isles Beach, Florida 33160 at no cost. Partial sets of Bidding Documents will not be available. Bidding Documents may be examined at the City of Sunny Isles Beach, at the above- referenced address. Bid security in the amount of five percent (5%) of the Total Bid, must accompany the Bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. The contract will be awarded by the Owner to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder whose bid best serves the interest of, and represents the best value to, the Owner pursuant to the criteria set forth in Section 62-8 of the Code of the City of Sunny 04/08 Final Version 00020-1 Isles Beach. Price is only a factor in determining the lowest responsible and responsive bidder. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, with or without cause, to waive technical errors and informalities, and to accept the Bid, which best serves the interest of the Owner. For further information, contact the office of the City of Sunny Isles Beach, Rick Conner, Public Works Director at (305) 792-1928. Jane Hines City Clerk City of Sunny Isles Beach Publish Dates: April 18, 2008 END OF DOCUMENT 04/08 Final Version 00020-2 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. DEFINITION OF TERMS 1.1 Bidding Documents - these include the Advertisement for Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, sample bidding and contract forms, proposed Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions and any Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 Total Base Bid - the amount stated on the Bid Form for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Unit Price Bid - the amount stated in the Bid Form as a price per unit of measurement for materials or labor as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.4 Addenda - written and graphic documents issued by the Engineer prior to the execution of the Contract to modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. 1.5 General Conditions - 2002 Version of the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. 1.6 Any Capitalized terms contained here-in (e.g. Owner, Engineer, Work, Agreement, Contract) and is not defined above are contained in the General Conditions Article 1 - Definitions and Terminology. 2. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1 Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained from the office of the Engineer as stated in the Advertisement for Bid. 2.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used by Bidders in preparation of Bids; neither the Owner nor the Engineer assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets. 2.3 Bidding documents consist of this project manual along with the following construction plans titled: a. Construction Drawinas Bid No. 08-05-02 Cubellis Project No. 070662FLAR Final Version 00100-1 3. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 Bidders shall visit the site of the proposed work and become familiar with the nature and extent of work to be performed and local conditions that may affect the work. 3.2 The Bidding Documents were prepared to present an essentially accurate representation of existing conditions, interpreted from available information on the site. The Bidder is not relieved, however, of the responsibility of becoming fully informed as to existing conditions at the site. 3.3 Bidders shall examine existing site improvements, and conditions, utilities, and streets to determine all conditions, which will affect the Work. 4. INTERPRETATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4.1 All questions requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be made in writing and shall reach the office of the Owner at least 5 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Direct all requests to the attention of Bruce Wasersztein, Project Architect at Cubellis, 1800 Eller Drive Suite 500, Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316; Fax: 954- 961-6807; Phone: 954-961-6806. 4.2 Any modification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum to all who are recorded by the Architect as having received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 4.3 Interpretations or modifications of Bidding Documents made in any manner other than by Addendum will not be binding. 4.4 A Bidder, prior to submitting his Bid, shall ascertain that he has received all Addenda issued, and shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid Form. 5. SUBSTITUTIONS 5.1 Bidders represent that their Bid is based upon the materials and equipment described in the Bidding Documents. 5.2 Requests for substitutions will be considered prior to receipt of bids if they reach the Architect at least 5 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 5.3 Acceptance by the Architect of a proposed substitution will be issued in the form of an Addendum or Substitution Request Form. Final Version 00100-2 6. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 6.1 If requested, the Bidder shall submit to the Architect, prior to award of contract, a properly completed Contractors Qualification Statement, along with any other evidence of his satisfactory experience and ability to perform the proposed Work. 6.2 If requested by the Owner, the Bidder shall submit a certified financial statement, prepared within the past 30 days, indicating current financial resources, liabilities, capital equipment, and past history performance. 6.3 Bidders may be disqualified and their bids rejected for any of the following specific reasons: a. Reason to believe that collusion exists among Bidders. b. Determination of lack of competency as may be revealed by qualification statements, financial statements, experience records, or other questionnaires. c. The Bidder's uncompleted work load which in the judgment of the Owner, may cause detrimental impact on prompt completion of this project. d. The Bidder is involved in any litigation against the Owner. e. The Bidder has defaulted on any previous contract or is in arrears on any existing contract. f. The submittal of more than one proposal from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation or association under the same or different names. g. The Bidder, or its principals, have outstanding code enforcement violations with the City of Sunny Isles Beach. 6.4 It shall be a requirement of this bid that there are no related party transactions between the bidder and any employee, agent or contractor of the City of Sunny Isles Beach. Any bidder who is a related party, as noted herein, will be considered non-responsive and the proposal and bid bond will be immediately returned. A bidder will be considered a related party if the bidder has an ownership interest or is in any way related to an employee, agent, consultant or contractor of the City, is a sub-consultant of an employee, agent, consultant or contractor, and can influence the management or operating policy of the other to an extent that one of the transacting parties might be prevented from fully pursuing its own separate interests. 7. PERFORMANCE OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR: 7.1 The Contractor shall perform on the site and with his own forces, work equivalent to at least forty percent (40%) of the total amount of work to be performed under this contract. After the contract is awarded, and during Final Version 00100-3 the progress of the work, the Owner reserves the right to reduce the percentage of work performed by the contractor's own forces. 8. BID PREPARATION 8.1 Prepare bids on the forms provided by the Architect with all blanks on the Bid Form filled in by typewriter or written in ink. 8.2 State total base bid amount in both words and figures. In case of a discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. 8.3 Bids shall include the legal name and address of the Bidder and indicate whether the Bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or other legal entity. a. Individual - provide name and post office address. b. Partnership - provide name and post office address of each member of the partnership. c. Corporation - provide name and post office address of person signing the form and legal evidence of his authority to do so; names and addresses of the corporation president, secretary and treasurer; name of state where chartered; and affixed with the seal of the corporation, attested by the secretary. 8.4 Bids shall include documentation required by the Florida "Trench Safety Act." The Trench Safety Act form is included within the Bid Form Section for completion by the Contractor and review by the Owner. The unit prices presented in the Bid shall include the Bidders cost of compliance with the applicable trench safety standards. 8.5 All Unit Price Bids requested on the Bid Form shall be bid. 9. BID SUBMITTAL 9.1 Submit one (1) original and five (5) copies of the Bid Form, the bid security, the list of Subcontractors, and other requested attachments, enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope, addressed to the entity receiving the bids as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall be further identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address, and the words "BID ENCLOSED". 9.2 Deposit Bids at the designated location on or before the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bids received after the time and date indicated for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Final Version 00100-4 10. BID SECURITY 10.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a cashiers check drawn on any State or National Bank in Florida, or an acceptable Bidders Bond, payable unconditionally to the Owner, in an amount of five percent (5%) of the amount of the total Bid or $5,000.00, whichever is less. 10.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to enter into the Contract in accordance with his Bid, or failure to furnish the required bonds will be just cause for an annulment of the award with the amount of the bid security being forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. 10.3 Should a Bid Bond be used, acceptable surety companies shall be determined from the latest United States Treasury Department's list of companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds. Requirements for Acceptable Surety Companies are outlined in Item 15.4. 10.4 The Owner may retain the bid security of those Bidders to whom an award may be considered until successful execution of the Contract and bonds; or the specified time for holding bids has elapsed; or all Bids have been rejected. 11. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID 11.1 Prior to the time of bid opening, a Bidder may withdraw his Bid at any time, but may not resubmit it. Bids may not be modified after submittal. 11.2 After the bid opening, no Bid may be withdrawn, canceled or modified for a period of 90 days after the time and date designated for the receipt of bids. 12. OPENING OF BIDS 12.1 Bids submitted will be opened publicly and read aloud at the time and place stated in the Advertisement for Bids. 13. GOVERNING LAWS AND REGULATIONS 13.1 Bidders shall be familiar with all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations that may in any way affect the Work. 13.2 Trench Safety Act: The Occupational Safety and Health Administration excavation safety standards, 29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P trench safety standards will be in effect during the period of construction of the Project. In compliance with current State of Florida statutes, the Bidder shall provide documentation required by the Florida Trench Safety statute to the Owner, in conjunction with the Bid Form. Final Version 00100-5 14. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 14.1 The Owner may incur financial loss if the Work is not substantially complete by the date set forth in the Agreement. The Contractor (and his Surety) shall be liable for liquidated damages in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions and the Agreement. 15. PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 15.1 With the execution and delivery of the Contract, the Bidder shall furnish the following Surety bonds of the forms contained herein: a. Performance Bond guaranteeing full and faithful execution of the Work in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum, and including guaranteed repair and maintenance of all defects due to faulty materials and workmanship that appear within one year after completion of contract. b. Labor and Material Payment Bond guaranteeing full and proper protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials in the Work in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum. 15.2 Bonds shall be executed by Surety authorized to do business in the State of Florida and listed on the latest U.S. Treasury Department list of companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable sureties on Federal Bonds. 15.3 Bonds executed by an Attorney-in-Fact on behalf of the Surety, shall have affixed thereto a certified and current copy of Power of Attorney, indicating the monetary limit of such power. 15.4 Qualifications: As to companies being rated acceptable: A Bid Bond and Performance and Payment Bond must be executed by a Surety Company of recognized standing, authorized to do business in the State of Florida and having been in business with a record of successful continuous operation for at least (5) years. In addition to the above - minimum qualifications, the Surety Company must meet the following additional qualifications. Final Version 1. The City will accept a surety bond from a company with a rating of B++ or better for bonds up to $1 million, provided, however, that if any Surety Company appears on the watch list that is published quarterly by Intercom of the Office of the Florida Insurance Commissioner, the City shall review and either accept or reject the Surety Company based on the financial information available to the City. A Surety Company that is rejected by the City may be substituted by the bidder or proposer with a surety company acceptable to the City, only if the bid amount does not increase. 00100-6 a. The Surety Company shall have at least the following minimum ratings: Amount of Bond CateQorv 100,000 to 1,000,000 B++ 1,000,001 to 2,000,000 A- 2,000,001 to 5,000,000 A Policvholder's RatinQ Financial Size Class V or higher Class VI or higher Class VII or higher b. All Surety Companies are subject to review and approval by the Owner and may be rejected without cause. All bonds signed by an Agency must be accompanied by a certificate of authority to act. 15.5 The Surety Company shall submit verification from the Department of Insurance Office of the Treasurer stating the surety company's license and certificate of authorization to do business in the State of Florida. 16. SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 16.1 In conjunction with the Bid Form, Bidder shall submit a list of names of the subcontractors and major material suppliers proposed for the principal portions of the Work. Submit list on form provided by the Architect. 16.2 Prior to award of Contract, the Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if they have an objection to any person or entity listed. Upon such reasonable objection, the Bidder shall propose an acceptable substitute person or entity in accordance with Article 6.06 of the General Conditions. 17. BID PROTEST 17.1 In the event of a timely protest, the City Manager or his/her designee shall stay the award of the contract unless, after consulting with the City Attorney and the affected director, he/she determines that the award of the contract without delay is necessary to protect substantial interests of the Owner. 17.2 The city shall require a deposit from a protester to compensate the Owner for the expenses of administering the protest. If the protest is decided in the protester's favor, the entire deposit shall be returned to the protester. If the protest is not decided in the protester's favor, the deposit shall be forfeited to the Owner. The deposit shall be in the form of a cashier's check and shall be in the amount of 1 % of the amount of the pending award, with a minimum deposit of $500 and a maximum deposit of $10,000. Final Version 00100-7 18. CONTRACT AWARD AND EXECUTION 18.1 Until final award of Contract, the Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, with or without cause; to waive any informality or irregularity; or to accept the Bid which is in the best interest of the Owner. 18.2 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder whose bid best serves the interests of, and represents the best value to, the Owner pursuant to the criteria set forth in Section 62-8 of the City Code of Sunny Isles Beach, and whose Bid is in conformance with the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. Price is only a factor in determining the lowest responsible and responsive bidder. 18.3 Upon acceptance of a Bid and award of the Contract, the successful Bidder shall deliver the executed Contract, along with required bonds and any other items requested, to the Owner within 10 days. Failure to do so will be deemed as a breach of agreement by the Bidder and result in forfeiture of bid security as described in the Instructions to Bidders. 18.4 The Owner reserves the right to hold all proposals and bid guarantees for a period not to exceed 90 days after the date of bid opening stated in the Advertisement for Bids. 18.5 The award of the contract, if it is awarded, will be to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder whose bid best serves the interests of, and represents the best value to, the Owner pursuant to the criteria set forth in Section 62-8 of the City Code of Sunny Isles Beach, and whose proposal shall comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Time is of the essence for this project and the time limits set in the proposal, if set by the bidder, will be accorded weight by the Owner in the determination of the best proposal. In no case will the award be made until all necessary investigations have been made into the responsibility of the bidder and the Owner is satisfied that the bidder is qualified to do the Work and have the necessary organization, capital and equipment to carry out the provisions of the contract to the satisfaction of the Owner within the time specified. 18.7 If the Contractor feels that a problem exists either prior to, or during the bid opening, he/she shall contact the City (within 24 hours of the bid opening) and follow the City's current policy for bid protests. 18.8 The Owner reserves the right to award as a total contract any combination of the Unit Price Bid Schedule Items that would be in the best interest of the Owner. Final Version 00100-8 19. CASH ALLOWANCES 19.1 The Bidder is advised that a space is provided in the Bid Form, Document 00300, for this purpose only. The Contractor shall not proceed on any additional work to be covered by allowances until authorized in writing by the Engineer. Such work shall be approved by the Owner, shall be within the scope of work defined by this Contract and shall not exceed the amount indicated in the Bid Form. Any amount remaining in the Cash Allowance will be retained by the Owner. END OF DOCUMENT Final Version 00100-9 SECTION 00300 BID FORM Bid of Address Phone To furnish all materials, equipment and labor and to perform all work in accordance with the Contract Documents for construction of: SUNNY ISLES BEACH: CITY HALL IMPROVEMENTS located in the CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH. To: CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH 18070 Collins Avenue, Suite 250 Sunny Isles Beach, Florida 33160 The undersigned Bidder has carefully examined the Bidding Documents and the site of the proposed work and is familiar with the nature and extent of the work and any local conditions that may in any manner affect the work to be done. The undersigned Bidder agrees to do all the work and furnish all materials called for by the Bidding Documents, in the manner prescribed therein and to the standards of quality and performance established by the Engineer for the unit price amounts stated in the spaces herein provided, for each of the items or combination of items stipulated. Unit price line items shall include cost of implementing all applicable safety requirements. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities scheduled are approximated for the sole purpose of obtaining comparative bids for determination of the lowest responsible and responsive bidder whose bid best serves the interest of, and represents the best value to, the Owner pursuant to the criteria set forth in Section 62-8 of the City Code, and that actual quantities required may increase or decrease. Bidder further agrees that payments will be made on the basis of actual quantities placed and accepted in the construction. Bidder acknowledges that price is only a factor in determining the lowest responsible and responsive bidder. Final Version 00300-1 Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements UNIT PRICE BID SCHEDULE Item Estimated Estimated No. Description Quantity Unit Unit Price Amount 1 New storefront glass enclosure for existing east stair, 1 st floor. 1 LS $65,000 $65,000 New concrete roof over existing Post office, 1 st 2 floor. 1 LS $88,000 $88,000 New vestibule entrance for existing Council 3 Chambers, 1st floor. 1 LS $14,800 $14,800 New storefront glass in front of existing 4 elevator doors, 2nd floor. 1 LS $9,500 $9,500 New floor drains installed into existing 5 concrete slab, 3rd floor. 1 LS $15,000 $15,000 New galvanized steel canopy over exiting 6 elevator doors, 3rd floor. 1 LS $13,000 $13,000 New entrance into existing building, 7 connecting 3rd floor parking with 3ill floor offices, incl. steel stair 1 LS $68,300 $68,300 8 New entrance to existing Generator Room 1 LS $6,200 $6,200 GRAND TOTAL (Items 1-8) $279,800 Two Hundred Seventy Nine Thousand, Eight Hundred Dollars (Written) (Authorized Signature) (Date) Final Version 00300-2 BID SECURITY Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or a bid bond in the amount of $ 5% of the bid made payable to the Owner which may be forfeited as liquidated damages if, in the event this proposal is accepted, the undersigned fails to execute the Agreement and furnish and pay for the required performance and payment bonds for the Owner within 10 days after acceptance of the Bid; otherwise said certified or cashier's check or bid bond will be returned to the undersigned. The undersigned Bidder agrees to commence work within 1Q days after the date of written Notice to Proceed, and further agrees to substantially complete the work within 270 consecutive calendar days after the date of written Notice to Proceed, subject to such extensions of time allowed by the Conditions of the Contract. The undersigned Bidder also agrees to complete the entire work within 300 days after the Contract time commences to run. The undersigned Bidder agrees that this Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned agrees to forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for each calendar day elapsing between the date established as the date of substantial completion and the actual date of such substantial completion of the contract work, the amount of $1,500.00 per calendar day. The undersigned further agrees to forfeit to the Owner, as liquidated damages for each calendar day elapsing between the date established as the date of final completion and the actual date of final completion of the contract work, the amount of $1,000.00 per calendar day. Final Version 00300-3 ADDENDA Bidder acknowledges the receipt of Addendum No.'s 1. ,2. ,3. ,4. ,5. Dated this _ day of (month) (year) Contractor: Address: * SEAL * Attachments: Subcontractor List Bid Security Trench Safety Act documentation END OF DOCUMENT Final Version 00300-4 DOCUMENT 00401 BID BOND BIDDER (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Address of Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH 18070 Collins Avenue Sunny Isles Beach. Florida 33160 BID BID DUE DATE: PROJECT: The Scope of the project includes any and/or all of the following work: 1. New storefront glass enclosure for existing east stair, 1 st floor. 2. New concrete roof over existing Post office, 1 st floor. 3. New vestibule entrance for existing Council Chambers, 1 st floor. 4. New storefront glass in front of existing elevator doors, 2nd floor. S. New floor drains installed into existing concrete slab, 3rd floor. 6. New galvanized steel canopy over exiting elevator doors, 3rd floor. 7. New entrance into existing building, connecting 3rd floor parking with 3rd floor offices. BOND NUMBER: DATE: (Not later than Bid Due Date): PENAL SUM: IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms printed on the reverse side hereof, do each cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent, or representative. BIDDER SURETY (Seal) (Seal) Bidder's Name and Corporate Seal Surety's Name and Corporate Seal By: By: Signature and Title Signature and Title (Attach Power of Attorney) Attest: Attest: Signature and Title Signature and Title Note: (1 ) (2) Above addresses are to be used for giving required notice. Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. Final Version 00401-1 1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder any difference between the total amount of Bidder's bid and the total amount of the bid of the next lowest, responsible and responsive bidder as determined by Owner for the Work required by the Contract Documents, provided that: 1.1. If there is no such next lowest, responsible and responsive bidder, and Owner does not abandon the Project, then Bidder and Surety shall pay to Owner the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond, and 1.2. In no event shall Bidder's and Surety's obligation hereunder exceed the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. 2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents. This obligation shall be null and void if: 3.1. Owner accepts Bidder's bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents, or 3.2. All bids are rejected by Owner, or 3.3. Owner fails to issue a notice of award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by paragraph 5 hereof). 4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default by Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due. 3. 5. Surety waives notice of and any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue notice of award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing notice of award including extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from Bid Due Date without Surety's written consent. 6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default, as required in Paragraph 4 above, is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after Bid Due Date. 7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project is located. 8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier or by United States Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned. 9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the officer, agent or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby. 10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable provision of any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect. 11. The term "bid" as used herein includes a bid, offer or proposal as applicable. Final Version 00401-2 SWORN STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 287.133{3}{a}, FLORIDA STATUTES, ON PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SWORN TO IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICIAL AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. 1. This sworn statement is submitted to [print name of the public entity] by [print individual's name and title] [print name of entity submitting sworn statement] for whose business address is and (if applicable) its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) is (If the entity has no FEIN, include the Social Security Number of the individual signing this sworn statement: .) 2. I understand that a "public entity crime" as defined in Paragraph 287.133(1 )(g), Florida Statutes, means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an agency or political subdivision of any other state or of the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or services to be provided to any public entity or an agency or political subdivision of any other state or of the United States and involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation. 3. I understand that "convicted" or "conviction" as defined in Paragraph 287 .133( 1 )(b), Florida Statues, means a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime, with or without an adjudication of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of record relating to charges brought by indictment or information after July 1, 1989, as a result of a jury verdict, nonjury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or nolo contendere. 4. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Paragraph 287.133(1 )(a), Florida Statutes, means: 1. A predecessor or successor of a person convicted of a public entity crime; or 2. An entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the management of the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity crime. The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of an affiliate. The ownership by one person of shares constituting a controlling interest in another person, or a pooling of equipment or income among persons when not for fair market value under an arm's length agreement, shall be a prima facie case that one person controls another person. A person who knowingly enters into a joint venture with a person who has been convicted of a public entity crime in Florida during the preceding 36 months shall be considered an affiliate. 5. I understand that a "person" as defined in Paragraph 287.133(1 )(e), Florida Statutes, means any natural person or entity organized under the laws of any state or of the United States with the legal power to enter into a binding contract and which bids or applies to bid on contracts for the provision of goods or services let by a public entity, or which otherwise transacts or applies to transact business with a public entity. The term "person" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in management of an entity. Final Version 00402-1 6. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. [Indicate which statement applies] Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any of its officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in the management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of its officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in the management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of its officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in the management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. However, there has been a subsequent proceeding before a Hearing Officer of the State of Florida, Division of Administrative Hearings and the Final Order entered by the Hearing Officer of the State of Florida, Division of Administrative Hearings and the Final Order entered by the Hearing Officer determined that it was not in the public interest to place the entity submitting this sworn statement on the convicted vendor list. [attach a copy of the final order] I UNDERSTAND THAT THE SUBMISSION OF THIS FORM TO THE CONTRACTING OFFICER FOR THE PUBLIC ENTITY IDENTIFIED IN PARAGRAPH 1 (ONE) ABOVE IS FOR THAT PUBLIC ENTITY ONLY AND, THAT THIS FORM IS VALID THROUGH DECEMBER 31 OF THE CALENDAR YEAR IN WHICH IT IS FILED. I ALSO UNDERSTAND THAT I AM REQUIRED TO INFORM THE PUBLIC ENTITY PRIOR TO ENTERING INTO A CONTRACT IN EXCESS OF THE THRESHOLD AMOUNT PROVIDED IN SECTION 287.017, FLORIDA STATUTES FOR CATEGORY TWO OF ANY CHANGE IN THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS FORM. [signature] Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of ,20_. Personally known OR Produced identification Notary Public - State of (Type of identification) My commission expires (Printed typed or stamped commissioned name of notary public) Final Version 00402-2 DOCUMENT 00403 TRENCH SAFETY ACT (90-96, Laws of Florida) Bidder acknowledges that included in the appropriate bid items of the proposal and in the Total Bid Price are costs for complying with the Florida Trench Safety Act (90-96, Laws of Florida) effective October 1, 1990. The bidder further identifies the costs of such compliance to be summarized below: Trench Safety Measure (Description) Unit of Measure (LFSF) Unit (Quantity) Unit Cost Extended Cost A. B. C. D. Total $ If applicable, the Contractor certifies that all trench excavation done within his control in excess of five feet in depth shall be in accordance with the Florida Department of Transportation's Special Provisions Article 125-1 and Subarticle 125-4.1 (TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY SYSTEM AND SHORING, SPECIAL - TRENCH EXCAVATION). Failure to complete the above may result in the bid being declared non-responsive. Contractor agrees that the above safety compliances and costs are included in his bid package. Signature of Bidding Contractor END OF DOCUMENT Final Version 00403-1 DOCUMENT 00420 INFORMATION REQUIRED FROM BIDDERS GENERAL INFORMATION The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to comply with this requirement may cause its rejection. Additional sheets shall be attached as required. 1. Contractor's Name/Address: 2. Contractor's Telephone Number: 3. Contractor's License: Primary Classification: 4. Number of years as a Contractor in construction work of the type involved in this Contract: S. List the names and titles of all officers of Contractor's firm: 6. Name of person who inspected site or proposed work for your firm: Name: Date of Inspection: 7. What is the last project of this nature you have completed? 8. Have you ever failed to complete work awarded to you; if so, where and why? Final Version 00420-1 9. Name three individuals or corporations for which you have performed work and to which you refer: 10. List the following information concerning all contracts on hand as of the date of submission of this proposal. (In case of co-venture, list the information for all co-ventures). NAME OF PROJECT CITY TOTAL CONTRACT VALUE CONTRACTED DATE OF COMPLETION % COMPLETION TO DATE (Continue list on inset sheet, if necessary) 11 . What equipment do you own that is available for the work? 12. What equipment will you purchase for the proposed work? NOTE: Attach additional sheets if required. If requested by the City, the Bidder shall furnish a notarized financial statement, references and other information, sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of his current financial condition. Final Version 00420-2 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS The Bidder SHALL list below the name and address of each Subcontractor who will perform work under this Contract in excess of one-half percent of the total bid price, and shall also list the portion of the work which will be done by such Subcontractor. After the opening of Proposals, changes or substitutions will be allowed with written approval of the City of Sunny Isles Beach. Subcontractors must be properly licensed. Work to be Performed Subcontractor's Name! Address 1. 2. 3. 4. s. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. NOTE: Attach additional sheets if required. Final Version 00420-3 EJCDC STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR ON THE BASIS OF A STIPULATED PRICE THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the _ day of in the year 20_ by and between CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH (hereinafter called OWNER) and (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK. CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as follows: Proiect Title and Descriotion of Work Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements 1. New storefront glass enclosure for existing east stair, 1 s\ floor. 2. New concrete roof over existing Post office, 18t floor. 3. New vestibule entrance for existing Council Chambers, 18t floor. 4. New storefront glass in front of existing elevator doors, 2nd floor. 5. New floor drains installed into existing concrete slab, 3rd floor. 6. New galvanized steel canopy over exiting elevator doors, 3rd floor. 7. New entrance into existing building, connecting 3'd floor parking with 3rd floor offices. Article 2. ARCHITECT The Project has been designed by: Cubellis 1800 Eller Drive, Suite 500 Fort Lauderdale, FL 33316 (954) 961-6806 who is hereinafter called ARCHITECT and who is to act as OWNER'S representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ARCHITECT in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIMES. 3.1. The work will be substantially completed within =270 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions within _ 300 calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 3.2. L1QUlDA TED DAMAGES. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Thousand Five Hundred and 001100 dollars ($1500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for each Substantial Completion date until the Work is substantially Final Version 00500-1 ~~ I' f~~ \J~ complete. If CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the project by the project completion date within the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER One Thousand and 00/100 dollars ($1000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for completion and readiness for final payment. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents an amount in current funds equal to the sum of the amounts detennined pursuant to paragraphs 4.1 below: 4A-.--FOR A LUMP SUM CONTRACT OF: TOTAL BASE BID (Lump sum, Unit prices, and contingency items) (use words) ($ figures As provided in paragraph 11.03 of the General Conditions estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and detenninations of actual quantities and classification are to be made by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9.08 of the General Conditions. Unit prices have been computed as provided in paragraph 11.03.8 of the General Conditions. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ARCHITECT as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. Progress Payments; Retainage. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment as recommended by ARCHITECT, on or about the last day of each month during construction as provided in paragraphs 5.1.1. and 5.1.2. below. All such payments will be measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.07 of the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no schedule of values, as provided in the General Requirements. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ARCHITECT shall detennine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions. ...iQ.... % of Work completed (with the balance being retainage). If Work has been 50% completed as detennined by ARCHITECT, and if the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ARCHITECT, OWNER, on recommendation of ARCHITECT, may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed, in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. .J!.L % (with the balance being retainage) of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.02 of the Final Version 00500-2 General Conditions and within Section 9-6.5 partial payments as provided in FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 5.1.2. When circumstances beyond the CONTRACTORS control arise (as determined by the OWNER) the OWNER may allow the total payment to the CONTRACTOR to increase to 98% of the contract price (with the balance being retainage), less such amounts as ARCHITECT shall determine, only after receipt of the final as-builts and upon substantial completion of the project and in accordance with Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions. 5.2. Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.07 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ARCHITECT as provided in said paragraph 14.07. Article 6. INTEREST. (Not Applicable) Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS. In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1. CONTRACTOR has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents (including the Addenda listed in paragraph 8) and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents including "technical data." 7.2. CONTRACTOR has visited the site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local and site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or fumishing of the Work. 7.3. CONTRACTOR is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance and fumishing of the Work. 7.4. CONTRACTOR has carefully studied all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2.1. of the General Conditions. CONTRACTOR accepts the determination set forth in paragraph SC-4.2 of the Supplementary Conditions of the extend of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents and may not be complete for CONTRACTOR's purposes. CONTRACTOR acknowledges that OWNER and ARCHITECT do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for having done so) all such additional supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies and data conceming conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. CONTRACTOR does not consider that any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies or data are necessary for the performance and furnishing of the Work at the contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5. CONTRACTOR is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by OWNER and others at the site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. 7.6. CONTRACTOR has correlated the information known to CONTRACTOR, information and observations obtained from visits to the site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Final Version 00500-3 Documents and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations. tests. studies and data with the Contract Documents. 7.7. CONTRACTOR has given ARCHITECT written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies that CONTRACTOR has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ARCHITECT is acceptable to CONTRACTOR, and the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the following: 8.1. This Agreement (pages 1 to-1!h inclusive). 8.2. Exhibits to this Agreement (page) A- 3 inclusive). 8.3. Performance, Payment, and other Bonds. identified as exhibits 00600 and 00601 and consisting of ~ pages. 8.4. Notice to Proceed. 8.5. General Conditions (pages 00700-1 to 00700-43. inclusive). 8.6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 00800-1 to 00800-15. inclusive) and any amendments thereto. 8.7. Specifications bearing the title Soecifications and consisting of 16 divisions. 8.8. Drawings consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as specified in the Drawing Index INX-1. 8.9. Addenda No. inclusive. 8.10. CONTRACTOR's Bid. 8.11. Documentation submitted by CONTRACTOR prior to Notice of Award (pages N/A to N/A inclusive). ~ 8.12. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of-- --- --- { Formatted: Bullets and Numbering the Agreement and are not attached hereto: All Written Amendments and other documents amending, modifying or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. +------ Fonnatted: Indent: Left: 0.4" 8.13 .!\mendments and Additions to the Standard General Conditions of the. Construction .______ Fonnatted: Font: (Default) Arial. Not Bold Contract and the Suoolementary Conditions. identified as exhibits N/A and N/A and .-..-. consistinq of 0 Daqes. Fonnatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Not Bold +------{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Hanging: 1" The documents listed in paragraphs 8.2 et seq. above are attached to this Agreement (except as expressly noted otherwise above). There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 13. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraph 3.04 of the General Conditions. Final Version 00500-4 Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS. 9.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party thereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4. Any provisions or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under any Law or Regulation shali be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, who agree that the Contract Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provisions or part thereof with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the stricken provision. 9.5. OTHER PROVISIONS. 9.5.1. DRAWINGS DESCRIPTION SHEET NO. 2. A001 3. A101 4. A102 5. A103 6. A104 7. A701 8. S-O 9. S-1 10. S-2 11. S-3 12. E101 13. E201 14. P101 15. P201 16. F101 17. F201 .1. G101 TITLE SHEET ________hm___h___h___m__________m____________-----{ Formatted: Font rolor: Auto KEY PLANS & CODE COMPLIANCE FIRST FLOOR NEW CANOPY ROOF PLAN & DETAILS THIRD FLOOR NEW ENTRANCE PLAN & ELEVATIONS EAST STAIR ENCLOSURE. GENERATOR ROOM DOORS CHAMBER NEW ENTRANCE & PARKING NEW WINDOW GENERAL NOTES STRUCTURAL NOTES & DETAILS STRUCTURAL PLANS STRUCTURAL SECTIONS SCHEDULES ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS ELECTRICAL NOTES. RISERS. & DETAILS PLUMBING PLAN PLUMBING LEGEND. NOTES, & NOTES FLOOR PLANS FIRE SPRINKLER DETAILS. LEGEND, & NOTES ---------1 Formatted: Tab stops: 0.5", Left + Not at 0.9S" Final Version 00500-5 9.5.2. In accordance with the indemnification provision contained in the General Conditions, the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and save harmless the CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH, and their agents and employees, from or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or person during or on account of any operations connected with the construction of all Work; or by or in consequence of any negligence in connection with the same; or by use of any improper materials or by or on account of any act or omission of the said Contractor, subcontractor, agents, servants, or employees; and 9.5.3. The CONTRACTOR agrees to maintain in force at all times during the life of the construction, public liability insurance, by separate certificate, in an amount not less than $1,000,000 for injuries, including willful death, to anyone person and subject to those same limits for each person, in an amount not less that $1,000,000 for damages as a result of each occurrence and property damage insurance and in an amount not less than $1,000,000 for damages on anyone occurrence. Such policy shall specifically protect the CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH, AND their agents and employees, by making them an additional insured, and shall not be modified or canceled without thirty (30) days written notice to the CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH. 9.5.4 Should the final completion and acceptance of the work herein embraced together with any modification or additions be delayed beyond the time herein set because of lace of performance by the Contract, it is understood and agreed that aside from any other liquidated damage per day for such delay from such time until the work is completed and accepted as herein provided, all costs of engineering and inspection on behalf of the Owner will be charged to the contractor and deducted from any estimate or payment otherwise due and payable to him from time to time. The costs of engineering and inspection which may be charged to the Contractor by the Owner under this article shall be equal to the Engineer's charges to the Owner. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in Five (5) parts. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ARCHITECT. All portions of the Contract Documents have been signed, initialed or identified by OWNER and CONTRACTOR or identified by ARCHITECT on their behalf. This Agreement will be effective on , 20_ (which is the Effective Date of the Agreement). ATTEST: By [CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL] Address for giving notices Final Version License No. Agent for service of process 00500-6 (If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attached evidence of authority to sign). Final Version 00500-7 SIGNATURE PAGE FOR CONTRACTS/AGREEMENTS CITY EXECUTIONS IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have made and executed this (Agreement or Contract) on the respective dates under each signature: City of Sunny Isles Beach through its City Commission, signing by and through its Mayor, authorized to execute same by Commission action on the _ day of , _; and CONTRACTOR authorized to execute same. CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH, through its City Commission ATTEST: By: Norman S. Edelcup, Mayor _day of ,20Q8 Jane Hines, City Clerk Approved as to form and legality by Office of the City Attorney By: A. John Szerlag, City Manager _day of ,2008 By: Hans Ottinot, City Attorney _day of ,20Q8 (CITY SEAL) I Final Version 00500-8 .. - - - - - - { Formatted: Centered CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE PRINCIPAL I, of and , who signed the Bid with City of Sunny Isles, , certify that I am the that Dade County Florida for is behalf of the Corporation. , City Bid No. of said Corporation with full authority to sign said Bid on Signed and sealed this _ day of ,20_. (SEAL) Signature Typed wfTitle STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF DADE SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED before me this _ day of ,20 . My Commission Expires: Notary Public Final Version 00500-9 .. - -- - - - Formatted: Une spacing: 1.5 lines, Tab stops: -1", Left + -0.5", Left + 1.5", Centered + 3", Left + 3.53", Left + 5.03", Centered CERTIFICATE AS TO AUTHORIZED CORPORATE PERSONNEL I, , certify that I am the of who signed the Bid with City of Sunny Isles Beach, Dade County Florida for the project titled , Consultant Project No. , and that the following persons have the authority to sign payment requests on behalf of the Corporation: (Signature) (Typed Name wffitle) (Signature) (Typed Name wffitle) (Signature) (Typed Name wffitle) Signed and sealed this _ day of ,20_. (SEAL) Signature Typed wffitle STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF DADE SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED before me this _ day of ,20 . My Commission Expires: Notary Public Final Version 00500-10 Construction Payment Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH 18070 Collins Avenue Sunny Isles Beach, Florida 33160 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: $ Description (Name and Location): Project Title and Descriotion of Work BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: $ Modifications to this Bond Form: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company SURETY (Corp. Seal) Company (Corp. Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Signature: Name and Title: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company SURETY (Corp. Seal) Company (Corp. Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Signature: Name and Title: Final Version 00600-1 FJCDC No. 191O-28B (1984 Edition) Prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors of America, American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors. 1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1. Promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and 2.2. Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from all claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default. 3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due. 4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1. Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim. 4.2. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: 1. Have furnished written notice to the Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed: and 2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly: and 3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have sent a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor. 5. If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance. 6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: 6.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed. 6.2. Payor arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. 7. The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. 8. Amounts owned by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. 9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others fo! obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond. 10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to relate subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (iii), or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be acceptable. 12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page. 13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 14. Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. 15. DEFINITIONS 15.1.Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct contract witt the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. 15.2.Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 15.3.Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (FOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): Final Version 00600-2 EJCDC No. 191O-28B (1984 Edition) Prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors of America, American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors. Construction Performance Bond Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. CONTRACTOR (Name and Address): SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business): OWNER (Name and Address): CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH 18070 Collins Avenue, Suite 250 Sunny Isles Beach, Florida 33160 CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: Amount: $ Description (Name and Location): Proiect Title and Descriotion of work BOND Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Amount: $ Modifications to this Bond Form: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company SURETY (Corp. Seal) Company (Corp. Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Signature: Name and Title: CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL Company SURETY (Corp. Seal) Company (Corp. Seal) Signature: Name and Title: Signature: Name and Title: Final Version 00601-1 PJCDC No. 191O-28A (1984 Edition) Prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors of America, American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors. 1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3. If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1. The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below, that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default: and 3.2. The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor's right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1: and 3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner. 4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: 4.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract: or 4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors: or 4.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Constructioil Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's default: or 4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 1. After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner: or 2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefor. 5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6. After the Owner has terminated the Contractor's right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1. The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract: 6.2. Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4: and 6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. 7. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors. 8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. 10. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. 11. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory 01 legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12. Definitions. 12.1. Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. 12.2. Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto. 12.3. Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract. 12.4. Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof. (FOR INFORMATION ONLY-Name, Address and Telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or other party): Final Version 00601-2 EJCDC No. 191O-28A (1984 Edition) Prepared through the joint efforts of the Surety Association of America, Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee, The Associated General Contractors of America, American Institute of Architects, American Subcontractors Association, and the Associated Specialty Contractors. DOCUMENT 00650 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF CONFORMANCE WITH O.S.H.A. STANDARDS TO THE CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH We acknowledge and agree that as contractors for the construction of the II ", that we have the sole responsibility for compliance with all requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and all State and Local Safety and Health regulations, and agree to indemnify and hold harmless the City of Sunny Isles Beach, and Calvin, Giordano & Associates, Inc., Consulting Engineers against any and all legal liability or loss the District or the Engineer may incur due to failure to comply with such act. ATTEST CONTRACTOR By: ATTEST Title: DATE END OF DOCUMENT Final Version 00650-1 This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly By ---- --- ACEC fi Nationa' Society of Professional Engineers Professional Engineers in Private Practice .S'I'I! American Society iFI ".. of Civil Engineers AMERTCAS Cot,Nnt or: ENGrNEr.RING COMPANIES PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America ~ KnOWle.dg~ for Creating -:ar. and Sustalmng the BUIlt Environment r Construction Specifications Institute ~ EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright@2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 0 Final Version Copyright @2002 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005 American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400 These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Nos. C-S20 or C-S2S (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition). EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 1 Final Version TABLE OF CONTENTS PaQe ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ..................................................................................................6 1.01 Defined Terms.................................................................................................................................... ..... 6 1 .02 Terminology............................ .......... ............. ............................ ........................... ................................... 8 ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MA TIERS............................................................................. ...................................... 9 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............. ......... ...... ......................... ......... .......................... 9 2.02 Copies of Documents ....................... ......... .............................................................................................. 9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.. ........ ......... ....................... .... ............. ............... 9 2.04 Starting the Work....... ................................................ .............................................................................. 9 2.05 Before Starting Construction............................... .................................................................................... 9 2.06 Pre construction Conference................................. ................................................................................... 9 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules....... ........................................................................................................ 9 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE............................................................ 10 3.01 Intent.................................................. .................................. ............................... ................................... 10 3.02 Reference Standards. .......... ........ .......................................................................................................... 10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies .................. .......... ....... ...... ............... .......... ............... .............. 10 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents ..................... .............. ........... ..... .................. ....... 11 3.05 Reuse of Documents.............................................................................................. ................. .............. 11 3.06 Electronic Data. .................................... ..... ......... ................................................. ............. .......... ........... 11 ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................... 11 4.01 A vailability of Lands...................................................................................... ..... .................................... 11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions.............. .................................... ........... ............. ........................... 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ......................................................................................... 12 4.04 Underground Facilities... ................... ................... .................. ............................... ..... .................... ........ 13 4.05 Reference Points............ .................... .................................... ....................................... ...... .................. 13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ..._... .......................... .............. ....... ..... ..... ........... ............... 13 ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE................................................................................................................ 14 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ............................................................................................14 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ................................. .......... ............. ..................................................... 15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance.... ................. ........................ ................................ ........................................... 15 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance............................. ................................................................................ 15 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance................................................ ............................................ ........................ 16 5.06 Property Insurance..................................................................................................................... ........... 16 5.07 Waiver of Rights.. .................... ............. .......................... .................... ....................... .... ........................ 17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds.................................................................................... 17 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace...................................................................... 17 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ....................................................................... 18 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................................ 18 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence ...... .......................... ..... ................ ................................................... 18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours...................................... .... ......................................................................... ......... 18 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment. ........... ........ ........ .... ..... ...... .................. ...... ........................ ........... 18 6.04 Progress Schedule.. .............. ............................ ....... ...... ............................ ........................................... 18 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals"............................................................ ....... ............... ................................ 19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ..............................................................................20 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ............................................................... ..................................................... 21 6.08 Permits........ .................. .............. ......... ....... ....... ............. ....................................................................... 21 6.09 Laws and Regulations...................................................................................................................... ..... 21 6.10 Taxes.................................................. ................................................................................................... 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas........... ......... .......... ................. .......... .... ............... ...... ................................ 22 6.12 Record Documents......................................................................................................................... ....... 22 6.13 Safety and Protection............... ............................................................................ ................................. 22 6.14 Safety Representative......................................................................................................................... .. 23 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 2 Final Version 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs........................................................................................................ 23 6.16 Emergencies....................... ............ ................................. ...................................................................... 23 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples.................. ............. ................................ .............. ....................... ....... ..... 23 6.18 Continuing the Work.................................................................. ............................................................ 24 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee.......................... ................. ............. ............................. 24 6.20 Indemnification..................................................... .................. ...................................................... ......... 24 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................................... 25 ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE............................................................................................................25 7.01 Related Work at Site................................... .......... ............. ....................................... ................. ............ 25 7.02 Coordination. ........ ....... ....................... ......... ................. ..... .......................... ................... ........ ............... 26 7.03 Legal Relationships.. ...................................................... ....................................................................... 26 ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ................ ............ ...................................... ......... ............................. 26 8.01 Communications to Contractor......... ..................................... ................................................................ 26 8.02 Replacement of Engineer................................................... ..................................................... .............. 26 8.03 Furnish Data ...................................... ... ................................................................................................. 26 8.04 Pay When Due.. ................................................... ..... ........... ..... ............................................................ 26 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests ........................................................................................... 26 8.06 Insurance........ ................................................ .................. ................... ......... .............. ........ ................... 26 8.07 Change Orders........................................................................................................................ .............. 26 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals...... .................... ........... ........ ....... ..... ........................ ........... ......... ... 26 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities ....................... ...... .................... ......... ...... ..... .............. ............. 27 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ................................................................................ 27 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements..................................................................................................... 27 ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................ 27 9.01 Owner's Representative .................... ...... ........................................................ ................................ ...... 27 9.02 Visits to Site..... .................................. ........................................ .................... ...... ..... ........... ......... ......... 27 9.03 Project Representative .................. ...... ... ........ .... ............. .............. ........................ ................................ 27 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work... ................. .......... ..... ..... ........ .................. ............... .............................. 27 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work... ....... ....... ..... ..... ....... ..... ........ ......................... ................................... ... ........ 27 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ................................................................................... 28 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ................ ........... ......... .......... ..... ........ ..... ..................... ............. ..... 28 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work................................... 28 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities......................................................................28 ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ............................................................................................... 28 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work.............. ....... ....... ............ ..... ..... .......... ..... ................... ........ ..... .......... 28 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ............................................ ................ .................... ................ ...... 29 10.03 Execution of Change Orders........ ..................... ................... ... ......................... ........... ........... ............... 29 10.04 Notification to Surety..... ............................................... ............ .... ..... ................... ..... ............. .... ........... 29 10.05 Claims ........ ........... .................. ............. ..... ........ .......... ...... ... ......... ............. ......... ....... ........ ..... ............... 29 ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK....................................................... 30 11.01 Cost of the Work......... ....... ................................... ........ ..... ... ........................... ..................... ................. 30 11 .02 Allowances..................................................................................................................... ........................ 31 11.03 Unit Price Work....... ... ...................... ..... ...... ....... ............. ............ ...... ........... .......... ....... ...... ... ................ 31 ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES .......................................... 32 12.01 Change of Contract Price................. ..... ............. ..................... .... ................. .... ......... ........... ..... ............ 32 12.02 Change of Contract Times......... .................... ..................... ..................................................... ...... ........ 33 12.03 Delays............ .............. .................... ............ ......................... ..... ................. ..... ........ ................. ............. 33 ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK .................................................................................................................................................................................33 13.01 Notice of Defects....... .............................................................. .......................... ..... ....................... ........ 33 13.02 Access to Work... ........................ .......................... ..... ....................... ................. .... ................ ................ 33 13.03 Tests and Inspections......................... ........ ..... ..... ................................... ....... ........................... ....... ..... 33 13.04 Uncovering Work........ .... ................... ................ ............................... ................ ......... .............. .............. 34 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work.................................................................................................................... 34 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 34 13.07 Correction Period.................................................. ......... ... ................ ................................. .................... 34 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work .......... ............ ....... ........... ...... ........ ............. ....... ... ...... .... ........... ............ 35 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................. ........ ......... ............................ ....... ...... .............. ............ 35 ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ................................................................... 36 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 3 Final Version 14.01 Schedule of Values........................ ........................................................................................................ 36 14.02 Progress Payments............................ ................................................................................................... 36 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................................ 37 14.04 Substantial Completion.......................................................................................................................... 37 14.05 Partial Utilization.......................................................................................................................... .......... 38 14.06 Final Inspection ................................................................... .......... ........................................................ 38 14.07 Final Payment................................................................................................................................. ....... 38 14.08 Final Completion Delayed .............................. ....................................................................................... 39 14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................... ........... ............................................................................................. 39 ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .............................................................................39 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work.................................................................................................................... 39 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause .......................................................................................................... 39 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience .................... ......... ....... ...... .......... ............. ............................. 40 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate........... ......... ..... ........ ....... .................... ................................... 40 ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION .... ...... ............. ........................ ............ ..................... ..................... ............ 41 16.01 Methods and Procedures.................... .................................................................................................. 41 ARTICLE 17 - MiSCELLANEOUS........................................................................................................................... 41 17.01 Giving Notice ..................................... ............................................................ ........................................ 41 17.02 Computation of Times ........................................................................................................................... 41 17.03 Cumulative Remedies............... ............................................................................................................ 41 17.04 Survival of Obligations..................... ......................................... ............................................................. 41 17.05 Controlling Law.............................................. ........................................................................................ 41 17.06 Headings............................................................ ............................ .................... .................................... 41 EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 4 Final Version GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement--The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. S. Bid--The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder--The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents--The Requirements and the proposed Documents (including all Addenda). Bidding Contract 8. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim--A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract--The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents-- Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor's submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times--The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor--The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work--See Paragraph 11.01.A for definition. 17. Drawings--That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 9. Change Order--A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright ~ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 5 Final Version 19. Engineer--The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order--A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements--Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifica- tions. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition-- The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petro- leum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulat- ions--Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all govern- mental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens--Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone--A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Comple- tion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award--The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project--The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual--The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material--Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner, employee, agent, consultant, or su bcontractor. 37. Resident Project Representative--The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples--Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Schedule of Submittals--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 40. Schedule of Values--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 41. Shop Drawings--AII drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 6 Final Version assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 42. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 43. Specifications--That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 44. Subcontractor--An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 45. Substantial Completion--The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially com- pleted" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 46. Successful Bidder-- The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 47. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 48. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcon- tractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor. 49. Underground Facilities--AII underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 50. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 51. Work--The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 52. Work Change Directive--A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the following meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered", "as directed" or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 7 Final Version contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C.Day 1. The word "day" means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents, or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer's - recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word "furnish," when used in connec- tion with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connec- tion with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, "provide" is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article S. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 8 Final Version Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicat- ing the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Pre construction Conference A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.0S.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.0S.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor's Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are comple- mentary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 9 Final Version effective to assign to Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepan- cy between the provisions of the Contract Docu- ments and: a. the provIsions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provi- sions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be autho- rized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor, shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer's consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaption by Engineer. B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 10 Final Version 3.06 Electronic Data A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user's sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data's creator. ARTICLE 4 AVAilABILITY SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL REFERENCE POINTS OF LANDS; CONDITIONS; CONDITIONS; 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner's furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface struc- tures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or infor- mation. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 11 Final Version 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, deter- mine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, perfor- mance of the Work; subject, however, to the follow- ing: a. such condition must meet anyone or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Docu- ments to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final com- mitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such informa- tion and data, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 12 Final Version b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 13 Final Version D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accor- dance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06. G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful perfor- mance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as pub- lished in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 14 Final Version Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent's authority to act. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph S.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs S.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and main- tained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be per- formed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 4. claims for damages reasonably available personal coverage which are sustained: insured by injury liability a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employ- ment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; S. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs S.04.A.3 through S.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such addi- tional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 15 Final Version 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; S. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materi- ally changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner's option, may purchase and maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Docu- ments. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple- mentary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1 . include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water dam- age, (other than caused by flood) and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects ); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; S. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 -16 Final Version Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provIsion or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph S.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph S.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or re- EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright If) 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 -17 Final Version placed, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provi- sions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respf!ct of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Sub- stantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specifiC means, method, tech- nique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and layout the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 18 Final Version equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provi- sions of the General Requirements applicable there- to. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equip- ment is speCified or described in the Contract Docu- ments by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, func- tion, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or-equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or-Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or-equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.0S.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items a. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or-equal" item under Paragraph 6.0S.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient informa- tion as provided below to allow Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equiva- lent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright C!:l 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 19 Final Version equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.0S.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of materiai or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed su bstitute item will prejudice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Comple- tion on time; b) whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and c) whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is sub- ject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified , and b) available engineering, maintenance, repair, replacement services; sales, and 4) and shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change, B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.0S.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.0S.A and 6.0S.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer's review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer's Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.0S.A.2 and 6.0S.B Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 20 Final Version F. Contractor's Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or-equal" at Contractor's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcon- tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (includ- ing those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reason- able objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued . No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor 2. shall anything in the Contract Documents create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcon- tractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontrac- tors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to commu- nicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer" and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 21 Final Version the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple- mentary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1 . Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 22 Final Version to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construc- tion. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pave- ments, roadways, structures, utilities, and Under- ground Facilities not designated for removal, reloca- tion, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly em- ployed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or, or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). D. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise ex- pressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 23 Final Version 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordi- nating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1. Shop Drawings a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.0. 2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals. a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is re- quired by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and veri- fied: a. all field measurements, quantities, dimen- sions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. the suitability of all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, han- dling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, tech- niques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satis- fied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawing's or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a speCific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer's Review EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 24 Final Version 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will be only to deter- mine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and ex- pressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by speCific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures 1 . Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct speCific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guaran- tee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor's warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper main- tenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responSible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; S. any review and approval of a Shop Draw- ing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 25 Final Version and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's employees, or via other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright i!:) 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 26 Final Version 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affect- ed. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work per- formed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficien- cies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsi- bilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor's actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communi- cations to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 27 Final Version Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities, if any, in respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article S. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner's responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, se- quences, or procedures of construction, or the ~afety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner's Representative A. Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responSible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construc- tion, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 28 Final Version the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer's consultant, agent or em- ployee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work in- volved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment , a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quanti- ties and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer's decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.0S.B. C. Engineer's written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer's authority or respon- sibility under this Article 9 or under any other provi- sion of the Contract Documents nor any decision EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 29 Final Version made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, se- quences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accor- dance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documen- tation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to, the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, ar revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A.Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 30 Final Version will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer's Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accom- panied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part, 2. approve the Claim, or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer's written action under Paragraph 10.0S.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.0S.C.3 or 10.0S.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment fur- nished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 31 Final Version field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to Engineers, architects, testing laborato- ries, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) em- ployed for services specifically related to the Work. S. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary trans- portation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in dis- charge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte- nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and tempo- rary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accor- dance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negli- gence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.0), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negli- gence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 32 Final Version agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. S. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B. C. Contractor's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted ac- counting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has in- cluded in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for addi- tional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accor- dance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 33 Final Version 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provision:; of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor's Fee: The Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph 12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.AA, 11.01.A.S, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are in- volved in anyone change, the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 34 Final Version the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such publiC body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspec- tion or approval. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 35 Final Version D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all neces- sary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as prOVided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 36 Final Version contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particu- lar item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications . D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommen- dation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 37 Final Version Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an exten- sion of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date estab- lished in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Docu- ments. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Applica- tion for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equip- ment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrange- ments to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer's recommendation of any pay- ment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer's observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer's knovtltedge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor's being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer's responsibility to observe the Work. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 38 Final Version 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically as- signed to Engineer in the Contract Docu- ments; or b. that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. S. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accor- dance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 1S.02.A. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.0) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or fur- nishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occur- rence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.S.a through 14.02.B.S.c or Paragraph 1S.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deducUon of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so with- held, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 39 Final Version 3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1. 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incor- porated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor's notification, , Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner's objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Sub- stantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer's aforesaid recom- mendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions. 1 . Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 40 Final Version Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Finallnspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Docu- ments, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph S.04.B.7; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responSible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer's Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as re- quired by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer's recommen- dation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 41 Final Version retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final pay- ment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of anyone or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regula- tions of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor's disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. 8. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 1S.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem exped ient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.8, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.8 and 1S.02.C, Contractor's services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 42 Final Version E. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph S.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 1S.02.B, and 1S.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and fur- nishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncom- pleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other eco- nomic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.0S.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer's action under Paragraph 10.0S.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.0S.C.3 or 10.05.0 shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions ofthe Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. AII rights reserved. 00700 - 43 Final Version 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process, or 3. gives written notice to the other party of their intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies avail- able to any or all of them which are otherwise im- posed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated speCifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, war- ranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termina- tion or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright @ 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. 00700 - 44 Final Version SECTION 00800 FIRST AMENDED SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change from or add to the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, EJCDC Document 1910-8, 1996 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions shall remain in effect.- ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY hhmhm_h_um_mhh+':,;/ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, . Underline Add the following sentence to Paraqraph 1.Q1.,28 entitled "Notice of Award:: ,,{ Formatted: Centered -"When requested by OWNER, the Notice of Award may be issued by the ENGINEER." ... - u - - - { Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" Add the following sentence to Paraqraph 1.Q1.,29 entitled "-Notice to Proceed:: -"When requested by OWNER, the Notice to Proceed may be issued by ENGINEER." ... - u u - { Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: OS Add the following terms after Paragraph 1.Q1.50: 1.51 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER - The person, firm or corporation named as the ENGINEER in the Agreement. ... u h h { Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" 1.52 Provide - As used in the Project Manual, means to fumish and install, complete and ready for intended use. 1.53 Product - As used in the Project Manual, includes materials, fabrications, systems and equipment. 1.54 Project Manual - The volume of written construction documents, including the Bidding Documents, sample forms, and the Contract Documents, such as the Conditions of the Contract and the Specifications. 1.55 Retainaqe - The percentaqe of the Contract Price, retained by Owner from the proqress payments to the Contractor for Work performed until the Work is completed. It shall be payable to Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS +,,__--- Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, _uuu__ "" Underline "'{ Formatted: Centered Add the following to Paragraph 2.01~: -"If the Work is to be commenced prior to execution of the Agreement in response to a letter of intent, CONTRACTOR shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to OWNER that such bonds will be fumished." ... - u u - { Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: OS Final Version 00800-1 In the first line of Paragraph 2.02.. change the tenn_-"...ten..." to read~ "...six@...". --- ___u_{ Formatted: Indent: First line: 0.5" Delete Paragraph 2.03. and replace with the following:- :~ The date of commencement of the Work is the date_established in a Notice to Proceed." Add the following to Paragraph 2.05.: :D. CONTRACTOR shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where specified, approved Shop Drawings for such portion of the Work.- E. By executing the Contract, CONTRACTOR represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.:- ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT. AMENDING. REUSE _mmm_m~~.:,- Add the following to Paragraph 3.02.A.: Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, Underline Formatted: Centered :3. Sections of Division One - General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of the Specifications.: .A~I~9-~~_4_:_~Y~~~~h!rr_9-~_~_~~;_~~~~~~fA~_~_~~~m___h___h________:<:>,----{ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold l .-PHYSICAL CONDITIONS: REFERENCE POINTS mmmuh______ ____ __ u_ "- Formatted: Centered - Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, In Paragraph 4.02.A., change the tenn_-"...Supptementary Conditions..." to read~ Underline ---------{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" J "...bidding requirements...". +_uu_{ Formatted: Indent: First line: 0.5" In Paragraph 4.02.B., change the tenn.-"Supplementary Conditions..." to read~ "...bidding requirements...". +------{ Formatted: Indent: First line: 0.5" ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ...__---{ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, _____u_uuuu_hhh__U___________ ,,_. ! Underline In the first line of Paragraph 5.04., following the word "...maintain...", insert the words~ "-f Formatted: Centered . "...in a company or companies licensed to do business in the State of Florida,...". ---------{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" In the last line of Paragraph 5.04.A.6., following the word "...vehicle.", insert the words~ d".... or arising out of operation of laws and regulations for damages bec'3use of bodily injury or death of any person or for damage to property." +------{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" Final Version 00800.2 Add the following after Paragraph 5.04.8.7.: 8. Include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including: i. Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverages as applicable. ~ - -- - - - { Formatted: Indent: First line: 0" ii. iii. iv. _v. vi. vii. Independent contractor's Protective. Products and Completed Operations. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted. Contractual Liability_ Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles. 8road Form property Damage including Completed Operations. 9. Provide coverage for not less than the following amounts. 3_ WoFkeFS' Componsation, oto. undor p3Fagr-a[)hc 5.1.1 and 5.4.2: 1. State b. Contraotor'c Liaeility Insuranoo under Artiole 5.1, '....hioh shall also inolueo oomploted operations and pmduot liaeility oo'/eragos and eliminate the exclusion with respect to pm[)erty undor tho care, ou€tody ane ocmtr-ol of Contractor: ~ m - - - { Formatted: Indent: First line: 0" ~ - - -- - - { Formatted: Indent: First line: OS' a. Workers' Compensation, etc. under paragraphs 5.4.1 and 5.4.2: 1. State Jn~I.l!9.in9._~r:DRl()y'E}!.~J!?_~!Ij!L------ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Font color: limits $1,000,000 each Red accident, $1,000,000 disease policy limit, $1,000,000 disease each employee Statutory 2. Applicable Federal (e.g. Longshoreman's and/or Maritime) 3. Employer's Liability $ 1 ,000,000.00 .. - - - - - - { Formatted Table b. Contractor's Liability Insurance under Article 5.4, which shall also include completed operations and product liability coverages and eliminate the exclusion with respect to property under the care, custody and control of custody and control of Contractor: 1. General Aggregate (Except Products - Completed Operations) $ 1,OOO,OOO.Ol: Final Version 00800-3 2. Products Aggregate Completed Operations $ 1.000.000.00 3. Personal and Advertising Injury (Per $ 1.000.000.00 Person/Organization) ..... --.. . { Formatted: Tab stops: '1", Left 4. Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and $ 1.000.000.00 Property Damage) .......ou{ Formatted: Tab stops: -1", Left 5. Property Damage liability insurance will $ 1.000.000.00 provide Explosion, Collapse and Underground coverages where applicable. 26. BoElily injury and property damage $ 1.000.000.00$ oombinedProfessional Liabilitv. Errors & Omissions insurance for architects. enQineers and other consultinQ professionals L+. Excess Liability General Aggregate $ 1.000.000.00 Each Occurrence $ 1.000.000.00 .lh Professional Liabilitv Insurance. as it $ 1.000.000.00 applies c. Automobile Liability under paragraph 5.4.6: 1. Bodily Injury: Each Person $ 1.000.000.00 Each Accident $ 1.000.000.00 Property Damage: Each Occurrence $ 1.000.000.00 OR 2. Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined Single Limit: Each Occurrence $ 1.000.000.00 $ 1.000.000.00 Aggregate Aggregate $ 1.000.000.00 d. Additional liability coverage for OWNER and ENGINEER shall be provided by endorsement as additional insureds on Contractor's General Liability Policy. Add the following names: Final Version 00800-4 ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILlTIES.....______...... +.....--1 Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, --..--....- ..... l Underline Add the following after Paragraph 6.05.F: ..{ Formatted: Centered :G. The use of asbestos or asbestos-based fiber materials is prohibited in this Project.: OWNER - City of Sunny Isles Beach 18070 Collins Avenue Sunny Isles Beach, Florida 33160 ENGINEER - Calvin, Giordano & Associates, Inc. Engineers, Planners & Surveyors 1800 Eller Drive, Suite 600 Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33316 OTHER ~ The additional liability coverage for ENGINEER is not to be construed as to requiring, in any way, that either OWNER or CONTRACTOR be obligated to supply insurance protecting ENGINEER for its liability emanating from professional errors or omissions. 1L-ln conformance with the requirements of Section 725.06, Florida Statutes, the specific considerations for CONTRACTOR's promises are: a. One dollar ($1.00) in hand paid by OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's employees to CONTRACTOR, receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged and the adequacy of which CONTRACTOR accepts as completely fulfilling the obligations of OWNER, ENGINEER, and ENGINEER's employees under the requirements of Section 725.06, Florida Statutes, and; b. The entry of OWNER and CONTRACTOR into the construction contract because, but for CONTRACTOR's promises as contained in the General Conditions, OWNER would not have entered into the construction contract with CONTRACTOR.: Add the following after Paragraph 5.06.E: :F. The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. G. If, under the provisions of this insurance, there are mandatory deductibles, or if OWNER elects to increase the mandatory deductibles or purchase this insurance with voluntary deductible amounts, then OWNER shall be responsible for payment of the full amount of the deductible in the event of a paid claim.: Final Version 00800-5 +- . -- --' { Formatted: Indent: First line: 2.25" +---. --{ Formatted: Tab stops: -0.75", Left + -0.5", I Left + 0", Left + OS', Left + 1", Left + [1.5", Left + 2", Left + 2.25", Left + 3", Left + Not at -1" , +------- Formatted: Right: 0.5" -,:: __ -- Formatted: Indent: Left: 0" '..{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Hanging: 0.5") +- --. -- -1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.44", Hanging: 0.56" +- . -- -- -1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0 S' -.....(including but not limited to fees and charges of ENGINEER, other engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, particularly including, but not limited to reasonable ENGINEER's attorney's fees, and court costs)...... ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION__.____.____________:~...<.{I Formatted: Font: (Default) Anal, Bold, ". Underline Change the first sentence of Paragraph 9.01.A. to read as follows: -..{ Formatted: Centered Add the following after Paragraph 6.08: :6.08.A. The OWNER will secure and pay for only the following governmental charges and inspection fees: a. special assessments, b. capital connection fees, c. threshold and special inspection fees, d. permanent utility meter installation fees, e. permanent utility hook-up fees, and f. impact fees. 6.08.B. CONTRACTOR shall pay for all building permits and charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER will pay charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees.: Add the followino after the last sentence in Paraoraph 6.10: In accordance with Exhibit A hereto. entitled Tax Exemption AQreement to Contract. the Owner may directlv purchase all materials and equipment identified in the Contract Documents for incorporation into the Project ("Owner-Provide Materials"). Delete the last sentence of Paragraph 6.12. and substitute the following: -"These shall be available to ENGINEER for examination during construction and shall be delivered "to ENGINEER for OWNER upon Substantia! Completion of the Work." At the end of Paragraph 6.13.B, add the following sentences: -"The Occupational Safety and Health Administration excavation safety standards, 29 CFR 1926.650 Subpart P trench safety standards are in effect during the period of construction of the Project. In compliance with current State of Florida statutes, the Contractor or subcontractor performing trench excavation work on the Project shall comply with the applicable trench safety standards." In the sixth line of Paragraph 6.20.A., change the parenthetical insert to read as follows: -"If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will be OWNER's repre- sentative during the construction period." Final Version 00800-6 + .----.{ Formatted: Indent: Left: OS', Right: OS' +.----.{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" +'-----1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: OS' I +....--{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: r +-----'1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: OS' +. -- --. { Formatted: Indent: Left: OS', Right: OS' +-----'1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK: CLAIMS +'.._'-' Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, -- -- - , Underline 'j Formatted: Centered -l Add the following: :10.06. Without invalidating the agreement, Owner may, at any time execute appropriate Change Orders for additions and/or deletions in the work of up to 25% of the total contract amount, without a change in the contract unit prices bid.: +------1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" .___m_____~"""" Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, "~II~~~ _1 ~-: -T.~-~.T~:~~~~giJ:tg~i~~~::~~~~~~!:~~~::_:::-:::::: ::::: :::::: ~,~<~>1 ~::::oo: Centered ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK +~,\, -..:,-{ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold \,',:,',':':,:,:'::':',,:'1 Formatted: Centered, Indent: First line: 0" 13.03. TEST AND INSPECTIONS: , " -"All testing shall be paid for by the Contractor." ....", Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, Underline Formatted: Centered Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, Underline .. Formatted: Centered, Indent: First line: 0" Formatted: Indent: Left: OS', Right: OS' Replace 13.03.B. with~ Add the following sentence to Paragraph 13.07.A,: -"Specific and special warranties specified in the Contract Documents are in addition to, and not in lieu of, the contractors general warranty. CONTRACTOR shall not be relieved of general warranty obligations by the specification of specific products or procedures." +------{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" 13.09. In the first sentence of the paraoraph OWNER, M^ Y CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK:..Q Ghange the first line from-':;. -If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice of Engineer...:..! +------ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Right: 0" + -- - - -- Formatted: Indent: Left: 0" +------1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Right: 0" +0 read: :-If Contractor fails within ten (10) calendar days after written notice of Engineer...: ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .________________~'.;.-". Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, Underline In the first sentence of Paragraph 14.02.A.1., change the phrase_-"At least twenty days befor~... " Formatted: Centered each progress payment is scheduled (but not more often than once a month), ......-to read~ ....{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0", Right: 0" ."By no later than the first day of the month, ...... Followino Paraoraph A€lG-14.02.A.~ add:;. ~~An original Partial Release of Lien is required from the General Contractor along with the application for Payment No. 1 and for each subsequent application thereafter. For each application for payment (excluding Application No.1) the Contractor shall submit Wilil the + -- - ---1 Formatted: Indent: Left: OS', Hanging: , 0.5", Right: 0.5" Final Version 00800-7 application Partial Releases of Liens for all Notice to Owners that have been received for the project by the Owner and Engineer". 5. With each Application for Payment. the Contractor shall submit supportino records and other evidence. in a form and amount acceptable to the City and the EnQineer. to demonstrate the expenses incurred and the Work performed. This shall include. but not be limited to documentation related to the purchase of Owner-Provided Material and the reduction in the Contract Sum as a result of such expenditures. 6. Each application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted bv Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents, The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Quaranteed maximum Contract Price amono the various portions of the Work. except that the Contractor's Fee shall be shown as a separate item. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported bv such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Enoineer may require. This schedule. unless objected to bv the Enoineer. shall be used as a basis for reviewino the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 7. Applications for payment shall show the percentaoe of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered bv the Application for Payment. The percentaoe of completion shall be the lesser of: (1) the percentaoe of that portion of the Work which has actuallv been completed: or (2) the percentaoe obtained bv dividino (a) the expense that has actuallv been incurred bv the Contractor on account of that portion of the Work for which the Contractor has made or intends to make actual payment prior to the next Application for Payment bv (b) the share of the Contract Price allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of values. 8. Subiect to the provisions of the Contract Documents. the amount of prooress payments shall be computed as follows: a) take that portion of the Contract Price properlv allocable to the computed Work as determined bv multiplvino the percentaoe of completion of each portion of the Work in the schedule of values. PendinQ final determination of the costs to the Owner of chanoes in the Work. amounts not in dispute shall be included in the Application for Payment alono with ChanQe Order. Work Chanoe Directive or Written Amendment indicatinQ the parties' aoreement with all or part of such costs for additional Work. b) add the portion of the Contract Price properlv allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitablv stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. or. if approved in advance bv Owner. suitablv stored off-site at a location aQreed upon in writino. c) add the Contractor's Fee. less the ten percent (10%) Retainaoe. The Contractor's Fee shall be computed upon the Cost of the Work described in the precedino clauses at the rate in accordance with Paraoraph 11.01.C or. if the Contractor's Fee is stated as a fixed sum. then it shall be an amount that bears the same ratio to that fixed-sum fee as the Cost of the Work in the two precedino clauses bears to a reasonable estimate of the probable Cost of Work upon completion. Final Version 00800-8 d) subtract the aQQreQate of the previous payments made bv the Owner; subtract the shortfall. if any. indicated bv the Contractor in the supportinQ records and other evidence as mutuallv aQreed between the Owner or EnQineer and Contractor to demonstrate expenditures incurred to substantiate prior Applications for Payment. or resultinQ from errors subseQuentlv discovered bv Owner. or desiQnee; subtract the amounts. if any. for which the Architect has withheld or nullified Certificate for Payment in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents." e) f) In Paragraph 14.02.B., change the beginning of the sentence~.from "Ten days..... to read~ _-"Forty-five days...... In ParaQraph 14.02.C.1, insertthefollowinQ: 2. 3. 4. Final Version 5. The Contractor shall promptlv pay each subcontractor. upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflectinQ percentaQes actuallv retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall. bv appropriate aQreement with each Subcontractor. require each Subcontractor to make payments to Subsubcontractors. if such Subsubcontractors are permitted bv the Contract Documents, to make payments to Subsubcontractors in the same manner. Neither the Owner nor the EnQineer shall have an obliQation to pavor see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor. except as provided bv law. Payment bv Contractor to material suppliers shall be treated in the manner as provided in ParaQraph 14.02.C.2. Except with the Owner's prior approval. payments to Subcontractors shall be subject to RetainaQe of not less than ten percent (10%). The Owner and the Contractor shall aQree upon a mutuallv acceptable procedure for review and approval of payments and retention for Subcontractors. Upon mutual aQreement bv Owner and Contractor. payment in full may be made to those Subcontractors whose Work is fullv completed durinQ the earlv staQes of the Project. NotwithstandinQ ParaQraphs 14.02.A.8 and 14.02.C.5 above, at such times as the Work as set forth in the schedule of values has been 50% completed. and upon mutual aQreement of the Owner and Contractor, no further RetainaQe shall be withheld from proQress payments with respect to such portion of the Work. AQreement as to any such reduction in retained amounts will not constitute a waiver of or otherwise preiudice the Owner's riQht to subseQuentlv reinstate full retainaQe. as to that subcontractor, should circumstances iustify such action in the Owner's sole iudQment. Upon Substantial Completion of the entire Work of the Contractor. a sum. sufficient to increase payments to the Contractor to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum, less amounts. if any for incomplete Work and unsettled claims. shall be paid to Contractor with the next sequential payment application after Substantial Completion is obtained. 6. 7. 00800-9 +- --... '1 Formatted: Right: 0.5" Formatted: Right: 0.5", Numbered + Level: 1 + Numbering Style: 1, 2, 3, ... + Start at: 2 + Alignment: Left + Aligned at: 0.25" + Tab after: 0.75" + Indent at: 0.75" Delete ParaQraph 14.05 and replace with the followinQ: A. The Owner may OCCUpy or use any completed or partiallv completed portion of the Work at any staQe when such portion is desiQnated bv separate aQreement with the Contractor. provided such occupancy or use is consented bv the insurer. in accordance with ParaQraph 5.06.A.5 and as authorized bv public authorities havinQ jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantiallv complete. provided Owner and Contractor have accepted in writinQ the responsibilities assiQned to each of them for payments. RetainaQe. if any. security. maintenance. heat. utilities. damaQe to Work and insurance. and have aQreed in writinQ concerninQ the period for correction of Work and commencement of warranties required bv the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantiallv complete. the Contractor shall prepare and submit a comprehensive list to the EnQineer of the items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. The Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibilitv of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasoanbalv withheld. The staQe of the prOQress of the Work shall be determined bv written aQreement between the Owner and the Contractor. or if no aQreement is reached. by decision of the EnQineer. B. Immediatelv or prior to such partial occupancy or use. the Owner. Contractor. and EnQineer shall iointlv inspect the area to be occupied or the portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. C. Unless otherwise aQreed upon. partial occupancv. or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of the Work not complvinQ with the Contract Documents." In tho first sontence of Paragraph 14.05.1\.2., following the word .....\JI!ork...". insert the worde .....or to plaoe and install oQuipment...... At the end of Para€jral3h 14.07.A.2, after, ...'....ith tho Work. Insort, "(i'l) aooeptanoe by the Ownor-s and go'.'erning agonoioG After the least sentence in ParaQraph 14.04.B. insert the followinQ: "C. Once 1) the definitive certificate of completion has been issued to the Owner and the Contractor and 2) once consent of the surety. if any. has been obtained. the Owner shall make payment of Retainaoe applvinQ to such Work or desiqnated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents." After the last sentence in the ParaQraph 14.04.B. insert the followinQ: .; "Final payment, constitutinQ the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Price. shall be made bv the Owner to the Contractor when the Contractor has fullv performed Final Version 00800-10 Formatted: Indent: Left: OS', Hanging: 0.25", Right: 0.5" +------f Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" the Contract except for Contractor's responsibilitv to correct Work as provided in ParaQraphs 13.06 and 13.07. and to satisfy other requirements, if any. which extend beyond final payment and after the EnQineer sends written notice to Owner that the Work is acceptable and in accordance with ParaQraphs 14.07.B and 14.07.C." Delete ParaQraph 14.07.A.2 and 14.07.A.3 insert the followinQ: "The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previouslv delivered) by: (1) an affidavit that pavrolls. bills for materials and equipment. and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property miQht be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld bv Owner) have been paid or otherwise been satisfied. (2) a certificate evidencinQ that insurance required bv the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currentlv in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to be expired until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been Qiven to the Owner. (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required bv the Contract Documents. (4) consent of the surety, if any. to final payment. and (5) if required bv the Owner. other data establishinQ payment or satisfaction of obliQations. such as receipts. releases. and waivers of liens. claims. security interests of encumbrances arisinQ out of the Contract. to the extent and in such form as may be desiQnated bv the Owner. (6) all documentation as required bv the Contract Documents. and (7) acceptance bv the Owner and QoverninQ aQencies. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required bv the Owner. the Owner may require that the Contractor furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner aQainst such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made. the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharoinQ the lien, includinQ all reasonable attorneys' fees and costs. The final payment will become due when the Contractor submits the information above to the EnQineer." +------{ Formatted: Right: 0.5" +------{ Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5", Right: 0.5" ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION +'../ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, -- -- -- -...... -- -- --- - - - . Underline In the twentieth line of Paragraph 15.02.B., insert the following after the words...such excess...; "'1 Formatted: Centered ". =<including but not limited to fees and charges of ENGINEER, other engineers,+'-----1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.5" architects, attorneys and other professionals, particularly including, but not limited to reasonable Engineer's attorney's fees, and court costs)...". ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ---------.."----------m..-----~,;.<-'l' Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, ", . Underline Delete this Article in its entirety. "'1 Formatted: Centered J ---. I I ! Add 17.05.B: ~TICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ______________..________________________:.::.;....1, Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Bold, "., \ Underline ',I 1 Formatted: Centered Final Version 00800-11 "The venue for any cause of action shall be Miami-Dade County." +------1 Formatted: Indent: Left: 0.44" After Article 17 add the followinQ article: ARTICLE 18 - OWNER-PROVIDED MATERIALS .The Contractor and Owner desire to enter into an arranQement whereby certain purchases _,,-"'1 Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial under the Contract may be made bv the Owner as a result of Owner's status of beinQ exempt from sales and use tax. 1. NotwithstandinQ anvthinQ in the Contract to the contrary, the Owner shall directly+------{ Formatted: Bullets and Numbering purchase all materials and equipment identified in the Contract Documents as required for incorporation into the Project ("Owner-Provided Materials"). The Owner does hereby Qrant to the Contractor the full authority as an aQent of the Owner to prepare. place and execute Purchase Orders for and in the name of the Owner for all Owner-Provided Materials. The Contractor as aQent of the Owner shall siQn such Purchase Orders. 2. The Owner will be liable for the timelv payment for all Owner-Provided Materials. Th~-----'{ Formatted: Bullets and Numbering Contractor will submit requisitions for orders of Owner-Provided Materials to the Owner for approval when required. Vendors will render statements ("OPM Invoices") to the Owner for any Owner-Provided Materials purchased. The Owner will provide copies of all OPM Invoices to the Contractor upon approval bv the Owner. After reviewinQ the OPM Invoices. the Contractor will return these OPM Invoices with proper back UP to the Owner for payment. The Owner shall make payment directlv to the respective vendors as provided in the OPM Invoices. The Owner will send such vendor payments alonQ with Contractor payment to the Contractor who wili. as Owner's aQent. distribute such vendor payments to the respective vendors in return for Releases of Lien. The Owner will provide Contractor with any tax exemption certificates or other documents required or useful to provide to the vendors of Owner-Provided Materials to evidence the tax-exempt status of the Owner. 3. .The Contract Price and shall be reduced bv the sum of all Costs of the Work paid bv th~:_.-,.. Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial Owner for Owner-Provided Materials plus any applicable sales and use tax amounts '. Formatted: Bullets and Numbering initiallv included in the Contract Sum and GMP for such Owner-Provided Materials. 4. The Contractor shall maintain separate accountinQ records for all transactions carried+-m--1 Formatted: Bullets and Numbering out under the authority of this AQreement. Such records shall be open to the Owner durinQ normal business hours of the Contractor. 5. The Contractor shall select. obtain aoorovals. submit samples. price shop drawinQs.+------{ Formatted: Bullets and Numbering pursue. receive. inspect. and accept or reiect all Owner-Provided Materials purchased in the manner described herein per the Contract. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the proper installation of all Owner-Provided Materials and will continue to warrant its installation of these Owner-Provided Materials as provided in the Contract. This AQreement will not be an acceptable excuse for delav to the construction schedule. 6. The authority Qranted the Contractor hereunder may be revoked bv the Owner at any+------< Formatted: Bullets and Numbering time upon written notice delivered to the Contractor at its offices at~ . ,..__" Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial, Highlight durinQ normal business hours. """1 Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial Final Version 00800-12 7. The Owner aQrees that the Contractor's Fee as set forth in the Contract shall not b~------1 Formatted: Bullets and Numbering reduced as a result of any Owner-Provided Materials deduct chanQe orders; Le.. the Contractor's Fee shall continue to applv to the total sum of all remaininQ Costs of the Work plus the costs of all Owner-Provided Materials and plus the applicable tax amounts. Likewise. all aQreed charQinQ rates based on the Contract Price. includinQ without limitation for bonds and insurance. shall continue to be charoed based on the total sum of the Contract Price amount plus the costs of all Owner-Provided Materials and plus the applicable tax amounts.... __......._........,..___....._..,__.__......'__...___.. -,.{ Formatted: Font: (Default) Arial ~ END OF DOCUMENT Final Version 00800-13 _IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have made and executed this First Amended Supplemental Conditions on the respective dates under each signature: City of Sunny Isles Beach through its City Commission, signing by and through its Mayor, authorized to execute same by Commission action on the _ day of , _, and CONTRACTOR authorized to execute same. CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH, through its City Commission ATTEST: By: Norman S. Edelcup, Mayor _day of ,2007 Jane Hines, City Clerk Approved as to form and legality by By: Office of the City Attorney A. John Szerlag, City Manager _day of ,2007 By: Hans Ottinot, City Attorney ATTEST: By [CORPORATE SEAL] [CORPORATE SEAL] Address for giving notices License No. Agent for service of process (If CONTRACTOR is a corporation, attached evidence of authority to sign). _day of ,2007 (CITY SEAL) Final Version 00800-14 SECTION 00900 Addendum NO.1 to Contract documents CITY OF SUNNY ISLES BEACH CUB ELLIS PROJECT NO. 070662FLAR CITY BID NO. 08-05-02 To All Bidders: Bidders for the above-referenced project shall take note of the following changes, additions, deletions, clarifications, etc. to the Plans and Specifications, which in accordance with the Contract Documents shall become a part of and have precedence over anything shown or described otherwise. IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: All other documents, specifications, drawings, terms and conditions remain the same. Bidders must acknowledge receipt of Addendum on Page 00300-5. END OF SECTION Final Version 00900-1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC 03/03 SECTION 01000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 0 1 000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (05/06) SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Work under other contracts. 5. Products ordered in advance. 6. Owner-furnished products. 7. Use of premises. 8. Owner's occupancy requirements. 9. Work restrictions. 10. Specification formats and conventions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for the Work. 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK. COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Sunny Isles Beach: City Hall Improvements. 1. Project Location: 18070 Collins Avenue, Sunny Isles Beach, FL 33160. B. Owner: City of Sunny Isles Beach 1. Owner's Representative: Rick Conner, Director of Public Works, City of Sunny Isles Beach C. Architect: Cubellis, 1800 Eller Drive, Suite 500, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 33316 D. Contractor: as Contractor for this Project. has been engaged SUMMARY 01100 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (05/06) E. Construction Manager: 1. Construction Manager has been engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to Owner and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between Owner and Contractor, according to a separate contract between Owner and Construction Manager. 2. Construction Manager for this Project is Project's Constructor. In Divisions 1 through 16 Sections, the terms "Construction Manager" and "Contractor" are synonymous. F. The Work consists of the following: 1. The Work includes: Existing Stair Enclosure, New Concrete Canopy Roof, New Floor Drains, New Storefront Windows, New Steel Canopy Roof, New Doorway, New Steel Steps. 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Proj ect will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK PHASES A. Not Applicable 1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Not Applicable 1.7 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE A. General: Owner may have negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Owner will assign these Purchase Orders to Contractor. Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are included in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final Purchase-Order agreements. 1.8 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment, and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections. 1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. SUMMARY 01100-2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (05/06) 3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor. 6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Construction Manager noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. 8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at Proj ect site. 9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. 11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work. 1.9 USE OF PREMISES A. General Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas within the Scope of Work, as described in the Construction Drawings. a. Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet (12.2 m) beyond building perimeter; 10 feet (3 m) beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches (300 mm) in diameter; 15 feet (4.5 m) beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet (7.6 m) beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking garage, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. SUMMARY 01100 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (05/06) C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.10 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day- to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written pennission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written pennission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. C. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. 1.11 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of <Insert time> a.m. to <Insert time> p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. SUMMARY 01100 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (05/06) 1. Weekend Hours: <Insert restrictions on times permitted for weekend work.> 2. Early Morning Hours: <Insert restrictions or references to regulations by authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work.> 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: <Insert Owner's restrictions.> 4. Hours for [Core Drilling] <Insert noisy activity>: <Insert Owner's restrictions.> B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. 1.12 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSIICSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulf11Ied indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. SUMMARY 01100 - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (05/06) 1.13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100END OF SECTION 01100 SUMMARY 01100 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01125 - SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes a swnmary of each contract, including responsibilities for coordination and temporary facilities and controls. B. Specific requirements of each contract are also indicated in individual Specification Sections and on Drawings. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents, restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for general coordination requirements. 3. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for specific requirements for temporary facilities and controls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofmg is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator shall be responsible for coordination between the General Construction Contract and all contracts related to the Construction of the Scope of Work. 1. General Construction Contractor shall act as Project Coordinator. 1.5 PROJECT COORDINATOR A. Project Coordinator: Full-time Project Coordinator shall be experienced in administration and supervision of building construction, including mechanical and electrical work. SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Coordination activities of Project Coordinator include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Provide overall coordination of the Work. b. Coordinate shared access to workspaces. c. Coordinate product selections for compatibility. d. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls. e. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary utilities, including those necessary to make connections for temporary services. f. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each contract g. Prepare Coordination Drawings to coordinate work by more than one contract h. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work. Include the following: 1) Initial Coordination Meeting: At earliest possible date, arrange and conduct a meeting with separate contractors for sequencing and coordinating the Work; negotiate reasonable adjustments to schedules. 2) Prepare a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule for entire Project Base schedule on Preliminary Construction Schedule. Secure time commitments for performing critical construction activities from separate contractors. Show activities of each contract on a separate sheet Prepare a simplified summary sheet indicating combined construction activities of contracts. 3) Distribute copies of schedules to Architect, Owner, and separate contractors. 1. Provide photographic documentation. J. Provide quality-assllfance and quality-control servIces specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." k. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and coordinate schedule of tests and inspections. 1. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures affected by construction. m. Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points, and establish pennanent benchmarks on Project site. n. Provide field surveys of in-progress construction and site work and fmal property survey. o. Provide progress cleaning of common areas and coordinate progress cleaning of areas or pieces of equipment where more than one contractor has worked. p. Coordinate cutting and patching. q. Coordinate protection of the Work. r. Coordinate firestopping. s. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items. t Coordinate preparation of Project Record Documents if information from more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form one combined record. u. Print and submit Record CAD Drawings if installations by more than one contractor are indicated on the same Contract Drawing or Shop Drawing. v. Collect Record Specification Sections from other contractors, collate Sections into numeric order, and submit complete set SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 w. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information from more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to form one combined record. 2. Responsibilities of Project Coordinator for temporary facilities and controls include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction activities. b. Provide telephone service for common-use facilities. B. Mechanical/Electrical Coordinator: Full-time MechanicallElectrical Coordinator shall be experienced in coordination of mechanical and electrical construction, including coordination of type of operations required for this Project, and shall be licensed to practice as a professional engineer in location of Project. 1. Coordination activities of MechanicallElectrical Coordinator include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Schedule and sequence mechanical and electrical activities. b. Coordinate sharing access to workspaces by mechanical and electrical contractors. c. Coordinate integration of mechanical and electrical work into limited spaces. d. Coordinate protection of mechanical and electrical contractors' work. e. Coordinate cutting and patching for mechanical and electrical work. f. Prepare mechanical and electrical Coordination Drawings. g. Coordinate tests and inspections for mechanical and electrical work. h. Coordinate mechanical and electrical temporary services and facilities. 1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTS A Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the Work, names and terminology on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine which contract includes a specific element of Project. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, the Work described in this Section for each contract shall be complete systems and assemblies, including products, components, accessories, and installation required by the Contract Documents. 2. Local custom and trade-union jurisdictional settlements do not control the scope of the Work of each contract. When a potential jurisdictional dispute or similar interruption of work is first identified or threatened, affected contractors shall negotiate a reasonable settlement to avoid or minimize interruption and delays. 3. Trenches for the Work of each contract shall be provided by the General Construction Contract. 4. Cutting and Patching: Provided by the General Construction Contract. 5. Through-penetration firestopping for the Work of each contract shall be provided by the General Construction Contract. 6. Within five working days after preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule and preliminary network diagram submittal has been received from Project Coordinator, submit a matching preliminary horizontal bar-chart schedule and SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 preliminary network diagram showing construction operations sequenced and coordinated with overall construction. 7. Project closeout requirements. B. Substitutions: Each contractor shall cooperate with other contractors involved to coordinate approved substitutions with remainder of the Work. 1. The General Construction Contract shall coordinate substitutions. C. Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls," each contractor is responsible for the following: 1. Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility usually considered as its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges associated with each facility. 2. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task lighting, and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities. 3. Its own field office, complete with necessary furniture, utilities, and telephone service. 4. Its own storage and fabrication sheds. 5. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities. 6. General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities, up to 2 tons (2000 kg). 7 . Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials. 8. Progress cleaning of its own areas on a daily basis. 9. Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment 10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively for its own construction activities. D. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation, including utility-use charges, temporary meters, and temporary connections. E. Temporary Heating, Cooling, and Ventilation: The General Construction Contract is responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation before permanent enclosure of building is complete. The General Construction Contract is responsible for temporary heating, cooling, and ventilation after permanent enclosure of building is completer and Owner will pay utility- use charges]. F. Use Charges: Comply with the following: 1. Sewer Service: Include the cost for sewer service use by all parties engaged in construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract 2. Water Service: Include the cost for water service, whether metered or otherwise, for water used. by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract 3. Electric Power Service: Include the cost for electric power service, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site in the General Construction Contract SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1.7 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. Work in the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Site preparation, including clearing, building demolition and relocations, and earthwork. 2. Site improvements, including roadways, parking lots, pedestrian paving, site development furnishings and equipment, and landscaping. 3. Tunnels for site utilities. 4. Selective demolition. 5. Foundations, including footings, foundation walls, and piles. 6. Slabs-on-grade, including earthwork, subdrainage systems, and insulation. 7. Below-grade building construction, including excavation, backfill, and thermal and moisture protection. 8. Superstructure, including floor and roof construction and sprayed fIre-resistive materials and board fIre protection. 9. Exterior closure, including walls, parapets, doors, windows, and louvers. 10. Roofmg, including coverings, flashings roof specialties and glazed openings. 11. Interior construction, including partitions, doors, interior glazed openings, and fIttings. 12. Fire-protection specialties. 13. Stairs, including railings and fInishes. 14. Interior fInishes, fInish carpentry, architectural woodwork and built-in casework. 15. Miscellaneous items, including concrete equipment bases and painting of mechanical and electrical work. 16. Conveying systems, including elevators and wheelchair lifts, escalators, and cranes. 17. Equipment, including stage equipment projection screens, loading dock equipment, waste compactors, foodservice equipment, residential appliances, and laboratory fume hoods. 18. Furnishings, including casework, window treatments, floor grilles and mats, and seating. 19. Special construction, including the following: a. Preengineered structures. b. Special-purpose rooms. c. Radiation protection. B. Temporary facilities and controls in the General Construction Contract include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary facilities and controls that are not otherwise specifIcally assigned to the Plumbing Contract, Mechanical Contract, and Electrical Contract. 2. Sediment and erosion control. 3. Unpiped sewers and drainage, including drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and containers. 4. Stormwater control. 5. Unpiped temporary toilet fIxtures, wash facilities, and drinking water facilities, including disposable supplies. 6. Temporary enclosure for building exterior, except as indicated. 7. Temporary roads and paved areas. 8. Dewatering facilities and drains. 9. Excavation support and protection, unless required solely for the Work of another contract. SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 10. Special or unusual hoisting requirements for construction activities, including hoisting loads in excess of 2 tons (2000 kg), hoisting material or equipment into spaces below grade, and hoisting requirements outside building enclosure. 11. Project identification and temporary signs. 12. General waste disposal facilities. 13. Pest control. 14. Temporary stairs. 15. Temporary fITe-protection equipment. 16. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 17. Site enclosure fence. 18. Covered walkways. 19. Security enclosure and lockup. 20. Environmental protection. 21. Restoration of Owner's existing facilities used as temporary facilities. 1.8 PLUMBING CONTRACT A. Work in the Plumbing Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Site water supply and distribution. 2. Site sanitary sewerage. 3. Site storm drainage. 4. Site fuel distribution. 5. Site special plumbing systems. 6. Plumbing fixtures. 7. Domestic water distribution. 8. Sanitary waste. 9. Stormwater drainage. 10. Special plumbing systems, including the following: a. Compressed air. b. Deionized water. c. Distilled water. d. Fuel oil. e. Natural gas. f. Medical gas. g. Vacuum. h. Acid waste. 1. Pools and fountains. 11. Fire-suppression systems. 12. Special fITe-suppression systems, including the following: a. Foam fITe-extinguishing systems. b. Clean-agent extinguishing systems. 13. Plumbing connections to equipment furnished by the General Construction Contract. B. Temporary facilities and controls in the Plumbing Contract include, but are not limited to, the following: SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Piped sewerage and drainage. 2. Piped gas service. 3. Piped water service. 4. Piped temporary toilet fixtures, wash facilities, and drinking water facilities. 5. Plumbing connections to existing systems and temporary facilities and controls furnished by the General Construction Contract. 1.9 MECHANICAL CONTRACT A. Work in the Mechanical Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Site steam distribution. 2. Site hydronic distribution. 3. Energy supply, including oil, gas, steam, hot- and chilled-water, and supply systems. 4. HV AC systems and equipment. 5. HV AC instrumentation and controls. 6. HV AC testing, adjusting, and balancing. 7. Building automation system. 8. Mechanical connections to equipment furnished by the General Construction Contract. 1.10 ELECTRICAL CONTRACT A. Work in the Electrical Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Site electrical distribution. 2. Site lighting. 3. Site communications and security. 4. Electrical service and distribution. 5. Exterior and interior lighting. 6. Communication and security. 7. Special electrical systems, including the following: a. Uninterruptib1e power supply systems. b. Packaged engine generator systems. c. Battery power systems. d. Cathodic protection. e. Electromagnetic shielding systems. f. Lightning protection systems. g. Unit power conditioners. h. Power generation systems. 8. Electrical connections to equipment furnished by the General Construction Contract. B. Temporary facilities and controls in the Electrical Contract include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Electric power service and distribution. 2. Lighting, including site lighting. SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 3. Electrical connections to existing systems and temporary facilities and controls furnished by the General Construction Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01125 SUMMARY OF MULTIPLE CONTRACTS 01125 - 8 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 02/06) SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Unit-cost allowances. 3. Quantity allowances. 4. Contingency allowances. 5. Testing and inspecting allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders for allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when fmal selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making fmal selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. ALLOWANCES 01210 - 1 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 02/06) 1.4 SUBMITTALS A Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.5 COORDINATION A Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.6 LUMP-SUM, UNIT-COST, AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES A Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials ordered by Owner under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance. 1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. ALLOWANCES 01210 - 2 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 02/06) B. The allowance does not include incidentallabor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. The cost for incidental labor to assist the testing agency shall be included in the Contract Sum. C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.9 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. <Insert number>: Include <Insert allowance description> as specified in Division <Insert Division number> Section "<Insert Section title>"[ and as shown on Drawings] . END OF SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES 01210 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defmed in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. <Insert number>: <Insert description of alternate.> END OF SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES 01230 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices. 3. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue, through Owner, supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AlA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Construction Manager will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Construction Manager are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Construction Manager. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.5 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AlA Document G701. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTNE A. Construction Change Directive: Construction Manager may issue a Construction Change Directive on AlA Document G714. Construction Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 1.4 A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 2. Division I Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, IDsurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. UNIT PRICES 01270 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. <Insert unit-price number> - <Insert unit-price item>: 1. Description: <Insert unit-price item description> according to Division <Insert Division number> Section "<Insert Section title>." 2. Unit of Measurement: <Insert unit of measurement.> END OF SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES 01270 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract 3. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit pnces. 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALVES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the Schedule of Values. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Submit draft of AlA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 1 00 percent 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-p1ace may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Construction Manager and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. D. Payment Application Forms: Use AlA Document G702 and AlA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. E. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included at end of this Section. F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit fmal or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit Waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit fmal Application for Payment with or preceded by fmal waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not fmal). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruct ion conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. L. Final Payment Application: Submit fmal Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for fmal changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AlA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AlA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AlA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC 08/04 SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the division of Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC 08/04 B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC 08/04 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Proj ect Record Drawing. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Proj ect. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC 08/04 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFls. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 1. Distribution of the Contract Documents. J. Submittal procedures. k. LEED requirements. 1. Preparation of Record Documents. m. Use of the premises and existing building. n. Work restrictions. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Construction waste management and recycling. r. Parking availability. s. Office, work, and storage areas. t. Equipment deliveries and priorities. u. First aid. v. Security. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC 08/04 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect and Construction Manager of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFls. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. 1. Possible conflicts. J. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. 1. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-5 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC 08/04 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: I) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC 08/04 shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 7 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC 08/04 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFL 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form BolA 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Attachments shall be electronic f1les in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFL RFIs received after 1 :00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within lO days of receipt of the RFI response. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 8 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC 08/04 F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 9 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: L Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for prepanng a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 4. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 5. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. 6. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure ofleeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Owner. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. 1. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships. K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's fmal release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities. D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early ftnish date, late start date, late ftnish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. H. Material Location Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. 1. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualiftcations: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. V erify availability of qualifted personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencIes. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. lO. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the fIrst 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling. " CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Defme activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 3 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. 1. Tests and inspections. J. Adjusting. k. Curing. 1. Startup and placement into fInal use and operation. 8. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 2. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall not be assigned to submittal activities unless specifIed otherwise but may, with Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Proj ect Record Documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. 3. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. 4. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. G. Contract ModifIcations: For each proposed contract modifIcation and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifIcally toemanage construction schedules. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.5 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. 1. Testing and commissioning. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late fInish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9 . Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values). F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. IdentifIcation of activities that have changed. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late fInish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. G. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In fIrst list, tabulate activity number, early fInish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late fInish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.6 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Proj ect site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and signifIcant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Work Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 9 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.7 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 10 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 11 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final Completion construction photographs. 4. Preconstruction videotapes. 5. Periodic construction videotapes. 6. Time-lapse sequence construction videotapes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Alloyvances" for requirements for photographic documentation provided under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for unit prices for extra photographs. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 4. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 6. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 7. Division 2 Section "Building Demolition" for photographic documentation before building demolition operations commence. 1.3 ALLOWANCE A. Costs: Photographer's services are included under the cash allowance for construction photographs established in Division 1 Section "Allowances." 1.4 UNIT PRICES A. Basis for Bids; Base number of construction photographs on twelve photographs per week over the duration of Project. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For photographer. B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs. C. Construction Photographs: Submit prints of each photographic view within 1 days of taking photographs. 1. Format: 8-by-lO-inch (203-by-254-mm) smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight commercial-grade photographic paper, mounted on linen or card stock to allow a l-inch- (25-mm-) wide margin and enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier. 3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of prints as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows. 1.8 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1.9 EXTRA PRINTS A. Extra Prints: If requested by Architect or Construction Manger, photographer shall prepare extra prints of photographs. Photographer shall distribute these prints directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for extra prints. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed jpg format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Proj ect site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect and Construction Manager. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take twelve photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take twelve photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 12 digital photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. Architect-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of digital photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. G. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take twelve digital photographs as indicated, to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Frequency: Take photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. 2. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Architect and Contractor, photographer to select vantage points. During each of the following construction phases, take not less than two of the required shots from same vantage point each time to create a time-lapse sequence as follows: a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction. b. Above-grade structural framing. c. Exterior building enclosure. d. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion. H. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will direct photographer for desired vantage points. I. Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. 1. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 2. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs. END OF SECTION 01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322 - 4 ~ Advancement of Construction Technology SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Project: Date: AlE Project Number: TRANSMITTAL To (Contractor): Date: Submittal No. A From (Subcontractor): By: o Resubmission Qty. Reference / Number Title / Description / Manufacturer Spec. Section Title and Paragraph / Drawin2 Detail Reference Other remarks on above submission: o Substitution involved - Substitution request attached o If substitution involved, submission includes point-by-point comparative data or preliminary details o Items included in submission will be ordered immediately upon receipt of approval o One copy retained by sender o Submitted for review and approval o Resubmitted for review and approval o Complies with contract requirements o Will be available to meet construction schedule o AlE review time included in construction schedule TRANSMITTAL To (AlE): Attn: Date Rec'd by Contractor: B From (Contractor): By: Date Trnsmt'd by Contractor: o Approved o Approved as noted o Revise / Resubmit o Rejected / Resubmit Other remarks on above submission: o One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To (Contractor): Attn: Date Rec'd by AlE: c From (AlE): o Other By: Date Trnsmt'd by AlE: o Approved o Approved as noted o Not subject to review o No action required o Revise / Resubmit o Rejected / Resubmit o Approved as noted / Resubmit o Provide file copy with corrections identified o Sepia copies only returned o Point-by-point comparative data required to complete approval process Other remarks on above submission: o Submission Incomplete / Resubmit o One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To (Subcontractor): Attn: Date Rec'd by Contractor: D From (Contractor): By: Date Trnsmt'd by Contractor: Copies: 0 Owner o Consultants o o o o One copy retained by sender Copyright 1996, Construction Specifications Institute, 106 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 Page of September 1996 CS1 Form 12.1A '<1"< ~ ~ 0'0.,., 2 0'0 . - - Z rJ1 ~ .as ~ 0 ~~ -< ...:l t;) rJ1 rJ1 U ~ ~ 0 ~ ~ ~ U ...:l ...... ~ al ~ 1:1 0 ~ 0 ;;;;J u ~ rJ1 ~ Z ...:l 0' 2'E' oo 0 <l) -< u S.D <l) U ;: !:: ;:l S :::: Z ;:l ~ oo <l)Z d) ;;;;J ~ ~ s ~ ~ 0 <l) ..s::f.L. Cl ~ ..s:: rJ1 oo P-.,-, ~ a; ~ 5 ~ 0. 0 g- oo ~ ~ 0 ~ 00 ~ ~ ~ 1 S t) g co Z j.; 0 tl ...... 0 Cl !:: u f.L. <l) !:: 0 08' ...... 0 S al .52 ~ d) P-. tl t) 1;j ~ s g Cl U oo f.L. !:: ...... 0 0 u <l) ., -5 oo bI) '" >> oo p... .D .t3 ] ~ 0 g. <l) ..... oo co ...... u <l) '0' ..... p... oo 0 :.s !:: 0 <l) oo ;:l ..... <E as oo 0 g 0- 0 2 ~ 0- as oo .~ .~ oo ]- 0. ~ g- ~g: tIl ~ 0'"";' a; ".e ~ !:: "'- UM '5 0 !€~ u ~ 0 ~< ~ ~> ..... l:l cd' c.e 0 o '': 't;j' !:: ",p "'0 Ql- ~ 0 U a Eg~ '.0 QJ E >< Q)~ 0 '"0 u ~ '" ., g~o 1a QJ .;; ~~ tIlf-o iJ ~8.€ oo ~ U..; 1) 0 s ^ ., <('O~ oo '<I" ., E '5 0 O'ol: 0 ~Vl ~ ] ~ l:l !:: ;>, ..s:: 0 0 bJ).~ ;..:... u al .D .~ -g ~ .D l:l iJ as ;,; .;..; ;:l ~ <l) g.:;E u tIl O.D 6h 's.. <l) '';:: S u- '0' '-' ...... 0 0 oo U ;:l 0 C/3 u IQ)~ ..... ~ ~z P-. f-o Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 01330 - SUBMITIAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. 5. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 6. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 7. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 8. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 9. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 10. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requmng coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmitta1s, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Insert list of submittals below requiring sequential review, or delete and identify submittals in Sections where they are specified. Structural, mechanical, plumbing, and electrical components are examples of the Work that often require sequential review. 6. Allowing procedure in subparagraph below may cause tracking problems for Architect and Construction Manager, if any. Delete if not allowed. See Evaluations. 7. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of flnn or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect 3. Include the following infonnation on label for processing and recording action taken: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffIx after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A). 1. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. J. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use AlA Document G810. 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. 1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. J. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 1. Remarks. ill. Signature of transmitter. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. 1. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of reVISiOn. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exceptions Taken" from Architect's action stamp. J. Distribution: Furnish copies of fInal submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Use for Construction: Use only fInal submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions Taken" from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual SpecifIcation Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifIcally established for Project. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifIcations. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. 1. Mill reports. J. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specifIed referenced standards. 1. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) n. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wmng, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. 1. Design calculations. J. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. L Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoiniug construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wmng. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) c. Sample source. d. Nwnber and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine fmal acceptance of construction associated with each set a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Nwnber of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Nwnber of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain no sample sets. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product Include unique identifier for each product 2. Nwnber and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Nwnber of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Proj ect Record Docwnent SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures. " 1. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures. " J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or finns proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. K. LEED Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "LEED Requirements. " 1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies ofLEED submittals, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on A WS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Proj ect. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. L Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 9 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) V. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified m Division 1 Section " Photographic Documentation." W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 10 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION o 1330END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 11 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 C. Mockups: Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. Full- size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation ofthe Work and for completed Work. L Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NR TL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Proj ect. L Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups usmg installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager. 2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11102 having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures. " D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that requITe testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.8 SPECIM, TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a fmal report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC 11/02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and fInishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching. " B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 8 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and mayor may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. REFERENCES 01420 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as ofthe date of the Contract Documents. PRIV ATE tbll ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (800) 872- 2253 (202) 272- 0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512- 1800 (202) 512- 1800 Available from Government Printing Office www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697- 6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697- 6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619- 8925 REFERENCES 01420 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289- 7800 www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MIL SPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697- 6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Access Board (800) 872- 2253 (202) 272- 0080 UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards www.access-board.gov 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRN ATE tb12 AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com (216) 241-7333 AABC Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com (202) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org (847) 303-5664 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) 624-5800 REFERENCES 01420 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA AATCC ABAA ABMA ACI ACPA AEIC AF&PA AGA AGe MASTERSPEC Full Length www.transportation.org American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org Air Barrier Association of America www.airbarrier.org American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org ACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org Association of Edison illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aelc.org American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org American Gas Association www.aga.org Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM AI AIA AISC AISI AITC REFERENCES Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org American Institute of Architects (The) WWW.ala.org American Institute of Steel Construction www.alsc.org American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org 11/05 (919) 549-8141 (866) 956-5888 (202) 367-1155 (248) 848-3700 (972) 506-7216 (205) 257-2530 (800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700 (202) 824-7000 (703) 548-3118 (202) 872-5955 (859) 288-4960 (800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300 (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 (202) 452-71 00 (303) 792-9559 01420 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute www.anS1.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. www.aosaseed.com AP A AP A - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org AP A Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute www.ap1.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.an.org ARMA Asphalt Roofmg Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofmg.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org A WCI A WCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.aWC1.org REFERENCES 11/05 (301) 972-1700 (847) 394-0150 (202) 293-8020 (505) 522-1437 (253) 565-6600 (239) 454-6989 (202) 682-8000 (703) 524-8800 (202) 207-0917 (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300 (800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400 (800) 843-2763 (973) 882-1170 (440) 835-3040 (610) 832-9585 (703) 534-8300 01420 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWl Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 REFERENCES 01420 - 6 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 WWw.clsca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 WWW.CISp1.0rg CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org Dm Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 WWW.ela.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.elilla.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 REFERENCES 01420 - 7 Copyright 2005 AIA ESD FIBA FIVB FMG FMRC FRSA FSA FSC GA GANA MASTERSPEC Full Length www.ejma.org ESD Association www.esda.org Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com Factory Mutual Research (Now FMG) Florida Roofmg, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.f1oridaroof.com Fluid Sealing Association www.f1uidsealing.com Forest Stewardship Council www.fsc.org Gypsum Association WWW.gypsum.org Glass Association of North America www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS GSI HI HI Green Seal www.greenseal.org Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 11/05 (315) 339-6937 41 225450000 41 21 3453535 (401) 275-3000 (407) 671-3772 (610) 971-4850 49 228 367 66 0 (202) 289-5440 (785) 271-0208 (202) 872-6400 (610) 522-8440 (888) 786-7744 (973) 267-9700 (908) 464-8200 REFERENCES 01420 - 8 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 HPVA HPW (Part ofNAAMM) Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org (703) 435-2900 H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com (410) 838-6550 IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF ICEA ICRI IEC IEEE IESNA IEST IGCC IGMA ILl ISO ISSFA ITS REFERENCES International Badminton Federation www.intbadfed.org (6-03) 9283-7155 Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369 International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830 International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch 41 2291902 11 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) WWW.leee.org (212) 419-7900 illuminating Engineering Society of North America WWW.lesna.org (212) 248-5000 Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology www.iest.org (847) 255-1561 Insulating Glass Certification Council WWW.lgcc.org (315) 646-2234 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510 Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426 International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch 41 2274901 11 Available from ANSI www.anS1.org (202) 293-8020 International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net (877) 464-7732 (702) 567-8150 (800) 345-3851 Intertek 01420 - 9 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length www.intertek.com ITU International Telecommunication Union www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org MIA Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport REFERENCES 11/05 (713) 407-3500 412273051 11 (703) 264-1690 (800) 488-6864 (804) 314-8955 (216) 241-7333 (847) 480-9138 (312) 644-6610 (800) 345-1815 (704) 676-1190 (440) 250-9222 (888) 674-8937 (703) 281-6613 (312) 332-0405 (800) 797-6623 (281) 228-6200 (202) 737-2926 (800) 213-7193, ext. 453 01420 - 10 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.nalilla.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncp1.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 REFERENCES 01420 - 11 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393 NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.org (901) 526-5016 NRCA National Roofmg Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofmg Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) (800) 966-5253 www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pC1.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org REFERENCES 01420 - 12 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length RCSC RFCI RIS Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofmg Manufacturers Association) (Now TRI) SAE SDI SDI SEFA SGeC SIA SIGMA sn SMA SAE International www.sae.org Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com Safety Glazing Certification Council WWW.sgcc.org Security Industry Association www.siaonline.org Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org Screen Manufacturers Association www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE SPFA REFERENCES Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers www.smpte.org Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org 11/05 (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 (301) 340-8580 (888) 225-7339 (415) 382-0662 (877) 606-7323 (724) 776-4841 (847) 458-4647 (440) 899-0010 (516) 294-5424 (315) 646-2234 (703) 683-2075 (843) 626-1995 (561) 533-0991 (703) 803-2980 (914) 761-1100 (800) 523-6154 01420 - 13 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofmg Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spn.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssma.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofmg, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry AssociationlElectronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 REFERENCES 01420 - 14 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org (202) 828-7422 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org (800) 938-7488 (315) 463-6463 (800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700 (800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651 USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.usitt.org W ASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org (800) 506-4636 (212) 297-2109 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com (800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200 WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WlC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org (916) 372-9943 WlC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WWP A W estern Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org (800) 550-7889 (530) 661-9591 (800) 725-0333 (650) 570-5441 (503) 224-3930 WMMP A Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com WSRCA Western States Roofmg Contractors Association www.wsrca.com C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up- to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tb13 BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMo International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472- 4100 REFERENCES 01420 - 15 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 www.lapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBo Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council www .iccsafe.org (888) 422- 7233 (703) 931- 4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. WWW.lcc-es.org (800) 423- 6587 (562) 699- 0543 SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC) D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl4 CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 REFERENCES 01420 - 16 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (800) 488-3111 HVD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112 LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www.lbl.gov (510) 486-4000 NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov (301) 975-6478 OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (800) 321-6742 (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs (202) 690-7694 RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) (202) 720-9540 SD State Department www.state.gov (202) 647-4000 TRB Transportation Research Board www.nas.edu/trb (202) 334-2934 USDA Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov (202) 720-2791 USPS Postal Service WWW.usps.com (202) 268-2000 E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. PRIVATE tbl5 CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (800) 952- 5210 (916) 574- 2041 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti REFERENCES 01420-17 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/05 CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703- 2782 WWW.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service (936) 639- 8180 Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice. tamu.edu PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420 - 18 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for temporary facilities and controls. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 6. Division 2 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site. 7. Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for pest control. 8. Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. 9. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofmg is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - I Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Sewer, Water, and Electric Power Service: Use charges are specified in Division I Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts." F. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. G. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and VL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFP A 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Pavement: Comply with Division 2. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-1illn), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-111m-) OD corner and pull posts[, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-111111-) aD top rails, with galvanized barbed-wire top strand. C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8- inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) aD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8- inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. D. Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood, [6 feet (1.8 111)] [8 feet (2.4 m)] high, framed with four 2-by- 4-inch (50-hy-1 OO-mm) rails, with preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart. E. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section. F. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 111m) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. G. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. H. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of [10] <Insert number> individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4- foot- (l.2-m-) square tack board. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C). 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fe (215 Ix) at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1. Store combustible materials apart from building. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fIre exposures. B. HV AC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HV AC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HV AC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HV AC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to lninimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. I. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. Install electric power service unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. L. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication sefV1ce, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 1. Provide DSL in primary field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFP A 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Pen:onnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for constructiotl operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to DiviBion 2 Section "Earthwork." 3. Recondition bas~: after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately befc)re Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of fInal course according to Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access fc)r fITe-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified m Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." I. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. J. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. I. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. K. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators. L. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refInished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. M. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. N. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. O. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so fInishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 -7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION F ACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified m Division 2 Section "Site Clearing." C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. E. Tree and Plant Protection: Comply with requirements specified in Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming." F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect veg€:tation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. G. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. H. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accOlnmodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. I. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of coru:truction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. J. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) K. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, and requirements indicated on Drawings. 1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. 2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. 3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect. L. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. M. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-nnn) polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-111111) polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches (460 rn111) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood. a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule. 3. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Weather strip openings. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. N. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fITe losses. Comply with NFPA241. 1. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fITe-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fITe department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 9 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fITe-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility Crumgeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, lmd replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove tempormy paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fIll that do not comply with requirements for fIll or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with fInal cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 10 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 02/03 (05/06) SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: I. Salvaging nonhazardous [ demolition] [and] [ construction] waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous [demolition] [and] [construction] waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous [demolition] [and] [construction] waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordination of responsibilities for waste management. 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection measures during construction[, and location of waste containers at Project site]. 3. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements[, and for disposition of hazardous waste]. 4. Division 2 Section "Building Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements[, and for disposition of hazardous waste]. 5. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 6. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 7. Division 4 Section "Stone Veneer Assemblies" for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 02/03 (05/06) C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processmg m preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.5 SUBMITTALS 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis.[ Include separate sections in plan for demolition and construction waste.] Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: hldicate anticipated types and quantities of [demolition] [site-clearing] [and] [ construction] waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimat(:s. C. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following: 1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 9. Net additional COBt or net savings from waste management plan. D. Forms: Prepare waste management plan on forms included at end of Part 3. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 02/03 (05/06) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Construction Manager. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Proj ect site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they fIrst begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Proj ect site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated. B. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: 1. Clean salvaged items. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTER SPEC Full Length 02/03 (05/06) 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area [on-site] [off-site] [designated by Owner]. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. 3.3 RECYCLING [DEMOI,ITION] [AND] [CONSTRUCTION] WASTE, GENERAL 3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Asphaltic Concrete PaV:lllg: Grind asphalt to maximum [1-1/2-inch (38-mm)] [4-inch (100- mm)] size. 1. Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for use as general fill. B. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. C. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum [1-1/2-inch (38-mm)] [4-inch (lOO-mm)] size. 2. Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase. D. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize maSOIll)' to maximum [3/4-inch (19-mm)] [l-inch (25-mm)] [1-1/2-inch (38- mm)] [4-inch (100-mm)] size. a. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for use as [general fill] [satisfactory soil for fill or subbase]. b. Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants" for use as mineral mulch. 2. Clean and stack ulldamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. E. Wood Materials: Sort alld stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials. F. Metals: Separate metals by type. 1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. G. Asphalt Shingle Roofmg: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 02/03 (05/06) H. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. I. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 1. Separate suspension system, trim, and other metals from panels and tile and sort with other metals. J. Carpet[ and Pad]: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. 1. Store clean, dry carpet[ and pad] in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. K. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fIxtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather. L. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. M. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. N. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. O. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. P. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Site-Clearing Wastes: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants" for use of chipped organic waste as organic mulch. C. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 5 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 02/03 (05/06) 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants." for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch. D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. a. Comply wil:h requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants." for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-sit,e. 2. Remove and tranBport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not bum waste materials. C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. D. Disposal: Transport waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. E. Disposal: Transport waBte materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01524END OF SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 6 ~ Advancement of Construction Technology SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: NE Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: ArticlelParagraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: 0 New product 0 2-5 years old 0 5-10 yrs old 0 More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: o Point-by-point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY NE Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Address: Architect: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: o No 0 Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ($ ). DNo o Yes [Add] [Deduct] days. Supporting Data Attached: 0 Drawings o Product Data 0 Samples o Tests o Reports 0 Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institute, 60 I Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 Page of September 1996 CSI Form 13.1A SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Continued) The Undersigned certifies: . Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and detennined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. . Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. . Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. . Proposed substitution will have no advers,e effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. . Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become app~ent~etobewffived. . Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. . Payment will be made for changes to building design, including NE design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. . Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: NE's REVIEW AND ACTION D Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. D Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. D Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. D Substitution Request received too late - USI~ specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: D Contractor D Subcontractor D Supplier D Manufacturer D NE D Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institutl:, 601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 Page of September 1996 CST Form 13.1A Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 4. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "systern," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. lnclude manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selectioru: and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. J. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rej ection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Proc(xiures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previou:dy selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to mmlilllze long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that produets are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitioU8 products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before fmal execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, fInish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements,. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements:. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consid~ration of an unnamed product or system. 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other charactmistics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be fmal on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturt:r's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11 /02 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSi 01600 - 7 Copyright 2002 AIA PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS MASTERSPEC 11/02 01600 - 8 ~ Advancement of Construction Technology REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Proj ect: R.F.I. Number: From: To: Date: AlE Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail : Request: Signed by: Date: Response: o Attachments Response From: To: Date Rec' d: Date Ref d: Signed by: Date: Copies: 0 Owner o Consultants o o o o o File Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute, 601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 Page of July 1994 CSI Form 13.2A Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements govemmg execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by surveyor. E. Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualific~.tions: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indic:ated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and. location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. Be:t:Dre construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility sefV1ces B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, :;torm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical sefV1ces. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Pmject site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affi::cting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unal;;ceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing fInishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatical1y on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. V erification: Before proceeding to layout the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to layout the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey patty member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Cons1ruction Manager. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to and Construction Manager before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish :md maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove tempor~il'Y reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Prepare a fmal property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor that principal metes, bounds" lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, eXlstmg improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. I. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in fInished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of [8 feet (2.4 m)] in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confIrm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Sch~:dule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFP A 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 dcg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufaclturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11 /02 I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 3.9 3.10 A. Start equipment and operating components to confIrm proper operation. malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Remove B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and fInishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 -7 Copyright 2002 AIA END OF SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS MASTERSPEC 11/02 01700 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fITe-rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and fIrms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and MechanicallElectrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) relocated and those that will be temporarily out of servIce. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform a~~ intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment SUppOltS. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: R€:move, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and MechanicallElectrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or fInished side into concealed surfaces. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide matl~rials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishe!i: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend fInish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other fInishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one fInished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of unifoml fInish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patc:hing occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply fmal paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of unifoml appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01731 END OF SECTION 01731 CUITING AND PATCHING 01 731 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 01732 - SELECTNE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for use of premises, and Owner-occupancy requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs taken before selective demolition operations. 3. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 4. Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. 5. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. 6. Division 2 Section "Building Demolition" for demolition of entire buildings, structures, and site improvements. 7. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below- grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner, ready for reuse. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: I. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for 8hutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other tenants affected by selective demolition operations. 6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial oc:cupancy of completed Work. 7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. D. Predemolition Photogr:llphs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including fInish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. E. Landfill Records: Indil;ate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1. Comply with submittal requirements m Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management. " 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EP A-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI AI0.6 and NFPA 241. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." F. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. F. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present. 1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 2. Do not disturb halardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during sdective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fITe-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: R{:tnove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demoliti.on, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are mcountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent stmctures during selective demolition operations. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, and preconstruction photol~aphs. 1. Comply with requirements specified m Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation. " 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in fmal Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. I. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified m Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and fInishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLD'ION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indi<:ated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolitJ.on operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods l,east likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remam. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or fInished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished ~:urfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fITe-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequatl~ ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to mat::h new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor covenngs and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. F. Roofmg: Remove no more existing roofmg than can be covered in one day by new roofmg and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 7 Section for new roofmg requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofmg system down to substrate. G. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Full Length 11/02 (R 05/06) 2. Remove and tram;port debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debriB to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with n:quirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management. " B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. D. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLn~ION SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 01 732END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-8 =~ UOO z~ ~~ ~ c: .2 <1>.... E g 1;; Q)~ 0 g~o ~8E "t:l 0 <l:'Cii!!! ~ ~ ~ '-' 8 o ... ~ .;..; () Q) 'e: ~ 0) 1;j C'l ...... '" ;; Q) ...... Vi ij "S ;:l z ~ 'e: ~ ~ ,-... ... .8 () ~ s:: o U '-' ~ Q) -B ~ "a (5 s:: '" Q) o "Cl ...... ~ '" :5 s:: o ~ .~ >. a Q) "Cl ;:l U .s .8 ] ~ Q) -B "Cl a j..; o ~ ~ s:: o U Q) .~ '" ;:l u .~ ~ Q) .0 ...... o s:: ~ 8 ~ '" ~J1 5 d ~ .g g i3C'l t:: ...... o () () ~ E> S s::U o Q) .-fl -B "E.-B g .~ () Q) ... () c.S a "Cl E> E> ...... () ~ ~ s:: .s 8~ Q) 0 -B~ ~~ s::B 02 '.c ~ 5 g ~ () Q).8 -B E> Q) ...... ... () .- '" g.t:l ~ S ",u 5.5 .~ t+-I 01)0 .~~ ..9:-9 ~ '" c.S s:: o Q) ~ ~ ~ S...><: .p i3 "'..s::: ~u '5 u.l >~ s:: o .~ ~ o U d .s: ~t:: B o '" UCl s:: o .p li '" Q) C'l s:: o .~ ~ () Q) o~ ...l,-, ~ g"S o ;:l ~z ~ .0 5 ~ ~z '" 15 Q) ~ ~ o 0) 1;j C'l ~ .0 "Cl Q) 61 Vi 2 ~ o ~...:: 0-,_ 0-, . _"<I" ii -~ frCil enu o o o o ..... o Q) gp ll.. o o o '" ~ '3 '" s:: o U o <i .~ ~ ]~ ~..J. 0- .ia ~ oN S...:: ~> 0.. . en to @~ ".::: !il o >< e Q) -< ~ . o ., u. ~ ~en 0-, s:: - 0 .:Q .~ bll"g .~~ 0.._ 00 u~ ~ ~ o o tJi Q) '6. o U Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART I-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division I Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 5. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 6. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 7. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar fmal record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and n::move temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of ehangeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete fmal cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed fInishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will noti~f Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting fInal inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a fInal Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures. " 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of fInal, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control fmal inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for fInal inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a fmal Certificate for Payment after inspection CLOSEOVTPROCEDVRES 01770 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. I. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas fIrst and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Proj ect Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-l1-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. CLOSEOVTPROCEDURES 01770 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: USI~ cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surfac;e to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage fInished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide fInal cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ exp<::rienced workers or professional cleaners for fInal cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Proj1xt site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Proj ect site:. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. A void disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 1. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. J. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed fInishes and surfaces. Replace fInishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. I) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fIxtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUTPROCEDVRES 01770 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01781 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOClJMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordinating Project Record Documents covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set( s) of marked-up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set(s) of corrected Record Transparencies or plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings, and one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each transparency or plot and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return transparencies or plots and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. b. Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints, one set(s) of Record Transparencies, and three copies printed from Record Transparencies. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. c. Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints, one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing files, one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing plots, and three PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 -1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 copies printed from record plots. Plot and print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. 1) Electronic Media: CD-R. B. Record Specifications: Submit 3 copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit 3 copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give partkular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below fIrst floor. d. Locations ,md depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. 1. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record irIDJrmation on the Work that is shown only schematically. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored penciL Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. 4. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies. Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop. C. Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect and Construction Manager. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. 4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings. D. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect and Construction Manager for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. E. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included. 3. Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to eac:h sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Proj ect name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781-4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01781 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01781 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in fmal form at least 15 days before fmal inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after fmal inspection. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuaLs that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: Lislt equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems. " 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents, 3. Manual contents. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-l/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-ll-inch (215-by-280-rnrn) white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instm~tions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain wanlings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required m individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: I. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, mmufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty lmd bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: LiBt each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Spedfication Section number and title in Project Manual. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants fOJr equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and servict: with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 2. Maintenance and Service Record: maintenance. Include manufacturers' forms for recording F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating person.-'lel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and fInish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01782 - 7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/02 flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use origiaal Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division I Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division] Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENP~CE DATA 01782 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR4.1[ and CreditMR4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Design Mixtures for Credit ill 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. D. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement[ and formwork]. Material [test reports] [certificates] . 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," [Sections 1 through 5.] [Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete."] 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - I Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) C. Preinstallation Conferen<:e: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Sted Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumt:r recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [60] <Insert number> percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. 1. Galvanized ReinfDrcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class [I] [II] zinc coated after fabrication and bending. 2. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/ A 775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged eoating in each 12-inch (300-mm) bar length. C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. E. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets. F. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1, [plain] [deformed] steeL G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II] [I/II] [ill] [V].[ Supplement with the following: ] CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class [C] [F]. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type [IS, portland blast-furnace slag] [IP, portland-pozzolan] [I (PM), pozzolan-modified portland] [I (SM), slag-modified portland] cement. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, [1-1/2-inch (38-mm)] [I-inch (25-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, [I-inch (25-mm)] [3/4-inch (t9-mm)] [t/2-inch (13- mm)] [3/8-inch (to-mm)] nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and potable]. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C IOl7M, Type II. G. Synthetic Fiber: [Monofilament] [or] [fibrillated] polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type ill, [1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 rom)] <Insert dimensions> long. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. B. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. C. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C[, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than to mils (0.25 mm) thick]. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA 2.5 A. B. C. D. E. F. MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 gisq. m) when dry. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. Water: Potable. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating[, certifiel[). by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering]. G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. H. Clear, Waterborne, Mt:mbrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.6 RELATED MATERIAI,s A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: [ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber] [or] [ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork]. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixture!! for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 perctmt. C. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: [5000 psi (34.51\tJPa)] [4500 psi (31MPa)] [4000 psi (27.6 MPa)] [3500 psi (24.1 MPa)] [3000 psi (20.7 MPa)] <Insert strength> at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: [0.50] [0.45] [0.40] <Insert ratio>. 3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)] [5 inches (125 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with vE~rified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high- range water-redlllcing admixture or plasticizing admixture] <Insert dimension>, plus or minus 1 inch (25 nm1). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 4. Air Content: [5-1/2] <Insert number> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: [6] <Insert number> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for [I-inch (25-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal maximum aggregate size. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 7. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than [1.0 Ib/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m)] [1.5 Ib/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m)] <Insert dosage>. D. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: [5000 psi (34.5 MPa)] [4500 psi (311\lPa)] [4000 psi (27.6 MPa)] [3500 psi (24.1 J\<:[Pa)] [3000 psi (20.7 MPa)] <Insert strength> at 28 days. 2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: [115 Ib/cu. ft. (1842 kg/cu. m)] [110 Ib/cu. ft. (1762 kg/cu. m)] [105 Ib/cu. ft. (1682 kg/cu. m)], plus or minus 3 Ib/cu. ft. (48.1 kg/cu. m) as determined by ASTM C 567. 3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)] [5 inches (125 mm)], plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum aggregate size greater than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 5. Air Content: 7 percent, plus or minus 2 percent at point of delivery for nominal maximum aggregate size 3/8 inch (10 mm) or less. 6. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled fInished floors to exceed 3 percent. 7. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than [1.0 Ib/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m)] [1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m)] <Insert dosage>. 2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116], and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI301 to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of SIze, shape, alignment, elevation, and position itldicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. [ Chamfer] [Do not chamfer] exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inch{:s (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with eRSl's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: lnstall so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened~plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least [one- fourth] <Insert depth> of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and fInishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 1illn). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying sUlface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete developB random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slab:;-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical Burfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fms and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces [not exposed to public view] <Insert locations>. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fms and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces [exposed to public view,] [to receive a rubbed finish,] [to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete] <Insert locations> . C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one- half parts fine sand with a 1: 1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1: 1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) will match adjacl~nt surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and fmish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue fmal surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unle:;s otherwise indicated. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS }..NJ) SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and fmishing operations for I;oncrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Us<;: stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 1illn) in 1 direction. 1. Apply scratch fmish to surfaces [indicated] [and] [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor fInishes] <Insert locations> . C. Float Finish: ConsolidaJe surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and f1l1 low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces [indicated] [to receive trowel finish] [and] [to be covered with fluid-appliEd or sheet waterproofIng, built-up or membrane roofIng, or sand- bed terrazzo] <IlIlsert locations>. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float fmish, apply fIrst troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient floorinl~, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-tilm-tinish coating system] <Insert locations>. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel fmish to surfaces [indicated] [where ceramic or quarry til'e is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method]. While concrete is still plastic, Blightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom fInish to exterior concrete platfonns, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. 111 X h) before and during fInishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float fInishing. C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 rnm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer[ unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project]. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. END OF SECTION 03300END OF SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 08/02 (R 05/06) 03300 - 10 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) SECTION 03301 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and fInishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A fIrm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." C. Comply with ACII17, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT B. C. D. E. 2.3 A. A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsum<:r recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [60] <Insert number> percent. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. CONCRETE MATERIALS Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Projeet: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II] [I/II] [III] [V].[ Supplement with the following: ] a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class [C] [F]. b. Ground Gnmulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type [IS, portland blast-furnace slag] [IP, portland-pozzola.n] [I (PM), pozzolan-modified portland] [I (SM), slag-modified portland] cement. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, [1-1I2-inch (3S-mm)] <Insert dimension> nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M[; potable]. D. Synthetic Fiber: [Monofilament] [or] [fibrillated] polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, [1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm)] <Insert dimensions> long. 2.4 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS 2.6 A. B. C. D. E. F. A. Vapor Retarder: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. Water: Potable. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal-Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI301, as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: [4500 psi (31 MPa)] [4000 psi (27.6 MPa)] [3500 psi (24.1 MPa)] [3000 psi (20.7 MPa)] <Insert strength> at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: [0.50] [0.45] <Insert ratio>. 3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)] [5 inches (125 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high- range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture] <Insert dimension>, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) 4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to rece:lve troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent. C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than a rate of [1.0 th/eu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m)] [1.5 lb/eu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m)] <Insert rate> . 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concret{:: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116], and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or pWlcture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct join1ts true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least [one- fourth] <Insert depth> of concrete thickness. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICA TrONS) 03301 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) 3.5 A. B. C. D. 3.6 A. C. Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE PLACEMENT Comply with ACI 30 I for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. FINISHING FORMED SURF ACES Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fms and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch (13 mm). 1. Apply to concrete surfaces [not exposed to puhlie view] <Insert locations>. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fms and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm). 1. Apply to concrete surfaces [exposed to puhlic view,] [to receive a ruhhed finish,] [or to he covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete] <Insert locations>. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defmed in ACI301, to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-rubbed fmish. 2. Grout-cleaned finish. 3. Cork-floated fmish. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and fmish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue fmal surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 - 5 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) B. Screed surfaces with a~traightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting fmishing operations. C. Scratch Finish: Apply sl;;ratch fmish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor fmishes, unless otherwise indicated. D. Float Finish: Apply float fmish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel fmish, and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofmg, fluid-applied or direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofmg, or sand-bed terrazzo. E. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel fmish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paiJ!lt, or another thin film-fmish coating system. F. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel fmish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify swface with a fme broom. G. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom fmish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float fmishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicuhr to main traffic route. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during fmishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after fmishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Curing Methods: Cure: formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 - 6 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 (R 05/06) c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 3.1 0 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section. END OF SECTION 03301 END OF SECTION 03301 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (LIMITED APPLICATIONS) 03301 - 7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 03331 - CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place architectural concrete including form facings, reinforcement accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and fmishes. B. See Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork; material, fabrication, and installation requirements for steel reinforcement; and field quality control. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR4.1[ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Design Mixtures for Credit ill 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. D. Formwork Shop Drawings. E. Placement schedule. F. Samples: For each of the following materials: 1. Form-facing panel. 2. Form ties. 3. Form liners. 4. Coarse- and fine-aggregate gradations. 5. Chamfers and rustications. G. Material [test reports] [certificates]. CAST -IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03331 - I Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI301, "Speciflcation for Structural Concrete,"[ Sections 1 through 5.] [Sections 1 through 5 and Sfction 6, II Architectural Concrete. "] 2. ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete." C. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting architectural concrete, produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under sample submittah Produce a minimum of 3 sets of full-scale panels, cast vertically, approximately 48 by 48 by 6 inches (1200 by 1200 by 150 mm) minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and texture variations. D. Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: E. Preinstallation Conferen;;e: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork and other form-facing material requirements. B. Form-Facing Panels for [As-Cast] [Exposed-Aggregate] Finishes: Steel, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or other approv{:d nonabsorptive panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. C. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration [indicated] [to match design reference sample]. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments of concrete. D. Rustication Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, or dressed wood with sides beveled and back kerfed; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths. CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03331-2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) E. Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths. F. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensItive; AAMA 800, "Specification 810.1, Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape"; minimum 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, [glass-fiher-reinforced ptastic] [internally disconnecting] [or] [removahle] ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for steel reinforcement and other requirements for reinforcement accessories. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [60] <Insert numher> percent. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufacture according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 1. Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use [gray, all-plastic] [CRSI Class 1, gray, plastic-protected] [or] [CRSI Class 2, stainless-steel] bar supports. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II] [I/II] [ill], [gray] [white].[ Supplement with the following:] a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class [C] [F]. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. c. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type [IS, portland hlast-furnaee slag] [IP, portland-pozzolan] [I (PM), pozzolan-modified portland] [I (SM), slag-modified portland] cement. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class [5S] [SM] [IN] <Insert class> coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source[ with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials]. 1. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/8 inch (10 mm)]. 2. Gradation: [Uniformly] [Gap] graded. CAST -IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03331-3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) C. Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: [ASTM C 33] [or] [ASTM C 144], manufactured or natural sand, from same source for entire Project. D. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from mixer washout operations. E. Air-Entraining AdmixtW'e: ASTM C 260. F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Wat(~r-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. G. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable:,[ free of carbon hlack,] nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 2.4 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene fIlm or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be[ pigmented type] approved by color pigment manufacturer. 2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural concrete proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI301. I. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Proportion concrete mixtures as follows: CAST -IN-PLACE ARCHITECTlJRAL CONCRETE 03331 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): [5000 psi (34.5 MPa)] [4500 psi (3I MPa)] [4000 psi (27.61\'IPa)] [3500 psi (24.1 MPa)] [3000 psi (20.7 l\-lPa)]. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.46. 3. Slump Limit: [3 inches (75 mm)] [4 inches (l00 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) hefore adding high- range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture] <Insert dimension>, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: [5-1/2] <Insert numher> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for l-lI2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: [6] <Insert numher> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for [I-inch (25-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. 2.6 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Architectural Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1. Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural concrete to prevent contamination from other concrete. 2. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, embedded items, and shoring and reshoring. B. In addition to ACI 303.1 limits on form-facing panel deflection, limit cast-in-place architectural concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class [A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] [B, 1/4 inch (6 mm)] [C, 1/2 inch (13 mm)]. C. Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." D. [Chamfer] [Do not chamfer] exterior comers and edges of cast-in-place architectural concrete. E. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03331 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTER SPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 3.2 3.3 3.4 F. Retighten forms and bnLcing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. G. Place form liners accurately to provide fmished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and attach securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners during concreting. Prevent form liners from sagging and stretching in hot weather. Seal joints of form liners and form liner accessories to prevent mortar leaks. Coat form liner with form-release agent. REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for fabricating and installing steel reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete placement. B. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrl~te may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Cut off and grind glass-tiber-reinforced plastic form ties flush with surface of concrete. B. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved [28-day design compressive strength] [at least 70 percent of 28-c1ay design compressive strength]. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove tins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces. JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Im;tall construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across constructionjoint~, unless otherwise indicated. B. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03331 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. B. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI306.1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.6 FINISHES A. Architectural Concrete Finish: Match Architect's design reference sample, identified and described as indicated, to satisfaction of Architect. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and fmish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 1. Continue fInal surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Maintain uniformity of special fmishes over construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. D. Form Liner Finish: Produce a textured surface free of pockets, streaks, and honeycombs, and of uniform appearance, color, and texture. E. Scrubbed Finish: After concrete has achieved a compressive strength of from 1000 to 1500 psi (6.9 to 10.3 MPa), apply scrubbed fmish. Wet concrete surfaces thoroughly and scrub with stiff fiber or wire brushes, using water freely, until top mortar surface is removed and aggregate is uniformly exposed. Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water. Maintain continuity of fmish on each surface or area of Work. Remove only enough concrete mortar from surfaces to match design reference sample or mockup. F. High-Pressure Water-Jet Finish: Perform high-pressure water jetting on concrete that has achieved a minimum compressive strength of 4500 psi (31 MPa). Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be high-pressure water-jet finished are treated at same age for uniform results. G. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Perform abrasive blasting after compressive strength of concrete exceeds 2000 psi (13.8 MPa). Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be abrasive blasted are treated at same age for uniform results. Expose aggregate as follows: 1. Brush: Remove cement matrix to dull surface sheen and expose face of fme aggregate; with no significant reveal. 2. Light: Expose fme aggregate with occasional exposure of coarse aggregate and uniform color; with maximum reveal of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). CAST -IN-PLACE ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03331 -7 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05/06) 3. Medium: Generally expose coarse aggregate; with slight reveal, a maximum of 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. Heavy: Expose .md reveal coarse aggregate to a maximum projection of one-third its diameter; with reveal range of 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 to 13 nun). H. Bushhammer Finish: Allow concrete to cure at least 14 days before starting bushhammer surface fmish operations. 1. Surface Continuity: Perform bushhammer fmishing in as continuous an operation as possible, maintaining continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work. Maintain required patterns Dr variances of cut as shown on Drawings or to match design reference sample or mockup. 2. Surface Cut: Maintain required depth of cut and general aggregate exposure. 3.7 CONCRETE CURING A. Begin curing cast-in-place architectural concrete immediately after [removing forms from] [applying as-cast formled finishes to] concrete. Cure according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of [moisture curing] [moisture-retaining-cover curing] [curing compound] methods that will not mottle, discolor, or stain concrete: 3.8 FIELD QUALITY COl'irTROL A. General: Comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for field quality-control requirements. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair and cure damaged fmished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete when approved by Architect. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding surfaces and to repairs on approved mockups. 1. Remove and replace cast-in-place architectural concrete that cannot be repaired and cured to Architect's approval. B. Protect comers, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from damage; use guards and barricades. C. Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 03331END OF SECTION 03331 CAST-IN-PLACE ARCIDTECTURAL CONCRETE 03331 - 8 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) SECTION 03410 - PLANT-PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes precast structural concrete. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design precast structural concrete, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Precast structural concrete units and connections shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Select material and minimum thicknesses to provide indicated fIre rating. 1.3 SUBMfIT ALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Design Mixtures for Credit ill 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. C. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. D. Shop Drawings: Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections, openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Detail fabrication and installation of precast structural concrete units. E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For precast structural concrete indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. F. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [fahrieator] [testing agency]. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) G. Welding certificates. H. Material certificates. 1. Material test reports. J. Source quality-control nports. K. Field quality-control[ and speciat inspection] reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualification:,: A fIrm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast structural concrete units to comply with performance requirements. Responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Participates in PCI's Plant Certification program[ at time of hidding] and is designated a PCI-certified plant as follows: a. Group C, [Category C1 - Precast Concrete Products (no prestressed reinforcement)] [Category C2 - Prestressed Hollowcore and Repetitively Produced Products] [Category C3 - Prestressed Straight Strand Structural Memhers] [Category C4 - Prestressed Deflected Strand Structural Memhers]. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI318M) and design recommendations in PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of precast structural COlll:~rete units indicated. C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality- control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 116, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Concrete Products." D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Stee1." 2. AWS D1.4, "Stru;;tural Welding Code - Reinforcing SteeL" E. Fire-Resistance Calculations: Where indicated, provide precast structural concrete units whose fIre resistance meets the prescriptive requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or has been calculated according to [ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of ConcretE: and Masonry Construction Assemhlies, "] [pel MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete, "] and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material in same position as during storage. B. Store units with adequate bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage. C. Lift and support units only at designated points shown on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction before starting that Work. Provide locations, setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [60] <Insert numher> percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. D. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from [ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)] [ASTM A 706/A 706M], deformed bars, assembled with clips. E. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. F. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/ A 497M, flat sheet. G. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 116. 2.2 PRESTRESSING TENDONS A. Strand: ASTM A 416/A 416M, Grade 270 (Grade 18(0), uncoated, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand. 1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with post-tensioning coating complying with ACI 423.6 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI423.6. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type ill, gray, unless otherwise indicated. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. MetakaolinAdmixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 116, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with [Class 5S] [Class SM] [Class 4S] [Class 4M]. Stockpile fme and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed fmish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Proj ect. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium c:bloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture. 2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/ A 36M. B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCIMNL 116. C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/ A 283M. D. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M. E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205). F. High-Strength, Low-AllDY Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M. G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450). 1. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/ A 706M. J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURt\L CONCRETE 03410 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M) or ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M). 1. Do not zinc coat ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M) bolts. L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items[, steel in exterior walls,] and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by [hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/ A 153M] [electrodeposition according to ASTM B 633, SC 3, Types I and 2]. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B or SSPC- Paint 20. M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized-steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3, and shop apply [lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhihitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79] [SSPC-Paint 25] according to SSPC-P A 1. 2.5 BEARING PADS A. Provide bearing pads for precast structural concrete units as recommended by precast fabricator for application. 2.6 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements. 2.7 INSULATED FLAT WALL PANEL ACCESSORIES A. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type I, 0.90 lh/cu. ft. (IS kg/cu. m)] [Type VIII, 1.15 lb/cu. ft. (IS kg/cu. m)] [Type IT, 1.35 lb/cu. ft. (22 kg/cu. m)]; [square] [ship-lap] edges; with R-value of <Insert value> and thickness of <Insert dimension>. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 1.60Ih/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m)] [Type X, 1.30 lh/cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m)] [Type VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m)]; [square] [ship-lap] edges; with R-value of <Insert value> and thickness of <Insert dimension>. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 591, [Type I, 1.8 lh/eu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m)] [Type IV, 2 lb/cu. ft. (32 kg/cu. m)] [Type II, 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m)] unfaced, with R- value of <Insert value> and thickness of <Insert dimension>. D. Wythe Connectors: [Gtass-fiber connectors] [Vinyl-ester potymer connectors] [Polypropylene pin l:onnectors] [Stainless-steel pin connectors] [Bent galvanized reinforcing bars] [Galvanized welded wire trusses] [Galvanized hent wire connectors] [Cylindrical metal sleeve anchors] manufactured to connect wythes of precast concrete panels. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 1. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. 2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast-fiJrllace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at precast structural concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 116 when tested according to A~TM C 1218/C 1218M. D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal- weight concrete with th{: following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 116. F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 116. G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Concrete Mix Adjustments: Concrete mix design adjustments may be proposed if characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Cast-in Anchors, InsertH, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 6 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. 1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding." B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing precast structural concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessones m precast structural concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings. D. Cast-in openings larger than 10 inches (250 mm) in any dimension. Do not drill or cut openings or prestressing strand without Architect's approval. E. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 116 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. F. Reinforce precast structural concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. G. Prestress tendons for precast structural concrete units by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. Comply with PCI MNL 116. H. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 116 and in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. 1. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 116. K. Comply with ACI 306.1 procedures for cold-weather concrete placement. L. Comply with PCI MNL 116 procedures for hot-weather concrete placement. M. Identify pickup points of precast structural concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each precast structural concrete unit on a surface that will not show in fmished structure. N. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 116, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of fmal product. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410-7 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) O. Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 116 and meet Architect's approval. 2.10 CASTING INSULATED WALL PANELS A. Cast and screed wythe supported by mold. B. Place insulation boards abutting edges and ends of adjacent boards. Insert wythe connectors through insulation, and consolidate concrete around connectors according to connector manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cast and screed top wythe to meet required finish. 2.11 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate precast structural concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and comers precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 116 product dimension tolerances. 2.12 COMMERCIAL FINISHES A. Commercial Grade: R,emove fIns and large protrusions and fill large holes. Rub or grind ragged edges. Faces must have true, well-defmed surfaces. Air holes, water marks, and color variations are permitted. Limit formjoint offsets to 3/16 inch (5 mm). B. Standard Grade: Nomtal plant-run fmish produced in molds that impart a smooth fmish to concrete. Surface hole:; smaller than 1/2 inch (13 mm) caused by air bubbles, normal color variations, form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls are permitted. Fill air holes greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in (1300 sq. mm). Major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects are not permitted. Limit joint offsets to 1/8 inch (3 nun). C. Grade B Finish: Fill air pockets and holes larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter with sand- cement paste matching Golor of adjacent surfaces. Fill air holes greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) in width that occur more than once per 2 sq. in. (1300 sq. mm). Grind smooth form offsets or fIns larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repair surface blemishes due to holes or dents in molds. Discoloration at formjoints is permitted. D. Grade A Finish: Fill surface blemishes with the exception of air holes 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width or smaller, and form marks where the surface deviation is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Float apply a neat cement-paste coating to exposed surfaces. Rub dried paste coat with burlap to remove loose particltes. Discoloration at form joints is permitted. Grind smooth all form joints. E. Screed or float finish unformed surfaces. Strike off and consolidate concrete with vibrating screeds to a uniform finish. Hand screed at projections. Normal color variations, minor PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 8 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) 2.13 indentations, minor chips, and spalls are permitted. Major imperfections, honeycombing, or defects are not permitted. F. Smooth, steel trowel fmish unformed surfaces. Consolidate concrete, bring to proper level with straightedge, float, and trowel to a smooth, uniform fmish. G. Apply roughened surface fmish according to ACI 318 (AeI 318M) to precast concrete units that will receive concrete topping after installation. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect precast structural concrete according to PCI MNL 116 requirements. B. Defective Units: Discard and replace precast structural concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including strength, manufacturing tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spall ed, or cracked units may be repaired, subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not match approved samples, sample panels, and mockups. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting precast structural concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. B. Erect precast structural concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary structural framing, supports, and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment of units until permanent connection. I. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 2. Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed. 3. For hollow-core slab voids used as electrical raceways or mechanical ducts, align voids between units and tape butt joint at end of slabs. C. Connect precast structural concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed. D. Field cutting of precast units is not permitted without approval ofthe Architect. E. Fasteners: Do not use drilled or powder-actuated fasteners for attaching accessory items to precast, prestressed concrete units. F. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/Dl.IM and AWS Dl.4 for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 9 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) G. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment. H. Grouting: Grout connections and joints and open spaces at keyways, connections, and joints where required or indic:ated on Shop Drawings. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaees with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. 3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect precast structural concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PC I MNL 135. B. Minimize variations between adjacent slab members by jacking, loading, or other method recommended by fabricator and approved by Architect. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY C01\TROL A. Special Inspections: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Erection of preca8t structural concrete members. 2. <Insert special inspections>. B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Field welds will be visually inspected and nondestructive tested according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-stnmgth bolted connections will be subject to inspections. D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. E. Repair or remove and nplace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirem(mts. F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to deter1nine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Repair precast structural concrete units if permitted by Architect. 1. Repairs may be permitted if structural adequacy, serviceability, durability, and appearance of units has not been impaired. B. Mix patching material~; and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTUR<\L CONCRETE 03410 - 10 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/05 (R 05/06) original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 teet (6 m). C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop pnmer. E. Remove and replace damaged precast structural concrete units that cannot be repaired or when repairs do not comply with requirements as determined by Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofmg, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. B. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's written recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete fmishes or damage adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 03410 PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 03410 - 11 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) SECTION 03450 - ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Architectural precast concrete cladding[ and load-hearing] units. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color, finish and texture, preapproved by Architect. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated: I. Loads: As indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water- absorption tests. D. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface fmish. Indicate details at building comers. 1. Comprehensive engineering analysis [signed and sealed] [certified] by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. Show governing panel types, connections, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Indicate ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) location, type, magnitude, and direction of loads imposed on the building structural frame from architectural precast concrete. E. Samples: For each type of fmish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating fun range of fmish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm). F. Welding certificates. G. Material test reports: For aggregates. H. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers: 1. Field quality-control test[ and special inspection] reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A fIrm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 1. Participates in PCI's plant certification program[ at time of bidding] and is designated a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category Al - Architectural Cladding and Load Bearing Dnits[ or partici]~ates in APA's "Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" and is designated aD APA-certified plant]. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI De:~ign Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated. C. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality- control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." D. Welding: Qualify pro;;edures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS Dl.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Stee1." E. Calculated Fire-Test-Re:;;ponse Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural precast concrete units whose fm~ resistance has been calculated according to [ACI 216.1/TMS 0216.1, "Standard Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemhlies,"] [pel MNL 124, "Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete,"] and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Sample Panels: After :;;ample approval and before fabricating architectural precast concrete units, produce a minimum of [2] <Insert numher> sample panels approximately [16 sq. ft. (1.5 sq. m)] <Insert size> in area for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, fInishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [60] <Insert numher> percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from [as-drawn] [galvanized] steel wire into flat sheets. E. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. F. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117. G. Prestressing Strand: ASTMA416/A416M, Grade 270 (Grade 1860), uncoated, 7-wire, low- relaxation strand. 1. Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhinitor passing ASTM D 1743 and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing. Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies. 2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type ill, gray, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For surfaces exposed to view in fmished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type, brand, and mill source. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed fmish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. 1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected fmish sample. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 3 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) a. Gradation: [Uniformly graded] [Gap graded] [To match design reference sample] . 2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect. D. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading. E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium cWoride, or more than 0.15 percent cWoride ions or other salts by weight of admixture. 2.3 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/ A 36M. B. Carbon-Steel Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISII018 through AISI1020, cold fmished, AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3. C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/ A 283M. D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M. E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30 (Grade 415-205). F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M. G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65 (Grade 450). 1. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496 or ASTM A 706/ A 706M. J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and flat, unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844. K. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M). L. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items[, steel in exterior walls,] and items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by [hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/ A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M] [electrodeposition according to ASTM B 633, SC 3, Types I and 2]. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 4 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC- Paint 20. M. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of nongalvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply [lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhihitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79] [SSPC-Paint 25] according to SSPC-P A 1. 2.4 GROUT MATERIALS A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time. C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of type, grade, and class to suit requirements. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCIMNL 117. F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 5 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement. 1. Weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to AWS D1.11D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding." B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction. C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as indicated on the Contract Drawings. D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. F. Prestress tendons for architectural precast concrete units by either pretensioning or post- tensioning methods. Comply with pel MNL 117. G. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. H. Place face mixture to a lninimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch (25 mm) or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified. 1. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. 1. Place backup conGrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete. J. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surface:~. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. 1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 6 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) K. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement. L. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in fmished structure. M. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of fInal product. N. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval. 2.7 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and comers precise and true so each fmished panel complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items. 2.8 FINISHES A. Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Comers, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved [design reference sample] [sample panels] and as follows: 1. Design Reference Sample: <Insert description and identify fahricator and code numher of sample.> 2. PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate numbers indicated. 3. As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs. 4. Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by form liners or inserts to provide surfaces free of pockets, streaks, and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture. 5. Bushhammer Finish: Use power or hand tools to remove matrix and fracture coarse aggregates. 6. Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Use chemical retarding agents applied to concrete forms and washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces after form removal. 7. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. 8. Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect hardware, connections, and insulation from acid attach. 9. Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and rubbing procedures. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 7 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) 10. Polished Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fme grit, followed by filling and rubbing procedures. 11. Sand-Embedment Finish: Use selected stones placed in a sand bed in bottom of mold, with sand removed after curing. B. Finish exposed [top] [bottom] [and hack] surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface fmish. C. Finish exposed [top] [bottom] [and hack] surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by smooth, steel-trowel fInish. D. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units by float fmish. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in PrecastlPrestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." B. Owner will employ an independent testing agency to evaluate architectural precast concrete fabricator's quality-control and testing methods. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install clips, hangers, b~g pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials. B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected. 1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide for uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch (19 mm). C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connec:ting and grouting are completed. D. Welding: Comply with applicable AWS Dl.l/Dl.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 8 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) F. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to fmish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects fmishes or hardens. G. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix 1. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and prepare reports: 1. Erection of precast concrete members. 2. <Insert special inspections.> B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. C. Field welds will be subject to visual inspections and nondestructive testing according to ASTM E 165 or ASTM E 709. High-strength bolted connections will be subject to inspections. D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.3 REPAIRS A. Repair damaged architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements. B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet (6 m). C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop pnmer. E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 9 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05/06) 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view. B. Clean mortar, plaster, frreproofmg, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushe~ and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials. END OF SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 10 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/03 SECTION 03521 - LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast-in-place [perlite aggregate] [vermiculite aggregate] [cellular]-type lightweight insulating concrete for [roof decks] <Insert location>. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include mixing and application instructions for each type of lightweight insulating concrete. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details showing roof slopes, lightweight insulating concrete thicknesses, embedded insulation board, roof penetrations, roof perimeter terminations and curbs, control and expansion joints, and roof drains. C. Design mixtures. D. Qualification data. E. Material Test Reports: For lightweight aggregates. F. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A fIrm that IS approved by lightweight insulating concrete manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where lightweight insulating concrete is part of a fIre- resistance-rated roof-deck assembly, provide lightweight insulating concrete identical to that used in assemblies tested for fIre resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS's "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete unless ambient temperature is [40 deg F (4.4 deg q] [32 deg F (0 deg q] and rising. LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 03521 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/03 B. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete during rain or snow or on surfaces covered with standing water, snow, or ice. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. MATERIALS Cementitious Material: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II] [I/II] [III].[ Supplement with fly ash, ASTM C (tI8, Class C or F.] Mineral Aggregate: ASTM C 332, Group I, [vermiculite] [perlite]. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. Water: Clean, potable. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Joint Filler: ASTM C 612, Class 2, glass-fiber type; compressing to one-half thickness under a load of 25 psi (172 kPa). Steel Wire Mesh: Cold-drawn steel wire, galvanized, 0.041-inch (1.04-mm) diameter, woven into 2-inch (50-mm) hexagonal mesh, and reinforced with a longitudinal 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm- ) diameter wire spaced 3 inches (75 mm) apart. H. Galvanized Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 mm), WO.5 by WO.5, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets. 1. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Board: ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90-lb/cu. ft. (14A-kg/cu. m) minimum density. 1. Provide units with keying slots of approximately 3 percent of board's gross surface area. 2.2 AGGREGATE LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE A. Produce lightweight irumlating concrete using the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix. 1. Do not exceed malXimum air content recommended by aggregate manufacturer. B. Perlite Aggregate Mix: Lightweight insulating concrete produced from cementitious materials, water, air-entraining admixture, and perlite mineral aggregates with the following physical properties: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 03521 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/03 a. Airlite Processing Corporation of Florida. b. Carolina Perlite Company. c. Harborlite Corporation. d. Redco II. e. Silbrico Corporation. f. Sun Gro Horticulture. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. As-Cast Unit Weight: 38 to 44 Ib/cu. ft. (610 to 705 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M. 4. Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 24 to 30 Ib/cu. ft. (385 to 480 kg/cu. 111), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 125 psi (860 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 6. Cement-to-Aggregate Ratio, by Volume: [1:6] <Insert ratio>. c. Vermiculite Aggregate Mix: Lightweight insulating concrete produced from cementitious materials, water, air-entraining admixture, and vermiculite mineral aggregates with the following physical properties: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Mandoval Vermiculite Products Inc. b. Palmetto Vermiculite Company. c. Siplast. d. Sun Gro Horticulture. e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. As-Cast Unit Weight: 45 to 49 Ib/cu. ft. (720 to 785 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M. 4. Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 23 to 26 Ib/cu. ft. (370 to 416 kg/cu. m), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 140 psi (965 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 6. Cement-to-Aggregate Ratio, by Volume: [1:6] <Insert ratio>. 2.3 CELLULAR LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE A. Produce cellular lightweight insulating concrete with the following IDllllmum physical properties using cementitious materials, air-producing liquid-foaming agents, and the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 03521 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/03 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Celcore Inc:orporated. b. Elastizell Corporation of America. c. Lite-Crete Inc. d. Sip last. e. <Insert m~mufacturer's name.> 3. As-Cast Unit Weight: 34 to 42 Ib/cu. ft. (545 to 673 kg/cu. m) at point of placement, when tested according to ASTM C 138/C 138M. 4. Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 26 to 32 1b/cu. ft. (416 to 513 kg/cu. m), when tested according to ASTM C 495. 5. Compressive Str'~ngth: Minimum 190 psi (1310 kPa), when tested according to ASTM C 495. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Control Joints: Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with vertical surfaces, including curb:~, walls, and vents, for full depth of lightweight insulating concrete. Fill control joints with joint filler. 1. Provide l-inch- (25-mm-) wide control joints for roof dimensions up to 100 feet (30 m) in length; l-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide control joints for roof dimensions exceeding 100 feet (30 m). B. Wire Mesh: Place steel wire mesh with longest dimension perpendicular to steel deck ribs. Cut mesh to fit around roof openings and projections. Terminate mesh at control joints. Lap sides and ends of mesh at least 6 inches (150 mm). C. Welded Wire Reinforcmlent: Place steel welded wire reinforcement with longest dimension perpendicular to steel deck ribs. Cut reinforcement to fit around roof openings and projections. Terminate reinforcement at control joints. Lap sides and ends of reinforcement at least 6 inches (150 mm). 3.2 MIXING AND PLACING A. Mix and place lightweight insulating concrete according to manufacturer's written instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mixture and loss of air content. B. Install insulation boardl according to lightweight insulating concrete manufacturer's written instructions. Place insulation board in wet, lightweight insulating concrete slurry poured a minimum of 1/8 inch (3 mm) over the structural substrate. Ensure full contact of insulation board with slurry. Stagger joints and tightly butt insulation boards. LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 03521 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/03 1. Install insulation board in a stair-step configuration with a maximum step-down of 1 inch (25 mm). C. Deposit and screed lightweight insulating concrete in a continuous operation until an entire panel or section of roof area is completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated. D. Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface in condition to receive subsequent roofmg system. E. Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than three days according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. If ambient temperature falls below 32 deg F (0 deg C), protect lightweight insulating concrete from freezing and maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after placement. END OF SECTION 03521 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 03521 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 SECTION 03532 - CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Emery-aggregate concrete floor topping. 2. Iron-aggregate concrete floor topping. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product test reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Emery-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Emery A-I Premix. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Emery Tuff Top. c. Emeri-Crete, Inc.; Emeri-Crete. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Emerytop 400. e. Metalcrete Industries; Met-Top E. f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Emeri-Crete SH. g. <Insert manufacturer's name; product Dame or designation.> 2. Iron-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Irontop. b. Burke by Edeco; Iron Topping. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Conplate Floor Topping. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Super Euco-Top. e. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. ofChemRex; Mastertop Anvil-Top 300. f. Metalcrete Industries; Metalcrete. g. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 2.2 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPINGS 2.3 A. B. C. D. E. A. Emery-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of graded, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide, not less than 24 percent ferric oxide, and not more than 8 percent silica; portland cement or blended hydraulic cement; plastidzers; and other admixtures to which only water needs to be added at Project site. 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): ASTM C 109/C 109M. [7000 psi (48 MPa)] <Insert strength>; B. Iron-Aggregate Concret{: Floor Topping: Factory-prepared and dry-packaged mixture of graded iron aggregate, portland cement, plasticizers, and other admixtures to which only water needs to be added at Project site. 1. Compressive Stn':ngth (28 Days): [10,000 psi (69 MPa)] <Insert strength>; ASTM C 109/C 109M. CURING MATERIALS Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth. Moisture-Retaining Cov,~: ASTM C 171. Water: Potable. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 25 percent solids content, minimum. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, [epoxy resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80] [aromatic polyurea with a Type A Shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95] per ASTM D 2240. B. Joint-Filler Strips: [ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiher] [or] [ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork]. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. D. Sand: ASTM C 404, fIne aggregate passing No. 16 (1.18-nnn) sieve. E. Water: Potable. F. Acrylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 G. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements. 2.5 MIXING A. Bonding Slurry: Mix portland cement with water to a thick paint consistency. B. Bonding Slurry: Mix 1 part portland cement and [1-1/2] [2] [2-1/2] parts sand with water[ and an acrylic-honding agent according to manufacturer's written instructions] to a thick paint consistency. C. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and water in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer or truck mixer according to manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Existing Concrete: Remove existing surface treatments and deteriorated and unsound concrete. Mechanically abrade base slabs to produce a heavily scarified surface profile with an amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm.) 1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks, and cavities in base slabs. 2. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) and fill with semirigid joint filler. B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical surfaces. 3.2 FLOOR TOPPING APPLICATION A. Start floor topping application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. B. Monolithic Floor Topping: After textured-float finish is applied to fresh concrete of base slabs specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," place concrete floor topping while concrete is still plastic. C. Deferred Floor Topping: Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bonding slurry into dampened concrete to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm), without puddling. Place floor topping while slurry is still tacky. D. Existing Concrete: Apply epoxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's written instructions, and scrub into dry base slabs to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1.6 to 3 mm), without puddling. Place floor topping while adhesive is still tacky. E. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer, tamping and consolidating to achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold joints or seams to develop within pour strip. CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 2. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated. 3. Begin initial floating using bull floats to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane free of humps or hollows. F. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as soon as concrete floor topping can support equipment and operator. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until concrete floor topping surface has a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply fIrst trowel fmish and consolidate concrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing blisters to develop. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is smooth and uniform in texture. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between surface and an unleveled freestanding lO-foot- (3-m-) long straightedge, resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the 8urface, does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). G. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete floor topping, <l:t locations indicated or as approved by Architect. H. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete floor topping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before random contraction cracks develop. 1. Form joints in <:oncrete floor topping over contraction joints in base slabs, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth equal to topping thickness and not less than one-fourth of base-slab thickness. 3. Construct contraetion joints for a depth equal to one-half of concrete floor topping thickness, but not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep. 4. Prepare and deem contraction joints and install semirigid joint filler, according to manufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured. 3.3 PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floor topping from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete floor topping surfaces in hot, dry, or windy conditions before and during fmishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions aft{:r placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying floor topping, but before float fmishing. C. Begin curing immediately after fmishing concrete floor topping. Cure by one or a combination of the following metb.ods, according to concrete floor topping manufacturer's written instructions: CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with [water] [continuous water-fog spray] [or] [ahsorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover topping surfaces and edges with 12-ineh (300-mm) lap over adjacent ahsorptive covers]. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete floor topping areas, including areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate. END OF SECTION 03532 CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING 03532 - 5 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 SECTION 03930 - CONCRETE REHABILITATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Removal of deteriorated concrete and reinforcement and subsequent replacement and patching. 2. Floor joint repair. 3. Epoxy crack injection. 4. Corrosion-inhibiting treatment. 5. Polymer sealers. B. See Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for clear penetrating and film-forming water repellents applied to concrete. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. Unit prices include the cost of preparing existing construction to receive the work indicated[ and costs offield quality-control testing required hy the Work for which the unit price applies]. B. Concrete Removal and Replacement or Patching: Work will be paid for by the cubic foot (cubic meter) computed on the basis of rectangular solid shapes approximating the actual shape of concrete removed and replaced with average depths, widths, and lengths, measured to the nearest inch (centimeter). 1. Reinforcing bar replacement will be paid for separately by the pound (kilogram) of replacement steel with welded and mechanical splices paid for by the unit. C. Epoxy Crack Injection: Work will be paid for by the linear foot (linear meter) of crack injected. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For [installers] [and] [testing agency]. 1. For products required to be installed by workers approved by product manufacturers, include letters of acceptance by product manufacturers certifying that installers are approved to apply their products. C. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated, signed by manufacturers. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for [honding agents] [patching mortars] [and] [epoxy adhesives]. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Installer Qualifications: Installer that employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to apply [corrosion-inhihiting treatments] [concrete patching and rehuilding materials] [epoxy crack injection materials] [and] [potymer sealers]. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer that employs factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection. C. Mockups: Build mockups for [concrete removal and patching] [floor joint repair] [epoxy crack injection] [and] [polymer sealers] to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BONDING AGENTS A Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: Product that consists of water-insensitive epoxy adhesive, portland cement, and water-based solution of corrosion- inhibiting chemicals that forms a protective film on steel reinforcement. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Corr-Bond. b. Kaufman Products, Inc; Surepoxy HM EPL. c. Sika Corporation; Armatec 110 EpoCem. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Sonoprep. e. Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Bonding and Anti-Corrosion Agent. f. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Duralprep AC. g. <Insert mnnufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type [II] [Y]. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Poly-Epoxy Bonding #100. b. ChemCo Systems; CCS Bonder Liquid, [LWL] [or] [SWL]. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; [Resi-Bond (J-58)] [Sure-Anchor Epoxy (J-50),] [or] [Sure-Inject (J-56)]. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); [Euco #352 Epoxy System] [Euco #452 Epoxy System] [ or] [Eueo #620 Epoxy System]. e. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SurePoxy HM EPL. f. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Concresive Liquid LPL. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; [Sealtight Rezi-Weld 1000] [Sealtight Rezi-Weld Gel Paste] [Sealtight Rezi-Weld Gel Paste State] [or] [Sealtight Rezi-Weld LV]. h. Sika Corporation; [Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel] [Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod] [Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL] [Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV] [or] [Sikadur 35, Hi- Mod LV LPL]. 1. Sonneborn, Div. ofChemRex; [Epogel] [or] [Epogrip]. J. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Duralbond. k. ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; Epoxy Adhesive 24LPL. I. Unitex; [Pro-Poxy 204] [or] [Slow Set Bonding Agent]. m. US MIX Products Company; [US Spec Maxi - Bond 2500] [or] [US Spec Slow Bond 6500]. n. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Thin Film Open Time: Not less than [two] [six] [24] hours. C. Latex Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type [I] [II] [II at exterior locations and where indicated, Type I at other locations]. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Latex Bonding Agent, Type I: 1) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Weld. 2) Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sureweld. 3) Meadows, W. R. Inc.; Intralok. 4) Sika Corporation; Sikalatex. 5) US MIX Products Company; US Spec Bondcoat. 6) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> b. Latex Bonding Agent, Type II: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Ad Bond (J-40). 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Flex-Con. 3) Kaufman Products, Inc.; Surebond. 4) Meadows, W. R. Inc.; Sealtight Acry-Lok. 5) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Acrylic Additive. 6) US MIX Products Company; US Spec Acrylcoat. 7) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.2 PATCHING MORTAR A. Patching Mortar, General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, use any of the products specified in this Article. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 3 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 2. Overhead Patching Mortar: For overhead repairs, use patching mortar recommended by manufacturer for overhead use and as specified in this Article. 3. Coarse Aggregate for Adding to Patching Mortar: Washed aggregate complying with ASTM C 33, Size No.8, Class 5S. Add only as permitted by patching mortar manufacturer. B. Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix complying with ASTM C 928. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cementitious Patching Mortar: 1) Kaujinan Products, Inc.; Hicap. 2) MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; [Emaco S66 CI] [Emaco S77 CI] [or] [Emaco S88 CI]. 3) Sika Corporation; [Sikarepair 223] [or] [Sikarepair SHB]. 4) SOllilebom, Div. ofChemRex; Deep Pour Mortar. 5) Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Full-Depth Repair Mortar. 6) ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; LA Repair Mortar. 7) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> b. Cementitious Patching Mortar, Rapid Setting: 1) CGM, Incorporated; Pro Patching Cement. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation; [Day-Chem Perma-Patch] [Re- Crete 5 Minute] [or] [Re-Crete 20 Minute]. 3) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco-Speed. 4) Fox lndustries, Inc.; FX-928 Rapid Hardening Mortar. 5) Kaufman Products, Inc.; Duracrete. 6) Meadows, W. R. Inc.; [Seattight Meadow-Patch 5] [Sealtight Meadow- Patch 20] [or] [Sealtight Futura-15]. 7) Sika Corporation; Sikaset Roadway Patch. 8) SOllilebom, Div. of ChemRex; Road Patch. 9) Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; Sto Rapid Repair Mortar. 10) Tamms Industries, Inc.; Speed Crete 2028. 11) ThoRoc, Div. of ChemRex; [10-60 Rapid Mortar] [or] [10-61 Rapid Mortar]. 12) Unitex; Patch Set 928. 13) US MIX Products Company; US Spec Transpatch. 14) Wat:)Qn Bowman Acme Corp., Degussa AG; Wabo Renew 100. 15) <Im:ert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Polymer-Modified, Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix complying with ASTM C 928, that contains a[ non-redispersihle] latex additive as either a dry powder or a separate liquid that is added during mixing. 1. Available Produets: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 4 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 a. AQUAFIN, Inc.; MORTAR-40. b. CGM, Incorporated; [Pro Trowel Mortar.] [Pro Gel Mortar.] [Pro Flowahle Mortar.] [Pro N.B.P.] c. Dayton Superior Corporation; [HD-50] [or] [Thin Resurfacer]. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); [Concrete Coat] [Thin Coat] [or] [Verticoat]. e. Fox Industries, Inc.; [FX-243] [or] [FX-273] Trowel Grade Polymer Repair Mortar. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; [Patchwell] [Patchwell Kit] [Patchwell Kit D] [or] [Patchwell Kit HB]. g. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; [Emaco R320 CI] [or] [Emaco R350 CI]. h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; [Sealtight Meadow-Patch TI] [or] [Sealtight Meadow- Crete FNP]. 1. Sika Corporation; [SikaTop 121 Ptus] [SikaTop 122 Plus] [SikaTop 123 Plus] [or] [SikaTop 126 Plus]. J. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; [Screed] [Sonopatch 100] [Sonopatch 200] [Sonopatch 300]. k. Sto Corp., Concrete Restoration Division; [Sto Flowahle Mortar] [Sto Overhead Mortar] [Sto Thin-Coat Mortar] [or] [Sto Trowel-Grade Mortar]. 1. Tamms Industries, Inc.; [Duraltop Fast Set] [or] [Speed Crete PM]. m. ThorRoc, Div. ofChemRex, Inc.; [HB2 Repair Mortar] [or] [polyset]. n. US MIX Products Company; [US Spec Polypatch FR] [or] [US Spec Thinpatch]. o. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Polymer-Modified, Silica-Fume-Enhanced, Cementitious Patching Mortar: Packaged, dry mix complying with ASTM C 928, that contains silica fume complying with ASTM C 1240 and a [non-redispersihle ]latex additive as either a dry powder or a separate liquid that is added during mixing. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Verticoat Supreme. b. Fox Industries, Inc.; [FX-261 Polymer Repair Mortar] [or] [FX-286]. c. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Emaco S88 CI. d. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; [Sealtight Meadow-Crete 82] [or] [Sealtight Meadow- Crete-GPS]. e. Sika Corporation; Sika Monotop 615. f. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; [Gel Patch] [Sonopateh 200] [or] [Sonopatch 300]. g. US Mix Products Company; US Spec V/O Patch. h. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.3 CONCRETE A. Concrete Materials and Admixtures: Comply with Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]." CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 5 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 B. Steel and Fiber Reinforcement and Reinforcement Accessories: Comply with Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Placf Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]." C. Form-Facing Materials: Comply with Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in- Place Concrete (Limih:d Applications)]." 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Epoxy Joint Filler: 2-Gomponent, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of at least 80 per ASTM D 2240. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Groove & Crack Filler #250. b. ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, [Control Joint] [or] [Control Joint - DB]. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco [700] [ or] [800]. d. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Surepoxy Flexijoint. e. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. ofChemRex; Masterfi1l300i. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Rezi-Weld Flex. g. Metzger/McGuire; [MM-80] [or] [Edge-Pro XL]. h. Sika Corporation; [Sikadur 51 NS] [ or] [Sikadur 51 SL]. 1. Unitex; [pI'o-Flex] [or] [pro-Flex Gel]. J. US Mix Products Company; US Spec SR 50 - EJF. k. <Insert mnnufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. Polyurea Joint Filler: 2..component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, polyurea resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of at least 80 per ASTM D 2240. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ASTC Polymers; Penetron 3003. b. ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, Polyurea [Control Joint] [or] [SWL]. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Joint Saver II. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Qwilgoint 200. e. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. ofChemRex; Masterfi1l400 CT. f. Metzger/McGuire; [Spal-Pro RS 88] [or] [Spal-Pro 2000]. g. Sonneborn" Div. ofChemRex; Sonolastic TF-100. h. <Insert mnnufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Epoxy Crack Injection Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type [I,] [IV,] [Grade I,] [except for gel time,] [solvent free]. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 6 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 a. ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, [Standard] [Standard - High Amhient Temperature] [or] [Low Viscosity]. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; [Resi-Bond (J-58)] [Sure-Anchor Epoxy (J-50)] [or] [Sure-Inject (J-56)]. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); [Euco #352 Epoxy System] [Eueo #452 Epoxy System] [Euco #620 Epoxy System] [Euco #452 LV] [Euco #620 LV] [or] [Eucopoxy Injection Resin]. d. Kaufman Products, Inc.; [Surepoxy HML V] [Surepoxy HML V-Class B] [ or] [Surepoxy HM-SL V]. e. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. ofChemRex; [Concresive Standard LVI] [or] [SCB Concresive 1380]. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Rezi-Weld LV. g. Sika Corporation; [Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV] [Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV LPL] [Sikadur 52] [or] [Sikadur Injection Gel]. h. Sonneborn, Div. ofChemRex; [Epofil] [or] [Epofil SLV]. 1. Tamms Industries, Inc.; DuraIcrete LV. J. Thermal-Chem; Crack Injection, Product [2] [205] [or] [212]. k. ThorRoc, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; [LV300 Injection Resin] [or] [ULV140 Injection Resin]. 1. Unitex; [pro-Poxy 50 SuperLV] [Pro-Poxy 100 LV] [or] [Slow Set Injection Resin]. m. US MIX Products Company; US Spec Maxi - Bond 500LV. n. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Capping Adhesive: Product manufactured for use with crack injection adhesive by same manufacturer. E. Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatment Materials: Water-based solution of alkaline corrosion- inhibiting chemicals that penetrates concrete by diffusion and forms a protective film on steel reinforcement. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cortec Corporation; [MCI2005] [or] [MCI2020]. b. Degussa Corporation; Protectosil CIT. c. Fox industries, Inc.; FX-361 Migratory Corrosion Inhibitor. d. Sika Corporation; Sika Ferrogard 903. e. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Corrosion Inhibitor. f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> F. Polymer Sealer: Low-viscosity [epoxy] [or] [high-molecular-weight methacrylate] penetrating sealer recommended by manufacturer for application to exterior concrete traffic surfaces. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Epoxy Sealers: CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 7 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1) ChemCo Systems; CCS Coating, Epoxy Healer Sealer. 2) Eucbd Chemical Company (The); Euco #512 Epoxy Sealer. 3) Fox Tndustries, Inc.; FX-452 Epoxy Penetrating Sealer. 4) Kaufinan Products, Inc.; SurePoxy Penetrating Sealer. 5) MBT Protection and Repair, Div. ofChemRex; Masterseal GP. 6) Thermal-Chern; Hairline Crack Sealer, Product 207. 7) Unitex; Pro-Seal HS. 8) US MIX Products Company; US Spec Eposeal L VS. 9) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> b. High-Mole';ular-Weight Methacrylate Sealers: 1) Meadows, W. R. Inc.; Sealtight Vocomp-25. 2) Sika Corporation; Sikapronto 19. 3) Transpo Industries, Inc.; Sealate T70. 4) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.5 MIXES A. Mix products, in clean containers, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Add clean silica sand and coarse aggregates to products only as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Do not add water, thinners, or additives unless recommended by manufacturer. 3. When practical, use manufacturer's premeasured packages to ensure that materials are mixed in proper proportions. When premeasured packages are not used, measure ingredients using graduated measuring containers; do not estimate quantities or use shovel or trowel as unit of measure. 4. Do not mix more materials than can be used within recommended open time. Discard materials that have begun to set. B. Dry-Pack Mortar: Mix with just enough liquid to form damp cohesive mixture that can be squeezed by hand into a ball but is not plastic. C. Concrete: Comply with Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates when areas of deteriorated or delaminated concrete and deteriorated reinforcing bars will be located. B. Locate areas of deteriorated or delaminated concrete using hammer or chain drag sounding and mark boundaries. Mark areas for removal by simplifying and squaring off boundaries[ as directed hy Architect]. At columns and walls make boundaries level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 8 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 C. Locate at least three reinforcing bars using a pachometer, and drill test holes to determine depth of cover. Calibrate pachometer, using depth of cover measurements, and verify depth of cover in removal areas using pachometer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect people, motor vehicles, equipment, surrounding construction, Project site, plants, and surrounding buildings from injury resulting from concrete rehabilitation work. 1. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and dispose of by legal means off Owner's property. 2. Dispose of runoff from wet operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. B. Shoring: Install temporary supports before beginning concrete removal. C. Concrete Removal: 1. Saw-cut perimeter of areas indicated for removal to a depth of at least [1/2 inch (13 mm)] <Insert depth>. Make cuts perpendicular to concrete surfaces and no deeper than cover on reinforcement. 2. Remove deteriorated and delaminated concrete by breaking up and dislodging from reinforcement. 3. Remove additional concrete, if necessary, to provide a depth of removal of at least [1/2 inch (13 mm)] <Insert depth> over entire removal area. 4. Where half or more of the perimeter of reinforcing bar is exposed, bond between reinforcing bar and surrounding concrete is broken, or reinforcing bar is corroded, remove concrete from entire perimeter of bar and to provide at least a 3/4-inch (l9-nm1) clearance around bar. 5. Test areas where concrete has been removed by tapping with hammer, and remove additional concrete until unsound and disbonded concrete is completely removed. 6. Provide fractured aggregate surfaces with a profile of at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) that are approximately perpendicular or parallel to original concrete surfaces. At columns and walls, make top and bottom surfaces level, unless otherwise directed. 7. Thoroughly clean removal areas of loose concrete, dust, and debris. D. Reinforcing Bar Preparation: Remove loose and flaking rust from reinforcing bars by [high- pressure water cleaning] [ahrasive hlast cleaning] [needle scaling] [or] [wire hrushing] until only tightly bonded light rust remains. 1. Where section loss of reinforcing bar is more than 25 percent, or 20 percent in 2 or more adjacent bars, cut bars and remove and replacer as directed hy Architect]. Remove additional concrete as necessary to provide at least 314-inch (l9-mm) clearance at existing and replacement bars. Splice replacement bars to existing bars according to ACI 318 (ACI 318M), by lapping, welding, or using mechanical couplings. E. Preparation of Floor Joints for Repair: Saw-cut joints full width to edges and depth of spalls, but not less than [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [I inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] <Insert depth> deep. Clean out debris and loose concrete; vacuum or blow clear with compressed air. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 9 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 F. Surface Preparation for Corrosion-Inhibiting Treatment: Clean concrete by [low-pressure water cleaning] [deterl~ent scruhhing] [ or] [sand hlasting] to remove dirt, oils, films, and other materials detrimental to treatment application. Allow surface to dry before applying corrosion-inhibiting treatment. G. Surface Preparation for Sealers: Clean concrete by [shot hlasting] [tow-pressure water cleaning] [ or] [detergent scruhhing] to remove dirt, oils, films, and other materials detrimental to sealer application. H. Surface Preparation for Sealers: Acid etch surface of concrete to produce a surface profile matching CSP 1 per ICRI03732.[ Prepare surface for acid etching hy detergent scruhhing to remove oils and film:~ that may prevent acid penetration.] I. Remove excess acid solution, reaction products, and debris by squeegeemg or vacuuming. 2. Scrub surface with an alkaline detergent, rinse, and squeegee or vacuum. 3. Check acidity of surface with pH test paper and continue rinsing until pH is acceptable. 4. When pH is acceptable and surface is clean, vacuum dry. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Comply with :manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for application of products, including surface preparation. B. Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: Apply to reinforcing bars [and concrete ]by stiff brush or hopper spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply to reinforcing bars in two coats, allowing first coat to dry two to three hours before applying second coat. Allow to dry before placing patching mortar or concrete. C. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Apply to reinforcing bars[ and concrete] by brush, roller, or spray according to manufactw'er's written instructions, leaving no pinholes or other uncoated areas. [Apply to reinforcing bars in at least two coats, allowing f'Irst coat to dry before applying second coat. ]Apply patching mortar or concrete while epoxy is still tacky. If epoxy dries, recoat before placing patching mortar or concrete. D. Latex Bonding Agent, Type II: Mix with portland cement and scrub into concrete surface according to manufacturer's written instructions. Apply patching mortar or concrete while bonding agent is still wet. If bonding agent dries, recoat before placing patching mortar or concrete. E. Latex Bonding Agent, Type I: Apply to concrete by brush roller or spray. Allow to dry before placing patching mortar or concrete. F. Patching Mortar: DolesH otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply as follows: 1. Wet substrate thoroughly and then remove standing water. Scrub a slurry of neat patching mortar[ .nixed with latex honding agent] into substrate, filling pores and voids. 2. Place patching mortar by troweling toward edges of patch to force intimate contact with edge surfaces. For large patches, fill edges first and then work toward center, always CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 10 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 troweling toward edges of patch. At fully exposed reinforcing bars, force patching mortar to fill space behind bars by compacting with trowel from sides of bars. 3. For vertical patching, place material in lifts of not more than [I inch (25 mm)] [1-1I2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (75 mm)] nor less than [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [114 inch (6 mm)]. Do not feather edge. 4. For overhead patching, place material in lifts of not more than [I inch (25 mm)] [1-1I2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] nor less than [118 inch (3 mm)] [114 inch (6 mm)]. Do not feather edge. 5. After each lift is placed, consolidate material and screed surface. 6. Where multiple lifts are used, score surface of lifts to provide a rough surface for application of subsequent lifts. Allow each lift to reach final set before placing subsequent lifts. 7. Allow surfaces of lifts that are to remain exposed to become fIrm and then fmish to a [smooth] [rough] surface with a [wood or sponge float] [hroom or hurlap drag]. 8. Wet-cure cementitious patching materials, including polymer-modified, cementitious patching materials, for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover. G. Dry-Pack Mortar: Use for deep cavities[ and where indicated]. Unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, apply as follows: 1. Provide forms where necessary to confine patch to required shape. 2. Wet substrate and forms thoroughly and then remove standing water. 3. Place dry-pack mortar into cavity by hand, and compact into place with a hardwood drive stick and mallet or hammer. Do not place more material at a time than can be properly compacted. Continue placing and compacting until patch is approximately level with surrounding surface. 4. After cavity is fIlled and patch is compacted, trowel surface to match prof11e and fmish of surrounding concrete. A thin coat of patching mortar may be troweled into the surface of patch to help obtain required fmish. 5. Wet-cure patch for not less than seven days by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover. H. Concrete: Place according to Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Plaee Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]" and as follows: 1. Apply [epoxy-modified, cementitious honding and anticorrosion agent] [epoxy honding agent] to reinforcement[ and concrete suhstrate]. 2. Apply [latex honding agent] [Type I, latex honding agent] to concrete substrate. 3. Use vibrators to consolidate concrete as it is placed. 4. At unformed surfaces, screed concrete to produce a surface that when fmished with patching mortar will match required prof11e and surrounding concrete. 5. Wet-cure concrete for not less than seven days by leaving forms in place or keeping surfaces continuously wet by water-fog spray or water-saturated absorptive cover. 6. Fill placement cavities with dry-pack mortar and repair voids with patching mortar. Finish to match surrounding concrete. 1. Joint Filler: Install in nonmoving floor joints where indicated. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 11 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1. Install filler to a depth of at least [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [I inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] <Insert depth>. Use fme silica sand no more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep to close base of joint. Do not use sealant backer rods or compressible fIllers below joint filler. 2. Install filler so that when cured, it is flush at top surface of adjacent concrete. If necessary, overfill joint and remove excess when filler has cured. J. Epoxy Crack Injection: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the following: 1. Clean areas to receive capping adhesive of oil, dirt, and other substances that would interfere with bond, and clean cracks with oil-free compressed air or low-pressure water to remove loose particles. 2. Place injection ports as recommended by epoxy manufacturer, spacing no farther apart than thickness of member being injected. Seal injection ports in place with capping adhesive. 3. Seal cracks at exposed surfaces with a ribbon of capping adhesive at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick by 1 inch (25 mm) wider than crack. 4. Inject cracks wid{:r than 0.003 inch (0.075 mm) to a depth of 8 inches (200 lllin) or to a width ofless than 0.003 inch (0.075 mm), whichever is less. 5. Inject epoxy adhesive, beginning at widest part of crack and working toward narrower parts. Inject adhl~sive into ports to refusal, capping adjacent ports when they extrude epoxy. Cap injected ports and inject through adjacent ports until crack is filled. 6. After epoxy adhesive has set, remove injection ports and grind surfaces smooth. K. Corrosion-Inhibiting Tmatment: Apply by brush, roller, or airless spray in two coats at manufacturer's recommmlded application rate. Remove film of excess treatment by high- pressure washing before patching treated concrete[ or applying a sealer or overlay]. 1. Apply to the following: <Insert tocations where treatment is to be applied.> L. Polymer Sealer: Apply by brush, roller, or airless spray at manufacturer's recommended application rate. 1. Apply to traffic-bearing surfaces, including parking areas and walks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owm~r will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to sample materials and perform tests as follows: 1. Patching Mortar, Packaged Mixes: <Insert numher> randomly selected samples tested according to ASllM C 928. 2. Concrete: As specified in Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limitfd Applications)]." 3. Joint Filler: Core drilled samples to verify proper installation. a. Testing Frequency: One sample for each 100 feet (30 m) of joint filled. b. Where sam:ples are taken, fill holes with joint filler. 4. Epoxy Crack Injection: Core drilled samples to verify proper installation. CONCRETE REHABILITATION 03930 - 12 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC ~ SHORT FORM a. Testing Frequency: 1 sample for each 100 feet (30 m) of crack injected. b. Where samples are taken, fill holes with epoxy mortar. END OF SECTION 03930 CONCRETE REHABILITATION 02/04 03930 - 13 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 SECTION 04720 - CAST STONE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.3 A. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cast stone trim. 2. Cast stone steps. 3. Cast stone bollards. 4. Cast stone benches. 5. Cast stone curbing. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include dimensions of individual components. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of fmished faces. Samples: For each color and texture of cast stone required. Colored Mortar Samples: For each mortar color required. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. Material Test Reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. 1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: CAST STONE 04720 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 1. Advanced Cast Stone, Inc. 2. AHI Supply, Inc. 3. American Artstone Co., Inc. 4. Arban Associates, Inc. 5. Architectural Art Stone, Inc. 6. Architectural Cast Stone Corp. 7. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc. 8. Architectural Concrete Company, Inc. 9. Architectural Molded Composites, Inc. 10. Architectural Ornamental Castings, Inc. II. Architectural Ornaments, Inc. 12. Artisan Stone Company, Inc. 13. Cast Stone Systems, Inc. 14. Classic Cast Stone of Dallas, Inc. 15. ConArt, Inc. 16. Continental Cast Stone East; Russell, Inc. 17. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 18. Custom Cast Stone, Inc. 19. Cut Art Castings Co. 20. Dallas Cast Stone Co., Inc. 21. Dura Art Stone. 22. DuraStone. 23. Edwards Cast Stone Company. 24. Fritchman & Associates Cast Stone. 25. Hoyle Stone Products. 26. Kerckhoff, D. C. Co. 27. Miller Precast, Ine. 28. Olde World Cast Stone. 29. Olympian Precast, Inc. 30. Pineapple Grove Designs. 31. Plasticrete Architectural Concrete Products. 32. Precision Development. 33. Siteworks, Inc. 34. Southern Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 35. Steps Plus, Inc. 36. Stonco. 37. Stone Castle Industries, Inc. 38. Stone Legends Div.; C.S.C.S., Inc. 39. Sun Precast Co., Inc. 40. Techcrete Architectural Precast. 41. Thunderstone. 42. Towne House Re!ltorations, Inc. 43. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 CAST STONE UNITS A. Provide cast stone unit~ complying with ASTM C 1364 using the [vihrant dry tamp] [or] [wet-cast] method. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing. CAST STONE 04720 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 2. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1: 12, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 4. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cure units by one of the following methods: 1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F (41 deg C) or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours. 2. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. 3. Cure units to comply with one of the following: a. Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) or above. b. Not less than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or above. c. Not less than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above. d. Not less than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or above. C. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. D. Colors and Textures: [Match Architect's samples] [Match existing units] [As selected hy Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Dowels: [Type 304 stainless steel] [Hot-dip galvanized steel]. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner complying with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" and approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. 2.4 MORTAR A. Comply with requirements m Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for mortar materials and mixes. 1. For setting mortar, use Type [S] [N]. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type [N] [0]. 3. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product[ or setect and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required]. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C 1364. CAST STONE 04720 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SETIING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies. " B. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 2. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 3. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 4. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 5. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. C. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. D. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. G. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.2 SETIING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS A. Set cast stone units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments to secure units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories. B. Fill anchor holes with sealant. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. C. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. D. Keep joints free of mOltar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary spacers from joints after anchors and SUppOltS are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. CAST STONE 04720 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 E. Prepare joints and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 fcct (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 nlm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 118 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm), except due to warpage of units. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 1. Replace units in a manner that shows no evidence of replacement. B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 1. Remove mortar fIns and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." END OF SECTION 04720 CAST STONE 04720 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 SECTION 04902 - STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes maintenance of stone assemblies consisting of stone restoration and cleaning as follows: 1. Repairing stone masonry, including replacing whole units. 2. Repointingjoints. 3. Preliminary cleaning, including removing plant growth. 4. Cleaning exposed stone surfaces. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Low-Pressure Spray: [IOO to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 Lis)] <Insert range of values>. B. Medium-Pressure Spray: [400 to 800 psi (2750 to 5510 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 Lis)] <Insert range of values>. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on stone units as follows: 1. Existing Stone: Test each type of existing stone indicated for replacement, according to ASTM C 170 for compressive strength, wet and dry, perpendicular and parallel to rift; ASTM C 99 for modulus of rupture, wet and dry, perpendicular and parallel to rift; and ASTM C 97 for absorption and bulk specific gravity. Carefully remove [five] <Insert numher> existing stones from locations designated by Architect. Take testing samples from these stones. 2. Existing Mortar: Test according to ASTM C 295, modified as agreed by testing service and Architect for Project requirements, to determine proportional composition of original ingredients, sizes and colors of aggregates, and approximate strength. Use X-ray diffraction, infrared spectroscopy, and differential thermal analysis as necessary to supplement microscopical methods. Carefully remove existing mortar from within joints at [five] <Insert numher> locations designated by [Architect] [or] [testing service]. 3. Temporary Patch: As directed by Architect, provide temporary materials at locations from which existing samples were taken. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - I Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 4. Replacement Stone: Test each proposed type of replacement stone, according to ASTM C 170 for compressive strength, ASTM C 99 for modulus of rupture, and ASTM C 97 for absorption and bulk specific gravity. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Replacement stone units and their jointing, showing relation of existing to new units. 2. Provisions for expansion joints or other sealant joints. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. D. Preconstruction test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Restoration Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced[, preapproved] stone restoration and cleaning firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. Experience installing standard unit masonry or new stone masonry is not sufficient experience for stone restoration work. 1. At Contractor's option, work may be divided between two specialist firms: one for cleaning work and one for repair work. 2. Field Supervision: Restoration specialist fIrms shall maintain experienced full-time supervisors on Proj ect site during times that stone restoration and cleaning work is in progress. 3. Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced in restoration work of types they will bl~ performing. [ When stone units are heing patched, assign at least one worker among those performing patching work who is trained and certified hy manufacturer of patching compound to apply its products.] B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. 1. Stone Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of stone indicated to have repair work performed. If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than 2 adjacent whole units or approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) in least dimension. Erect sample areas in existing walls unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work. Include the following as a minimum: a. Replacement: [Four] <Insert number> stone units replaced. b. Patching: Three small holes at least 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 2. Repointing: Rake out joints in 2 separate areas [, each approximately 36 inches (900 mm) high hy 48 inches (1200 mm) wide] [as indicated] <Insert dimensions> for each type of repointing required and repoint one of the areas. 3. Cleaning: Clean an area [approximately 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m)] [as indicated] <Insert dimension> for each type of stone and surface condition. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STONE MATERIALS A. Stone: Provide natural building stone of variety, physical properties, color, texture, grain, veining, fmish, size, and shape to match existing stone. 1. Physical Properties: a. Compressive Strength: <Insert requirement> per ASTM C 170. b. Modulus of Rupture: <Insert requirement> per ASTM C 99. c. Absorption: <Insert requirement> per ASTM C 97. d. Bulk Specific Gravity: <Insert requirement> per ASTM C 97. 2. For existing stone that exhibits a range of colors, texture, grain, veining, fmishes, sizes, or shapes, provide stone that proportionally matches that range rather than stone that matches an individual color, texture, grain, veining, fmish, size, or shape within that range. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone from the original quarry, which is <Insert quarry name, location, and stone designation>. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type IT, whiter or gray or hoth] where required for color matching of exposed mortar. 1. Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Color: Provide natural sand or ground marble, granite, or other sound stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. 3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 E. Water: Potable. 2.3 MANUFACTURED REPAIR MATERIALS A. Stone Patching Compound: Factory-mixed cementitious product that is custom manufactured for patching stone. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jalm Restoration Mortars. b. Conproco Corporation; [Mimic] [Matrix]. c. Edison Coatings, Inc.; Custom System 45. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2. Use formulation that is vapor- and water permeable (equal to or more than the stone), exhibits low shrinkage, has lower modulus of elasticity than the stone units being repaired, and devdops high bond strength to all types of stone. 3. Formulate patching compound in colors, textures, and grain to match stone being patched. B. Stone-to-Stone Adhesive: [2-part polyester or epoxy-resin stone adhesive with a 15- to 45- minute cure at 70 deg F (21 deg C)] [or] [I-part cementitious stone adhesive], recommended by adhesive manufacturer for type of stone repair indicated, and matching stone color. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the follo~ring] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. Two-Part Polyester or Epoxy-Resin Stone Adhesive: 1) Akelni North America; [Akepox] [platinum] [MS76 Stone and Marhle Adh,esive] . 2) Bom:tone Materials Corporation; Fast Set 41. 3) Edison Coatings, Inc.; Flexi-Weld 520T. 4) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. b. One-Part Cementitious Stone Adhesive: 1) Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; Jalm Restoration Adhesive. 2) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.4 PAINT REMOVERS A. Covered or Skin-Forming Alkaline Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard covered or skin- forming alkaline formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. ABR Products, Inc.; Grip 'N Strip 800 Fast Acting. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 606 Multi-Layer Paint Remover or 606X Extra Thick Multi-Layer Paint Remover with pull-off removal system. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 1 System. d. PROSOCO; [Enviro Klean Safety Peel 1] [or] [Enviro Klean Safety Peel3] with Enviro Klean Overcoat. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard water-rinsable, solvent-type gel formulation for removing paint coatings from masonry. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. ABR Products, Inc.; Super Bio Strip Gel. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; 505 Special Coatings Stripper. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 2. d. Hydroc1ean, Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroc1ean HT -300 Solvent Paint Remover. e. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Strip-All. f. PROSOCO; Sure Klean Fast Acting Stripper. g. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. C. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, water-rinsable solvent-type gel formulation, containing no methanol or methylene chloride, for removing paint coatings from masonry. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. ABR Products, Inc.; Super Bio Strip Gel. b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; [S-301] [S-303] [or] [S-305]. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; [Peel Away 6] [Peet Away 7] [or] [peet Away 21]. d. PROSOCO; [Enviro Klean Safety Peell] [or] [Enviro Klean Safety Peel 3]. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.5 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F (60 to 71 deg C). STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 C. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup (125 mL) of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts (20 L) of hot water for every 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required. D. Job-Mixed Mold, Mildew, and Algae Remover: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups (0.5 L) of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 5 quarts (5 L) of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts (15 L) of hot wat{:r for every 5 gal. (20 L) of solution required. E. Nonacidic Gel Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard gel formulation, with pH between 6 and 9, that contains detergents with chelating agents and is specifically formulated for cleaning masonry surfaces. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the follollring] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Marble Cleaner-Gel. b. PROSOCO; Sure Klean 942 Limestone and Marble Cleaner. c. <Insert mlmufacturer's name; product name or designation>. F. Nonacidic Liquid Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly alkaline liquid cleaner formulated for removing mold, mildew, and other organic soiling from ordinary building materials, including polished stone, brick, aluminum, plastics, and wood. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Diedrich 910PM Polished Marble Cleaner. b. Dominion Restoration Products, Inc.; Bio-Cleanse. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Safe n' Easy Architectural Cleaner/Restorer. d. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Non-Acid Masonry Cleaner. e. PROSOCO; Enviro Klean 2010 All Surface Cleaner. f. <Insert mlllnufacturer's name; product name or designation>. G. Mild Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard mildly acidic cleaner containing no muriatic (hydrochloric), hydrofluoric, or sulfuric acid; or ammonium bifluoride or chlorine bleaches. 1. Products: Subjec:t to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may be incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. ABR Products, Inc.; X-190 Limestone & Concrete Cleaner. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; Envirorestore 100. c. Dominion Restoration Products, Inc.; DR-60 Stone and Masonry Cleaner. d. PROSOCO; Enviro Klean BioWash. e. <Insert mlllllufacturer's name; product name or designation>. H. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard acidic masonry cleaner composed of hydrofluoric acid or ammonium bifluoride: blended with other acids, detergents, wetting agents, and inhibitors. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 6 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, hut are not limited to, the following]: a. ABR Products, Inc.; 801 Heavy Duty Masonry Cleaner. b. Diedrich Technologies Inc.; [Diedrich 101 Masonry Restorer] [or] [Diedrich 10lG Granite, Terra Cotta, and Brick Cleaner]. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; [Safe n' Easy IDtimate Stone and Masonry Cleaner] [or] [Safe n' Easy Heavy Duty Restoration Cleaner]. d. EaCo Chem, Inc.; [GS-Restoration] [or] [HD-Acid] e. Hydroclean, Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean Brick, Granite, Sandstone and Terra Cotta Cleaner (HT-626). f. Price Research, Ltd.; [price Heavy Duty Restoration Cleaner] [or] [Price Restoration Cleaner]. g. PROSOCO; [Enviro Klean Restoration Cleaner] [Sure Klean Restoration Cleaner] [or] [Sure Klean Heavy-Duty Restoration Cleaner]. h. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 1. One-Part Limestone Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard one-part acidic formulation for cleaning limestone. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [availahle products that may he incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. ABR Products, Inc.; X-190 Limestone & Concrete Cleaner. b. Hydroclean, Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.; Hydroclean Limestone and Marble Cleaner and Brightener (RT -907). c. Price Research, Ltd.; Price Limestone Restorer. d. PROSOCO; Sure Klean Limestone Restorer. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Stone Anchors[ and Pins]: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, to match existing anchors in size and type. Fabricate anchors[ and pins] from [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless steel. B. Setting Buttons: Resilient plastic buttons, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of stone units without intruding into required depths of pointing materials. 2.7 MORTAR MIXES A. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 7 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of fmal mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. B. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval. 1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to- cement ratio of 1: 10 by weight. C. Do not use admixtures irl mortar unless otherwise indicated. D. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1. Pointing Mortar for Stone: [1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand] [1 part wbite portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts sand] [1 part white portland cement, 6 parts lime, and 12 parts sand] <Insert proportions>. a. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required. 2. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Same as pointing mortar[ except mortar pigments are not required]. 3. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: [1 part white portland cement, 1 part lime, and 6 parts sand] [1 part wbite portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts sand] [I part white portland cement, 6 parts lime, and 12 parts sand] <Insert !lroportions>. 4. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N unless otherwise indicated, with cementitious material limited to portland cement and lime. 2.8 CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS A. Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. B. Acidic Cleaner Solution for Unpolished Stone: Dilute with water to produce hydrofluoric acid content of 3 percent or less, but not greater than that recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. C. Acidic Cleaner for Polished Stone: Dilute with water to concentration demonstrated by testing that does not etch or otherwise damage polished surface, but not greater than that recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding 'buildings from harm resulting from stone restoration work. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 8 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 B. Comply with chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. 1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners used unless chemical cleaners being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use materials that contain only waterproof, UV -resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining. 2. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. 3.2 STONE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A. At locations indicated, remove stone that has deteriorated or is damaged beyond repair[ or is to he reused]. Carefully demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding stone, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units. B. Support and protect remaining stonework that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition. C. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose units in existing stone or unit masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. D. Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole stone units as possible. 1. Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from stone by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water. 2. Remove sealants by cutting close to stone with utility knife and cleaning with solvents. E. Clean stone surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement. F. Replace removed damaged stone with other removed stone in good quality, where possible, or with new stone matching existing stone, including size. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size. G. Do not allow face bedding of stone. Before setting, inspect to verify that each stone has been cut so that, when it is set in final position, natural bedding planes are essentially horizontal[ except for arches, where hedding planes are essentially radial or verticat, hut perpendicular to the wall]. Reject and replace stones with vertical bedding planes except as required for arches, lintels, and copings. H. Install replacement stone into bonding and coursing pattern of existing stone. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut stone with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Finish edges to blend with appearance of edges of existing stone. 1. Maintain joint width for replacement stone to match existing joints. 2. Use setting buttons or shims to set stone accurately spaced with uniform joints. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 9 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 I. Set replacement stone with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter vertical joints for full width before S{:tting and set units in full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. Replace existing anchors with new anchors of size and type indicated. 1. Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing stonework. 2. Rake out mortar used for laying stone before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing stone, and at same time as repointing of surrounding area. 3. When mortar is sufficiently hard to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering with pointing of joints. 3.3 STONE-FRAGMENT REPAIR A. Carefully remove cracked or fallen stone fragment indicated to be repaired. Reuse only stone fragment that is in sound condition. B. Remove soil, loose pmticles, mortar, and other debris or foreign material, from fragment surfaces to be bonded and from parent stone where fragment had broken off, by cleaning with stiff-fiber brush. C. Pinning: Before applying adhesive, prepare for mechanical anchorage consisting of 1/4-inch- (6-1llin-) diameter, [plain] [threaded] stainless-steel pins set into 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter holes drilled at a 45-degree downward angle through face of fragment and into parent stone. Center and space pins between 3 and 5 inches (75 and 125 nun) ap:ut and at least 2 inches (50 mm) from any edge. Insert pins at least 2 inches (50 mm) into parent stone and 2 inches (50 mm) into fragment with end countersunk at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) from exposed face of fragment. D. Concealed Pinning: B€:fore applying adhesive, prepare for concealed mechanical anchorage consisting of 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter, [plain] [threaded] stainless-steel pins set into 1/4- inch- (6-mm-) diameter holes drilled into parent stone and into, but not through, the fragment. Center and space pins between 3 and 5 inches (75 and 125 mm) apart and at least 2 inches (50 mm) from any edge. Insert pins at least 2 inches (50 mm) into parent stone and 2 inches (50 mm) into fragment, but no closer than 3/4 inch (19 mm) from exposed face of fragment. E. Apply stone-to-stone adhesive to comply with adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. Coat bonding surfaces of fragment and parent stone, completely filling all crevices and voids. F. Fit stone fragment onto parent stone while adhesive is still tacky and hold fragment securely in place until adhesive ha~: cured. Use shims, clamps, wedges, or other devices as necessary to align face of fragment with face of parent stone. G. Clean adhesive residue from exposed surfaces and patch chipped areas[ and exposed drill holes] as specified in "Stone Patching" Article. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 10 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 3.4 STONE PATCHING A. Remove deteriorated material and remove adjacent material that has begun to deteriorate. Carefully remove additional material so patch will not have feathered edges but will have square or slightly undercut edges on area to be patched and will be at least 1/4 inch (6 mill) thick, but not less than recommended by patching compound manufacturer. B. Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch will extend to edge of stone unit. C. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each stone unit being patched. D. Brush-coat stone surfaces with slurry coat of patching compound according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Place patching compound in layers as recommended by patching compound manufacturer, but not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more than 2 inches (50 mm) thick. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer. 1. Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surface plane or contour of the stone. Shape and fmish surface before or after curing, as determined by testing, to best match existing stone. F. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set. G. Remove and replace patches with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone at edges, and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture. 3.5 CLEANING STONE, GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from [hottom to top] [top to hottom] of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water will not wash over cleaned, dry surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each stone material and location. 1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used. Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist chemical cleaner being used. 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage stone. a. Equip units with pressure gages. 3. For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with cone-shaped spray tip. 4. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. 5. For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F (60 and 71 deg C) at flow rates indicated. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 11 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including comers, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging stone surfaces. D. Water-Spray Application Method: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of stone and apply water in horizontal back and forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. E. Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to stone surfaces to comply with chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush[ or spray] application.[ Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi (345 kPa).] Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer. F. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to del:ermine that chemical cleaner is completely removed. 1. Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5. 3.6 PRELIMINARY CLEANING A. Removing Plant Growth: Completely remove visible plant, moss, and shrub growth from stone surfaces. Carefully remove plants, creepers, and vegetation by cutting at roots and allowing to dry as long as possibk before removal. Remove loose soil or debris from open joints to whatever depth they occur. B. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar. 1. Carefully remove: heavy accumulations of material from surface of stone with sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip stone surface. 2. Remove paint and calking with alkaline paint remover. a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article. b. Repeat application up to two times if needed. 3. Remove asphalt and tar with solvent-type paint remover. a. Comply with requirements in "Paint Removal" Article. b. Apply paint remover only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting. c. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes. d. Repeat application if needed. 3.7 PAINTREMOVAL A. Paint Removal with Covered or Skin-Forming Alkaline Paint Remover: STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 12 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 1. Remove loose and peeling paint using [low] [medium]-pressure spray, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted stone with trowel, spatula, or as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Apply cover, if required by manufacturer, per manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer or as determined in test panels. 5. Scrape off paint and remover and collect for disposal. 6. Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint residue. 7. Apply acidic cleaner or manufacturer's recommended afterwash to stone, while surface is still wet, using low-pressure spray equipment or soft-fiber brush. Let cleaner or afterwash remain on surface as a neutralizing agent for period recommended by chemical-cleaner or afterwash manufacturer. 8. Rinse with cold water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. B. Paint Removal with Solvent-Type Paint Remover: 1. Remove loose and peeling paint using [low] [medium]-pressure spray, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply thick coating of paint remover to painted stone with natural-fiber cleaning brush, deep-nap roller, or large paint brush. 3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer.[ Agitate periodically with stiff-fiber hrush.] 4. Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove chemicals and paint residue. 3.8 CLEANING STONEWORK A. Detergent Cleaning: 1. Wet stone with [cold] [hot] water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub stone with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that stone surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. B. Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal: 1. Wet stone with [cold] [hot] water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush[ or low-pressure spray]. 3. Scrub stone with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate fresh cleaner is used and that stone surface remains wet. STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 13 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 4. Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove mold, mildew, and algae: remover and soil. 5. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. C. Nonacidic Gel Chemical Cleaning: 1. Wet stone with [c1()ld] [hot] water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply nonacidic gel cleaner in 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness by brush, working into joints and crevices. Apply quickly and do not brush out excessively so area will be uniformly covered with fresh cleaner and dwell time will be uniform throughout area being cleaned. 3. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. b. As established by mockup. 4. Remove bulk of nonacidic gel cleaner by squeegeeing into containers for disposal. 5. Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 6. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. D. Nonacidic Liquid Chemical Cleaning: 1. Wet stone with [cold] [hot] water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply cleaner to stoner in two applications] by brush[ or low-pressure spray]. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. b. As established by mockup. 3. Rinse with [cold] [hot] water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. E. [Mild Acidic] [Acidic] Chemical Cleaning: 1. Wet stone with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply cleaner to stoner in two applications] by brush[ or tow-pressure spray]. Let cleaner remain on surface for period indicated below: a. As recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer. b. As established by mockup. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by [low] [medium]-pressure spray to remove chemicals and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. Do not repeat more than once. F. One-Part Limestone Chl~mical Cleaning: STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 14 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 1. Wet stone with [cold] [hot] water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Apply cleaner to stone by brush[ or low-pressure spray]. Let cleaner remain on surface for period recommended by manufacturer. 3. Immediately repeat application of one-part limestone cleaner as indicated above over the same area. 4. Rinse with [eotd] [hot] water applied by medium-pressure spray to remove chelnicals and soil. 3.9 REPOINTING STONEWORK A. Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent: 1. All joints in areas indicated. 2. Joints where mortar is missing or where they contain holes. 3. Cracked joints where cracks can be penetrated at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) by a knife blade 0.027 inch (0.7 mm) thick. 4. Cracked joints where cracks are [1/16 inch (1.6 mm)] [118 inch (3 mm)] <Insert dimension> or more in width and of any depth. 5. Joints where they sound hollow when tapped by metal object. 6. Joints where they are worn back 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more from surface. 7. Joints where they are deteriorated to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools. 8. Joints, other than those indicated as sealant-filled joints, where they have been filled with substances other than mortar. B. Do not rake out and repointjoints where not required. C. Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup: 1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of [joint width plus 1/8 inch (3 mm)] [2 times joint width] [2-1/2 times joint width] <Insert dimension>, but not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. 2. Remove mortar from stone surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose stone for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of stone units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged stone units as directed by Architect. a. Cut out mortar by hand with chisel and resilient mallet. Do not use power- operated grinders. b. Cut out center of mortar bed joints using angle grinders with diamond-impregnated metal blades. Remove remaining mortar by hand with chisel and resilient mallet. D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose stone, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. E. Pointing with Mortar: STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 15 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 1. Rinse joint surfaees with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If rinse water dries, dampenjoint surfaces before pointing. 2. Apply pointing mortar fIrst to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. 3. After low areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point all joints by placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm). Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing stone has worn or rounded edges, slightly recess fmished mortar surface below face of stone to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed stone surfaces or to featheredge the mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. 5. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours, including weekends and holidays. a. Acceptable curing methods include covering with wet burlap and plastic sheeting, periodic hand misting, and periodic mist spraying using system of pipes, mist heads, and timers. 6. Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint IS unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint. F. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing stone, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.10 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed stone surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. 1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. END OF SECTION 04902 STONE RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04902 - 16 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/01 (R 05106) SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel[ and grout]. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand [ASD-service] [LRFD] loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using [schematic details indicated] [and] [AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design, " Volume 2, Part 9] [AISC's !IManual of Steel Construction, Allowahle Stress Design," Part 4] <Insert source>. 1.3 SUBMITTALS C. D. E. F. 1.4 A. B. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. Welding certificates. Mill test reports. Source quality-control test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to A WS D 1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel. " STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 MASTERSPEC Short Form Copyright 2001 AIA 02/01 (R 05106) C. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Preinstallation Conferenee: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS B. C. D. E. F. G. 2.2 A. A. Recycled Content of Sted Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsum{:r recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [50] [60] <Insert numher> percent. W-Shapes: [ASTM A 992/A 992M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)]. Channels, Angles[, M] L S]-Shapes: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)]. Plate and Bar: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)]. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade [B] [C], structural tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 531 A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. Welding Electrodes: Comply with A WS requirements. BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: [Ptain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. 2. Direct-Tension lndicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8.) compressible-washer type. a. Finish: [Pllain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50, haked epoxy coated]. B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts[ olr tension-control, holt-nut-washer assemhlies with splined ends]; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. 1. Direct-Tension lndicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 9591\1,) Type ]0.9, compressible-washer type, plain. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/01 (R 05/06) C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, [heavy hex] [round] head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: [Plain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-fmished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldahle]. 1. Configuration: [Straight] [Hooked]. 2. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Ctass 50]. F. Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldahle], straight. 1. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. G. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A 193/A 193M] [ASTM A 36/A 36M]. I. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. B. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer. 2.4 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "[Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--AUowahle Stress Design and Plastic Design] [Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings]." STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/01 (R 05/06) B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to A WS D 1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: [Snui~ tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical]. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS Dl.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fIre-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 nun). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3, Article "Field Quality Contro1." B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in A WS D 1.1 for stud welding. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/01 (R 05106) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "[Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design] [Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings]." C. Base[ and Bearing] Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting baser and hearing] plates. Clean bottom surface ofbase[ and hearing] plates. 1. Set baser and hearing] plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. [Snug-tighten] [pretension] anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of baser or bearing] plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and baser or hearing] plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.[ Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.] D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical]. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "[Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-Allowahle Stress Design and Plastic Design] [Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steet Buildings]" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/01 (R 05106) 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect [field welds] [and] [high-strength holted connections]. B. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be[ tested and] inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to A WS Dl.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to A WS D 1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on fmished wdd. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 05120END OF SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05/06) SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K -series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Long-span steel joists. 5. Joist girders. 6. Joist accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR4.1[ and CreditMR4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. D. Welding certificates. E. Manufacturer certificates. F. Mill Certificates: For bolts. G. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. H. Research/Evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by the Steel Joist Institute (Sn) to manufacture joists complying with sn standard specifications and load tables. STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05106) B. sn Specifications: Comply with Sll's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, sn's "Specifications") that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify pro,;;edures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in sn's "Specifications." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with Sn'i; "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members. 1. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer :recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [50] [60] <Insert numher> percent. B. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: [Plain, uncoated] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/ A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically df:posited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: [plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Ctass C] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50]. D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in STI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: [K-sfries steel joists] [and] [KCS-type K-series steel joists]. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in STI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members. STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05106) 2.3 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH- Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in sn's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type as follows and end and top-chord arrangements indicated. 1. Joist Type: [LH-series steel joists] [and] [DLH-series steel joists]. 2.4 JOIST GIRDERS A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in sn's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members and with end and top-chord arrangements as indicated. 2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of [horizontal] [or] [diagonal] bridging of material, size, and type required by sn's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to sn's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. C. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of fmished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. Apply 1 coat of shop primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to sn's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05106) 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel [hearing plates] [and] [framework]. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with A WS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts. E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connections' "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends Df bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY COl'iTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owll4~r will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect [field welds] [and] [bolted connections] and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 05210END OF SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05106) SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. 3. Noncomposite form deck. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. D. Product certificates. E. Welding certificates. F. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. G. ResearchlEvaluation Reports: For steel deck. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS Dl.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet SteeL" B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. STEEL DECK 05310-1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05106) 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. " D. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert numher> percent. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ASC Profiles, Inc. 2. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. 3. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 4. DACS, Inc. 5. D-Mac Industries Inc. 6. Epic Metals Corporation. 7. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 8. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 9. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. 10. Roof Deck, Inc. 11. United Steel Deck, Inc. 12. Valley Joist; Division ofEBSCO Industries, Inc. 13. Verco Manufacturing Co. 14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 15. <Insert manufacturer's name.> STEEL DECK 05310 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05106) 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)] minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked- on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: [Manufacturer's standard] [Gray] [White] [Gray top surface with white underside]. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)], [G60 (ZI80)] [G90 (Z275)] zinc coating. 3. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)], 060 (Z180) zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: [Manufacturer's standard] [Gray] [White] [Gray top surface with white underside]. 4. Deck Profile: [As indicated] [Type NR, narrow rih] [Type IR, intermediate rih] [Type WR, wide rih] [Type 3DR, deep rib] [Long span]. 5. Profile Depth: [As indicated] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] [4-112 inches (114 mm)] [6 inches (152 mm)] [7-1/2 inches (190 mm)]. 6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0295 inch (0.75 mm)] [0.0358 inch (0.91 mm)] [0.0474 inch (1.20 mm)] [0.0598 inch (1.52 mm)] [0.0747 inch (1.90 mm)]. 2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)] minimum, with top surface phosphatized and unpainted and underside surface shop primed with manufacturers' standard [gray] [or] [white] baked- on, rust-inhibitive primer. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6531 A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), [G30 (Z90)] [G60 (ZI80)] [G90 (Z275)] zinc coating. 3. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), [G30 (Z90)] [G60 (Z180)] zinc coating; with unpainted top surface and cleaned and pretreated bottom surface primed with manufacturer's standard [gray] [white] baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. 4. Profile Depth: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] [As indicated] . STEEL DECK 05310 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/03 (R 05/06) 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: [0.0295 inch (0.75 mm)] [0.0358 inch (0.91 mm)] [0.0474 inch (1.20 mm)] [0.0598 inch (1.52 mm)]. 2.4 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)] minimum. 2. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)] minimum, with [top and] underside surface shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: [Manufacturer's standard] [Gray] [White] [Gray top surface with white underside]. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [40 (275)] [80 (550)], [G30 (Z90)] [G60 (ZI80)] [G90 (Z275)] zinc coating. 4. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6531 A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade [33 (230)] [80 (550)], G60 (ZI80) zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: [Manufacturer's standard] [Gray] [White] [Gray top surface with white underside]. 5. Profile Depth: [9/16 inch (14 mm)] [15/16 inch (24 mm)] [1-5/16 inches (33 mm)] [l- 1/2 inches (38 mm)]. 6. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: [0.0149 inch (0.38 mm)] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0239 inch (0.61 mm)] [0.0295 inch (0.75 mm)] [0.0358 inch (0.91 mm)] [0.0474 inch (1.20 mm)] [0.0598 inch (1.52 mm)]. 7. Span Condition: [As indicated] [Simple span] [Double span] [Triple span or more]. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. STEEL DECK 05310 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/03 (R 05106) E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and fmish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section, and as indicated. B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to fmal position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at opening~ as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. F. Comply with A WS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 1. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and [wetd] [ mechanically fasten] flanges to top of deck. Space [welds] [mechanical fasteners] not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one [weld] [fastener] at each comer. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and [weld] [ or] [mechanically fasten]. J. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, fmish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. [Weld] [or] [mechanically fasten] to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. K. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. STEEL DECK 05310-5 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05103 (R 05/06) L. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and m writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.3 REJ>AIRS A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on [hoth surfaces] [top surface] of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. END OF SECTION 0531 OEND OF SECTION 05310 STEEL DECK 05310-6 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) SECTION 05400 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Floor joist framing. 5. Roof trusses. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: [As indicated.] [As follows:] a. Dead Loads: [Weights of materials and construction] <Insert applicable dead loads> . b. Live Loads: <Insert applicable live loads.> c. Roof Loads: <Insert applicable roof loads.> d. Snow Loads: <Insert applicable snow loads.> e. Wind Loads: <Insert applicable wind loads.> f. Seismic Loads: <Insert applicable seismic loads.> g. <Insert loads.> 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand[ design loads] without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of [1/240] [11360] [1/600] [1/720] of the wall height. b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of [11240] [1/360] of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 1bf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of [1/240] [1/360] [1/600] [1/720] <Insert ratio> of the wall height. d. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and 1/360 for total loads of the span. e. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of [1/240] [1/360] of the span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Welding certificates. E. Qualification data. F. Product test reports. G. Research/evaluation reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AlSI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AlSI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AlSI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 2. Comply with AlSI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." E. Comply with AlSI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A l003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: [ST33H (ST230H)] [ST50H (ST340H)] [As required by structural performance] <Insert grade>. 2. Coating: [G60 (Z180), A60 (ZFI80), AZSO (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90)] [G90 (Z275) or equivalent] <Insert coating weight>. 2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)] [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)] [0.0677 inch (1.72 mm)] [0.0966 inch (2.45 mm)]. 2. Section Properties: <Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment.> B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)] [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)] [0.0677 inch (1.72 mm)] [0.0966 inch (2.45 mm)]. 2. Flange Width: [1-3/8 inches (35 mm)] [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [2- 1/2 inches (63 mm)]. 3. Section Properties: <Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment.> 2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)] [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)] [0.0677 inch (1.72 mm)] [0.0966 inch (2.45 mm)]. 2. Flange Width: [1-3/8 inches (35 mm)] [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [2- 1/2 inches (63 mm)]. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3. Section Properties: <Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment.> B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard V-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard [bypass] [head] clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, V-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads. E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 2.4 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, [unpunched,] [punched,] [punched, with enlarged service holes,] with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)] [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)] [0.0677 inch (1.72 mm)] [0.0966 inch (2.45 mm)]. 2. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (63 mm)], rmmmum. 3. Section Properties: <Insert minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment.> B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists. 2. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (63 mm)], rmmmum. 2.5 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard[-shape steel sections] [C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges]. 2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 361 A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A l23/A l23M. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade [36] [55], threaded carbon-steel [hex-headed bolts] [headless, hooked bolts] [headless bolts, with encased end threaded,] and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by [hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/ A 153M, Class C] [mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class 50]. D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to lO times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. l. Head Type: Low-profIle head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035] [ASTM A 780]. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 5 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AlSI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified inDivision 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in lO feet (l :960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 111m) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at comers and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: [24 inches (610 mm)] [32 inches (813 mm)] [To match stud spacing] [As shown on Shop Drawings]. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of l/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: [12 inches (305 mm)] [16 inches (406 mm)] [19.2 inches (488 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] [As indicated]. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 6 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fastenjamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support ftxtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. l. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced [48 inches (1220 mm)] [as indicated] [as indicated on Shop Drawings]. Fasten at each stud intersection. l. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (150 mm) deep. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 7 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to[ top and] bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: [12 inches (305 IDm)] [16 inches (406 mm)] [19.2 inches (488 mm)] [24 inches (610 mID)] [As indicated]. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. l. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to [bypassing] [infill] studs and anchor to primary building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within [12 inches (305 mm)] [18 inches (450 mID)] of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at [96-inch (2440-mm) centers] [centers indicated] [centers indicated on Shop Drawings]. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. 4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-waIl-framing system. 3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at comers, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 8 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3.6 A. B. C. D. E. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to fmal position, brace, and reinforce. Fastenjoists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-l/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows: 1. Joist Spacing: [12 inches (305 mm)] [16 inches (406 mm)] [19.2 inches (488 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] [As indicated]. D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated[ on Shop Drawings]. l. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. F. Install bridging at intervals indicated[ on Shop Drawings]. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. TRUSS INSTALLATION Install, bridge, and brace trusses according to Shop Drawings and requirements in this Section. Truss Spacing: [16 inches (406 mm)] [19.2 inches (488 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] [32 inches (813 mm)] [48 inches (1220 mm)] [As indicated]. Do not alter, cut, or remove framing members or connections oftrusses. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other, align, and accurately position at spacings indicated. Erect trusses without damaging framing members or connections. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 9 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3.7 A. B. C. D. E. F. Align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. G. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated[ on Shop Drawings and designed according to LGSEA's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide for Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses. "] [.] FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide ftnal protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 10 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1- GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Shelf angles. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Steel weld plates and angles. 6. Structural-steel door frames. 7. Miscellaneous steel trim. 8. Metal ladders [and safety cages]. 9. Metal bollards. 10. Pipe guards. 11. Bicycle racks. 12. Metal floor plate[ and supports]. 13. Abrasive metal [nosings] [treads] [and] [thresholds]. 14. Loose steel lintels. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for metal-framed stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for metal pipe and tube railings. D. See Division 5 Section "Gratings" for metal gratings. E. See Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for ornamental metal items. F. See Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for ornamental metal railings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Prefabricated building columns. 2. Metal nosings and treads. 3. Grout. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Templates: For anchors and bolts. E. Samples: For each type and fInish of extruded [nosing] [and] [tread]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.l MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 361 A 36M. 3. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type [304] [316L]. 4. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 7861 A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade Cor D. 5. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 6. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate [with abrasive granules rolled into surface] [or] [with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel by a proprietary process]. a. [Available ]Products: 1) !KG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac. 2) W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT. 3) <Insert manufacturer's name; product.> 7. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 8. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 9. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels complying with MFMA-3, 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 nml). Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.079-inch (2-mm) nominal thickness. 10. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. C. Nonferrous Metals: 1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063- T6. 2. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 606l-T6. 3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Type [304] [316] stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class FelZn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless- steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A l53/A 153M. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. h. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Vse connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld comers and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hungers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 2. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness. C. Prefabricated Building Columns: Assemblies of load-bearing structural-steel members protected by insulating concrete frreproofmg encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel shell and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: [4 hours] [3 hours] [2 hours] [As indicated]. D. Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1. Lintels in Exterior Walls: [Galvanize] [prime with zinc-rich primer]. E. Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 1. Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: [Galvanize] [Prime with zinc-rich primer]. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 2. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. F. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. G. Structural-Steel Door Frames: Fabricate from structural shapes and bars fully welded together, with 5/8-by-l-l/2-inch (16-by-38-mm) steel channel stops secured with countersunk machine screws. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept finish hardware. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into adjoining concrete or masonry . 1. Exterior Frames: [Galvanize] [Prime with zinc-rich primer]. H. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: [Galvanize] [prime with zinc-rich primer]. 1. Metal Ladders [and Safety Cages]: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Elevator Pit Ladders: Comply with ASME A17 .1. 2. Space siderails [16 inches (406 mID)] [18 inches (457 mID)] apart, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Steel Ladder Construction: Flat bar siderails, with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bar rungs fitted in centerline of siderails, plug-welded, and ground smooth on outer rail faces.[ Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.] 4. Aluminum Ladder Construction: Extruded channel or tube siderails, not less than 2-l/2 inches (64mfi) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick; with extruded tube rungs, not less than 3/4 inch (19 finl) deep and not less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, fitted into centerline of siderails and fastened by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or brackets and aluminum rivets. Provide rungs with ribbed tread surfaces. 5. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Fabricate from same metal as ladders to which safety cages are attached and assemble by welding or riveting. 6. Exterior Steel Ladders [and Safety Cages]: [Galvanize] [Prime with zinc-rich primer]. J. Metal Bollards: Fabricate from [Schedule 40 steel pipe] [Schedule 80 steel pipe] [l/4-inch (6.4-mm) wall-thickness rectangular steel tubing]. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick steel plate. 2. Fabricate bollards with 3/8-inch- (1 O-mm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill baseplates at all four comers for 3/4-inch (19-mm) anchor bolts. 3. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel [pipe] [or] [tubing] with l/4-inch- (6- mm-) thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. K. Pipe Guards: Fabricate from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch (50- METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (l9-rmn) anchor bolts. L. Bicycle Racks: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe, fully welded together. 1. Fabricate with NPS 3 (DN 80) top rails and end posts, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) bottom rails, and NPS 3/4 (DN 20) vertical separators at approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. 2. Make top rails 36 inches (900 mm) above pavement/floor and bottom rails 4 inches (l00 mm) above pavement/floor. 3. Fabricate end posts with 1/4-inch- (6.4-rnm-) thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab. Drill end post baseplates at all 4 comers for 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) anchor bolts. 4. Finish: [Galvanize] [Prime with zinc-rich primer]. M. Metal Floor Plate: l. Fabricate from [ rolled-steel Door] [ rolled-stainless-steel floor] [rolled-aluminum-alloy tread] [ abrasive-surface floor] plate of thickness indicated below: a. Thickness: [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [114 inch (6.4 mm)] [5/16 inch (8 mID)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [As indicated]. 2. Provide [steel] [stainless-steel] [aluminum] angle supports as indicated. 3. Provide flush [steel] [stainless-steel] [aluminum] bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each end of each section. N. Abrasive Metal [No sings] [Treads] [and] [Thresholds]. 1. Cast-Metal Units: Cast [gray iron, Class 20] [aluminum] [bronze (leaded red or semired brass)] [nickel silver (leaded nickel bronze)], with an integral abrasive fInish. a. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1) American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 2) Balco Inc. 3) Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. 4) Granite State Casting Co. 5) Safe- T -Metal Co. 6) Wooster Products Inc. 7) <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Extruded Units: [Aluminum] [Bronze], with abrasive flller in an epoxy-resin binder. a. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1) ACL Industries, Inc. 2) American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 3) Amstep Products. 4) Armstrong Products, Inc. 5) Balco Inc. 6) Granite State Casting Co. 7) Wooster Products Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 8) <Insert manufacturer's name.> b. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1116 inch (1.5 mm) above aluminum extrusion. c. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs. 3. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units. 4. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate not more than 4 inches (100 mill) from ends and not more than l2 inches (300 illm) o.c. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating fInishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/ A 123M or ASTM A l53/A l53M as applicable. 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone lB)[ and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer]: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fIreproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards to existing construction with [expansion anchors] [anchor bolts] [through bolts]. Provide four 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts at each bollard. 2. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 3. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 4. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. D. Touch up surfaces and ftnishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500END OF SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 055ll - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with [concrete-filled] [precast concrete] [epoxy-resin-fIlled] [and] [abrasive-coating-fmished formed-metal] treads. 2. Industrial-type stairs with steel [floor plate] [grating] treads. 3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs[ and to walls adjacent to metal stairs]. B. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Stairs: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 Ibf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to [L/240] [L/360] <Insert deflection ratio> or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. B. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 IbfY ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 Ibf (0.89 ktl\J) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibfl ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of200 Ibf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of] sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). Uniform load of251bf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN!sq. m) applied horizontally. b. METAL STAIRS 05511 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) c. Infillload and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal stairs capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."] <Insert applicable code requirement.> l.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. l. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the frre-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. METAL STAIRS 05511 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 2.2 METALS C. D. E. F. G. H. 1. J. K. L. 2.3 A. A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 361 A 36M. Steel Tubing: [ASTM A 500 (cold formed)] [or] [ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn)]. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 7861 A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade Cor D. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M). Iron Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 481 A 48M, Class 30, or malleable lfon, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170). Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A lOl1M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205). Expanded Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Class 1 (uncoated). Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135- inch (3.5-111111) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51 OM). Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Cast-Metal Abrasive Nosings: Cast gray iron, Class 20, with an integral abrasive fInish. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. c. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Co. f. Wooster Products Inc. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Apply bituminous paint to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete. B. Extruded Abrasive Nosings: Extruded-aluminum units with abrasive filler. METAL STAIRS 05511 - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. ACL Industries, Inc. b. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. c. Amstep Products. d. Armstrong Products, Inc. e. Balco Inc. f. Granite State Casting Co. g. Wooster Products Inc. h. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above aluminum extrusion. 3. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs. 4. Apply clear lacquer to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of units set into concrete. C. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated. F. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 nml)--W1.4 by Wl.4, unless otherwise indicated. G. Precast Concrete Treads: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi (35 MPa) and a total air content of not less than 4 percent or more than 6 percent. Reinforce with galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50 by 50 nun) by 0.062-inch- (l.6-nnn-) diameter wire. 2.4 FABRICATION A. [ Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,[ railings,] clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain METAL STAIRS 05511 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, fInish exposed welds smooth and blended. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 4. Form bent-metal comers to smallest radius possible without impairing work. 5. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. C. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of steel [plates] [channels] [plates or channels]. Construct platforms of steel [plate] [channel] [plate or channel] headers and miscellaneous framing members. 1. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on fInished surfaces. 2. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum-board[ shaft-wall] assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. 3. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. D. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0677 inch (1.7 mm). 1. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication. 2. Provide epoxy-resin-filled treads, reinforced with glass fibers, with slip-resistant, abrasive surface. E. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.0966 inch (2.5 mm). Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded abrasive finish. F. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms from rolled-steel floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than [1/4 inch (6.4 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)]. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. G. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel grating with 1-1!4-by-3/16-inch (32-by-5-mm) bearing bars at l5/16 inch (24 mm) o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 2. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel grating with l-by-3!16-inch (25-by-5-mm) bearing bars at 11/16 inch (17 mm) o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts. H. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, fInish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. METAL STAIRS 05511-5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 1. Configuration: [1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter] [1-l/2-inch- (38-mm-) square] top and bottom rails, l-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square posts, and ll2-inch- (13-mm-) square pickets spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm) clear. 2. Configuration: l-l/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and bottom rails and posts with infill panels made from [expanded metal] [woven wire mesh in steel channel frames]. 3. Configuration: l-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top, bottom, and intermediate rails and posts. Space intermediate rails less than [12 inches (305 mm)] [21 inches (533 mm)] clear. 4. Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. 5. Form changes in direction of railings by bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings. 6. Form curves by bending members injigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling. 7. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 8. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. 9. Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. lO. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A l23/A l23M or ASTM A l53/A 153M as applicable. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Exterior Stairs (SSPC Zone lB): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning. " 2. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-P AI, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. METAL STAIRS 05511 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Place and fInish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast- in-Place Concrete." 1. Install abrasive no sings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. E. Install precast treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. l. Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage]. G. Adjusting and Cleaning: 1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055llEND OF SECTION 05511 METAL STAIRS 05511-7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum [pipe] [and] [tube] railings. 2. Stainless-steel [pipe] [and] [tube] railings. 3. Steel [pipe] [and] [tube] railings. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. C. See Division 10 Section "Access Flooring" for railings included with access flooring. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibfl ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of200 1bf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbfl ft. (0.73 kNim) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 1bf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 Ibf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of 25 Ibf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq. m) applied horizontally. c. Infillload and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. l.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For[ mechanically connected railings,] grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.l[ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Samples: For each exposed fInish required. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings: a. AlumaGuard Corp. b. ATR Technologies, Inc. c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division ofthe Wagner Companies. e. CraneVeyor Corp. f. Hollaender Manufacturing Company. g. Moultrie Manufacturing Company. h. Pisor Industries, Inc. 1. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc. J. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. k. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. l. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. m. Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze. n. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division ofthe Wagner Companies. o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Stainless-Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) b. Paragon Aquatics; Division of Pent air Pool Products, Inc. c. Pisor Industries, Inc. d. Stainless Fabricators, Inc. e. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc. f. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. g. Tuttle Aluminum & Bronze. h. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Sharpe Products. c. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and fInisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. 1. Extruded [Bars] [and] [Tubing]: ASTM B 22l (AS1M B 22lM), Alloy 6063-T5/T52. 2. Extruded Structural [Pipe] [and] [Round Tubing]: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. 3. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 606l-T6. 5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 606l-T6. 6. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0- T6. 7. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.162-inch (4.1-111111) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM B 2ll (ASTM B 2l1M), Alloy 606l-T94. C. Stainless Steel: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT [304] [316L]. 2. Pipe: ASTM A 3l2/A 312M, Grade TP [304] [316L]. 3. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade [CF 8 or CF 20] [CF 8M or CF 3M]. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316L]. 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F l267, Type [I (expanded)] [n (expanded and flattened)], Class 3 (corrosion-resistant steel), ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316]. 6. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-mch (3.S-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type [304] [316]. D. Steel and Iron: PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552l - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 1. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. 2. Tubing: [ASTM A 500 (cold formed)] [or] [ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn)]. 3. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 4. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 361 A 36M. 5. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 6. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type [I (expanded)] [n (expanded and flattened)], Class 1 (uncoated). 7. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5-111111) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 51 OM). 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard for railings indicated. 1. Aluminum Railings: Type [304] [316] stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type [304] [316] stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class FelZn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Anchors: Provide [cast-in-place] [chemical] [or] [torque-controlled expansion] anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. D. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 [painting Sections.] [Section "High-Performance Coatings. "] E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. F. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. G. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with fInish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 2.4 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1. J. H. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C ll07; or water-resistant, nonshrink anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. FABRICATION General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated[, but not less than that required to support structural loads ]. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Form changes in direction [by bending] [or] [by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings]. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otheIT/ise indicated. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1- by-1/2-by-1I8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) metal channel frames. 2.5 FINISHES A. Aluminum: 1. Mechanical Finish: AA-M12 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated). 2. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A4l complying with AAMA 611. 3. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. B. Stainless Steel: 1. l80-Grit Polished Finish: Oil-ground, uniform, textured fInish. 2. Directional Satin Finish: No.4. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No.6. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 0552l - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) C. Steel and Iron: 1. Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize [exterior] [indicated] railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A l23/A l23M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallic- phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-P A 1. 3. Shop-Primed Steel Finish: Prepare to comply with [SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning"] [SSPC-SP 7/NACE No.4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning"] and apply primer to comply with SSPC-P A 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into [preset steel pipe sleeves] [formed or core-drilled holes] and grouting annular space. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. E. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. 1. Use type of bracket with [flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt] [predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage]. 2. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into[ fIre-retardant-treated] wood backing between studs. 4. For steel-framed partitions, fasten to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 5. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. G. Adjusting and Cleaning: PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) l. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 0552lEND OF SECTION 05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05521 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) SECTION 05700 - ORNAMENTAL METAL PART 1 - GENERAL l.1 A. B. C. 1.2 A. B. C. D. SUMMARY This Section includes custom ornamental metal [items] <Insert list of items>. See Division 5 Section "Formed-Metal Fabrications" for ornamental metal items made from sheet metal. See Division 5 Section "Ornamental Railings" for ornamental metal railings. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication and installation. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. Patterns, Models, or Plaster Castings: For each custom casting required. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: l. Ornamental Mechanical Grilles: a. Architectural Grille; Div. of Giumenta Corporation. b. Harrington & King Perforating Co. c. Reggio Registers Co., Inc. d. Register & Grille Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Metal-Clad Doors: a. Dawson Metal Co., Inc. b. InKan Limited. ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) c. Krieger Steel Products Co. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. Ornamental Castings and Forgings: a. Allen Architectural Metals. b. Alloy Casting Co., Inc. c. Architectural Iron Company, Inc. d. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. e. Braun, J. G. Company; a division ofthe Wagner Companies. f. Classic Iron Supply/Craft. g. Colonial Castings, Inc. h. Cullar/La Cuesta. 1. Dempsey, Inc. J. Historical Arts & Casting, Inc. k. Indital USA. 1. Lawler Foundry Corporation. m. Morrow, Frank Company. n. Olin Wrought Iron. o. OMC Industries, Inc. p. Robinson Iron. q. Tennessee Fabricating Co. r. Texas Metal Industries, Inc. s. IT Triebenbacher - Bavarian Iron Works Co. t. Universal Manufacturing Co., Inc. u. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 4. Stainless-Steel Wire Rope and Fittings: a. Cable Connection (The). b. Esmet, Inc. c. Feeney Wire Rope & Rigging. d. Hayn Enterprises, LLC. e. Johnson, C. Sherman, Co., Inc. f. Loos & Co., Inc.; Cableware Division. g. Ronstan International Inc. h. SA V A Industries. 1. Seco South, Inc. J. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 METALS A. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and fInisher with strength and durability properties not less than that of alloy and temper designated below. 1. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 22lM), Alloy 6063-T5/T52. 2. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy [3003-HI4] [5005-H32] [6061- T6]. 3. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), alloy 606l-T6. 4. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy A356.0- T6. ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) B. Copper Alloys: 1. Extruded Shapes, Bronze: ASTM B 455, alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze). 2. Extruded Shapes, Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M, alloy UNS No. C36000 (free-cutting brass). 3. Extruded Shapes, Nickel Silver: ASTM B l5l/B 151M, alloy UNS No. C74500. 4. Castings, Bronze: [Composition bronze castings complying with ASTM B 62, alloy UNS No. C83600 (85-5-5-5 or No.1 composition commercial red brass)] [or] [sand castings complying with ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C86500 (No.1 manganese bronze)]. 5. Castings, Brass: Sand castings complying with ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass). 6. Castings, Nickel Silver: ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 7. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). 8. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). 9. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Copper: ASTM B l52/B 152M, alloy UNS No. CllOOO (electrolytic tough pitch copper) or UNS No. C12200 (phosphorous deoxidized, high residual phosphorous copper). C. Stainless Steel: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT [304] [316] [316L]. 2. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade [CF 8 or CF 20] [Cl' 8M or CF 3M]. 3. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316] [316L]. 4. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type [304] [316] [316L]. 5. Wire Rope: [1-by-19] [7-by-7] [7-by-19] <Insert configuration> wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492, Type 3l6. D. Steel and Iron: 1. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. 2. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 361 A 36M. 3. Castings: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, or malleable Iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A l0081 A l008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), exposed. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed, unless otherwise indicated, with Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners. B. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined per ASTM E 488. ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) C. Wire-Rope Fittings: Fabricated from stainless steel and with strength equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used. D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. E. Brazing Rods: For copper alloys, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. F. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, air-drying,[ waterborne] acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating copper-alloy products. G. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 [painting Sections.] [Section "High-Performance Coatings. "] H. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. Zinc-Rich Primer: Comply with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. J. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form ornamental metal true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defmed lines and arris. B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter comer joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop [welding] [and] [brazing]. Clean exposed [welded] [and] [brazed] joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect mechanical finishes by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Aluminum Finishes: Designations are as established by the Aluminum Association. 1. Clear Anodic Finish: Class [IT, AA-MI2C22A31] [I, AA-M12C22A41] complying with AAMA 611. 2. Color Anodic Finish: Class [IT, AA-MI2C22A32/A34] [I, AA-M12C22A42/A44] complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black]. ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-Cl 2C42Rl x, with thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primerltopcoat organic coating system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss. a. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 4. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 lnm) for topcoat. a. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>. 5. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx, fluoropolymer thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605]. a. System: [Two] [Three] [Four] coat. b. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>. C. Copper-Alloy Finishes: Designations are system established for designating copper-alloy ftnish systems defmed in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products." 1. Buffed Finish: M2l (smooth specular). 2. Hand-Rubbed Finish: M3l-M34 (directionally textured, hand rubbed). 3. Medium-Satin Finish: M32 (directionally textured, medium satin). 4. Fine-Matte Finish: M42 (nondirectional ftnish, fme matte). 5. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M21-06x (smooth specular). 6. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered: M3l-M34-06x (directiona1ly textured, hand rubbed). 7. Medium-Satin Finish, Lacquered: M32-06x (directionally textured, medium satin). 8. Fine-Matte Finish, Lacquered: M42-06x (nondirectional ftnish, fme matte). a. Clear, Organic Coating: Two coats lacquer specified for copper alloys; total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). 9. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M3l-C55. a. Color: Match sample. 10. Patina Conversion Coating: M36-C12-C52. a. Color: Match sample. 11. Statuary Conversion Coating, Bright Relieved and Lacquered: M12-C55-M2x-06x. a. Color and Buffmg: Match sample. b. Clear, Organic Coating: Two coats lacquer specified for copper alloys; total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) l2. Blackened, Bright Relieved, and Lacquered: M33-060-M2x-06x. a. Blackening and Buffmg: Match sample. b. Clear, Organic Coating: Two coats lacquer specified for copper alloys; total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 111111). D. Stainless-Steel Finishes: 1. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B finish. 2. Directional Satin Finish: No.4 finish. 3. Dull Satin Finish: No.6 finish. 4. Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7 finish. 5. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No.8 finish. E. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/ A 123M. a. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware to comply with ASTM A l53/A 153M. 2. Factory-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces and apply air-dried primer to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 m111) to exposed surfaces and to concealed, nongalvanized surfaces. a. Preparation for Galvanized Metal: After galvanizing, clean and treat with metallic- phosphate pretreatment. b. Preparation for Uncoated Ferrous Metal: Comply with SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat ferrous metal to comply with resm manufacturer's written instructions. a. Preparation of Uncoated Ferrous Metal: Comply with SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Preparation of Galvanized Metal: Thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter. c. Treat prepared metal with metallic-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. d. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04111111). e. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-place construction. ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTER SPEC - SHORT FORM 05/02 (R 08/03) B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. C. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such fInishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refInishing, or provide new units as required. D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses. E. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. END OF SECTION 05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL 05700 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) SECTION 05721 - ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL l.l SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Aluminum ornamental railings. 2. Copper-alloy ornamental railings. 3. Stainless-steel ornamental railings. 4. Steel and iron ornamental railings. 5. Glass- and plastic-supported railings. 6. Post-supported railings with glass infill. B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. C. See Division 5 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe and tube components. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbfl ft. (0.73 kN!m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbfl ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kil\T) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Uniform load of251bf/sq. ft. (1.2 kN/sq.m) applied horizontally. c. Infillload and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if anyone panel fails. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For railings assembled from standard components, grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed fInish required. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage testing agency to test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. Payment will be made [by Owner] [from the Testing and Inspecting Allowance, as authorized by Change Orders]. 1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for each form and fInish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) 1. Aluminum Ornamental Railings: a. Architectural Metal Works. b. ATR Technologies, Inc. c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. d. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. e. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. f. CraneVeyor Corp. g. Livers Bronze Co. h. Newman Brothers, Inc. 1. Pisor Industries, Inc. J. Platers Polishing Company; a division of Rippel Architectural Metals. k. Poma Corporation. l. Sterling Dula Architectural Products, Inc. m. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. n. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. o. Wylie Systems. p. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Copper-Alloy Ornamental Railings: a. Architectural Metal Works. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. c. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. e. CraneVeyor Corp. f. Lavi Industries. g. Livers Bronze Co. h. Newman Brothers, Inc. 1. Platers Polishing Company; a division of Rippel Architectural Metals. J. Tri Tech, Inc. k. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 1. Wylie Systems. m. Zephyr Southwest Ornamental, LLC. n. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. Stainless-Steel Ornamental Railings: a. Architectural Metal Works. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. c. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. d. CraneVeyor Corp. e. Livers Bronze Co. f. Newman Brothers, Inc. g. P & P Artec. h. Pisor Industries, Inc. 1. Platers Polishing Company; a division of Rippel Architectural Metals. J. Tri Tech, Inc. k. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division ofthe Wagner Companies. 1. Wylie Systems. m. Zephyr Southwest Ornamental, LLC. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 0572l - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) n. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 4. Steel and Iron Ornamental Railings: a. Architectural Iron Designs, Inc. b. Artezzi. c. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. d. Braun, J. G., Company; a division of the Wagner Companies. e. Indital USA. f. Lawler Foundry Corporation. g. Livers Bronze Co. h. Olin Wrought Iron. 1. Regency Railings. J. IT Triebenbacher - Bavarian Iron Works Co. k. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 5. Glass- and Plastic-Supported Railings: a. Architectural Metal Works. b. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc. c. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh. d. Clearail, Inc. e. CraneVeyor Corp. f. Livers Bronze Co. g. Newman Brothers, Inc. h. Platers Polishing Company; a division of Rippel Architectural Metals. 1. TACO Metals Inc. J. Tri Tech, Inc. k. Zephyr Southwest Ornamental, LLC. l. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 METALS A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and fInisher for type of use and fInish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below. 1. Extruded Bars and Shapes[, Including Extruded Tubing]: ASTM B 22l (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5/T52. 2. Extruded Structural [Pipe] [and] [Round Tubing]: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. 3. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M), Alloy 6063-T832. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 606l-T6. 5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 (ASTM B 247M), Alloy 606l-T6. 6. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0- T6. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) 7. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh, made from O.162-inch (4.1-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M), Alloy 606l-T94. C. Copper and Copper Alloys: Provide temper to suit application and forming methods, but not less than Temper HOl for plate, sheet, strip, and bars and Temper H55 for tube and pipe. 1. Extruded Shapes, Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (architectural bronze). 2. Extruded Shapes, Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M, Alloy UNS No. C36000 (free-cutting brass) . 3. Seamless Pipe, Bronze: ASTM B 43, Alloy UNS No. C23000 (red brass, 85 percent copper). 4. Seamless Tube, Bronze: ASTM B 135 (ASTM B 135M), Alloy UNS No. C23000 (red brass, 85 percent copper). 5. Seamless Tube, Brass: ASTM B 135 (ASTM B 135M), Alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). 6. Castings, Bronze: [Composition bronze castings complying with ASTM B 62, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (85-5-5-5 or No.1 composition commercial red brass)] [or] [sand castings complying with ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C86500 (No.1 manganese bronze)]. 7. Castings, Brass: Sand castings complying with ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C85200 (high-copper yellow brass). 8. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). 9. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). D. Stainless Steel: 1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT [304] [316L]. 2. Pipe: ASTM A 3l2/A 312M, Grade TP [304] [316L]. 3. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade [CF 8 or CF 20] [CF 8M or CF 3M]. 4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316L]. 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type [I (expanded)] [n (expanded and flattened)], Class 3 (corrosion-resistant steel), ASTM A 666, Type [304] [316]. 6. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-1mn) woven-wire mesh, made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type [304] [316]. E. Steel and Iron: l. Tubing: [ASTM A 500 (cold formed)] [ or] [ASTM A 513, Type 5 (mandrel drawn)]. 2. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. 3. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 4. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron, unless otherwise indicated. a. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. b. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 0572l - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) 5. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type [I (expanded)] [ll (expanded and flattened)], Class 1 (uncoated). 6. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, 2-inch (50-111m) woven-wire mesh, made from o . 135-inch (3 .S-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A SIOM). 2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C l048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Clear Glass: Class 1 (clear). 2. Tinted Glass: Class 2 (tinted), manufacturer's standard [bronze] [gray] [green] <Insert color> tint color. 3. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads, but not less than [12.0] [19.0] mm. 4. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than [6.0] [10.0] mm. B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3 with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick. 1. Kind: [LA (laminated annealed)] [LHS (laminated heat strengthened)] [LT (laminated tempered)]. 2. Clear Glass: Class 1 (clear). 3. Tinted Glass: Class 2 (tinted), manufacturer's standard [bronze] [gray] [green] <Insert color> tint color. 4. Lites for Structural Glass Balusters: Two, each of thickness required by structural loads, but not less than [6.0] [8.0] mm thick. 5. Lites for Glass Infill Panels: Two, each of thickness required by structural loads, but not less than [3.0] [4.0] [5.0] mm. C. Plastic Structural Glazing: Transparent acrylic sheet complying with ASTM D 4802, Category A-lor A-2 (cell cast or continuous cast), Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 1. Color: [Colorless (clear)] [Bronze] [Gray] [Match glass] <Insert color>. 2. Thickness: [12.0 mm] [Match glass thickness]. D. Glazing Cement and Accessories: Provide glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless [otherwise indicated] [exposed fasteners are unavoidable] [exposed fasteners are standard for railings indicated]. 1. Aluminum Components: Type [304] [316] stainless-steel fasteners. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) 2. Copper-Alloy Components: Silicon bronze (Alloy 65l or 655) fasteners. 3. Stainless-Steel Components: Type [304] [316] stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class FelZn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. 5. Dissimilar Metals: Type [304] [316] stainless-steel fasteners. B. Anchors: Provide [cast-in-place] [chemical] [or] [torque-controlled expansion] anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488. C. Wood Rails: Hardwood rails of species and profile indicated, with manufacturer's standard transparent ftnish and secured to [recessed] [exposed] metal subrail. D. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, air-drying, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating copper-alloy products. E. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 [painting Sections.] [Section "High-Performance Coatings. "] F. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. G. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. H. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer compatible with ftnish paint systems indicated and complying with SSPC-Paint 5. 1. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107, or water-resistant, nonshrink, anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated[, but not less than that required to support structural loads ]. B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. C. Brazed Connections: Connect copper-alloy railings by brazing. Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Braze comers and seams continuously. D. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. E. Form changes in direction [by bending] [or] [by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings]. F. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain cross section of member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 0572l - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) G. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. J. Expanded-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate panels from [stainless-steel] [steel] expanded metal [edged with U-shaped channels made from same metal, 0.0428 inch (l.1 mID) thick]. K. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into I-by- 1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-.mm) metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from [aluminum] [stainless steel] [steel]. 2.6 FINISHES A. Aluminum: 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 complying with AAMA 611. 2. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primerltopcoat system complying with AAMA 2603, medium gloss. a. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] 4. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Fluoropolymer [two] [three]-coat system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight and complying with AAMA [2604] [2605]. a. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. B. Copper-Alloys: Finish designations comply with the system for designating copper-alloy finishes in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products." 1. Buffed Finish: M21. 2. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M2l-06x. Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in 2 coats to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). 3. Medium-Satin Finish, Lacquered: M32-06x. Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in 2 coats to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). 4. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M3l-C55. 5. Patina Conversion Coating: M36-C12-C52. C. Stainless Steel: ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 0572l - 8 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) 1. Directional Satin Finish: No.4. 2. Dull Satin Finish: No.6. 3. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No.7. 4. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No.8. D. Steel and Iron: 1. Galvanized Railings: Hot-dip galvanize [ exterior] [indicated] railings, after fabrication, to comply with ASTM A l23/A 123M. Provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. 2. Shop-Primed Galvanized Railings: After galvanizing, clean railings, treat with metallic- phosphate process, and apply primer to comply with SSPC-P A l. 3. Shop-Primed Steel Finish: Prepare surfaces to comply with [SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning"] [SSPC-SP 7/NACE No.4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning"] and apply primer to comply with SSPC-P A 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.l INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation. 1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mra in 1m). 2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed l/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m). B. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into [preset steel pipe sleeves] [formed or core-drilled holes] and grouting annular space. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose. E. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with [sleeves concealed within railing ends] [flanges connected to railing ends] [brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends] and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. F. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. l. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. 2. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into[ fire-retardant-treated] wood backing between studs. 3. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural loads. ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 9 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/02 (R 08/03) 4. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements. G. Installing Glass-Supported Railings: Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel. Support glass panels at quarter points with setting blocks that also act as shims, and fill base channel with glazing cement. H. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean abraded areas and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. END OF SECTION 05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS 05721 - 10 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) SECTION 05730 - ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Beam wraps. 2. Closures and trim. 3. Column covers. 4. Filler panels. 5. Heating-cooling unit enclosures. 6. Lighting coves. 7. Metal base. 8. Mullion cladding. 9. Pockets for window treatment. 10. Window stools. B. See Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for items made primarily from plate, bars, extrusions, tubes, castings, and other forms of metal, but which may include sheet metal components. l.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishes. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For [adhesives] [and] [sealants], including printed statement ofVOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of components and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.[ Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.] D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (l50-mm-) square samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 1 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.2 A. B. A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on fInished units. B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and fInisher, with not less than strength and durability of alloy 5005-H32. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating. Steel Sheet: [Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M] [or] [electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 5911A 591M, with steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M]. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 2401 A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. Bronze Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper) or alloy UNS No. C23000 (red brass, 85 percent copper). Brass Sheet: ASTM B 36/B 36M, alloy UNS No. C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent copper). MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Gaskets: As required to seal joints in ornamental formed metal, and as recommended in writing by ornamental formed-metal manufacturer. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; [silicone] [polyurethane] [or] [polysulfide] sealant; of grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in ornamental formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by ornamental formed-metal manufacturer. C. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834; and as recommended in writing by ornamental formed-metal manufacturer. 1. Use sealant that has a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). D. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Type and alloy as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items and that will match the color of metal being joined. E. Fasteners: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 2 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) F. Anchors: Provide [powder-actuated fasteners] [metal expansion sleeve anchors] [or] [metal impact expansion anchors] of type, size, and material recommended by manufacturer. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors for exterior installations. G. Sound-Deadening Materials: 1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test. 2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. H. Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard [alkali resistant coating] [bituminous paint] [epoxy coating]. 2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79. B. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for priming zinc- coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated; complying with SSPC- Paint 5. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds ill steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, air-drying, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating copper products. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "lncralac" developed by International Copper Research Corporation. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble ornamental formed-metal items ill shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. B. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a l/2-inch- (12-mm-) wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges and support them with concealed stiffeners. C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use. 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. D. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed. E. Beam Wraps: Form from metal of type and thickness indicated below. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 3 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Steel Sheet: [0.053 inch (1.34 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [powder coat]. 3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: No. [2B] [4] [6] [7] [8]. F. Closures and Trim: Form from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining construction[, with weathertight joints at exterior installations]. 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [powder coat]. 3. Steel Sheet: [0.043 inch (1.09 mm)] [1.1 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Powder coat]. G. Column Covers, Spackled-Seam Type: Form column covers from 0.125-inch (3.2-mm) aluminum, rolled to radii indicated. Taper edges of adjoining pieces of column covers, for taping and spackling, to 0.094-inch (2.4-mm) thickness. Punch edges for gypsum board screws at 1/2 inch (12 mm) o.c., and mill grooves in edge to improve bond withjoint compound. H. Column Covers, Snap-Together Type: Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will engage continuous mounting clips. 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Steel Sheet: [0.053 inch (1.34 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Powder coat]. 3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: No. [2B] [4] [6] [7] [8]. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 4 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) 4. Bronze Sheet: [0.051 inch (1.29 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Buffed finish, lacquered] [Hand-rubbed finish, lacquered] [Statuary conversion coating over satin finish]. 5. Brass Sheet: [0.051 inch (1.29 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Buffed finish, lacquered] [Hand-rubbed f"Inish, lacquered]. 6. Form returns at joints to provide [1/2-inch- (12-mm-)] [3/4-inch- (18-mm-)] wide reveal at joints. Provide snap-in metal filler strips at reveals that leave reveals [1/2 inch (12 mm) deep] [flush]. 1. Filler Panels: Form from two sheets of metal of type and thickness indicated below, separated by channels formed from the same material, producing a panel of same thickness as [partitions] [mullions], unless otherwise indicated. Incorporate reveals, trim, and concealed anchorages. l. Galvanized Steel Sheet: [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [Powder coat]. 2. Steel Sheet: [0.053 inch (1.34 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Powder coat]. 3. Fill interior of panel with sound-deadening insulation permanently attached to inside panel faces. 4. Adhesively attach gaskets to filler panel edges where they abut mullions or glazing. J. Heating-Cooling Unit Enclosures: Fabricate to withstand lOO 1bf/sq. ft. (4.8 k.l\J!sq. m) or a concentrated load of 300 1bf (1.3 k..f\l) on an area of 4 sq. in. (26 sq. em), whichever produces the greater stress. Fabricate from metal of type and thickness indicated below. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: a. Framing: [0.108 inch (2.74 mm)] [2.8 mm] [Thickness required to comply with performance requirements]. b. Sills and Stools: [0.079 inch (2.01 mm)] [2.0 mm] [Thickness required to comply with performance requirements]. c. Front Panels and Bases: [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)] [1.6 mm]. d. Concealed Panels and Trim: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] [1.0 mm]. e. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [powder coat]. 2. Steel Sheet: a. Framing: [0.097 inch (2.45 mm)] [2.5 mill] [Thickness required to comply with performance requirements]. b. Sills and Stools: [0.068 inch (1.72 mm)] [1.7 mm] [Thickness required to comply with performance requirements]. c. Front Panels and Bases: [0.053 inch (1.34 mm)] [1.3 mm]. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 5 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) d. Concealed Panels and Trim: [0.033 inch (0.84 mm)] [0.85 mm]. e. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Powder coat]. 3. Fill space between framing with sound-deadening insulation attached to face sheet with insulation adhesive. 4. Coat concealed faces of metal panels more than 6 inches (150 mm) wide with sound- deadening mastic applied at the minimum rate of20 sq. ft.!gal (0.5 sq. miL). 5. Provide louvers and grilles of size, type, and materials indicated. 6. Incorporate removable tops and fronts where indicated or needed for access to heating- cooling units and to piping, ductwork, controls, and electrical service. K. Lighting Coves: Form lighting coves from metal of type and thickness indicated below. 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [Powder coat]. 3. Steel Sheet: [0.043 inch (1.09 mm)] [1.1 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Powder coat]. 4. Fabricate light coves with [hairline butt joints] [tapered edges for taping and spackling] . L. Metal Base: Form from metal oftype and thickness indicated below. 1. Aluminum: [0.062 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: No. [2B] [4] [6] [7] [8]. M. Mullion Cladding: Form from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate to fit tightly to adjoining construction. 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.60 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [1.3 mm]. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 6 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [Powder coat]. 3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: No. [2B] [4] [6] [7] [8]. N. Pockets for Window Treatment: Form from metal of type and thickness indicated below, with end closures. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods with window treatment equipment, window frames, ceiling suspension system, and other related construction. 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [Powder coat]. 3. Steel Sheet: [0.043 inch (1.09 mm)] [1.1 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Powder coat]. o. Window Stools: Form from metal of type and thickness indicated below, with end closures. 1. Aluminum Sheet: [0.063 inch (1.59 mm)] [1.6 mm]. a. Finish: [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat] [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Factory primed] [Baked enamel] [Siliconized polyester] [Powder coat]. 3. Stainless-Steel Sheet: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: No. [2B] [4] [6] [7] [8]. 4. Bronze Sheet: [0.051 inch (1.29 mm)] [1.3 mm]. a. Finish: [Buffed finish, lacquered] [Hand-rubbed finish, lacquered] [Statuary conversion coating over satin finish]. 5. Apply sound-deadening [insulation] [mastic] to underside of window stools. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 7 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) 2.5 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating ftnishes. B. Comply with SSPC-P AI, "Paint Application Specification No.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for steel sheet finishes. C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum ftnishes. 1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A4l complying with AAMA 6l1. 2. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: [Dark bronze] [As selected from full range of industry colors and color densities] . 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42Rlx, with thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primerltopcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of l.5 mils (0.04 mm). 4. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than l.5 mils (0.04 nnn). 5. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 nnn) for topcoat. 6. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C 1 2C40Rlx, with topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Comply with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605]. 7. High-Performance Organic Finish ([3] [4]-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40Rlx, with color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Comply with AAMA 2605. a. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample ] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet Finishes: 1. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition. 2. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply specified shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 4. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 2-coat, baked- enamel ftnish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of2 mils (0.05 mm). ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 8 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) 5. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than l.5 mils (0.04 mm). 6. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil ((l.02 mm) for topcoat. a. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>. E. Steel Sheet Finishes: 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1 or SSPC-SP 8. 2. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. 3. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply shop primer. 4. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat with a minimum dry film thickness of2 mils (0.05 mm). 5. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less than l.5 mils (0.04 mm). a. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match sample] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>. F. Stainless-Steel Finishes: 1. General: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into fInish. 2. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B fInish. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No.4 finish. 4. Dull Satin Finish: No.6 finish. 5. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No.7 fInish. 6. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No.8 fInish. G. Copper-Alloy Finishes: Finish designations for copper alloys comply with the system established for designating copper-alloy fInish systems defmed in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products." 1. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M2l-06x, with lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in 2 coats, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). 2. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered: M3l-M34-06x, with lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in 2 coats, with interim drying, to a total thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm). 3. Statuary Conversion Coating over Satin Finish: M3l-C55 with color to match sample. ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - 9 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/03 (R 05/06) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.l INSTALLATION A. Locate and place ornamental formed-metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. D. Apply joint treatment at joints of spackled-seam-type metal column covers. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies." E. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refInished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refInish entire unit or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05730END OF SECTION 05730 ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 - lO Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) SECTION 05811 - ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes architectural joint systems for building [interiors] [and] [exteriors]. B. See Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in architectural-joint-system frames furnished, but not installed, in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Provide placement drawings, including line diagrams and details[, and a tabular schedule of architectural joint systems]. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Options: Drawings are based on the specific systems indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)"] [and] [ICC A117.1]. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide architectural joint system and fITe-barrier assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fITe resistance per UL 2079[ or ASTM E 1966] by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Hose Stream Test: Wall-to-wall and wall-to-ceiling assemblies shall be subjected to hose stream testing. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of exterior wall[ and soffit] joint systems with roof expanSIOn assemblies specified in Division 7. ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 058ll-l Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 606l-T6 for sheet and plate. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials. 2. Mill Finish. 3. Clear Anodic Finish: [Class II, clear anodic coating] [Class I, clear anodic coating] complying with AAMA 6ll. 4. Color Anodic Finish: [Class II, color anodic coating] [Class I, color anodic coating] complying with AAMA 6ll. 5. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): Comply with AAMA 2604 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 for plates, sheet, and strips. C. Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, UNS Alloy C26000 for half hard sheet and coil. D. Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy C38500 for extrusions; Alloy C23000 red brass for plates. E. Moisture Barrier: [pVC, minimum 30 mils thick] [EPDM, minimum 45 mils thick] [Santoprene ]. F. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, fasteners, and other accessories as required for complete installations. 2.2 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. General: Provide joint systems of design indicated. 1. Furnish in longest practicable lengths to minimize splicing. Install with hairline mitered comers where joint changes direction. 2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces to provide continuous joint systems. B. Design architectural joint systems for the following size and movement characteristics: 1. Nominal Joint Width: [As indicated on Drawings ] [As scheduled] <Insert width>. 2. Movement Capability: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] <Insert movement capability> . 3. Type of Movement: [As indicated on Drawings] [As scheduled] [Thermal] [Seismic]. 2.3 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING INTERIORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811-2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products [indicated on Drawings] [specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products] or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. JointMasterllnPro Corporation. 5. Michael Rizza Company, LLC. 6. MM Systems Corporation. 7. Nystrom, Inc. 8. Watson Bowman Acme Corp. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. [Floor-to-Floor] [and] [Floor-to-Wall] Joint Systems: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Type: [Cover plate] [Center plate] [Glide plate] [Hidden sightline] [Pan]. a. Exposed Metal: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Brass]. l) Finish: Manufacturer's standard fInish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class IT, clear anodic]. 3. Type: [Elastomeric] [Dual elastomeric] seal. a. Exposed Metal: [ Aluminum] [Bronze] [Brass]. l) Finish: Manufacturer's standard fInish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class IT, clear anodic]. b. Seal Material: [Santoprene] <Insert material>. 1) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 4. Cover-Plate Design: [plain] [Serrated] [Abrasive filled]. 5. Cover-Plate Design: Recessed to accept field-applied finish materials. a. Recess Depth: [To accommodate adjacent flooring] <Insert depth>. 6. Attachment Method: [Mechanical anchors] [Cast in]. 7. Load Capacity: [Standard] [Heavy] [Extra heavy] duty. 8. Fire-Resistance Rating: [Match adjacent construction] <Insert rating>. 9. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard. E. [Wall-to-Wall] [and] [Wall Corner] Joint Systems: ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Type: [Vertical cover plate] [Glide plate] [Hidden sightline] [Snap-on cover] [Clip- in cover]. a. Exposed Metal: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Brass]. 1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class II, clear anodic] [Class I, color anodic] [Class II, color anodic] [High-performance organic]. a) Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors] <Insert color>. 3. Type: [Elastomeric seal] [Dual elastomeric seal] [Accordion]. a. Exposed Metal: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Brass]. 1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class II, clear anodic] [Class I, color anodic] [Class II, color anodic] [High-performance organic]. a) Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. b. Seal Material: [Santoprene] [pVC] <Insert material>. 1) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 4. Type: Flat seal. a. Seal Material: [Santoprene] <Insert material>. l) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 5. Fire-Resistance Rating: [Match adjacent construction] <Insert rating>. 6. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard. F. [Wall-to-Ceiling] [and] [Ceiling-to-Ceiling] Joint Systems: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Type: [Cover plate] [Glide plate] [Snap-on cover] [Clip-in cover]. a. Exposed Metal: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Brass]. l) Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class II, clear anodic] [Class I, color anodic] [Class II, color anodic] [High-performance organic]. ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811-4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) a) Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. 3. Type: [Elastomeric seal] [Dual elastomeric seal] [Accordion]. a. Exposed Metal: [Aluminum] [Bronze] [Brass]. 1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard fInish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class IT, clear anodic] [Class I, color anodic] [Class IT, color anodic] [IDgh-performance organic]. a) Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. b. Seal Material: [Santoprene] [PVC] <Insert material>. 1) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 4. Type: Flat seal. a. Seal Material: [Santoprene] <Insert material>. 1) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 5. Fire-Resistance Rating: [Match adjacent construction] <Insert rating>. 6. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard. 2.4 ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS FOR BUILDING EXTERIORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products [indicated on Drawings] [specified in individual subparagraphs below as basis-of-design products] or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc. 2. Balco, Inc. 3. Capital Services. 4. Construction Specialties, Inc. 5. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. 6. E-Poxy Engineered Materials, LLC. 7. Erie Metal Specialties. 8. JointMaster/InPro Corporation. 9. LymTallntemational, Inc. 10. Michael Rizza Company, LLC. ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) ll. MM Systems Corporation. 12. Nystrom, Inc. 13. R. J. Watson, Inc. 14. Schul International, Inc. 15. Stellar-Mark, Inc. 16. Thermal-Chem. 17. Tremco Sealant/Weatherproofmg Division. l8. Watson Bowman Acme Corp. 19. Williams Products, Inc. 20. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Architectural Joint Systems for Exterior Walls[ and Soffits]: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Type: Vertical cover-plate. a. Exposed Metal: [Aluminum] [Stainless steel]. 1) Finish: Manufacturer's standard fInish. 2) Finish: [Mill] [Class I, clear anodic] [Class II, clear anodic] [Class I, color anodic] [Class II, color anodic] [ffigh-performance organic]. a) Color: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. 3) Finish: No. [2B] [4]. b. Secondary Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-elastomeric seal designed to prevent water and moisture infiltration. 3. Type: Flat seal. a. Seal Material: [Santoprene] <Insert material>. 1) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. b. Secondary Seal: Manufacturer's standard extruded-elastomeric seal designed to prevent water and moisture infiltration. c. Pantograph Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard nylon pantographic wind-load support mechanism with stainless-steel fasteners. 4. Type: Preformed cellular foam. a. Foam Material: crosslinked, [Polyurethane] . [Manufacturer's standard] [Non-extruded, low-density, nitrogen-blown, ethylene-vinyl-acetate copolymer] 1) Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811-6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) 2.5 5. Fire-Resistance Rating: [Match adjacent construction] <Insert rating>. FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating fInishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.l A. B. C. D. 3.2 A. B. PREPARATION Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Repair concrete slabs and blockouts using manufacturer's recommended repair grout. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing joint systems. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing architectural joint assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install joint systems. 1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining fInished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. 3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. 4. Locate in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. 5. Support underside of frames continuously to prevent vertical deflection when in service. 6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 111m) o.c. C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. l. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer. ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 08/04) E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate so complete assemblies comply with assembly performance requirements. 1. Fire Barriers: Install fIre barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices. F. Water Barrier: Provide water barrier at exterior joints and where called for on Drawings. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until fInish work in adjacent areas is complete. B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. END OF SECTION 058ll ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 05811 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/04 (R 05/06) SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofmg. 2. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofmg. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: l. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For dampproofmg, including printed statement ofVOC content. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofmg in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofmg has cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.l COLD-APPLIED, CUT -BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ChemMasters Corp. 2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 3. Gardner Gibson, Inc. 4. Henry Company. 5. Kamak Corporation. 6. Koppers Inc. 7. Malarkey Roofing Products. 8. Meadows, W. R., Inc. 9. Tamms Industries, Inc. lO. <Insert manufacturer's name.> BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/04 (R 05/06) C. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered. D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered [or nonfibered]. E. VOC Content: [250 gIL] [2.5 lb/gal. (300 g!l,)] [4.2Ib/gal. (500 g/L)] or less. 2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING C. D. E. F. 2.3 A. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ChemMasters Corp. 2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 3. Gardner Gibson, Inc. 4. Henry Company. 5. Kamak Corporation. 6. Koppers Inc. 7. Malarkey Roofmg Products. 8. Meadows, W. R., Inc. 9. Tamms Industries, Inc. 10. <Insert manufacturer's name.> Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type ill, Class 1. VOC Content: [Zero] [0.25Ib/gal. (30 gIL) or less]. PROTECTION COURSE Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8-inch- (3-nml-) thick, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film. B. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced on [one] [or] [both] side(s) with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per ASTM C 272. C. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 111m) with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55kPa) per ASTM D 1621. D. Protection Course, Roll-Roofmg Type: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type ill. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form l1/04 (R 05/06) 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cut-Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type ill, Class l, except diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer. C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. 3.2 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofmg. B. Apply dampproofmg to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces [building interior] [occupied space]. 1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. 2. Extend l2 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3. Install flashings and comer protection stripping at internal and external comers, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofmg. Dampproofmg coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. C. Apply dampproofmg to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls. D. Apply dampproofmg to provide continuous plane of protection on interior face of above-grade, exterior [concrete] [and] [masonry] [single-wythe masonry] walls unless walls are indicated to receive direct application of paint. 3.3 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. On Concrete Foundations[ and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls]: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.5 L1sq. In) for first coat and 1 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.4 Lisq. m) for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gaL/lOO sq. ft. (1.6 L/sq. m). BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/04 (R 05/06) B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 ga1.l100 sq. ft. (1.6 Llsq. m). C. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than l.25 gal.l100 sq. ft. (0.5 Llsq. m). D. On Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.5 L/sq. m). E. On Concrete Backup for [Stone Veneer Assemblies] [and] [Dimension Stone Cladding]: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m). F. On Masonry Backup for [Stone Veneer Assemblies] [and] [Dimension Stone Cladding]: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal.llOO sq. ft. (004 L1sq. m). G. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m). 304 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. On Concrete Foundations[ and Parged Masonry Foundation Walls]: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal.l100 sq. ft. (0.6 L/sq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.4 L1sq. m) for second coat, 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./l00 sq. ft. (1.2 L/sq. m), or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./lOO sq. ft. (1.6 L1sq. m). B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 5 gal./lOO sq. ft. (2 L1sq. m). C. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.5 L1sq. m). D. On Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.5 L1sq. m). E. On Concrete Backup for [Stone Veneer Assemblies] [and] [Dimension Stone Cladding]: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 ga1.l100 sq. ft. (0.4 L/sq. m). F. On Masonry Backup for [Stone Veneer Assemblies] [and] [Dimension Stone Cladding]: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.4 L1sq. m). G. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./lOO sq. ft. (004 L1sq. m). H. On Interior Face of Exterior Concrete Walls: Where above grade and indicated to be furred and fInished, apply 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./1 00 sq. ft. (004 L/sq. m). 1. On Interior Face of [Single-Wythe ]Exterior Masonry Walls: Where above grade and indicated to be furred and finished, apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.4 L1sq. m). BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form l1/04 (R 05/06) 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofmg. Comply with dampproofmg material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course. l. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by protection board manufacturer over cured coating. 2. Install protection course [on same day] [within 24 hours] of installation of dampproofmg (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion. END OF SECTION 07ll5END OF SECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - 5 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) SECTION 07131 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l. Modified bituminous sheet waterproof mg. 2. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofmg, fabric reinforced. 3. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 4. Insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproof mg. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofmg, and other termination conditions. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproof mg. D. Special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A fIrm that is [approved or licensed by] [acceptable to] waterproofmg manufacturer for installation of waterproofmg required for this Project. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 104 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofmg within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 1 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofmg material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [Three] [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Not less than 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils (lAmm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, polyethylene fIlm with release liner on adhesive side[ and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction]. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. b. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 7100. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. d. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet. e. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene [3000] [4000]. f. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. h. Nervastral, Inc.; BITU-MEM. 1. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 700-SM. J. Polyguard Products; Polyguard 650. k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Plastiwrap 60. l. Tamko Roofmg Products, Inc.; TW-60. m. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi 0.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C); ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of lI8-inch (3-1llil1) movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (l80 N) minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet (45 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131 - 2 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 penns (2.9 nglPa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96, Water Method. B. Modified Bituminous Sheet, Fabric Reinforced: 60-mil- (1.5-111111-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of rubberized-asphalt membrane embedded in spun-bonded polyester or fiberglass nonwoven fabric reinforcement laminated to a 0.50-mil- (O.OI-mm-) thick polyester film with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Protecto Wrap Company; Jiffy Seal 140/60. b. Royston Laboratories, Div. of Chase Corporation; Royal-Gard. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Physical Properties: a. Pliability: No cracks when bent 180 degrees over a I-inch (25-rnm) mandrel at minus 25 deg F (minus 32 deg C); ASTM D 146. b. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet (45 m) minimum. c. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 nglPa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96, Water Method. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid [waterborne] [solvent-borne] pruner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofmg material. C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofmg material. D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity. E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating. F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproof mg. G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer. H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick, predrilled at 9-inch (229-mm) centers. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 0713l-3 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) 1. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced- asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [1/4 inch (6 mm)], nominal. 2. Thickness: l/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 n1l11), nominal, elsewhere. 3. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for type of protection course. J. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced [one side] [or] [both sides] with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 111111), with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D l621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per ASTM C 272. K. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal thickness l/4 inch (6 mm) with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621. L. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578 Type X, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. M. Protection Course: Molded-polystyrene board insulation, ASTM C 578, Type I, O.90-lb/cu. ft. (15-kgicu. m) minimum density, I-inch (25-111111) minimum thickness. 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage." B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded- plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m). C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (OA25-mm) sieve laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 L/min. per m). 204 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [square] [ or] [shiplap] edged. 1. Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2. Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 0713l - 4 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) 4. Type V, lOO-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength. B. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels. C. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. D. Unfaced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type Vll, 60-psi (414-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplapped or channel edges and with 1 side having ribbed drainage channels. E. Geotextile-Faced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type Vll, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofmg to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fms, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. F. Bridge and cover [isolation joints] [expansion joints] [and] discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck-to-deckjoints with overlapping sheet strips. 1. Invert and loosely lay fIrst sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate. G. Comers: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside comers according to ASTM D 6135. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 0713l - 5 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofmg and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofmg in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and fmnly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-l/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low point to high point of decks to ensure that side laps shed water. E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic. G. Install sheet waterproofmg and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions. I. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately. J. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofmg that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives[ or mechanical fasteners] that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install [board insulation] [protection course] before installing drainage panels. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 0713l-6 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 02/06) 3 A INSULATION INST ALLA TION A. Install [one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness] [and] [insulation drainage panels] over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) ofprojections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive or tape applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofmg from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed [board insulation] [insulation drainage panels] from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07131-7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 SECTION 07132 - ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l. Butyl rubber sheet waterproof mg. 2. EPDM rubber sheet waterproofing. 3. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 4. Insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproof mg. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofmg, and other termination conditions. C. Product test reports. D. Special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A fIrm that is [approved or licensed by] [acceptable to] waterproofmg manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofmg requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 104 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofmg within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofmg to a damp or wet substrate. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofmg material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [10] [20] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Butyl Rubber Sheet: ASTM D 6134, Type II, [60-mil- (1.5-mm-)] [90-mil- (2.3-mm-)] [120- mil- (3.0-mm-)] thick flexible sheet, unreinforced, formed from isobutyl ene-isoprene rubber. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Sure-Seal Butyl. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. EPDM Rubber Sheet: ASTM D 6134, Type I, 60-mi1- (l.5-mm-) thick flexible sheet, unreinforced, formed from EPDM. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Sure-Seal EPDM. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproof mg. l. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Concealed Sheet Flashing: Same material, construction, and thickness as sheet waterproofmg or 60-lnil- (1.5-mm-) thick, uncured EPDM as required by manufacturer. C. Exposed Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick EPDM, cured or uncured, as required by manufacturer. D. Bonding Adhesives: Adhesive for bonding polymeric sheets and sheet flashings to substrates and projections. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 E. Splicing Cement and Cleaner: Single-component butyl splicing cement and solvent-based splice cleaner. 1. Butyl Gum Tape: 30-mil- (0.76-m111-) thick-by-6-1/4-inch- (160-m111-) wide, uncured butyl with polyethylene release film. F. Lap Sealant: Single-component sealant. G. In-Seam Sealant: Single-component sealant. H. Water Cutoff Mastic: Butyl mastic sealant. 1. Waterproofmg and Sheet Flashing Accessories: Provide sealants, pourable sealers, cone and vent flashings, inside and outside comer flashings, termination reglets, and other accessories recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for intended use. J. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide, prepunched, with zinc-alloy-body fasteners and stainless-steel pins. K. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced- asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: [118 inch (3 mm)] [1/4 inch (6 mm)], nominal. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm), nominal, elsewhere. 3. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for type of protection course. L. Protection Course: Faced, fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation sandwiched between 2 sheets of plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm), with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per ASTM C 272. M. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm) with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per ASTM D 1621. N. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578, Type X, 1/2 inch (1 3 mm) thick. O. Protection Course: Molded-polystyrene board insulation, ASTM C 578, Type I, O.90-1b/cu. ft. (IS-kg/cu. m) minimum density, I-inch (25-mm) minimum thickness. 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage." B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-m111) sieve laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded- ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 Llmin. per m). C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (OA2S-mm) sieve laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 Llmin. per m). 204 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [square] [or] [shiplap] edged. 1. Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2. Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VII, 60-psi (4l4-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 4. Type V, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength. B. Unfaced Walllnsulatioll Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels. C. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. D. Unfaced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type VB, 60-psi (414-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplapped or channel edges and with 1 side having ribbed drainage channels. E. Geotextile-Faced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofmg application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofmg to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 3.2 A. B. C. D. E. F. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fms, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofmg and at drains and protrusions. FULLY ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION Install fully adhered sheets over entire area to receive waterproofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 5843. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. Apply bonding adhesive to substrates at required rate and allow to partially dry. Apply bonding adhesive to sheets and firmly adhere sheets to substrates. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet. Install fully adhered sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproof mg. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending beyond repaired areas in all directions. G. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible. 1. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal sheet waterproofmg in place with clamping ring. 3.3 PARTIALLY ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install partially adhered sheets over entire area to receive waterproofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. C. Apply bonding adhesive to the following areas of substrates and to each sheet at required rate and allow to partially dry: 1. Upper 25 percent of length of each sheet and 18 inches (457 mm) around perimeter of each sheet. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 D. Firmly adhere sheets to substrate. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet. E. Install partially adhered sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproof mg. F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending beyond repaired areas in all directions. 304 COMPARTMENTED, LOOSELY LAID SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install compartmented, loosely laid sheets over entire area to receive waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. C. Apply continuous beads of water cutoff mastic, of size recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer, to substrates in a 60-by-60-inch (1500-by-1500-mm) grid pattern before installing sheet. D. Apply sheets with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible. E. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal sheet waterproofmg in place with clamping ring. F. Install compartmented, loosely laid sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproof mg. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.5 SEAM INSTALLATION A. Cement Splice: Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement and in-seam sealant, and ftrmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a splice not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide and to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet terminations. B. Cement and Tape Splice: Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement and butyl gum tape, and fmnly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet terminations. 3.6 SHEET FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to waterproofmg manufacturer's written instructions. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFINGn 07132 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 B. Form wall flashings using exposed sheet flashing. C. Extend deck sheet waterproofmg to form wall flashings. 1. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside comers with uncured sheet flashing. 2. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. D. Cover expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints by extending deck sheet waterproofmg over joints. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ with mechanically anchored termination bars]. 3.7 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of membrane. 1. [Molded-sheet drainage panels] [Insulation drainage panels] [Board insulation] may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofmg manufacturer. 3.8 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives[ or mechanical fasteners] that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. l. For vertical applications, install [board insulation] [protection course] before installing drainage panels. 3.9 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install [one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness] [and] [insulation drainage panels] over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, place and secure insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 3.10 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed [board insulation] [insulation drainage panels] from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07132 ELASTOMERIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07132 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 SECTION 07133 - THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. PVC sheet waterproofing. 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 3. Insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproof mg. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofmg, and other termination conditions. C. Product test reports. D. Special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A fIrm that is [approved or licensed by] [acceptable to] waterproofmg manufacturer for installation ofwaterproofmg required for this Project. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 104 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofmg within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofmg to a damp or wet substrate. THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which [manufacturer agrees] [manufacturer and Installer agree] to repair or replace waterproofmg that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Samafil US Division, Sarnafil, Inc.; System [1000] [2000] [3000] [4001] [4002]. 2. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. PVC Sheet: [80-mil- (2.0-mm-)] [96-mil- (2.4-mm-)] [120-mil- (3.0-mm-)] thick, flexible sheet compounded from PVC resin, plasticizers, stabilizers, fillers, and pigments and reinforced with nonwoven fiberglass. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Concealed Sheet Flashing: Sheet flashing of same material, construction, and thickness as sheet waterproof mg. C. Exposed Sheet Flashing: [60-mil- (1.5-mm-)] [80-mil- (2.0-mm-)] [96-mil- (2.4-mm-)] thick, coated PVC; reinforced with nonwoven fiberglass. D. Bonding Adhesives: Adhesive for bonding polymeric sheets and sheet flashings to substrates and projections. E. Containment Strip: Manufacturer's standard asphalt-resistant, 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, PVC strip; reinforced with nonwoven fiberglass; 12 inches (300 mm) wide. F. Geotextile Leveling Layer: Manufacturer's standard nonwoven polypropylene. G. Separation Layer: O.160-inch- (4.06-mm-) thick, nonwoven polyester felt. THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 H. Control Test Drain: Manufacturer's standard four-component pipe assembly. 1. Waterproofmg and Sheet Flashing Accessories: Provide PVC discs, sealants, pourable sealers, cone and vent flashings, inside and outside comer flashings, termination reglets, clamps, compression bars, tapes, and other accessories recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer for intended use. J. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel or aluminum bars, prepunched, with nylon anchors and stainless-steel pins. K. Protection Course: [39-mil- (1.0-mm)- thick, hot-air-weldable, HDPE] [51-mil- (1.3-mm)- thick, hot-air-weldable, PVC] sheet protection layer. 2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage." B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to 1 side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of at least 15 gpm per ft. (188 Llmin. per m). C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve laminated to 1 side of a 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 4 gpm per ft. (49 Llmin. per m). 204 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [ square] [ or] [shiplap] edged. l. Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2. Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 4. Type V, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength. B. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels. C. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05104 D. Unfaced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type Vll, 60-psi (414-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplapped or channel edges and with 1 side having ribbed drainage channels. E. Geotextile-Faced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with 1 side having grooved drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven geotextile filter fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. SURFACE PREPARATION Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. Remove fms, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofmg and at drains and protrusions. 3.2 FULLY ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install fully adhered sheets over entire area to receIve waterproofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. C. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate at required rate and allow to partially dry. D. Apply bonding adhesive to sheets and firmly adhere sheets to substrate. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice areas of sheets. E. Secure terminations and perimeter of deck sheet waterproofmg with PVC cord and metal termination bars anchored 12 inches (300 Imn) o.c. F. Apply sheet waterproofmg with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible. THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal sheet waterproofmg in place with clamping ring. H. Install fully adhered sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproof mg. I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofmg not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.3 LOOSELY LAID SHEET INSTALLATION A. General: Install loosely laid sheets over entire area to receive waterproofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install geotextile leveling layer directly over substrates and maintain minimum side and end laps. 2. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. 3. Install loosely laid sheets and auxiliary materials to tie into adjoining waterproofing. 4. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofmg not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending beyond repaired areas in all directions. B. Horizontal Applications: Secure terminations and perimeter of [deck] [mud-slab] sheet waterproofmg with PVC cord and metal termination bars anchored 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 1. Apply sheets with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible. 2. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal sheet in place with clamping ring. C. Vertical Applications: Mechanically attach leveling layer with 4-inch- (lOO-nnn-) minimum diameter, reinforced PVC sheet discs and fasteners at required spacings. 1. Hot-air-weld sheet waterproofmg to discs. 2. Secure top termination of waterproofmg [with continuous, extruded-aluminum, surface-mounted, termination reglet anchored at spacings recommended by waterproofing manufacturer] [by hot-air welding to containment strips] [according to manufacturer's written instructions]. 3. Terminate waterproofing on footing as follows: a. Scarify concrete footing under containment strips to an amplitude of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and containment strip at required rate and allow to partially dry. Firmly adhere containment strip to substrate. b. Hot-air-weld sheet waterproofmg to containment strips. 304 COMPARTMENTED, LOOSELY LAID SHEET INSTALLATION A. Install compartmented, loosely laid sheets over entire area to receive waterproofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions. THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 B. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required. Stagger end laps. C. Scarify concrete deck under containment strips to an amplitude of l/l6 inch (1.6 mm). Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and containment strip at required rate and allow to partially dry. 1. Firmly adhere containment strips to substrates to form grids 25 feet (7.6 m) square. D. Drill hole in decks and install control test drain within each grid. E. Install geotextile leveling layer directly over substrate with edges lapped and extend onto containment strips. F. Hot-air-weld sheet waterproofmg to containment strips. G. Secure terminations and perimeter of deck sheet waterproofmg with PVC cord and metal termination bars anchored 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. H. Apply sheets with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible. 1. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal sheets in place with clamping ring. J. Install compartmented, loosely laid sheet waterproofmg and auxiliary materials to tie into existing waterproof mg. K. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofmg extending beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.5 SEAM INSTALLATION A. Hot-air-weld side and end laps of overlapping sheets according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Inspect outside edge of seams with pointed metal probe and ensure completed laps lay flat and are free of voids, fishmouths, or wrinkles. 3.6 SHEET FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to waterproofmg manufacturer's written instructions. B. Form wall flashings using exposed sheet flashing. C. Extend sheet flashings over deck sheet waterproof mg. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside comer accessories with sheet flashing. 1. Hot-air-weld joints with deck sheet and end laps of overlapping sheet flashings and accessories to ensure a watertight seam installation. D. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ with mechanically anchored termination bars]. THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 3.7 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION A. Install separation layer over sheet waterproofmg before placing protection course. B. Install protection course over separation layer according to manufacturer's written instructions and before beginning subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of membrane. 3.8 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives[ or mechanical fasteners] that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed panels during subsequent construction. 3.9 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install [one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness] [and] [insulation drainage panels] over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, place and secure insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofmg membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofmg from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed [board insulation] [insulation drainage panels] from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07133 THERMOPLASTIC SHEET WATERPROOFING 07133 - 7 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 SECTION 07141 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-component polyurethane waterproof mg. 2. Two-component polyurethane waterproofing. 3. Polyester waterproofmg. 4. Latex-rubber waterproofing. B. Related Section: Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproof mg. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofmg, and other termination conditions. C. Product test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is [approved or licensed by] [acceptable to] waterproofmg manufacturer for installation ofwaterproofmg required for this Project. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site]<Insert location>. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofmg within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofmg to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofmg manufacturer[ and Installer] agree to repair or replace waterproofmg that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING A. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofmg: Comply [with ASTM C 836 and ]with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 6800. b. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Seamless Membrane. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-525. d. CETCO; LDC 60. e. Degussa Building Systems; HLM 5000. f. Karnak Corporation; One-Kote System. g. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Sealtight Meadow-PrufSeamless h. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; Mer-Thane 320. 1. Neogard, Div. ofJones-Blair; Neogard 7401. J. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; [Elasto-Deck B.T.] [Elasto-Deck B.T. 100% Solids] [Elasto-Deck B.T. mOl. k. Tremco Incorporated; [Tremproof60] [Vulkem 250 GC] [Vulkem 201]. 1. United Coatings; Elastall1000. m. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Single-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofmg: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. 3M; Scotch Clad 5893/5864. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 101. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 2.2 TWO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING A. Two-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofmg: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Gaco Western Inc.; LM-60. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 222. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Two-Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofmg: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [pro\'ide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofmg Inc.; CCW 703 Liquisea1. b. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; [Elasto-Deck B.T. 1000] [Elasto-Deck B.T. Two-Component] . c. 3M; FC 100. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 102. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.3 POLYESTER WATERPROOFING A. Two-Component, Reinforced, Unsaturated Polyester Waterproofmg: ASTM C 836 and ]with manufacturer's written physical requirements. Comply [with 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Kemper System, Inc.; Kemperol BR. b. Landmark Products, Inc.; Triflex D. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.4 LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING A. Two-Component, Reinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Comply [with ASTM C 836 and ]with manufacturer's written physical requirements. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Procor Deck System 3R. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory-formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer. B. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil- (1.3-nn11-) minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene. I. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive. C. Membrane-Reinforcing Fabric: Nonwoven, needle-punched white polyester fabric. D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. 2.6 PROTECTION COURSE A. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced- asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: [1/8 inch (3 mID)] [1/4 inch (6 mm)], nominal. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 nnn), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm), nominal, elsewhere. 3. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for type of protection course. B. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced [one] [or] [both] side(s) with plastic film, nominal thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan-folded, rigid, extruded-polystyrene board insulation; nominal thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm). D. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of molded-polystyrene board insulation faced both sides with plastic f1lm, nominal thickness of [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)]. E. Protection Course: Unfaced, extruded-polystyrene board insulation; ASTM C 578, Type X, 1/2 inch (13 lllin) thick. F. Protection Course: Molded-polystyrene board insulation, ASTM C 578, Type I, O.90-1b/cu. ft. (15-kgicu. m) minimum density, I-inch (25-mm) minimum thickness. 2.7 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage." B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (O.21-lnm) sieve laminated to one side[ with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded- COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 Llmin. per m). C. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43-nlm) sieve, laminated to one side[ with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 Llmin. per m). 2.8 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [square] [ or] [shiplap] edged. 1. Type IV, 25-psi (1 73-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2. Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VII, 60-psi (4 1 4-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 4. Type V, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength. B. Unfaced, Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi {I 73-kPa)] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. C. Geotextile-Faced, Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels faced with a nonwoven-geotextile filter fabric. D. Unfaced, Plaza Deck, Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with shiplapped or channel edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels. E. Geotextile-Faced, Plaza Deck, Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels faced with manufacturer's standard, nonwoven-geotextile filter fabric. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofmg application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofmg fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fms, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. F. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofmg and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to [ASTM C 898] [ASTM C 1471] and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply waterproofmg in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the ftrst preparation coat when recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer. G. Prepare, treat, rout, and ftll joints and cracks in substrate according to [ASTM C 898] [ASTM C 1471] and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces. H. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofmg manufacturer's written instructions. I. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. 3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to [ASTM C 898] [ASTM C 1471] and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Unreinforced Waterproofmg Applications: 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofmg to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry fIlm thickness of [60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils (1.3 mm) at any point] [120 mils (3 mm)] <Insert thickness>. C. Reinforced Waterproofmg Applications: 1. Apply ftrst coat of waterproofmg, embed membrane-reinforcing fabric, and apply second coat of waterproofing to completely saturate reinforcing fabric and to obtain a seamless reinforced membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film total thickness of [70 mils (1.8 mm)] [80 mils (2 mm)] [120 mils (3 mm)] <Insert thickness>. D. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. [Molded-sheet drainage panels] [Insulation drainage panels] [Board insulation] may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofmg manufacturer. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 6 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/05 3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives[ or mechanical fasteners] that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install [board insulation] [protection course] before installing drainage panels. 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install [one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness] [insulation drainage panels] over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations. B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer. C. On horizontal surfaces, place insulation units unadhered according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 3.5 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofmg from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 7 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 SECTION 07142 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rubberized-asphalt waterproofmg membrane [, unreinforced] [, reinforced]. 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 3. Insulation. 4. Plaza deck pavers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproof mg. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofmg, and other termination conditions. C. Product test reports. D. Sample warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A ftrm that is [approved or licensed by] [acceptable to] manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project and is eligible to receive special warranties specified. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofmg within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofmg manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C). 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within specified warranty period. HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 07142 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 1. Warranty Period: [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Hot Fluid-Applied, Rubberized-Asphalt Waterproofmg Membrane: Single component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Monolithic Membrane 6125. b. American Permaquik Inc.; Permaquik 6100. c. Barrett Company; Ram-Tough 250. d. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-500R. e. Henry Company; 790-11. f. Tamko Waterproofmg; TW-Hot Melt. g. Tremco Incorporated; Tremproof 150. h. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.2 FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: 50-mil- (1.3-nnn-) minimum, uncured sheet neoprene as follows: 1. Tensile Strength: 1400 psi (9.6 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C. 2. Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412. 3. Tear Resistance: 125 psi (860 kPa) minimum; ASTM D 624, Die C. 4. Brittleness: Does not break at minus 30 deg F (34 deg C); ASTM D 2137. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer. B. Elastomeric Sheet: 50-mil- (l.3-nnn-) minimum, uncured sheet neoprene as follows: 1. Tensile Strength: 1400 psi (9.6 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C. 2. Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412. 3. Tear Resistance: 125 psi (860 kPa) minimum; ASTM D 624, Die C. 4. Brittleness: Does not break at minus 30 deg F (34 deg C); ASTM D 2137. C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars; approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. D. Sealants and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories. HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 07142 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 E. Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended, spun-bonded polyester fabric. F. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced- asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and nominal thickness of [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [1/4 inch (6 mm)]. G. Protection Course: Manufacturer's standard, 80- to 90-mil- (2.0- to 2.3-mm-) thick, fiberglass- reinforced rubberized asphalt or modified bituminous sheet. 2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (O.21-mm) sieve, laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded- plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpmlft. (112 to 188 L!min. per m). B. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43-mm) sieve, laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric fIlm bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpmlft. (35 L/min. per m). 2.5 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [square] [or] [shiplap] edged. 1. Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 2. Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 3. Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive strength. 4. Type V, 100-psi (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength. B. Unfaced Plaza Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa)] minimum compressive strength; unfaced; fabricated with ship lapped or channel edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels. 2.6 PLAZA DECK P AVERS A. Plaza Deck Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, [square edged] [with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm)], manufactured for use as plaza deck pavers; minimum compressive strength [7500 psi (52 MPa)] [6500 psi (45 MPa)] <Insert value>, ASTM C 140; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67. HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 07142 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Hanover Architectural Products. b. Hastings Pavement Company, LLC. c. Roofblok Limited. d. Sunny Brook Pressed Concrete. e. Wausau Tile, Inc.; Terra-Paving Division. f. Westile Roofmg Products. g. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Thickness [2 inches (51 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 4. Face Size: [18 inches (457 mm) square] [24 inches (610 mm) square] [As indicated] <Insert dimensions and shape>. 5. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. B. Paver Supports: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-density polyethylene, or polyurethane paver support assembly, including [fixed-height] [adjustable or stackable] pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [3/16 inch (5 mm)] [118 to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm)]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofmg to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofmg fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fms, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING 07142 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 3.2 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks, deck drains, comers, and penetrations according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Adhere strip of e1astomeric sheet to substrate in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend elastomeric sheet a minimum of 6 inches (150 111m) on each side of moving joints and cracks or joints and cracks exceeding 118 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond deck drains and penetrations. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over e1astomeric sheet. 2. Embed strip of reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of nonmoving joints and cracks not exceeding 118 inch (3 111n1) thick, and beyond roof drains and penetrations. a. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over reinforcing fabric. B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints with elastomeric sheet extended a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of joints and adhere to substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install e1astomeric flashing sheets at terminations of waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow to dry. B. Heat and apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Unreinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to form a uniform, unreinforced, seamless membrane, [180-mil (4.5-mm) minimum thickness] [I80-mil (4.5-mm) average thickness, but not less than 125 mil (3.2 mm) thick]. D. Reinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to a thickness of 90 mils (2.3 mm); embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2 inches (50 mm); spread another l25-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils (5.5 mm) thick. E. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer. F. Cover waterproofmg with protection course with overlapped joints. HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHAL T WATERPROOFING 07142 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 3.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use methods that do not penetrate waterproof mg. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install [board insulation] [protection course] before installing drainage panels. 3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation over waterproofed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PLAZA DECK PAVER INSTALLATION A. Install concrete pavers in locations indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately install [fixed] [adjustable]-height paver pedestals and accessories in locations and to elevations required. Adjust for ftnallevel and slope with shims. C. Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align joint patterns parallel in each direction. D. Install pavers to not vary more than 1/16 inch (1.6 rom) in elevation between adjacent pavers or more than 1/16 inch (1.6 nnn) from surface plane elevation of individual paver. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect waterproofmg from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07142 HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHAL T WATERPROOFING 07142 - 6 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) SECTION 07180 - TRAFFIC COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications: I. [Interior,] [Exterior,] [Interior and exterior,] pedestrian traffic. 2. Vehicular traffic. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For interior field-applied traffic coatings[ and pavement marking paints], including printed statement ofVOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions. D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type offmish indicated. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of traffic coating required, prepared on rigid backing and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. F. Qualification data. G. Material test reports. H. Material certificates. I. Maintenance data. J. Warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of traffic coatings required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: 1. Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer. TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) 2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manufacturer. Obtain secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide traffic coating materials with the frre-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method below for deck type and slopes indicated by an independent testing and inspecting agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Class [A] [B] [C] roof covering per ASTM E 108 [or] [UL 790]. 2. <Insert applicable test requirements.> D. Mockups: Apply mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one representative surface for each traffic coating and each substrate to receive traffic coatings. Apply each coating to at least 200 sq. ft. (18.5 sq. m) of each substrate to demonstrate surface preparation, joint and crack treatment, thickness, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 2. Remove and reapply mockups until they are approved by Architect. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which traffic coating manufacturer agrees to repair or replace traffic coatings that deteriorate during the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1 I 16 inch (1.6 nnn) in width, fire, vandalism, or abuse by snowplow, maintenance equipment, and truck traffic. 1. Deterioration of traffic coatings includes the following: a. Adhesive or cohesive failures. b. Abrasion or tearing failures. c. Surface crazing or spalling. d. Intrusion of water, oils, gasoline, grease, salt, deicer chemicals, or acids into deck substrate. 2. Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957. TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) B. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings[ and pavement marking paints], for use inside the weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and miscellaneous materials that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2.2 TRAFFIC COATING <Insert drawing designation, e.g., Tc-l> A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Advanced Polymer Technology Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>. 2. American Permaquik Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 3. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 4. Degussa Building Systems, Sonneborn Brand Products; <Insert product name or designation> . 5. Dex-O-Tex/Crossfie1d Products Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>. 6. Gaco Western Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 7. General Polymers; <Insert product name or designation>. 8. Key Resin Company; <Insert product name or designation>. 9. Kinsman Corporation/Nox-Crete Products Group; <Insert product name or designation> . 10. LymTal International, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 11. Mer-Kote Products, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 12. Neogard, Division of Jones-Blair; <Insert product name or designation>. 13. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 14. Pecora Corporation; <Insert product name or designation>. 15. POL Y-CARB, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 16. Stellar-Mark; <Insert product name or designation>. 17. Tamms Industries, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 18. 3M Specified Construction Products Division; <Insert product name or designation>. 19. Tremco Incorporated, Sealant/W aterproofmg Division; <Insert product name or designation> . 20. Urethane Polymers International, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 21. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>. 22. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. C. Primer: Manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate and conditions indicated. 1. Material: [Epoxy] [Urethane]. D. Preparatory and Base Coats: Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer. E. Intermediate Coat: [Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Single- or multicomponent, aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Liquid epoxy]. TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 3 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) F. Topcoat: [Single- or multicomponent, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Single- or multicomponent, aliphatic liquid urethane elastomer] [Single- or multi component, aromatic liquid urethane elastomer with UV inhibitors] [Liquid epoxy]. 1. Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] (Match Architect's sample] <Insert color>. G. Component Coat Thicknesses: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following (measured excluding aggregate): 1. Base Coat: <Insert thickness> minimum [ dry] [wet] film thickness. 2. Intermediate Coat: <Insert thickness> minimum [dry] [wet] film thickness. 3. Topcoat: <Insert thickness> minimum [dry] [wet] film thickness. H. Aggregate: [Uniformly graded, washed silicon carbide sand] [Uniformly graded, washed silica sand] [Uniformly graded, washed flint shot silica] [Walnut shell granules] [Aluminum-oxide grit] <Insert aggregate> of particle sizes, shape, and minimum hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. 1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated, but not less than the following: a. Intermediate Coat: [8 to 10 Ibll00 sq. ft. (3.6 to 4.5 kg/l0 sq. m)] [To refusal] <Insert spreading rate>. b. Topcoat: [8 to 10 Ib/lOO sq. ft. (3.6 to 4.5 kg/l0 sq. m)] [As required to achieve slip-resistant finish] <Insert loading>. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Sheet Flashing: Nonstaining. 1. Minimum Thickness: [60 mils (1.5 mm)] [50 mils (1.3 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 2. Material: [Sheet material recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer] [Uncured neoprene sheet] [Cured neoprene sheet] <Insert material>. C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings. TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 4 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) 3.2 3.3 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 3. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by traffic coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry. 4. Verify that substrates are visibly dry and free of moisture. a. Test for moisture vapor transmission by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. b. Test for moisture content by [measuring with an electronic moisture meter] [method recommended in writing by manufacturer] <Insert test method>. 5. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application. B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. C. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D 4259. Do not acid etch. 1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. 2. Remove concrete fIns, ridges, and other projections. 3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form- release agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion. 4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and nonreinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints. c. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip. D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations. TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 5 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 3.5 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). B. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated, and omit aggregate on vertical surfaces. C. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination and damage during application and curing stages. 3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07180END OF SECTION 07180 TRAFFIC COATINGS 07180 - 6 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes [penetrating] [and] [fIlm-forming] water-repellent coatings for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: I. Concrete (unpainted). 2. Cast stone. 3. Brick masonry. 4. Concrete unit masonry (unpainted and unglazed). 5. Portland cement plaster (stucco). 6. Stonework. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which [ manufacturer] [and] [Applicator] agree(s) to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article within [Two] [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. WATER REPELLENTS 07190-1 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) 2.2 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, monomeric compound containing [20] <Insert number> percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 3.3 Ibl gal. (400 glL) or less of VOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; [Dri- Treat] [Sil-Act Multiguard]. b. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Aridox 40M. c. ChemMasters; Aquanil Plus 40. d. Gemite Products, Inc.; Gem Guard SL. e. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; Enviroseal 20. f. Nox-Crete Products Group; [Stifel cG] [Stifel HC] [Stifel SC] [Stifel VC]. g. Pecora Corporation; Klear-Sea19100 S. h. Seal-Krete, Inc.; S-K High Solids. 1. Sonneborn Building Products, a division ofChemRex; White Rox 10 VOC. J. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Baracade Silane 100. k. Wacker Chemical Corp.; 1316. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, monomeric compound containing [20] <Insert number> percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 5 Ib/ga1. (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; ATS-42. b. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Aridox 20M. c. Chemical Products Industries, Inc.; [SW-40M] [SW-244-20] [SW-244-40]. d. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc.; [conspec Silane 20] [conspec Silane 40] [conspec Silane 40 WB] [Weather Seal WB]. e. Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories, a division of Dayton Superior Corporation; J-29-A. f. Hydrozo, a division ofChemRex; Silane 40. g. Sonneborn Building Products, a division ofChemRex; Penetrating Sealer 40. h. Tamms Industries, Inc.; [Baracade Silane 40] [Baracade Silane 40 IPA]. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Pigmented, monomeric compound containing [20] <Insert number> percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 5 Ib/gal. (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Nox Crete Products Group; Nox Carbo b. Wacker Chemical Corp.; Creme C. C. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Colors: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 2 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) D. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, monomeric compound containing [20] <Insert number> percent or more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with more than 5lb/gal. (600 g/L) ofVOCs. I. [A vaUable ]Products: a. Advanced Chemical Technologies, Inc.; [ATS-22] [ATS-I00]. b. Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories, a division of Dayton Superior Corporation; J-29. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> E. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes containing [10] <Insert number> percent or more solids; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 3.3 Ib/gal. (400 glL) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Chemical Products Industries, Inc.; CP-500W. b. ChemMasters; [Spall Guard WB] [Spall Guard WB 10%]. c. Chemprobe Coating Systems, L. P.; Prime A Pell H20. d. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; 303-S. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Weatherguard. f. Hydrozo, a division ofChemRex; Enviroseal40. g. ProSoCo, Inc.; (Natural Stone Treatment] [Siloxane PD] [Siloxane WB Concentrate] . h. SaverSystems, Div. of Meredith, Inc.; Masonry Saver WB. 1. Specco Industries, Inc.; Waterstopper S-10 WB Siloxane. J. Wacker Chemical Corp.; [29A] [290] [100IA] [2001] [SMK 1311]. k. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> F. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes containing [10] <Insert number> percent or more solids; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with 5 Ib/ga1. (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Dayton/Richmond Concrete Accessories, a division of Dayton Superior Corporation; [J-26-WB] [J-27-WB]. b. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; [303-C] [D 50 W] [Salt Bloc]. c. Gemite Products, Inc.; Gem Guard SX WB. d. Pecora Corporation; 940S VOC. e. Specco Industries, Inc.; Waterstopper S-20 WB Siloxane. f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> G. Siloxane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, oligomerous alkylalkoxysiloxanes containing [10] <Insert number> percent or more solids; with alcohol, ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and with more than 5 Iblgal. (600 g/L) ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Chemical Products Industries, Inc.; [CP-250] [CP-500 Premium]. WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 3 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) b. Chemprobe Coating Systems, L. P.; [Prime A Pe1l200] [Prime A Pell N. S.]. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Weatherguard VOX. d. ProSoCo, Inc.; [B 40] [Paver Enhanser]. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> H. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blends with 3.3 Ib/ga1. (400 g/L) orless ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; [Aridox 40] [Aridox 40 VOC] [Aridsil VOC]. b. Chemprobe Coating Systems, L. P.; Deck A Pell15%. c. Gemite Products, Inc.; Gem Guard SX. d. Hydrozo, a division ofChemRex; [EnviroseaI7] [Hydrozo 100]. e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; [Aquapel] [Hydroblock] [Hydropel WB]. f. Pecora Corporation; [910W] [920W]. g. ProSoCo, Inc.; [Saltguard WB] [SL 100 Water Repeller] [Weatherseal GP]. h. Seal-Krete, Inc.; SilanelSiloxane Water Repellent. 1. Sormebom Building Products, a division ofChemRex; White Roc 10 WB. J. Tamms Industries, Inc.; [Baracade WB 244] [chemstop WB Heavy Duty] [chemstop WB Regular]. k. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.; RSI 1750 W Stain. 1. Wacker Chemical Corp.; OH 100. m. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 1. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, PenetratL'1g Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blends with 5 Ib/gal. (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Aridox 20. b. Chemprobe Coating Systems, L. P.; Prime A Pell Plus. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> J. Proprietary-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of 1 or several different resins (silanes or siloxanes), polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of components; and with 3.3 Ib/gal. (400 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. ChemMasters; Colorsil Pigmented. b. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; [Enviroseal Double 7] [Enviroseal Double 7 Brick] [Enviroseal Double 7 BD]. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Aquapel Plus. d. OKON, Inc.; [W-l] [W-2]. e. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.; Rainstopper 100. f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> K. Proprietary-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of 1 or several different resins (silanes or siloxanes), polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of components; and with 5 Ib/gal. (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 4 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) 1. [Available ]Products: a. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; [Enviroseal Double 7 Brick] [Enviroseal Double 7 BD]. b. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.; [Rainstopper 200] [Rainstopper 400]. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.3 FILM-FORMING WATER REPELLENTS A. Silicone Sealer, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, polymerized, silicone-resin water repellent for dense substrates; with a solvent- or water-based solution containing not less than 3 and up to 5 percent solids by weight; and with 3.3 Ib/gal. (400 glL) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. ChemMasters; [Aquanil HS Silicone] [Enviropel]. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Silicone Waterpeller W. c. Wacker Chemical Corp.; 17711. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. Silicone-Sealer, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, polymerized, silicone-resin water repellent for dense substrates; with a solvent- or water-based solution containing not less than 3 and up to 5 percent solids by weight; and with 5 Iblgal. (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Specco Industries, Inc.; S-5 RTV Regular. b. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Baracade M. E. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Proprietary-Blend, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of 1 or several different resins, acrylics, polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of components; and with 3.3 Ib/gal. (400 g/L) or less ofVOCs. I. [Available ]Products: a. ChemMasters; Colorsil Pigmented. b. Professional Products of Kansas, Inc.; Professional Water Sealant (Super). c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Proprietary-Blend, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of I or several different resins, acrylics, polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of components; and with 5 Ib/gal. (600 glL) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; [Omegaseal333 A] [Omegaseal333 L]. b. Professional Products of Kansas, Inc.; [Professional Water Sealant (Extra)] [Professional Water Sealant (Regular)]. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> VVATERREPELLENTS 07190 - 5 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) E. Siliconate, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Clear, with 3.3 Ib/gaL (400 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Wacker Chemical Corp.; 15. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> F. Acrylic, Film-Forming Water Repellent: [Clear] [Pigmented], breathing coating of acrylic resins; with a water-based, solvent-based, or acrylic emulsion solution containing less than 15 percent solids by volume; and with 3.3 Ib/ga1. (400 g/L) or less ofVOCs. I. [Available ]Products: a. ChemMasters; Enviropel Methacrylate. b. Gemite Products, Inc.; [Gem-Guard Stain OP] [Rain Shield Stain OP]. c. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; Colorsi1. d. Nox-Crete Products Group; Sparkl-Seal E. e. Seal-Krete, Inc.; S-K Waterproofer Sealer. f. Sonneborn Building Products, a division of ChemRex; [White Roc 10 Tone VOC] [White Roc W]. g. Specco Industries, Inc.; Brick & Block Water Repellent. h. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Colors: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. G. Acrylic, Film-Forming Water Repellent: Pigmented, with 5 Ib/gaL (600 g/L) or less ofVOCs. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Nox-Crete Products Group; Acryl Pen. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Colors: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure that surface is dry enough. 1. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents. 2. Clay Brick Masonry: Clean clay brick masonry per ASTM D 5703. B. Test for pH level, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 6 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/02 (R 02/06) 3.2 3.3 C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. APPLICATION A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. B. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Precast Concrete: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on precast concrete units may be completed before installing units. Mask sealant-bond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces. C. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 7 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). 3. Cavity-wall insulation. 4. Concealed building insulation. 5. Exposed building insulation. 6. Loose-fill building insulation. 7. Self-supported, spray-applied cellulosic insulation. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Sound attenuation insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Provide [glass] [slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool]-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" anG "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-tpm (13-m/s) air velocity. 2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) D. Product test reports. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of frre-resistance characteristic specified for each product in Part 2. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the frre-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per [ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics] [ and] [other methods indicated with product], by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. B. Recycled Content: Provide [glass] [and] [slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool]-fiber insulation with recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m)] [X, 1.30 lb/cu. ft. (21 kg/cu. m)] [VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m)] [VII, 2.20 lb/cu. ft. (35 kg/cu. m)] [V, 3.00 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m)], with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Coming. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft. (26 kg/cu. m)] [VI, 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m)] [VII, 2.20 lb/cu. ft. (35 kg/cu. m)], and fabricated with one side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels. 3. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Coming. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Fabric-Faced, Extruded-Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type VI, with a density of 1.80 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m), faced with insulation manufacturer's standard nonwoven filtration fabric and fabricated with 1 side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Owens Coming. b. T. Clear Corporation. c. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [I, 0.90 lb/cu. ft. (15 kg/cu. m)] [VIII, 1.15 lb/cu. ft. (18 kg/cu. m)] [II, 1.35 lb/cu. ft. (22 kg/cu. m)], with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of75 and 450, respectively. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Manufacturers with a third-party certification program satisfying model building code mandatory requirements for foam plastics. c. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class [lor 2] [1] [2], with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches (101 mm). 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofmg Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Rmax, Inc. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.3 GLASS-FillER BOARD INSULATION A. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3. Knauf Fiber Glass. 4. Owens Coming. 5. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and ill; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [1.0 lb/cu. ft. (16 kg/cu. m) and 3.7 degF x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (25.7 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft. (27 kg/cu. m) and 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x mlW at 24 deg C)]. C. Foil-Faced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and ill; faced on 1 side with foil-scrim-kraft vapor retarder; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [1.0 lb/cu. ft. (16 kg/cu. m) and 3.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 degF (25.7 K x mlW at 24 deg C)] [1.5Ib/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft. (27 kg/cu. m) and 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x D:1I\V at 24 deg C)]. D. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and ill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively;[ passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics;] and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [2.25 lb/cu. ft. (36 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg 1" x h x sq. ft.lBtu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C)] [3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [4.25Ib/cu. ft. (68 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft.lBtu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m) and 4.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (30.5 K x m/W at 24 deg C)]. E. Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and ill; faced on 1 side with foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder, with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [2.25 lb/cu. ft. (36 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [3Ib/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C)] [4.25 lb/cu. ft. (68 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg 1<' (29.8 K x mlW at 24 deg C)] [6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m) and not less than 4.34 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (30.1 K x mIW at 24 deg C)]. F. Glass-Mat-Faced, Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and ill; faced on I side with black glass-fiber mat or black polymer finish; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m) and 4.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.1 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [2.25 lb/cu. ft. (36 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m) and 4.3 deg 1<' x h x sq. ft.lBtu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x mIW at 24 deg C)] [6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m) and 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (31.2 K x mlW at 24 deg C)]. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 2.4 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BOARD INSULATION A. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Coming. 3. Thermafiber. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 0, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m), Types IA and ill, and 4 degF x h x sq. ft.lBtu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K x m/W at 24 deg C)] [6 lb/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m), Type II, and 4.16 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (28.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C)] [8 Ib/cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m), Type ill, and 4.35 degF x h x sq. ft.lBtu x in. at 75 deg F (30.2 K x m/W at 24 deg C)]. 1. Fiber Color: Regular color, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fiber Color: Darkened, where indicated. C. Foil-Faced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612; faced on 1 side with foil-scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor retarder; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 5, respectively; and with a nominal density and thermal resistivity, respectively, of [4 lb/cu. ft. (64 kg/cu. m), Types IA and ill, and 4 degF x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (27.7 K:x mIW at 24 deg C)] [61b/cu. ft. (96 kg/cu. m), Type II, and 4.16 deg}' :x h x sq. ft.lBtu :x in. at 75 deg!" (28.8 K :x mIW at 24 deg C)] [8 lb/cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m), Type ill, thermal resistivity of 4.35 deg F :x h x sq. ft.!Btu :x in. at 75 deg!" (30.2 K:x mIW at 24 deg C)]. 2.5 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. [ Available ]Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Coming. 6. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type ill (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with[ foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil- scrim-polyethylene] [polypropylene-scrim-kraft] vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. BUILDING INSULATION 07110 - 5 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) D. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of [11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg 1<' (1.9 K x sq. mrW at 24 deg C)] [13 deg:F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (2.3 K x sq. mIW at 24 deg C)]. 2. 3-5/8 inches (92 lllill) thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1.9 K x sq. mlW at 24 deg C). 3. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 4. 6-1/2 inches (165 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.7 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 5. [9-1/2 inches (241 mm)] [10 inches (254 mm)] [10-114 inches (260 mm)] thick with a thermal resistance of30 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (5.2 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 6. <Insert thickness and thermal resistance.> 2.6 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Coming. 3. Thermafiber. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type ill (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. D. Where slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 6 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (1 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 2. 3-1/2 inches (89 111m) thick with a thermal resistance of 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (2.3 K x sq.m!W at 24 deg C). 3. 4 inches (101 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 16 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (2.8 K x sq. mIW at 24 deg C). 4. 5-1/4 inches (133 nnn) thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.3 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C). 5. 6 inches (152 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 22 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.9 K x sq. IniW at 24 deg C). 6. <Insert thickness and thermal resistance.> BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 2.7 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION A. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. B. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, [Type I for pneumatic application] [or] [Type IT for poured application]; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of5. 2.8 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, [Type I (materials applied with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications),] [Type IT (materials containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation; intended only for enclosed or covered applications),] [Type ill (materials containing an adhesive mixed with water during application; intended for application on attic floors),] chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. 2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils (0.15 lllin) thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm (7.5 nglPa x s x sq. m). B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 Ibll000 sq. ft. (12 kg/l00 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 penn (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m). 1. [Available ]Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene f11m laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 Ib/lOOO sq. ft. (10 kgllOO sq. 111), with maximum permeance rating of 0.1317 perm (7.56 nglPa x s x sq. m) and with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively. 1. [Available ]Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T -55 FR. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: 2 layers of 0.5-mil- (O.013-mm-) thick polyester film laminated to an inner layer of l-mil- (0.025-nU11-) thick aluminum foil, with maximum water- BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 7 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) vapor transtnission rate in flat condition of 0.0 g/h x sq. m and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Zero Perm" by Alumiseal Corporation. E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. F. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use 0 related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. H. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 2.10 AUXILIARY !NSULATING MATERIALS A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 2.11 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: [Plate] [Angle] formed from perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mtn) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square, welded to projecting copper-coated steel spindle 0.105 inch (2.67 tnm) in diameter and of length capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position with 1-1/2-inch- (38- mm-) square or diameter self-locking washers complying with the following requirements: 1. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.0 1 6-inch- (0.41-mm- ) thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness. 2. Where anchors are located in [ceiling plenums] [crawlspaces] [attic spaces] <Insert location>, protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap. B. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized tnild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached. C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 8 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water plpmg is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF [PERIMETER] [AND] [UNDER-SLAB] INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units fmnly against inside substrates indicated. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 9 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies. " 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder [to warm-in-winter side] [in location indicated] <Insert location> of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fIll the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to f1l1 cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 6. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once fInish material is installed over it. E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 10 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. F. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction where indicated on Drawings according to curtain-wall manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. 2. Install insulation where it contacts perimeter fIfe-containment system to prevent insulation from bowing under pressure from perimeter fire-containment system. G. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces indicated, [either] [by pouring] [or] [by machine blowing], to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." H. Apply self-supported, spray-applied cellulosic insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make it flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. I. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. (40 kgicu. m). 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A. Install [3-inch- (76-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick, unfaced [glass] [slag-wool-fiber/rocl..- wool]-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches (1219 111m) on either side of partition. B. Install [1-l/2-inch- (38-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick, unfaced [glass] [slag-wool- fiber/rock-wool]-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings so that insulation extends over entire ceiling. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 11 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. C. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. END OF SECTION 07210END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 12 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/05 SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) 07240 - I Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) SECTION 07241 - POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior insulation and ftnish system (EIFS) applied over [concrete] [masonry] [exterior cement board] [gypsum sheathing] [plywood sheathing] <Insert substrate> . 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Class PB EIFS: Physical properties and structural performance that comply with [Icc- ES Ac219] [ANSI/EIMA 99-A] <Insert requirements>. 1.3 SUBMITTALS C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.4 A. A. Product Data: For each type and component ofEIFS indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofmg system, including printed statement ofVOC content. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, penetrations, temJinations, joints, fasteners, and attachments to other work. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. [Material] [ or] [product] certificates. Product test reports. Field quality-control reports[ and special inspection reports]. Evaluation reports. Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: [An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers] <Insert requirements>. POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07241 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following frre-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Per ASTM E 119. 2. Full-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Per UBC Standard 26-4. 3. Full-Scale Diversified Fire Test: Per ASTM E 108 modified for testing vertical walls. 4. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Per [NFPA 285] [UBc Standard 26-9]. 5. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition ofEIFS per NFPA 268. 6. Potential Heat: Acceptable level per NFPA 259. 7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per [ASTM E 84] [UBc Standard 8-1] <Insert test method>. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Acrocrete, Inc. 2. Corev America, Inc. 3. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 4. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc.; a brand of Par exLaha bra, Inc. 5. Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 6. Master Wall, Inc. 7. Omega Products International, Inc. 8. Parex, Inc.; a brand ofParexLahabra, Inc. 9. Pleko LLC. 10. Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 11. Sono Wall; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 12. Sto Corp. 13. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc. POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07241 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) 14. TEC; an H. B. Fuller company. 15. Total Wall Inc. 16. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and ftnish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. B. PrimerlSealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner[ with VOC content of 250 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 cFR 59, Subpart D (EP A Method 24),] designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate oftype indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. C. Insulation Adhesive: [Standard formulation] [Standard formulation with VOC content of 50 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 cFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)] <Insert requirement>. D. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." 1. Foam Shapes: Provide with proftles and dimensions indicated on Drawings. E. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following: 1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight> . 2. Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [10 oz./sq. yd. (339 g/sq. m)] [12.0 oz.lsq. yd. (407 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 3. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [15 oz./sq. yd. (509 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight> . 4. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [20 oz.lsq. yd. (678 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 5. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 6. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 7. Comer Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. F. Base-Coat Materials: [Standard formulation] <Insert requirement>. G. Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer. H. Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, [standard acrylic-based coating] [standard acrylic- based coating with enhanced mildew resistance] [siliconized acrylic-based coating] [with aggregate] <Insert coating>. 1. Colors: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07241 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) 1. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate. J. Trim Accessories: <Insert type> manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. D. E. F. INSTALLATION Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. PrimerlSealer: Apply over [gypsum sheathing] <Insert substrate>. Waterproof AdhesiveIBase Coat: Apply over [sloped surfaces] [window sills] [parapets] [where indicated on Drawings] <Insert location>. Trim: Apply trim accessories [at locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. Board Insulation: [Adhesively] [Mechanically] [Adhesively and mechanically] attach to substrate. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; [at floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction; land where wall height changes< Insert location>. G. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation[ and foam shapes] in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than [1/16-inch (1.6-mm)] <Insert dimension> dry-coat thickness. H. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 1. Standard-impact reinforcing mesh [unless otherwise indicated] <Insert location>. 2. Intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh [where indicated] <Insert location>. 3. High-impact reinforcing mesh [where indicated] <Insert location>. 4. Heavy-duty reinforcing mesh [where indicated] <Insert location>. I. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of [standard] [intermediate]-impact reinforcing mesh. J. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. K. Finish Coat: Apply over dry [primed ]base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform fmish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07241 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) 1. Texture: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: [Owner will engage ] [Engage] a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. According to [Icc-ES Ac24] [Icc-ES Ac219]. 2. <Insert special inspections>. B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: For the following: 1. According to [Icc-ES Ac24] [Icc-ES Ac219]. 2. <Insert testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction>. D. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified requirements. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 07241 POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07241 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) SECTION 07243 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes water-drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over [water-resistive coating over sheathing] [weather-resistant sheathing paper over sheathing] [weather-resistant sheathing paper over exterior cement board] [exterior cement board over weather-resistant sheathing paper] <Insert substrate>. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Class PB EIFS: Physical properties and structural performance that comply with [Icc- ES Ac235] [ANSI/EIMA 99-A] <Insert requirements>. 1. Drainage: According to [Icc-ES Ac24] [Icc-ES Ac235]. 1.3 SUBMITTALS C. D. E. F. G. H. 1. 1.4 A. A. Product Data: For each type and component ofEIFS indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement ofVOC content. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details, penetrations, terminations, joints, fasteners, and attachments to other work. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. [Material] [or] [product] certificates. Product test reports. Field quality-control reports[ and special inspection reports]. Evaluation reports. Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: [An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers] <Insert requirements>. WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07243 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following frre-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Per ASTM E 119. 2. Full-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Per UBC Standard 26-4. 3. Full-Scale Diversified Fire Test: Per ASTM E 108 modified for testing vertical walls. 4. Intermediate-Scale Multistory Fire Test: Per [NFP A 285] [UBc Standard 26-9]. 5. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition ofEIFS per NFPA 268. 6. Potential Heat: Acceptable level per NFP A 259. 7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and fmish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or less, per [ASTM E 84] [UBc Standard 8-1] <Insert test method>. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. I. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Acrocrete, Inc. 2. Corev America, Inc. 3. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 4. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc.; a brand ofParexLahabra, Inc. 5. Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 6. Master Wall, Inc. 7. Omega Products International, Inc. 8. Parex, Inc.; a brand ofParexLahabra, Inc. 9. Pleko LLC. 10. Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 11. SonoWall; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 12. Sto Corp. 13. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc. WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07243 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) 14. TEC; an H. B. Fuller company. 15. Total Wall Inc. 16. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of [Icc-ES Ac209] [Icc-ES Ac212]. 1. VOC Content of Coatings Used as Insulation Adhesive: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, fully self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized- asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. D. Drainage Mat: [Three-dimensional, nonwoven, entangled fIlament, nylon or plastic] [Woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath] <Insert type> mat designed to drain incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer[ with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners suitable for intended substrate]. E. Spacers: [Closed-cell polyethylene] [Woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath] <Insert type> furring strips; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer[ with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners suitable for intended substrate]. F. Insulation Adhesive: [Standard formulation] [Standard formulation with VOC content of 50 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 cFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)] <Insert requirement> G. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board." I. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated profile with linear, vertical drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board. 2. Foam Shapes: Provide with profIles and dimensions indicated on Drawings. H. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following: 1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [4.0 oz.lsq. yd. (136 glsq. m)] <Insert weight> . WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07243 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) 2. Intermediate-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [10 oz./sq. yd. (339 g/sq. m)] [12.0 oz./sq. yd. (407 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 3. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [15 oz.lsq. yd. (509 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight> . 4. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [20 oz./sq. yd. (678 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight> . 5. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [3.75 oz./sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 6. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 7. Comer Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [7.2 oz./sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 1. Base-Coat Materials: [Standard formulation] <Insert requirement>. J. Primer: Factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer. K. Finish-Coat Materials: Factory-mixed, [standard acrylic-based coating] [standard acrylic- based coating with enhanced mildew resistance] [siliconized acrylic-based coating] [with aggregate] <Insert coating>. 1. Colors: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. L. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener suitable for substrate. M. Trim Accessories: <Insert type> manufactured from UV -stabilized PVC and complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. B. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide water-/weather-resistive barrier. C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, temJinations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details. D. Trim: Apply trim accessories [at locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. E. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges [butted] [overlapped] and [adhesively secured] [mechanically secured with fasteners] over water-/weather-resistive barrier according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Board Insulation: [Adhesively ] [Mechanically] [Adhesively and mechanically] attach to substrate. WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07243 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/05 (R 05/06) G. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS; where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction; [at floor lines in multilevel wood-framed construction; land where wall height changes< Insert location>. H. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation [and foam shapes ]in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than [l/16-inch (1.6-mm)] <Insert dimension> dry-coat thickness. 1. Reinforcing Mesh: Completely embed mesh in wet base coat, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible. 1. Standard-impact reinforcing mesh [unless otherwise indicated] <Insert location>. 2. Intermediate-impact reinforcing mesh [where indicated] <Insert location>. 3. High-impact reinforcing mesh [where indicated] <Insert location>. 4. Heavy-duty reinforcing mesh [where indicated] <Insert location>. J. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of [standard] [intermediate]-impact reinforcing mesh. K. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. L. Finish Coat: Apply over dry [primed ]base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform fInish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. 1. Texture: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualifIed special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. According to [Icc-ES Ac24] [Icc-ES Ac235]. 2. <Insert special inspections>. B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: For the following: 1. According to [Icc-ES Ac24] [Icc-ES Ac235]. 2. <Insert testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction>. D. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified requirements. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 07243 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form END OF SECTION 07243 WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 05/05 (R 05/06) 07243 - 6 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/04 SECTION 07270 - AIR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 07270 AIR BARRIERS 07270 - 1 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 2. Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 3. Metal liner panels. 4. Metal soffit panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure of [20 Ibf/sq. ft. (957 Pa)] [30 Ibf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa)] <Insert design wind pressure>, acting inward or outward. 2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than [11180] [1/240] <Insert deflection> of the span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, comers, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field- assembled work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed fmish required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal wall panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 1 Copyright 2006 AIA E. F. G. H. 1.4 A. B. MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 Coordination Drawings: Exterior elevations drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and wall-mounted items. Product test reports. Maintenance data. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal wall panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied fmishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: [10] [20] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 7921 A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 3. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed] fmish. 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 2 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fInish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fInish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. c. Siliconized-Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 mm) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 nnn) for topcoat. 5. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. B. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 1. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed] fInish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer fInish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. 3-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer fInish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. c. Siliconized-Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil (0.005 rom) for primer and 0.8 mil (0.02 mm) for topcoat. 3. Exposed Anodized Finish: a. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-MI2c22A41, Class 1,0.018 mm] [AA- M12c22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker. b. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-MI2c22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-MI2c22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker. 4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light- colored acrylic or polyester backer fInish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). C. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920 as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 3 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 B. Unfaced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 591, Type II, compressive strength of 35 psi (241 kPa), with maximum flame-spread index of75 and smoke-developed index of 450. C. Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, [Type I (foil facing), Class 1 or 2] [Type II (asphalt felt or glass-fiber mat facing), Class 2 or 3, Grade 3], with maximum flame-spread index of 75 and smoke-developed index of 450, based on tests performed on unfaced core. D. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 1.60-1b/cu. f1. (26-kg/cu. m), with maximum flame-spread index of75 and smoke-developed index of 450. E. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type I, 0.9 lb/cu. ft. (IS kg/cu. m)] [Type II, 1.35 lb/cu. ft. (22 kg/cu. m)], with maximum flame-spread index of 75 and smoke- developed index of 450. F. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, type indicated below; consisting of fibers manufactured from [glass, slag wool, or rock wool] [glass] [slag or rock wool]. 1. Type I (blankets without membrane covering), passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2. Type II (blankets with nonreflective membrane covering), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less). 3. Type ill (blankets with reflective membrane covering), Category 1 (membrane is a vapor retarder), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of25 or less). G. Metal Building Insulation: [ASTM C 991, Type I; or NAIMA 202] [ASTM C 991, Type 11], glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 0.5-1b/cu. ft. (8-kg/cu. m) density; 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less. I. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, withpermeance not greater than 0.02 penn (1.15 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method: a. Composition: [Polypropylene faced, scrim reinforced, and kraft-paper backing] [Foil faced, scrim reinforced, and kraft-paper backing with vapor- retarder coating] [polypropylene faced, scrim reinforced, and foil backing] [Vinyl faced, scrim reinforced, and foil backing] [Vinyl faced, scrim reinforced, and polyester backing] <Insert facing>. 2. Insulation Retainer Strips: 0.019-illch- (0.48-mm-) thick, formed galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) hot-dip galvanized] or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 4 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 B. Subgirts: Manufacturer's standard C- or Z-shaped sections, O.064-inch (1.63-mm) nominal thickness. C. Zee Clips: O.079-inch (2.01-mm) nominal thickness. D. Base or Sill [Angles] [Channels]: 0.079-inch (2.0l-mm) nominal thickness. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Nominal Thickness: [As indicated] [As required to meet performance requirements] [0.025 inch (0.64 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 2. Depth: [As indicated] [7/8 inch (22 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] <Insert depth>. F. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: Minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flange. 1. Nominal Thickness: [As indicated] [As required to meet performance requirements] [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 2. Depth: [As indicated] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] <Insert depth>. 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with O.040-inch (1.02- mm) nominal thickness. 4. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.57- mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.22-mm-) diameter wire. G. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-114 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 718 inch (22 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Nominal Thickness: [As indicated] [As required to meet performance requirements] [0.025 inch (0.64 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 2.5 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM MET AL WALL P MTELS A. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 5 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 b. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). c. Architectural Metal Systems. d. AT AS International, Inc. e. Berridge Manufacturing Company. f. Butler Manufacturing Company g. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. h. Copper Sales, Inc. 1. Englert, Inc. J. F abra1. k. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. 1. Galvamet. m. Industrial Building Panels. n. MBCI; Div. ofNCI Building Systems. o. McElroy Metal, Inc. p. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. q. Metecno-Morin. r. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. s. Steelox Systems, L.L.C. t. United Steel Deck, Inc.; Subsidiary of Bouras Industries Inc. u. VICWEST; Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products. v. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Profile: [Corrugated] [Tapered rib] [Reverse rib] [Vee rib] [Box rib] [Deep-box rib]. 4. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, [0.022-inch (0.56-mm)] [0.028-inch (O.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] [0.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [O.052-inch (1.32-mm)] [O.064-inch (l.63-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color> . 5. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, [O.022-inch (O.56-mm)] [0.028-inch (O.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] [O.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] [O.064-inch (1.63-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 6. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] thick. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] [Clear anodized] [Color anodized] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color> . METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 6 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 7. Major-Rib Spacing: <Insert dimension> o.c. 8. Panel Coverage: <Insert dimension>. 9. Panel Height: <Insert dimension>. 2.6 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS A. Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners[ and factory-applied sealant] in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. b. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). c. Architectural Building Components. d. Architectural Metal Systems. e. ATAS International, Inc. f. Berridge Manufacturing Company. g. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. h. Dimension Metals, Inc. 1. Fabra1. J. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. k. Industrial Building Panels. 1. MBCI; Div. ofNCI Building Systems. m. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, L.L.C. n. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. o. Metecno-Morin. p. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. q. Steelox Systems, L.L.C. r. United Steel Deck, Inc.; Subsidiary of Bouras Industries Inc. s. VICWEST; Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products. t. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Profile: [Flush] [Reveal joint] [Wide-reveal joint] [V groove] [Tapered rib] [Curved rib] [Creased] [Creased rib]. 4. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, [0.028-inch (O.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (O.86-mm)] [O.040-inch (l.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 7 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 5. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, [0.028-incb (O.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (O.86-mm)] [0.040 inch (-1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color> . 6. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] thick. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] [Clear anodized] [Color anodized] <Insert f"mish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 7. Panel Coverage: <Insert dimension>. 8. Panel Height: <Insert dimension>. 2.7 METAL LINER PANELS A. Provide factory-formed [perforated] metal liner panels designed for interior side of metal wall panel assemblies and field assembled by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners[ and factory-applied sealant] in side laps. Include accessories required for a complete installation. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. Alcoa Architectural Products (USA). b. Architectural Metal Systems. c. Berridge Manufacturing Company. d. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. e. Englert, Inc. f. Fabral. g. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc. h. MBCI; Div. ofNCI Building Systems. 1. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. J. Metecno-Morin. k. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 3. Profile: Flush. 4. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, [0.028-inch (0.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (O.86-mm)] [0.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 8 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color> . 5. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, [0.028-inch (O.7l-mm)] [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] [0.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 6. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] thick. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] [Clear anodized] [Color anodized] <Insert finish>. b. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 7. Panel Coverage: [12 inches (305 mm)] [16 inches (406 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] [36 inches (914 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 8. Panel Height: [1.5 inches (38 mm)] [2.0 inches (51 mm)] [3.0 inches (76 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 9. Acoustical Performance: NRC of not less than [0.65] [0.85] [1.00] <Insert rating> when tested according to ASTM C 423. 2.8 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. Provide factory-formed [perforated] metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners[ and factory-applied sealant] in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal wall panels. 1. Finish: (Match finish and color of metal wall panels] [As indicated on Drawings]. 2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 4. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. b. Architectural Building Components. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 9 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 c. ATAS International, Inc. d. Berridge Manufacturing Company. e. CENTRIA Architectural Systems. f. Cheney Flashing Company. g. Copper Sales, Inc. h. Dimensional Metals, Inc. 1. Englert, Inc. J. Fabral. k. Innovative Metals Company, Inc. 1. MBCI; Div. ofNCI Building Systems. m. McElroy Metal, Inc. n. Merchant & Evans Inc. o. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, L.L.C. p. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. q. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. r. Ultra Seam Incorporated. s. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 5. Profile: [Flush] [Reveal joint] [V groove]. 6. Material: Same material, fInish, and color as metal wall panels. 7. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, [0.022-inch (0.56-mm)] [0.028-inch (O.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (O.86-mm)] [0.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: (Match finish and color of metal wall panels] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 8. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, [0.022-inch (O.56-mm)] [0.028-inch (0.71-mm)] [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] [0.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] <Insert finish>. b. Color: (Match finish and color of metal wall panels] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 9. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.024 inch (0.65 mm)] [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] thick. a. Exterior Finish: [2-coat fluoropolymer] [3-coat fluoropolymer] [Siliconized polyester] [Clear anodized] [Color anodized] <Insert finish>. b. Color: (Match finish and color of metal wall panels] [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 10. Panel Coverage: <Insert dimension>. 11. Panel Height: <Insert dimension>. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 10 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 12. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, comer units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and ftnish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum l-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from O.018-inch (0.46-mm) minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, comers, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same ftnish system as adjacent metal wall panels. 2.10 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 11 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install sub girts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal wall panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.2 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Board Insulation: Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire wall. Comply with installation requirements in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 1. Erect insulation horizontally and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Attach furring members to substrate with screws spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. 2. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within panels, spaced at intervals according to insulation manufacturer's instructions. Maintain cavity width between insulation and metal liner panel of dimension indicated. B. Blanket Insulation: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Set vapor-retarder-faced insulation with vapor-retarder facing [building exterior] [building interior] [as indicated on Drawings]. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for frrestopping. 2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 3. Install insulation straight and true in one-piece lengths. Comply with the following installation method: a. Over-Framing Installation: Extend insulation over and perpendicular to top flange of framing members. 4. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with framing to hold insulation in place. 3.3 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 12 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight. 7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl- rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. B. Zee Clips: Provide Zee clips of size indicated or, if not indicated, as required to act as standoff from sub girts for thickness of insulation indicated. Attach to sub girts with fasteners. C. Metal Liner Panels: Install panels on [exterior side of girts with girts exposed to the interior] [interior side of girts with flush appearance on the inside] [girts as indicated on Drawings]. D. Fire-Rated Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: Install metal liner panels on exterior side of girts, fastening through faces of panels, with girts exposed to the interior. Install subgirts horizontally, fastened to legs of metal liner panels. Install substrate board as indicated in Division 6 Section "Sheathing," in number of layers required for fire rating, over subgirts, attached with board fasteners. Install second set of subgirts horizontally, fastened through substrate board into first set of subgirts. Install exterior metal wall panels, fastened to second set of subgirts. 1. Comply with [UL] [FMG] requirements for fITe-rated construction. E. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. 3.4 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal ManuaL" Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. METAL WALL PANELS 07412 - 13 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/06 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean fmished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 07412 MET AL WALL PANELS 07412 -14 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/00 SECTION 07510 - BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING PART I - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 07510 BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING 07510 - 1 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 SECTION 07511 - BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes built-up asphalt roofing systems. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Hot Roofmg Asphalt: Roofmg asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mopping application and 75 centipoise for mechanical application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofmg system. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: manufacturer's products. A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofmg system [from] [or] [approved by] roofmg system manufacturer. C. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the frre-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 - I Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within [10] [15] [20] years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Built-up Asphalt Roofmg: a. Barrett Company. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Ecology Roof Systems. d. Fields Company, LLC. e. Firestone Building Products Company. f. GAF Materials Corporation. g. Henry Company. h. Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc. 1. Honeywell Commercial Roofmg Systems. J. Intec/Permaglas; Div. of U.S. Intec, Inc. k. Johns Manville International, Inc. 1. Malarkey Roofmg Company. m. TAMKO Roofmg Products, Inc. n. Tremco, Inc. o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 Ib/l 00 sq. ft. (0.16 kgisq. 111). B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type [I] [II], nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fme mineral surfacing on both sides. C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified, asphalt-impregnated and -coated sheet, with glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. D. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 - 2 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type [IV] [VI], asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. B. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber cap sheet, with white coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fme mineral surfacing on bottom surface. 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type [IV] [VI], asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. B. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type [I] [II], asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fme mineral surfacing on both sides. C. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. D. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. E. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Type I or II, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. F. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; mineral-granule surfaced; and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. 2.5 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Roofmg Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type [III] [IV] [ill or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system manufacturer for application] <Insert type>. 2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofmg. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofmg system manufacturer for application. BUILT -UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-3 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 C. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofmg system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two- part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing base flashings. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofmg membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. E. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No.6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, [water-worn gravel or crushed stone, free of sharp edges] [crushed slag, free of sharp edges]. 2.7 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 rom) thick. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1 177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [114 inch (6 mm)] [112 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. C. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick, seal coated. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.8 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)] [X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. (21-kg/cu. m)] minimum density, square edged. B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type [II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m)] [VIII, 1.15-lb/cu. ft. (I8-kg/cu. m)] [IX, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m)] minimum density. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. D. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Type ill (perlite-insulation-board facer), [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick. 2. Type IV (cellulosic-fiber-insulation-board facer), Grade 1, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. E. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofmg agents with top surface seal-coated. F. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, fibrous-felted wood fiber or other cellulosic-fiber and water-resistant binders, asphalt impregnated, chemically treated for deterioration. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 - 4 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 G. Glass-Fiber-Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt-coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper. H. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of [1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48)] <Insert slope>, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.9 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. E. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. G. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass-fiber insulation board. H. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. I. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick 2.10 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: [Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition] [Polymer- modified, reconstituted solid-rubber, surface-textured], slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer, [3/8 inch (9 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: <Insert size.> B. Cap Sheet Strips: [ASTM D 6163, Type lor II, glass-fiber] [ASTM D 6164, Type I or II, polyester]-reinforced, SBS-modified, asphalt-impregnated and -coated walkway sheet; with white coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511-5 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal- (89-mm actual-) width wood nailer strips of same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck at the following spacing: 1. [16 feet (4.88 m)] <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 1 inch per 12 inches (1: 12) but less than 3 inches per 12 inches (3: 12). 2. [48 inches (1220 mm)] <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 3 inches per 12 inches (3:12). D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 rom) in each direction. F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal.llOO sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. 111) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. H. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure ftrst layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 - 6 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install built-up roofmg membrane system according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMAlNRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." B. Where roof slope exceeds 1 inch per 12 inches (1: 12), install sheets of built-up roofmg membrane parallel with slope and backnai1. C. Coordinate installing roofmg system components so insulation and roofmg membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofmg asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofmg system components or adjacent building construction. E. Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mIn), respectively. F. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 2. Spot- or strip-mop to substrate with hot roofmg asphalt. 3. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. G. Install [two] [three] [four] ply sheets starting at low point ofroofmg system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofmg membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. H. Cap Sheet: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofmg system. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. I. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofmg membrane, base flashing, and stripping, flood-coat roof surface with 60 Ib/1 00 sq. ft. (3 kgisq. m) of hot roofmg asphalt. While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: 1. Aggregate Weight: [400 Ib/lOO sq. ft. (20 kg/sq. m)] [300 Ib/lOO sq. ft. (15 kg/sq. m)]. BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 -7 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofmg membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofmg membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install stripping, according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofmg. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot roofing asphalt. B. Cap Sheet Strips: Install cap sheet strips, approximately 36 inches (900 mm) wide and in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m), leaving a space of 6 inches (150nnn) between strips. Adhere in hot roofing asphalt. END OF SECTION 07511 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07511 - 8 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 SECTION 07512 - BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes built-up coal-tar roofmg systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Bitumen: A generic term for either asphalt or coal-tar pitch. B. Hot Coal-Tar Pitch: Coal-tar pitch heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 25 centipoise for either mopping or mechanical application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. C. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofmg asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mopping application and 75 centipoise for mechanical application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: manufacturer's products. A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofmg system [from] [or] [approved by] roofmg system manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the frre-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 1 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within [15] [20] [25] years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Built-up Coal-Tar Roofmg: a. Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc. b. Honeywell Commercial Roofmg Systems. c. Koppers Industries. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 Ib/lOO sq. ft. (0.16 kgisq. 111). B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass- fiber sheet, dusted with fme mineral surfacing on both sides. C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. 2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 227, coal-tar-saturated organic felt. B. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 4990, Type I, coal-tar-impregnated, glass-fiber felt and the physical properties of ASTM D 2178, Type [IV] [VI]. BUILT -UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 2 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. B. Backer Sheet: Roofing system manufacturer's standard spun-bonded, nonwoven, polyester- reinforced fabric, of standard color and weight, suitable for application method specified. C. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. D. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6162, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. E. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Type I or II, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. 2.5 BITUMEN MATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. B. Coal-Tar Primer: ASTM D 43. C. Coal-Tar Pitch: ASTM D 450, Type 1. D. Roofmg Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type [III] [IV] [ill or IV as recommended by built-up roofing system manufacturer for application]. 2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofmg. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. C. Coal-Tar Roofmg Cement: ASTM D 5643, coal-tar-based roofing cement, asbestos free. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. BUILT -UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 3 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 E. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No.6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, [water-worn gravel or crushed stone, free of sharp edges] [crushed slag, free of sharp edges]. F. Walkway Pads: [Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition] [polymer- modified, reconstituted solid-rubber, surface-textured], slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer, [3/8 inch (9 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: <Insert size>. 2.7 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 nnn) thick. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1 177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. C. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick, seal coated. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.8 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)] [X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. (21-kg/cu. m)] minimum density, square edged. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. C. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Type ill (perlite-insulation-board facer), [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick. 2. Type IV (cellulosic-fiber-insulation-board facer), Grade 1, 1/2 inch (13 lllin) thick. D. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofmg agents with top surface seal-coated. E. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, fibrous-felted wood fiber or other cellulosic-fiber and water-resistant binders, asphalt impregnated, chemically treated for deterioration. F. Glass-Fiber-Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt-coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper. G. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of [1/8 inch per 12 inches (1:96)] [1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48)] <Insert slope>, unless otherwise indicated. BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 4 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 H. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.9 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. E. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. G. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass-fiber insulation board. H. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13 nnn) thick. 1. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1 177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing roofmg system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal- (89-mm actual-) width wood nailer strips of same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck, spaced [16 feet (4.88 m)] BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 5 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than [1/8 inch per 12 inches (1:96)] [114 inch per 12 inches (1:48)] [1/2 inch per 12 inches (1 :24)]. D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofmg to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is [1-112 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 nml) in each direction. F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with [asphalt] [coal-tar] primer at a rate of 3/4 gaL/IOO sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot [ roofing asphalt] [ coal-tar pitch]. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. H. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure ftrst layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot [roofing asphalt] [coal- tar pitch]. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. 1. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install built-up roofmg membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofmg." B. Where roof slope exceeds [1/8 inch per 12 inches (1 :96)] [1/4 inch per 12 inches (1 :48)] [112 inch per 12 inches (1:24)], install sheets of built-up roofmg membrane parallel with slope and backnai1. C. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent [coal-tar pitch] [or] [roofing asphalt] from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofmg system components or adjacent building construction. BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 6 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 E. Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively. F. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 2. Spot- or strip-mop to substrate with hot roofmg asphalt. 3. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. G. Install [two] [three] [four] ply sheets starting at low point ofroofmg system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofmg membrane. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot coal-tar pitch. H. Composite Roofing Membrane: Install one lapped coal-tar, glass-fiber felt ply sheet course over shingled organic felt ply sheets according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align ply sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water. Embed ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot coal-tar pitch applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. Extend ply sheet over and terminate beyond cants. I. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofmg membrane, base flashing, and stripping, flood-coat roof surface with 70 Ibl100 sq. ft. (3.5 kg/sq. m) of hot coal-tar pitch. While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: 1. Aggregate Weight: [400 IbllOO sq. ft. (20 kg/sq. m)] [300 IbllOO sq. ft. (15 kg/sq. m)]. J. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Sweep away loose aggregate surfacing and set walkway pads in additional flood coat of hot coal tar. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 m111) above roofing membrane and 4 inches (1 00 111m) onto field of roofmg membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roof mg. D. Install stripping, according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofmg. BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 7 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 2/00 END OF SECTION 07512 BUILT-UP COAL-TAR ROOFING 07512 - 8 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 SECTION 07530 - ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 07530 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07530 - 1 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 SECTION 07531 - ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered EPDM membrane roofmg system. 2. Mechanically fastened EPDM membrane roofing system. 3. Loosely laid and ballasted EPDM membrane roofmg system. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Energy Performance: Provide roofmg system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than [78] [29] when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. B. Energy Performance: Provide roofmg system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for [low] [steep]-slope roof products. C. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than [0.70] <Insert value> and emissivity not less than [0.75] <Insert value> when tested according to CRRC-1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirement. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement ofVOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For roofmg system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Samples: For each product included in the roofmg system. E. Research/evaluation reports. F. Field quality-control reports. G. Maintenance data. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 1 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified ftrm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofmg system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including for membrane roofmg system [from same manufacturer as membrane roofmg] [or] [approved by membrane roofing manufacturer]. C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, [Class A] [Class B] [Class C]; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofmg materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofmg system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [10] [15] [20] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, [Type I, non-reinforced,] [Type ll, scrim or fabric internally reinforced,] uniform, flexible EPDM sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. ERSystems. c. Firestone Building Products. d. GAF Materials Corporation. e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. f. International Diamond Systems. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 2 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 g. Johns Manville. h. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. 1. Protective Coatings, Inc. J. Roofmg Products International, Inc. k. StaFast Building Products. 1. Versico Incorporated. m. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 2. Thickness: [45 mils (1.1 mm)] [60 mils (1.5 mm)] [75 mils (1.9 mm)] [90 mils (2.2 mm)] <Insert thickness>, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: [Black] [White on black] <Insert color>. 2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofmg. 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 gIL. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 gIL. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 gIL. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 gIL. e. Contact Adhesive: 80 gIL. f. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 gIL. g. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 gIL. h. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 gIL. 1. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 gIL. J. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 gIL. B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- (1.5-lllil1-) thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application. C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene non-reinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60-mil- (1.4- to 1.5-mm-) thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic solvents, grease, and oil. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard[, water based]. E. Seaming Material: [Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner] [Manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release fIlm]. F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531-3 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM securement strips, T -joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C l3961C 1396M, Type X gypsum board, 5/8 inch (16 nnn) thick. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C I 177/C I 177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. C. Substrate Board: ASTM C l278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/8 inch (10 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. D. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick, seal coated. E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type IV, l.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)] [Type X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. (2l-kg/cu. m)] minimum density, square edged. B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m)] [Type VIII, 1.15-lb/cu. ft. (18-kg/cu. m)] [Type IX, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m)] minimum density. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, [Type II, Class 1, Grade 2] [Type II, Class I, Grade 3], felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. D. Composite PolyisocyanUrate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 with factory-applied facing board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass- fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Type IV, cellulosic-fiber-insulation-board facer, Grade 2, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 2. Type V, OSB facer, 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick. 3. Type VII, glass mat faced gypsum board facer, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick. E. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728, rigid, mineral-aggregate thermal insulation board composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal coated. F. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 2, fibrous-felted, rigid insulation boards of wood fiber or other cellulosic-fiber and water-resistant binders, asphalt impregnated, chemically treated for deterioration. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 4 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 G. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of [1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48)] <Insert slope> unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion- resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation[ and cover boards] to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended cold-applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. C. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 2, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. D. Cover Board: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, OSB, 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick. E. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177 IC 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick[, factory primed]. F. Cover Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber reinforced, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/8 inch (10 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. 2.6 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Roofmg Asphalt: [ASTM D 312, Type ill or Type IV] [ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified]. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. 2.7 AGGREGATE BALLAST A. Aggregate Ballast: Provide aggregate ballast that will withstand weather exposure without significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation, of the following type and size: 1. Aggregate Type: [Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth- faced stone] [Crushed gravel or crushed stone]. 2. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 4, ranging in size from 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm). 3. Size: ASTM D 448, Size 2, ranging in size from 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inches (38 to 63 mm). 2.8 ROOF PAVERS A. Lightweight Roof Pavers: Interlocking, lightweight concrete units, specially factory cast for use as roof ballast; grooved back, with four-way drainage capability; beveled, doweled, or otherwise profiled; and as follows: ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 5 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 1. Size: <Insert actual size(s) of pavers>. 2. Weight: <Insert weight or weight range>. 3. Compressive Strength: [2500 psi (17 MPa)] [5000 psi (34 MPa)] <Insert strength>, nnmmum. B. Heavyweight Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, [square edged] [with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm)], factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Size: [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] <Insert dimensions>. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in length, height, and thickness. 2. Weight: [18Ib/sq. ft. (90 kg/sq. m)] [22Ib/sq. ft. (110 kg/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 3. Compressive Strength: [7500 psi (52 ]\rlPa)] [6500 psi (45 MPa)] <Insert strength>, nnmmum. 2.9 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway [pads] [or] [rolls], approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofmg system manufacturer. B. Walkway Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, [square edged] [with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm)], factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Size: [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] <Insert dimensions>. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in length, height, and thickness. 2. Weight: [18Ib/sq. ft. (90 kg/sq. m)] [22Ib/sq. ft. (110 kg/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 3. Compressive Strength: [7500 psi (52 MPa)] [6500 psi (45 MPa)] <Insert strength>, nnmmum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofmg system manufacturers' written instructions. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531-6 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofmg system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofmg system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofmg to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofmg to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. E. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 ga1.1100 sq. ft. (0.3 L!sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3. Set each layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, ftrmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. F. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners speciftcally designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. I. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install ftrst layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten ftrst layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (lA deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, ftrmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. H. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units over substrate. I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together[and fasten to roof deck]. 1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 7 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 3.3 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere membrane roofmg over area to receive roofmg according to membrane roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofmg. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofmg. D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofmg securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeters. E. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and ftrmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofmg terminations. F. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and fmnly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofmg terminations. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofmg that does not comply with requirements. 3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofmg over area to receive roofmg according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before installing. B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Mechanically fasten or adhere membrane roofmg securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofmg. D. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofmg terminations. E. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and fmnly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofmg terminations. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531-8 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofmg that does not comply with requirements. G. In-Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of membrane roofmg using fastening plates or metal battens centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten membrane roofmg to roof deck. Field splice seam. H. Through-Membrane Attachment: Secure membrane roofing using fastening plates or metal battens and mechanically fasten membrane roofing to roof deck. Cover battens and fasteners with a continuous cover strip. 3.5 LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Loosely lay membrane roofmg over area to receive roofing according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofmg and allow to relax before installing. 1. Comply with requirements in SPRI RP-4 for [System 1] [System 2] [System 3]. B. Accurately align membrane roofing, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. C. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofmg according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofmg terminations. D. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and frrmly roll side and end laps of overlapping membrane roofing according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of membrane roofmg terminations. E. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofmg that does not comply with requirements. F. Aggregate Ballast: Apply uniformly over membrane roofing at the rate required by membrane roofmg system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing system. Lay ballast as membrane roofmg is installed, leaving membrane roofmg ballasted at the end of the workday. 1. Ballast Weight: Size 4 aggregate, 10 lb/sq. ft. (50 kg/sq. m). 2. Ballast Weight: Size 2 aggregate, 13 lb/sq. ft. (65 kg/sq. m), at comers and perimeter; Size 4 aggregate, 10 Ib/sq. ft. (50 kg/sq. m), elsewhere. 3. Ballast Weight: Size 2 aggregate, 13lb/sq. ft. (65 kg/sq. m). G. Roof-Paver Ballast: Install [lightweight] [heavyweight] roof-paver ballast according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Roof-Paver and Aggregate Ballast: Install heavyweight roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions on roof comers and perimeter. ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 - 9 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 1. Install Size 4 aggregate ballast elsewhere on roofing at a minimum rate of 10 lb/sq. [1. (50 kg/sq. rn). 2. Install Size 2 aggregate ballast elsewhere on roofmg at a minimum rate of 13 lb/sq. ft. (65 kg/sq. m). 3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside comers with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean splice areas, apply splicing cement, and frrmly roll side and end laps of overlapping sheets to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars]. 3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches (75 mm) of space between adjacent roof pavers. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofmg system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofmg installation on completion. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07531 -10 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) SECTION 07540 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes [adhered] [mechanically fastened] [loosely laid and ballasted] membrane roofmg systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Energy Performance: Provide roofmg system with Solar Reflectance Index not less than [78] [29] when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For roof materials, documentation indicating that roof materials comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirement. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement ofVOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. D. Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system. E. Research/evaluation reports. F. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: manufacturer's products. A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofmg system [from] [or] [approved by] roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofmg materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 1 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within [10] [15] years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type ill, fabric reinforced. 1. [A vallable ]Manufacturers: a. Duro-Last Roofmg, Inc. b. Firestone Building Products Company. c. Flex Membrane International, Inc. d. GAF Materials Corporation. e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. f. ill Roof Systems. g. Johns Manville International, Inc. h. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. 1. Samaf11 Inc. J. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Thickness: [45 mils (1.1 mm), minimum] [60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal] <Insert thickness> . 3. Exposed Face Color: [White] [Gray] <Insert color>. B. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434, Type IV, fabric reinforced. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 2 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. BondCote Corporation. b. Cooley Engineered Membranes; Div. of Cooley Group. c. Duro-Last Roofmg, Inc. d. Ecology Roof Systems. e. ERSystems. f. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. g. Seaman Corporation. h. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Thickness: [36 mils (0.9 mm), minimum] [40 mils (1.0 mm), nominal] [60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal] <Insert thickness>. 3. Exposed Face Color: [White] [Gray] <Insert color>. 2.3 THERMOPLASTIC POL YOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefm, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows: I. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products Company. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. GenFlex Roofing Systems. e. Johns Manville International, Inc. f. Samafil Inc. g. Stevens Roofmg Systems; Div. of JPS Elastomerics. h. Versico Inc. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Thickness: [45 mils (1.1 mm)] [60 mils (1.5 mm)] <Insert thickness>, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: [Black] [Gray] [White] <Insert color>. 4. Physical Properties: a. Breaking Strength: 225lbf(1 kN); ASTM D 751, grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 551bf (245 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F (30 deg C). e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch- (75-mm-) diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F (40 deg C) and an ozone level of 100 pphm (l00 mPa); ASTM D 1149. f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 573. g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F (70 deg C); ASTM D 471. h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 3 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofmg. 1. Adhesives and sealants that are used inside of the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EP A Method 24): a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 gIL. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 gIL. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 gIL. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 gIL. e. Contact Adhesives: 80 gIL. f. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 gIL. g. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 gIL. h. Other Adhesives: 250 gIL. 1. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 gIL. J. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 gIL. k. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 gIL. I. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 gIL. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane. C. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefm sheet flashing, [55 mils (1.4 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard [solvent] [water]-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings. E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick, prepunched. G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofmg system manufacturer. H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside comer sheet flashings, T -joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, slip sheet, and other accessories. 2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 4 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. C. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick, seal coated. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)] [X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. (21-kg/cu. m)] minimum density, square edged. B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type [II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m)] [VIII, 1.15-lb/cu. ft. (18-kg/cu. m)] [IX, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m)] minimum density. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. D. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Type III (perlite-insulation-board facer), [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick. 2. Type IV (cellulosic-fiber-insulation-board facer), [non-asphaltic] [asphaltic] binder, Grade 2, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. 3. Type V (oriented-strand-board facer), 7/16 inch (11 mm) thick. E. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofmg agents with top surface seal-coated. F. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 2, fibrous-felted wood fiber or other cellulosic-fiber and water-resistant binders, chemically treated for deterioration. G. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of [114 inch per 12 inches (1:48)] <Insert slope>, unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 5 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) C. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 2, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. D. Cover Board: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, oriented strand board, 7/16 inch (l1 mm) thick. E. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177 /C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick. F. Roofmg Asphalt: [ASTM D 312, Type ill or IV] [ASTM D 6152, SEBS modified]. 1. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. 2.8 AGGREGATE BALLAST A. Aggregate Ballast: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth-faced stone; ASTM D 448, Size [4, ranging from 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm)] [2, ranging from 1- 1/2 to 2-1/2 inches (38 to 63 mm)]. 2.9 ROOF PAVERS A. Lightweight Roof Pavers: Interlocking, lightweight concrete units, specially factory cast for use as roof ballast; grooved back, with four-way drainage capability; beveled, doweled, or otherwise prof11ed; and as follows: 1. Size: <Insert actual size(s) of pavers.> 2. Weight: <Insert weight or acceptable weight range.> 3. Compressive Strength: [2500 psi (17 MPa)] [5000 psi (34 MPa)] <Insert strength>, rrnmmum. B. Heavyweight Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, [square edged] [with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm)], factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Size: [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] <Insert size>. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in length, height, and thickness. 2. Weight: [18 lb/sq. ft. (90 kg/sq. m)] [22 lb/sq. ft. (110 kgIsq. m)] <Insert weight>. 3. Compressive Strength: [7500 psi (52 MPa)] [6500 psi (45 ]\lPa)] <Insert strength>, rrnmmum. 2.10 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway [pads] [rolls] [pads or rolls], approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, and acceptable to membrane roofmg system manufacturer. B. Walkway Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, [square edged] [with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm)], factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 6 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Size: [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] <Insert size>. Manufacture pavers to dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 1/ 16 inch (1. 6 nun) in length, height, and thickness. 2. Weight: [18 lb/sq. ft. (90 kg/sq. m)] [22 lb/sq. ft. (110 kg/sq. m)] <Insert weight>. 3. Compressive Strength: [7500 psi (52 MPa)] [6500 psi (45 MPa)] <Insert strength>, muumum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to membrane roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofmg to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. E. Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units. F. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal./lOO sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 7 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. H. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure fIrst layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten fIrst layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature. 3. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. 1. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.3 ADHERED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofmg membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. 1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036. B. Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofmg membrane. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply water-based bonding adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer and immediately install roofmg membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofmg membrane. D. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofmg membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams m roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. 3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofmg membrane over area to receive roofmg according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. 1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082. B. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofmg. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 8 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) 3.5 C. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofmg membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofmg membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams m roofmg membrane that does not meet requirements. D. In-Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of roofmg membrane using fastening plates or metal battens centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofmg membrane to roof deck. Field-splice seam. E. Through-Membrane Attachment: Secure roofmg membrane using fastening plates or metal battens and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Cover battens and fasteners with a continuous cover strip. LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofmg membrane over area to receive roofmg according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. B. [Mechanically fasten or adhere perimeter of roofing membrane] [Adhere roofing membrane at corners, perimeters, and transitions] according to requirements in ANSIISPRl RP-4. C. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofmg membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams m roofmg membrane that does not meet requirements. D. Aggregate Ballast: Apply aggregate ballast uniformly over roofmg membrane at rate required by membrane roofmg system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofmg system. Lay ballast as roofmg membrane is installed, leaving roofing membrane ballasted at the end of the workday. 1. Ballast Weight: Size 4 aggregate, 10 Ib/sq. ft. (50 kg/sq. m). 2. Ballast Weight: Size 2 aggregate, 13 Ib/sq. ft. (65 kg/sq. m), at comers and perimeter; Size 4 aggregate, 10 Ib/sq. ft. (50 kg/sq. m), elsewhere. E. Roof-Paver Ballast: Install lightweight roof-paver ballast according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Roof-Paver and Aggregate Ballast: Install heavyweight roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions on roof comers and perimeter. Install Size 2 aggregate ballast elsewhere on roofing at a minimum rate of 13 lb/sq. ft. (65 kg/sq. m). THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 9 MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/00 (R 05/06) Copyright 2000 AlA 3.6 A. B. C. D. E. BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside comers with sheet flashing. Clean seam areas and overlap and ftrmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars]. 3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches (75 mm) of space between adjacent roof pavers. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofmg system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofmg installation on completion and submit report to Architect. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07540END OF SECTION 07540 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 - 10 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/00 SECTION 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07550 - 1 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 SECTION 07551 - APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes APP-modified bituminous membrane roofmg. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofmg asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop-applied roofmg asphalt and 75 centipoise for mechanical spreader-applied roofmg asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofmg system. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: manufacturer's products. A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofmg system [from] [or] [approved by] roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the frre-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 1 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 1.5 VV~ll1{ A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within [10] [15] [20] years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. APP-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofmg: a. American Lubricants Co., Inc. b. Bitec Inc. c. CertainTeed Corporation. d. Dibiten USA. e. Ecology Roof Systems. f. Firestone Building Products Company. g. GAF Materials Corporation. h. Garland Co., Inc. (The). 1. Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc. J. Honeywell Commercial Roofmg Systems. k. ICA, Inc. I. IKO Industries. m. Johns Manville International, Inc. n. Koppers Industries, Inc. o. Malarkey Roofmg Company. p. Performance Roof Systems, Inc. q. Polyg1ass USA, Inc. r. Texas Refmery Corporation. s. U.S. Intec, Inc. t. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 APP-MODIFIED ASPHALT -SHEET MATERIALS A. Roofmg Membrane Sheet: [ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6223, Grade S, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], APP-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. B. Roofmg Membrane Cap Sheet: [ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester- reinforced] [ASTM D 6223, Grade G, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber- APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 2 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 reinforced], APP-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. 2.3 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 Ib/1 00 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type [I] [II], nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fme mineral surfacing on both sides. C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. 2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type [I] [II], asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fme mineral surfacing on both sides. B. Backer Sheet: [ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6223, Grade S, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], APP-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. C. Flashing Sheet: [ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6223, Grade G, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], APP-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofmg membrane. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. C. Roofmg Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type [III] [IV] [ill or IV as recommended by rooting system manufacturer for application] <Insert type>. D. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofmg system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two- part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with [rooting membrane] [and] [base flashings]. E. Asphalt Roofmg Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 3 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofmg membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. 2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. C. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick, seal coated. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)] [X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. (21-kg/cu. m)] minimum density, square edged. B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type [II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (22-kg/cu. m)] [VIII, 1.15-lb/cu. ft. (18-kg/cu. m)] [IX, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m)] minimum density. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. D. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Type ill (perlite-insulation-board facer), [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick. 2. Type N (cellulosic-fiber-insulation-board facer), Grade 1, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. E. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofmg agents with top surface seal-coated. F. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, fibrous-felted wood fiber or other cellulosic-fiber and water-resistant binders, asphalt impregnated, chemically treated for deterioration. G. Glass-Fiber-Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt-coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper. H. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of [1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48)] <Insert slope>, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 4 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section ''[Rough Carpentry] [Miscellaneous Carpentry]." F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. G. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. H. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass-fiber insulation board. I. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. J. Cover Board: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with top surface seal-coated. K. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick 2.9 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: [Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition] [Polymer- moditied, reconstituted solid-rubber, surface-textured], slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer, [3/8 inch (10 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: <Insert size.> B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: [ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or ll, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6223, Grade G, Type I or ll, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], APP-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 5 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Comply with roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. B. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal- (89-mm actual-) width wood nailer strips of same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck at the following spacing: 1. [16 feet (4.88 m)] <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 1 inch per 12 inches (1: 12) but less than 3 inches per 12 inches (3: 12). 2. [48 inches (1220 mm)] <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 3 inches per 12 inches (3:12). C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. F. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal./l00 sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure fIrst layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551-6 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. J. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofmg membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMAlNRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofmg." B. Where roof slope exceeds [112 inch per 12 inches (1:24)] [3/4 inch per 12 inches (1:18)] <Insert slope>, install roofing membrane sheets parallel with slope. 1. Backnail roofmg membrane sheets to [nailer strips] [substrate] according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. C. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofmg membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofmg asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofmg system components or adjacent building construction. E. Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50 lllill) and 6 inches (l50 mm), respectively. F. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 2. Spot- or strip-mop to substrate with hot roofmg asphalt. 3. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. 4. Adhere to substrate in a uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive. G. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane [sheet] [and] [cap sheet] according to roofmg manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofmg system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive. 2. Torch apply to substrate. 3. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. H. Laps: Accurately align roofmg membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. I. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water. APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 7 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofmg membrane and 4 inches (100 Il1m) onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roof mg. D. Install roofmg membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads in cold-applied adhesive, using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. B. Walkway Strips: Install walkway cap sheet strips over roofing membrane. 1. Install walkway strips [in cold-applied adhesive] [by torch application]. END OF SECTION 07551 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - 8 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 SECTION 07552 - SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes SBS-modified bituminous membrane roofing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofmg asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop-applied roofmg asphalt and 75 centipoise for mechanical spreader-applied roofmg asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofmg system. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: manufacturer's products. A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofmg system [from] [or] [approved by] roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the frre-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class [A] [B] [C]; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 1 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofmg system that fail in materials or workmanship within [10] [15] [20] years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roofleaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofmg: a. Barrett Company. b. Bitec Inc. c. CertainTeed Corporation. d. Danoza Caribbean Inc. e. Ecology Roof Systems. f. Firestone Building Products Company. g. GAF Materials Corporation. h. Garland Co., Inc. (The). 1. Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc. J. Honeywell Commercial Roofmg Systems. k. IKO Industries. I. Johns Manville International, Inc. m. Koppers Industries, Inc. n. Malarkey Roofmg Company. o. MBTechnology Corporation. p. Monsey-Bakor; Div. of Henry Company. q. Polyglass USA, Inc. r. Siplast, Inc. s. Soprema Roofmg and Waterproofmg Inc. t. T AMKO Roofmg Products, Inc. u. Tremco, Inc. v. U.S. Intec, Inc. w. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 SBS-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS A. Roofmg Membrane Sheet: [ASTM D 6164, Grade S, Type I or IT, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or II, glass-tiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6162, Grade S, SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 2 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. B. Roofmg Membrane Cap Sheet: [ASTM D 6164, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or II, glass-tiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6162, Grade S, Type lor II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. C. Roofmg Membrane Cap Sheet: [ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester- reinforced] [ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type lor II, glass-tiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. 2.3 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS A. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/lOO sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m). B. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type [I] [II], nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fme mineral surfacing on both sides. C. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified, asphalt-impregnated and -coated sheet, with glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. D. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. 2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type [I] [II], asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. B. Backer Sheet: [ASTM D 6164, Grade S, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I or II, glass-tiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6162, Grade S, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. C. Flashing Sheet: [ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I or II, glass-tiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type I or II, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 3 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofmg membrane. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. C. Roofmg Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type [Ill] [IV] [ill or IV as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application] <Insert type>. D. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofmg system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or two- part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with [roofing membrane] [and] [base flashings]. E. Asphalt Roofmg Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofmg system manufacturer for application. F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofmg membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer. G. Aggregate Surfacing: ASTM D 1863, No.6 or No. 67, clean, dry, opaque, [water-worn gravel or crushed stone, free ofsharp edges] [crushed slag, free ofsharp edges]. 2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick. B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. C. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick, seal coated. D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. 2.7 ROOF INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type [IV, 1.6-lb/cu. ft. (26-kg/cu. m)] [X, 1.3-lb/cu. ft. (21-kg/cu. m)] minimum density, square edged. B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578 Type [II, 1.35-lb/cu. ft. (l2-kg/cu. m)] [VIII, 1.15-lb/cu. ft. (IS-kg/cu. m)] [IX, 1.8-lb/cu. ft. (29-kg/cu. m)] minimum density. C. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both maj or surfaces. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 4 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 D. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass-fiber mat facer on the other. 1. Type ill (perlite-insulation-board facer), [112 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick. 2. Type IV (cellulosic-fiber-insulation-board facer), Grade 1, 1/2 inch (13 nun) thick. E. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofmg agents with top surface seal-coated. F. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type IT, Grade 1, fibrous-felted wood fiber or other cellulosic-fiber and water-resistant binders, asphalt impregnated, chemically treated for deterioration. G. Glass-Fiber-Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders, faced on one side with asphalt-coated fiberglass scrim and kraft paper. H. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of [114 inch per 12 inches (l :48)] <Insert slope>, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. D. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 208, Type IT, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. E. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "[Rough Carpentry] [Miscellaneous Carpentry]." F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. G. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type IT, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board. H. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass-fiber insulation board. 1. Cover Board: ASTM C 208, Type IT, Grade 1, cellulosic-fiber insulation board, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. J. Cover Board: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board, 3/4 inch (l9mm) thick, with top surface seal-coated. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 5 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 K. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, [114 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 ffim)] thick. 2.9 WALKWAYS A. Walkway Pads: [Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition] [Polymer- moditied, reconstituted solid-rubber, surface-textured], slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofmg system manufacturer, [3/8 inch (9 mm)] [112 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: <Insert size.> B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: [ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type lor ll, polyester-reinforced] [ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I or ll, glass-tiber-reinforced] [ASTM D 6162, Grade G, Type lor ll, composite polyester- and glass-tiber-reinforced], SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. B. Nailer Strips: Mechanically fasten 4-inch nominal- (89-mm actual-) width wood nailer strips of same thickness as insulation perpendicular to sloped roof deck at the following spacing: 1. [16 feet (4.88 m)] <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 1 inch per 12 inches (l: 12) but less than 3 inches per 12 inches (3: 12). 2. [48 inches (1220 mm)] <Insert spacing> apart for roof slopes greater than 3 inches per 12 inches (3:12). C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. D. Install tapered insulation under area ofroofmg to conform to slopes indicated. E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofmg to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] or greater, SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 6 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 111m) in each direction. F. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gaL/lOO sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m) and allow primer to dry. 2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. 3. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure fIrst layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. J. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 3.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofmg membrane system according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMAINRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofmg." B. Where roof slope exceeds [1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24)] [3/4 inch per 12 inches (1:18)] <Insert slope>, install roofmg membrane sheets parallel with slope. 1. Backnail roofmg membrane sheets to [nailer strips] [ substrate] according to roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. C. Coordinate installing roofmg system so insulation and other components of the roofmg membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. D. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofmg asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofmg system components or adjacent building construction. E. Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), respectively. F. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet as follows: SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 7 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 1. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 2. Spot- or strip-mop to substrate with hot roofing asphalt. 3. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt. 4. Adhere to substrate in a uniform coating of cold-applied adhesive. G. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane [sheet] [and] [cap sheet] according to roofmg manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofmg membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofmg asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F (218 deg C). 2. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive. 3. Torch apply to substrate. 4. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. H. Laps: Accurately align roofmg membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 1. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water. J. Aggregate Surfacing: Promptly after installing and testing roofing membrane, base flashing, and stripping, flood-coat roof surface with 60 Ib/l00 sq. ft. (3 kg/sq. m) of hot roofmg asphalt. While flood coat is hot and fluid, cast the following average weight of aggregate in a uniform course: 1. Aggregate Weight: [400 Ib/100 sq. ft. (20 kg/sq. m)] [300 Ib/100 sq. ft. (15 kg/sq. m)]. 3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and 4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install roofmg membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 8 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 5/00 B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: Install roofmg membrane walkway cap sheet strips over roofmg membrane [in hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F (218 dcg C)] [in cold- applied adhesive] [by torch application]. END OF SECTION 07552 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 9 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 SECTION 07561 - FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Protected, hot fluid-applied roofing membrane[, unreinforced] [, reinforced]. 2. Board insulation. 3. Aggregate ballast. 4. Roof pavers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of roofmg. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, for substrate joints and cracks, flashing sheets, roof penetrations, vertical intersections, roof slope, [ expansion joints,] and membrane terminations. C. Product test reports. D. Maintenance data. E. Sample warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Proj ect. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide hot fluid-applied roofing identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics indicated by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; complying with ASTM E 108, for application and slopes indicated. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply roofmg within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by roofmg system manufacturer. Do not apply roofmg to a damp or wet substrate or when temperature is below 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C). FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07561 - I Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace roofmg that does not remain watertight and base flashing that does not within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [10] [15] [20] years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Hot Fluid-Applied, Rubberized-Asphalt Roofing Membrane: Single component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Monolithic Membrane 6125. b. American Permaquik Inc.; Permaquik 6100. c. Barrett Company; Ram-Tough 250. d. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-500R. e. Henry Company; 790-11. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremproof 150. g. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2.2 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) thick, minimum, uncured sheet neoprene[ with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives]. B. SBS-Modified Bituminous Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6164, Grade G, Type I or Type II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, [white] [gray] [tan] <Insert color>. C. APP-Modified Bituminous Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, [Grade S, smooth] [Grade G, granular] surfaced, Type I or Type II, polyester-reinforced, APP-modified asphalt sheet; suitable for application method specified. 1. Granule Color: [White] [Gray] [Tan] <Insert color>. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer. B. Elastomeric Sheet: 50-mil- (1.3-1mn-) thick, rmmmum, uncured sheet neoprene[ with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives]. FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07561 - 2 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled, stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors. D. Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended, spun-bonded polyester fabric. E. Protection Course: Manufacturer's standard, 80-to-90-mil- (2.0-to-2.3-mm-) thick, fiberglass- reinforced rubberized asphalt or modified bituminous sheet. F. Geotextile Fabric: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefm, or polyester geotextile fabric; water permeable and resistant to UV -light degradation; of type and weight recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. G. Roof-Paver Metal Straps: Securement strapping fabricated from stainless steel, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) wide by 0.031 inch (0.8 mm) thick with stainless-steel anchors or other corrosion-resistant, postinstalled expansion anchors approved by insulation manufacturer. 2.4 BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 1.8 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m)] [Type VII, 2.2Ib/cu. ft. (35 kg/cu. m)] with two or four edges rabbeted. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 1.8 lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m)] [Type VII, 2.2 lb/cu. ft. (35 kg/cu. m)] with rabbeted edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels. 2.5 AGGREGATE BALLAST A. Aggregate Ballast: Washed, crushed stone or smooth stone that will withstand weather exposure without significant deterioration and will not contribute to membrane degradation; ASTM D 448, [Size 5] [Size 4] [Size 2]. 2.6 ROOF P AVERS A. Roof Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, [square edged] [with top edges beveled 3/16 inch (5 mm)], factory cast for use as roof pavers; absorption not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Size: [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] <Insert size>. 2. Weight: <Insert weight>. 3. Compressive Strength: [7500 psi (52 MPa)] [6500 psi (45 .MPa)] <Insert strength>, minimum; ASTM C 140. 4. Colors and Textures: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 5. Paver Supports: Integral comer pedestals. 6. Paver Supports: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-density polyethylene, or polyurethane paver support assembly, including [fixed-height] [adjustable or FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07561 - 3 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 stackable] pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint spacing of [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [3/16 inch (5 mm)] [1/8 to 3/16 inch (3 to 5 mm)]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. C. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fms, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.2 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive roofing membrane, includingjoints and cracks, expansion joints, discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, roof drains, and penetrations, according roofmg system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. 3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing at terminations of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow to dry. B. Heat and apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Unreinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to area to receive roofmg. Spread hot rubberized asphalt to form a uniform, unreinforced, seamless membrane, [180-mil (4.5-mm) minimum thickness] [I80-mil (4.5-mm) average thickness, but not less than 125 mil (3.2 mm) thick]. D. Reinforced Membrane: Apply hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to area to receive roofmg. Spread a 90-mil- (2.3-mm-) thick layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt; embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2 inches (50 nm1); spread another 125-mil- (3.2-rllil1-) thick layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to form a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane, 215 mi Is (5.5 mm) thick. FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07561 - 4 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 E. Apply hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer. F. Cover waterproofmg with protection course with overlapped joints before membrane is subject construction traffic. 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Loosely lay board insulation units over roofing membrane, with long joints of insulation in continuous straight lines and with end joints staggered between rows. Abut edges and ends between units. B. Install one or more layers of insulation to achieve required thickness over roofmg membrane. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations. 1. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches (50 mm) or more, install required thickness in two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered over joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. C. Install geotextile fabric over insulation, overlapping edges and ends at least 12 inches (300 mm). Do not lap ends of fabric sheets within 72 inches (1800 mm) of roof perimeter. Extend fabric 2 to 3 inches (50 to 75 m111) above ballast at perimeter and penetrations. Apply additional layer of fabric around penetrations to prevent aggregate from getting between penetration and insulation. Do not cover drains or restrict water flow to drains. 3.6 BALLAST INSTALLATION A. To roofed area, apply aggregate ballast uniformly over geotextile fabric at rate required by insulation manufacturer, carefully spreading aggregate to not damage roofing membrane and base flashings.[ Install roof-paver ballast according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions]. Apply ballast as insulation is installed, leaving roofing membrane insulated and ballasted at end of workday. 1. Walkway Pavers: Install walkways formed from [one row] [two rows] of roof pavers, loosely laid and butted. 3.7 ROOF-PAVER INSTALLATION A. Install roof pavers over roofed area according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install roof pavers over roofed area according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Mechanically fasten roof-paver metal straps to center of ftrst perimeter and ftrst perimeter comer row of roof pavers. C. Install roof pavers over roofed area according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Mechanically fasten roof-paver metal straps to center of first two perimeters and ftrst two perimeter comer rows of roof pavers. D. Install roof pavers on pedestals set according to pedestal manufacturer's written instructions. FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07561 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect roofmg from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07561 FLUID-APPLIED PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING 07561 - 6 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/00 SECTION 07591 - MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof tear-off. 2. Partial roof tear-off. 3. Roof re-cover preparation. B. Allowances: Refer to Division 1 Section "Allowances" for description of Work in this Section affected by allowances. C. Unit Prices: Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for description of Work in this Section affected by unit prices. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Temporary Roofmg: Include Product Data and description of temporary roofmg system. If temporary roof will remain in place, submit surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer stating acceptance of the temporary membrane, and that its inclusion will not adversely affect the roofmg system's resistance to ftre and wind[ or its FMG rating]. C. Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualiftcations: Installer of new membrane roofing system. B. [Preliminary Reroofing and ]Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below reroofmg area. Conduct reroofing so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide Owner with not less than [72] <Insert number> hours' notice of activities that may affect Owner's operations. MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 1 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/00 1. Coordinate work activities daily with Owner so Owner can place protective dust or water leakage covers over sensitive equipment or furnishings, shut down HV AC and fITe-alarm or -detection equipment if needed, and evacuate occupants from below the work area if desired. 2. Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify Owner to evacuate occupants from below the affected area. Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated prior to proceeding with work over the impaired deck area. B. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofmg operations. C. Limit construction loads on roof to <Insert load> rooftop equipment wheel loads and <Insert load> for uniformly distributed loads. D. A roof moisture survey of existing membrane roofmg system is available for Contractor's reference. E. The results of an analysis of test cores from existing membrane roofmg system are available for Contractor's reference. F. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofmg preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering into existing roofmg system or building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECOVER BOARDS A. Recover Board: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade [1] [2], cellulosic-fiber insulation board; 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick. B. Recover Board: Fan-folded, unfaced, extruded-polystyrene board insulation; nominal thickness [3/16 inch (5 mm)] [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/8 inch (10 mm)]. C. Recover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate; [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (16 mm)] thick. D. Recover Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board; [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] thick. E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners, No. [12] [or] [14], and metal or plastic plates listed in FMG's "Approval Guide," designed for fastening recover boards to deck. 2.2 AUXILIARY REROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary reroofmg preparation materials recommended by roofmg system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with components of [existing and ]new membrane roofmg system. MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 2 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/00 B. Base Sheet Fasteners: Capped head, factory-coated steel fasteners, listed in FMG's "Approval Guide. " C. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect existing membrane roofmg system that is indicated not to be reroofed. B. Coordinate with Owner to shut down air intake equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air intake louvers before proceeding with reroofmg work that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork. C. Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast. D. Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping have been shut off before commencing Work. 3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed[ and obtain authorization to proceed]. B. Remove aggregate ballast from roofmg membrane. [ Store aggregate ballast for reuse]. C. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced built-up bituminous roofmg with a power broom. D. Remove pavers from roofmg membrane.[ Store and protect pavers for reuse. Discard cracked pavers]. E. [Partial ]Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing membrane and other membrane roofing system components down to the deck. 1. Bitumen and felts that are frrmly bonded to concrete decks are permitted to remain if felts are dry. Remove unadhered bitumen and felts and wet felts. 2. Remove excess asphalt from steel deck. A maximum of 15 Ib/100 sq. ft. (0.72 kg/sq. m) of asphalt is permitted to remain on steel decks. 3. Remove fasteners from deck. 3.3 DECK PREPARATION A. Inspect deck after[ partial] tear-off of membrane roofmg system. MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 3 Copyright 2000 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/00 1. Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 or by pouring 1 pint (0.5 L) of hot roofmg asphalt on deck at start of each day's work and at start of each roof area or plane. Do not proceed with roofmg work if moisture condenses under the plastic sheet or if asphalt test sample foams or can be easily and cleanly stripped after cooling. B. If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to one another or to structure are observed, or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. C. If deck surface is not suitable for receiving new roofmg, or if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect. D. Remove temporary roofing membrane before installing new roofing membrane. 3.4 ROOF RE-COVER PREPARATION A. Remove blisters, ridges, buckles, and other substrate irregularities from existing roofing membrane that inhibit new recover boards from conforming to substrate. 1. Remove loose aggregate from aggregate-surfaced, built-up bituminous roofing with a power broom. 2. Broom clean existing substrate. 3. Coordinate with Owner's inspector to schedule times for tests and inspections before proceeding with installation of recover boards. 4. Verify that existing substrate is dry before proceeding with installation of recover boards. Spot check substrates with an electrical capacitance moisture-detection meter. 5. Remove materials that are wet or damp. Removal will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. 6. Provide additional uplift securement for existing roofmg system with new screws and plates applied to each roof zone at the following densities: a. Field of roof, one fastener for each <Insert area>. b. Comers of roof, one fastener for each <Insert area>. c. Perimeters of roof, one fastener for each <Insert area>. Width of perimeter zone of roof is <Insert dimension>. 3.5 EXISTING BASE FLASHINGS A. Remove existing base flashings around parapets, curbs, walls, and penetrations. 1. Clean substrates of contaminants such as asphalt, sheet materials, dirt, and debris. B. Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain. Replace metal counterflashings damaged during removal with counterf1ashings [of same metal, weight or thickness, and finish.] [specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."] [specified in Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties. It] MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 4 Copyright 2000 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/00 C. Remove existing parapet sheathing and replace with new [pressure-preservative] [exterior fire-retardant]-treated plywood sheathing, [19/32 inch (15 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. If parapet framing has deteriorated, immediately notify Architect. 1. Plywood parapet sheathing is specified in Division 6 Section "[Rough Carpentry] [Miscellaneous Carpentry]." 3.6 RECOVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install recover boards over [roof insulation] [roofing membrane] with long joints in continuous straight lines and end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt recover boards together[ and fasten to deck]. 1. Fasten to resist wind-uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof specified in Division 7 Section "[Built-up Asphalt Roofing] <Insert Section title>." 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Collect and place demolished materials in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 07591 MEMBRANE REROOFING PREPARATION 07591 - 5 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 SECTION 07610 - SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Flat-seam metal roofing, custom fabricated. 2. Standing-seam metal roofmg, [custom fabricated] [on-site, roll formed]. 3. Batten-seam metal roofmg, [custom fabricated] [on-site, roll formed]. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Energy Perfomiallce: Provide metal roofing with solar reflectance index not less than [78] [29] when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For roof panels, indicating that panels comply with Solar Reflectance Index requirement. C. Shop Drawings: Show installation layout of sheet metal roofmg, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, and securing sheet metal roofmg, including pattern of seams, termination points, fIxed points, expansion joints, roof penetrations, edge conditions, special conditions, connections to adjoining work, and details of accessory items. D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each fmish specified. E. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale with coordinated details for penetrations and roof-mounted items. F. Portable Roll-Forming Equipment Certificate: Issued by UL for equipment manufacturer's portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing panels that comply with UL requirements. G. Product test reports. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 1 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 H. Maintenance data. 1. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofmg Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator authorized by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to fabricate and install sheet metal roofmg units required for this Project, and who maintains current UL certification of its portable roll-forming equipment. B. UL-Certified, Portable Roll-Forming Equipment: UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofmg assemblies that comply with UL 580 for [Class 30] [Class 60] [Class 90] wind-uplift resistance. Maintain UL certification of portable roll-forming equipment for duration of sheet metal roofmg work. C. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. D. Copper Roofmg Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof area and eave[, including fascia,] [ and soffit] as shown on Drawings; approximately [48 inches (1200 mm)] [12 feet (3.5 m)] <Insert dimension> square by full thickness, including attachments[, underlayment,] and accessories. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Warranty form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair fmish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factory- applied fmishes within [20] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other fmishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 2 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/ A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 3. Thickness: Nominal [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> unless otherwise indicated. a. Batten Caps: Nominal 0.028 inch (0.71 111m) thick. 4. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed]. 5. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pretreat with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm). 6. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. c. Silicornzed Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 7. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for fmish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. Thickness: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] unless otherwise indicated. a. Batten Caps: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick. 2. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed]. 3. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pretreat with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm). 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. c. Silicornzed Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 5. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 3 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 D. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, HOO temper, [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] [20 oz./sq. ft. (0.70 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)> unless otherwise indicated. 1. Batten Caps: 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.70 nml thick). 2. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: Mill. 3. Pre-Patinated Copper-Sheet Finish: [Dark brown] [Verdigris] <Insert color>, pre- patinated according to ASTM B 882. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/ A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed. 1. Thickness: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] unless otherwise indicated. a. Batten Caps: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick. 2. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed]. 3. Finish: [2D (dull, cold rolled)] [2B (bright, cold rolled)] [3 (coarse, polished directional satin)] [4 (polished directional satin)]. a. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished fmish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 2.2 UNDERLA YMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: ASTM D 4397. 6-mil- (O.l5-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felts. C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 111m) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C). D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/l00 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofmg system and as recommended by primary sheet metal[ or portable roll-forming equipment] manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 4 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 B. Wood Battens: Lumber complying with requirements in Division 6 Section "[Rough Carpentry] [Miscellaneous Carpentry]" and treated with exterior-type fIre retardant. C. Snap-On Seams: Provide snap-on seams integrated with panel-edge profile as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to produce sheet metal roofmg assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. D. Snap-on Batten Caps: Provide batten clips integrated with snap-on caps as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to produce sheet metal roofmg assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. E. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. General: a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofmg using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. c. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for [Zinc-Coated] [Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated] Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, ASTM F 2329, or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel. 5. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. F. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade snSo, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. 2. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 3. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. G. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (l3 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant[ as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for installation indicated]; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal roofmg and remain watertight. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 5 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 1. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofmg assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, comer units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and fmish of sheet metal roofing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide accessories as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to produce sheet metal roofmg assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 2. Cleats: For mechanically seaming into joints and formed from the following materials: a. (Metallic-Coated Steel] [Aluminum] Roofmg: [O.025-inch- (O.64-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick stainless steel. b. Copper Roofmg: [16-oz.!sq. ft. (O.55-mm)] <Insert weight (thickness)> copper sheet. c. Stainless-Steel Roofmg: [O.025-inch- (O.64-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick stainless steel. 3. Clips: Minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum l-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible-closure strips; cut or premolded to match sheet metal roofmg profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 5. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and fmish as sheet metal roofmg, minimum thickness [matching the sheet metal roofing] <Insert thickness>. B. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material and finish as sheet metal roofmg, rmrumum thickness [matching the sheet metal roofmg] <Insert thickness>; with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles; with weatherproof top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb sub framing of nominal [0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped galvanized steel or stainless-steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Insulate curbs with [l-inch- (25-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick, rigid insulation. 2. Install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal roofmg to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 6 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 dimensions (panel width and seam height), geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of installation indicated. Fabricate sheet metal roofmg and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Flat-Seam Roofmg: Form flat-seam panels from metal sheets 20 by 28 inches (510 by 710 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) notched and folded edges. 2. Standing-Seam Roofmg: Form standing-seam panels with fmished seam height [of 1 inch (25 mm)] [of 1-112 inches (38 mm)] [as indicated] <Insert dimension>. 3. Batten-Seam Roofmg: Form batten-seam panels with sides turned up [2-1/8 inches (54 mm)] [as indicated] <Insert dimension> with 1/2-inch (l3-mm) flange turned toward center of pan. B. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofmg panels with UL-certified, portable roll- forming equipment capable of producing roofmg panels for sheet metal roofmg assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and to comply with details shown. C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator of sheet metal roofmg or manufacturers of the metals in contact. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that tops of fasteners are flush with surface. B. Layout and [nail battens to wood sheathing] [screw battens to wood sheathing] [screw battens to metal deck] before installation of sheet metal roofmg. I. Space fasteners not more than [18 inches (457 mm)] <Insert dimension> o.c. 2. Space fasteners as required by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for specified UL classification for wind-uplift resistance. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 7 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 3.2 UNDERLA YMENT INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofmg. Use adhesive for anchorage. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply [over entire roof] [at locations indicated on Drawings], in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. D. Apply slip sheet before installing sheet metal roofmg. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofmg. 1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 2. Provide metal closures at [peaks] [rake edges] [rake walls] [eaves] [and] each side of ridge[ and hip] caps. 3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofmg with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels for fasteners. 5. Install ridge[ and hip] caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds. 6. Locate roofmg splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 7. Install sealant tape where indicated. 8. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the material. B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. 1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at [ eave] [ridge] [center of panel length ] [locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert location>. 2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 8 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate [wood sheathing not less than 1-114 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws] [metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull- out resistance] <Insert size requirement>. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of [uncoated aluminum] [and] [stainless-steel] sheet metal roofing with bituminous coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. 3.4 CUSTOM-FABRICATED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate and install work with lines and comers of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two fasteners to prevent rotation. 2. Fasten cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over fastener head. 3. Provide expansion-type cleats and clips for roof panels that exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) in length. B. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofmg with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder [metallic-coated steel] [and] [aluminum] sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Roofmg: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 4. Copper Roofmg: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets, using solder for copper. D. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 9 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 E. Flat-Seam Roofmg: Attach flat-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, starting at eave and working upward toward ridge. After panels are in place, mallet seams and solder. 1. Attach roofmg panels with cleats spaced not more than [24 inches (610 mm)] <Insert cleat spacing> o.c. Lock and solder panels to base flashing. 2. Attach edge flashing to face of roof edge with continuous cleat fastened to roof substrate at [12 inches (305 mm)] <Insert cleat spacing> o.c. Lock panels to edge flashing and [solder] [apply sealant]. F. Standing-Seam Roofmg: Attach standing-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, double fastened at [12 inches (305 mm)] <Insert cleat spacing> o.c. Install panels reaching from eave to ridge before moving to adjacent panels. Before panels are interlocked, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower panel. Lock standing seams by folding over twice so cleat and panel edges are completely engaged. 1. Lock each panel to panel below with [ soldered] [sealed] transverse seam. 2. Loose-lock panels at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges at roof edge at gutters. 3. [Leave seams upright] [Fold over seams] after locking at ridges and hips. G. Batten-Seam Roofmg: Attach batten-seam metal panels to substrate with cleats, starting at eave and working upward toward ridge. Hold cleats in place with battens and fold edges of cleats over to hold panels. After panels are in place and before batten cap is installed, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flanges of each panel. Install batten cap covering batten and panel edges and fold batten cap and panel together so batten cap and panel edges are completely engaged. 1. Lock each panel to panel below with [soldered] [sealed] transverse seam. 2. Splay upturned edges of panels away from base of battens to provide expanSlOn capability . 3. Close batten ends with metal closures. Fold together with panel edges and end of batten cap. 4. Loose-lock panels at eave edges to continuous cleats and flanges at roof edge at gutters. 3.5 ON-SITE, ROLL-FORMED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION A. General: Install on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofmg fabricated from UL-certified equipment to comply with equipment manufacturer's written instructions for UL wind-uplift resistance class indicated. Provide sheet metal roofmg of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise restricted by on-site or shipping limitations. B. Standing-Seam Sheet Metal Roofmg: Fasten sheet metal roofmg to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, at spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer of portable roll-forming equipment. 1. Install clips to substrate with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in equipment manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Before panels are joined, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower panel. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 10 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 4. Snap-On Seam: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging field-applied sealant. 5. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so cleat, sheet metal roofmg, and field-applied sealant are completely engaged. C. Batten-Seam Sheet Metal Roofmg: Fasten sheet metal roofmg to supports with concealed clips at each batten-seam joint at location, at spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer of portable roll-forming equipment. 1. Install clips to substrate with self-drilling fasteners. 2. After panels are in place and before batten cap is installed, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of each panel. 3. Apply snap-on batten caps to sheet metal roofmg seams, fully engaged to provide weathertight joints. D. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofmg with 3:12 slopes or less, use cleats at transverse seams. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 111m) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant- type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofmg assembly including trim, copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fIllers, metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal ManuaL" Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 11 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofmg is installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 07610 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07610 - 12 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured reglets[ and counterflashing]. 2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS C. D. E. 1.3 A. B. e. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field- assembled work. 1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work. Samples: For each exposed product and for each fmish specified. Maintenance data. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. QUALITY ASSURANCE Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including [built-in gutter] [fascia] [fascia trim] [apron flashing] <Insert item>, approximately [10 feet (3.0 m)] <Insert dimension> SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 1 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments[, underlayment,] and accessones. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair fmish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within [20] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other fmishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strlppable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, HOO or HOl temper. 1. Non-Patinated Exposed Finish: MilL 2. Pre-Patinated Copper-Sheet Finish: [Dark brown] [Verdigris] <Insert color>, pre- patinated according to ASTM B 882. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for fmish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required. 1. As-Milled Finish: One-side bright mill finish. 2. Alclad Finish: Metallurgically bonded surfacing to both sides, forming a composite aluminum sheet with reflective luster. 3. Factory Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, pretreat with white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 111m). 4. Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class 1,0.018 mm or thicker. 5. Color Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. a. Color: [Champagne] [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] <Insert color>. 6. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 c. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 7. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; [2D (dull, cold rolled)] [2B (bright, cold rolled)] [3 (coarse, polished directional satin)] [4 (polished directional satin)] fmish. E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/ A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality. 3. Surface: [Mill phosphatized for field painting] [Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides]. 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer fmish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. c. Siliconized Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat. 5. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. 2.2 UNDERLA YMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: ASTM D 4397. 6-mil- (O.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C). 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C). D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lbil 00 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 3 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal[ or manufactured item] unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal[ or manufactured item]. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 5. Fasteners for [Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)] [Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated] Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Solder: 1. For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. 2. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 3. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade snSo, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 REGLETS A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated [with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions ] [with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet]. 1. Material: [Stainless steel, 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick] [Copper, 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] [Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick] [Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick]. 2. Finish: [Mill] [With manufacturer's standard color coating] <Insert finish>. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.] G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer.[ Rivet joints where necessary for strength.] SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 5 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 2.6 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers,[ gutter bead reinforcing bars,] and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Accessories: [Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware cloth screen] [Wire ball downspout strainer] [Valley baIDes]. B. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated. 1. Accessories: [Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal fraIDe and hardware cloth screen] [Bronze wire ball downspout strainer] [Wire ball downspout strainer] . 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. b. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 IDm)] <Insert thickness> thick. C. Downspouts: Fabricate [round] [rectangular] [open-face] downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Hanger Style: <Insert description>. 2. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. b. Aluminum: [0.024 inch (0.61 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. c. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. d. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. e. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch- (lOO-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (l 00 mm) beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof.[ Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.] Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mID)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes [, exterior flange trim,] [and] [built-in overflows]. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. F. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof-Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop)[ and Fascia Cap]: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400- mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Furnish with 6-inch- (150-rnm-) wide, joint cover plates. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [20 oz./sq. ft. (0.68 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 10-foot- (3-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and[ drill elongated holes for fasteners on] interior leg. Miter comers, seal, and solder or weld watertight. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [24 oz./sq. ft. (0.82 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.025 inch (0.64 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [20 oz./sq. ft. (0.68 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. D. Counterflashing[ and Flashing Receivers]: Fabricate from the following materials: I. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 7 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [12 oz./sq. ft. (0.41 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 2.8 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0.48 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. D. Eave, Rake[, Ridge, and Hip] Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0.40 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 8 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0040 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill,[ jamb,] and similar flashings to extend [4 inches (100 mm)] <Insert extension> beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.016 inch (0040 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.022 inch (0.56 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. C. Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight (thickness)>. 2. Aluminum: [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.019 inch (0048 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Galvanized Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.71 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 rom) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 9 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 nun) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of [ uncoated aluminum] [and] [stainless-steel] sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of [10 feet (3 m)] <Insert dimension> with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of comer or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate [wood sheathing not less than 1-114 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws] [metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull- out resistance] <Insert size requirement>. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 nun), except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder [metallic-coated steel] [and] [ aluminum] sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 10 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. 4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored [gutter brackets] [straps] [twisted straps] spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, [50 feet (15.24 m)] <Insert dimension> apart. Install expansion-joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, [removable] [hinged to swing open] for cleaning gutters. C. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with roofmg nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment. 2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, [50 feet (15.24 m)] <Insert dimension> apart. Install expansion-joint caps. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1I2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 111m) O.C. in between. E. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on [low-slope roofs] <Insert surface>. Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofmg. F. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofmg membrane. G. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim 1 inch (25 mm) below [scupper] [gutter] discharge. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 11 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 H. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements[, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions,] and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at [staggered 3-inch (75-mm)] <Insert spacing> centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations m SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at [24-inch (600-mm)] [16-inch (400-mm)] <Insert spacing> centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at [24-inch (600-mm)] <Insert spacing> centers. D. Pipe or Post Counterf1ashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterf1ashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterf1ashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (l00 mm) and bed with sealant. F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofmg and other items penetrating roof. Seal with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "[Unit Masonry Assemblies] [Stone Masonry]." C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in [Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies]. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 12 Copyright 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/05 D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill,[ jamb,] and similar flashings to extend [4 inches (100 mm)] <Insert extension> beyond wall openings. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 13 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Copings. 2. Roof edge flashings. 3. Roof edge drainage systems. 4. Counterflashings and reglets. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FMG Listing: Manufacture and install [copings] [roof edge flashings] that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" and approved for Windstorm Classification, Class 1-[60] [75] [90] [105] [120] <Insert number>. Identify materials with FMG markings. B. Manufacture and install [copings] [roof edge flashings] tested according to SPRl ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures: 1. Design Pressure: <Insert design wind pressure.> 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of manufactured roof specialties, including plans and elevations. Identify factory- vs. field-assembled work. C. Samples: For each type of manufactured roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color fmishes. D. Product Test Reports: Verifying compliance of [copings] [roof edge flashings] with performance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 1 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: The designs for [copings] [roof edge flashings] [roof edge drainage system] [and] [counterflashings and reglets] are based on the products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 EXPOSED METALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, Temper HOO or HOl, cold rolled, mill finished. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and fmish indicated, fmished as follows: 1. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed] fmish. 2. Mill fmish. 3. High-Performance Organic Finish: [Two] [Three ]-coat, thermocured system with color coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. 4. [Clear] [Color] Anodic Finish: Class [I, 0.018 mm] [11,0.010 mm] or thicker coating, complying with AAMA 611. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and fmish indicated, finished as follows: 1. High-Performance Organic Finish: [Two] [Three]-coat, thermo cured system with color coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. 2. [Clear] [Color] Anodic Finish: Class [I, 0.018 mm] [11,0.010 mm] or thicker coating, complying with AAMA 611. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, No. [2B (bright, reflective)] [3 (reflective, polished directional satin)] [4 (fine reflective, polished directional satin)] fmish. E. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, structural quality, and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/ A 755M. 1. Surface: [Smooth, flat] [Embossed] fmish. 2. High-Performance Organic Finish: [Two] [Three]-coat, thermocured system with color coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604, except as modified for below: MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 2 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) a. Humidity and Salt Spray Resistance: [1000] [2000] hours. 2.3 CONCEALED METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use and structural performance indicated, mill fmished. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and structural performance indicated, mill finished. e. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/ A 240M, Type 304. D. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: designation; structural quality. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric [polyurethane] [polysulfide] [silicone] polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. D. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for IS-mil (O.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 COPINGS A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding [12 feet (3.6 m)] <Insert length>, concealed anchorage, concealed splice plates with same fmish as coping caps, mitered comer units, and end cap units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Architectural Products Co. MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 3 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) b. AT AS International, Inc. c. Castle Metal Products. d. Cheney Flashing Company. e. Hickman, W. P. Company. f. Merchant & Evans, Inc. g. Metal-Era, Inc. h. Metal-Fab Manufacturing LLC. 1. MM Systems Corporation. J. Perimeter Systems, a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. k. Petersen Aluminum Corp. I. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. [Available ]Products: a. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 4. Coping Caps: [Snap-on] [Face leg hooked to continuous cleat with back leg fastener exposed], fabricated from the following exposed metal: a. Copper: [20 oz./sq. ft. (0.7 mm thick)] <Insert weight or thickness>. b. Aluminum: [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] [0.063 inch (1.6 mm)] [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. c. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.85 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Coping Cap Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 6. Comers: [Continuously welded] [Mechanically clinched and sealed watertight] [Soldered]. 7. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized steel sheet, 12 inches (300 mm) wide, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) thick, with integral cleats. 8. Face Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous [galvanized steel sheet] [stainless steel]. 2.6 ROOF EDGE FLASHINGS A. Canted Roof Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof edge fascia consisting of [snap-on] [compression-clamped] metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding [12 feet (3.6 m)] <Insert length> and a continuous formed galvanized steel sheet cant dam, 0.028 inch (0.7 Imn) thick, minimum, with integral drip edge cleat. Provide matching mitered and welded comer units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Architectural Products Co. b. Castle Metal Products. c. Cheney Flashing Company. d. Hickman, W. P. Company. MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 4 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) e. Merchant & Evans, Inc. f. Metal-Era, Inc. g. Metal-Fab Manufacturing LLC. h. MM Systems Corporation. 1. Perimeter Systems, a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. J. Petersen Aluminum Corp. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. [Available ]Products: a. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 4. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from the following exposed metal: a. [Formed] [Extruded] Aluminum: [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] [0.063 inch (1.6 mm)] [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. b. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.85 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Fascia Cover Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 6. Splice Plates: [Concealed] [Exposed], of same material, fmish, and shape as fascia cover. B. Roof Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding [12 feet (3.6 m)] <Insert length> and a continuous formed- or extruded-aluminum anchor bar with integral drip edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching mitered and welded comer units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 2. [ Available ]Manufacturers: a. Hickman, W. P. Company. b. Metal-Era, Inc. c. MM Systems Corporation. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3 . [Available ]Products: a. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 4. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from the following exposed metal: a. [Formed] [Extruded] Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.8 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] [0.063 inch (1.6 mm)] [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. b. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.85 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 5 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) 5. Fascia Cover Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 6. Splice Plates: [Concealed] [Exposed], of same material, fmish, and shape as fascia cover. C. Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, formed-metal gravel stop in section lengths not exceeding [12 feet (3.6 m)] <Insert length>, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia terminating in a drip edge, continuous hold-down cleat, and concealed splice plates of same material, fmish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide mitered and welded or soldered comer units. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Architectural Products Co. b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Castle Metal Products. d. Cheney Flashing Company. e. Hickman, W. P. Company. f. Merchant & Evans, Inc. g. Metal-Era, Inc. h. MM Systems Corporation. 1. Perimeter Systems, a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. J. Petersen Aluminum Corp. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. [Available ]Products: a. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 4. Fabricate from the following exposed metal: a. Copper: [16 oz.lsq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight or thickness>. b. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.8 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. c. Stainless Steel: [0.0250 inch (0.65 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. d. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.85 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.7 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: B. [Available ]Manufacturers: MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 6 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) 1. Architectural Products Co. 2. ATAS International, Inc. 3. Berger Bros. Co. 4. Castle Metal Products. 5. Cheney Flashing Company. 6. Hickman, W. P. Company. 7. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 8. Metal-Era, Inc. 9. Metal-Fab Manufacturing LLC. 10. MM Systems Corporation. 11. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated. 12. Perimeter Systems, a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Co. 13. Petersen Aluminum Corp. 14. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. [Available ]Products: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Gutters and Downspouts: Manufactured formed gutter in uniform section lengths not exceeding [12 feet (3.6 m)] <Insert length>, with mitered and welded or soldered comer units, end caps, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25 mm) above front gutter rim. Furnish with flat-stock gutter straps and gutter support brackets and expansion joints and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters. 1. Fabricate gutter from the following exposed metal: a. Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.8 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] [0.063 inch (1.6 mm)] [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. b. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.85 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. c. Copper: [20 oz.!sq. ft. (0.7 mm thick)] <Insert weight or thickness>. 2. Gutter Style: [A] [B] [F] [G] [H] [I] [Half round] [Ogee] <Insert style> according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal ManuaL" 3. Applied Fascia Cover: Exposed, formed [aluminum, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick] [copper, 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)], with mitered comers, end caps, and concealed splice joints. 4. Gutter Accessories: [Continuous removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame] [Bronze wire ball downspout strainer] [Wire ball downspout strainer]. 5. Downspouts: (Rectangular closed-face] [Rectangular open-face] <Insert shape> with mitered elbows, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish wall brackets, from same material and fmish as downspouts, with anchors. a. Formed Aluminum: [0.032 inch (0.8 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] [0.063 inch (1.6 mm)] [0.080 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. b. Extruded Aluminum: [0.125 inch (3.2 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. c. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.034 inch (0.85 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 7 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) d. Copper: [16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight or thickness>. 2.8 COUNTERFLASHINGS AND REGLETS A. Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: B. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Castle Metal Products. 2. Cheney Flashing Company. 3. Fry Reglet Corporation. 4. Hickman, W. P. Company. 5. Keystone Flashing Company. 6. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 7. Metal-Era, Inc. 8. MM Systems Corporation. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. [Available ]Products: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Counterf1ashings: Manufactured units in lengths not exceeding [12 feet (3.6 m)] <Insert length> designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated: 1. Copper: [16 oz.!sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight or thickness>. 2. Aluminum: [0.024 inch (0.6 mm)] [0.032 inch (0.8 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.0250 inch (0.65 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. E. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterf1ashing pieces, and compatible with flashings indicated[ with factory-mitered and - welded corners and junctions], from the following exposed metal in thickness indicated: 1. Copper: [16 oz.!sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick)] <Insert weight or thickness>. 2. Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.2 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 3. Stainless Steel: [0.0187 inch (0.5 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.028 inch (0.7 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install manufactured roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor manufactured roof specialties securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 8 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) 3.2 3.3 in performance requirements. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete manufactured roof specialty systems. 1. Install manufactured roof specialties with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 2. Torch cutting of manufactured roof specialties is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. e. Install manufactured roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil-canning, buckling, or tool marks. D. Install manufactured roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. E. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed manufactured roof specialties. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet (3.6 m) with no unplanned joints within 18 inches (450 111m) <Insert dimension> of comers or intersections. F. Fasteners: Use fasteners of type and size recommended by manufacturer but of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (l9 rom) for wood screws. G. Seal joints with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant as required by manufacturer of roofmg specialties. COPING INSTALLATION A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor copings to resist uplift and outward forc.es according to performance requirements. 1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor plates anchored to substrate at [30-inch (760-mm) centers] [40-inch (1015-mm) centers] [manufacturer's recommended spacing] <Insert spacing>. 2. Interlock face leg drip edge into continuous cleat anchored to substrate at [24-inch (600- mm) centers] [16-inch (400-mm) centers] [manufacturer's recommended spacing] <Insert spacing>. Anchor back leg of coping with screw fasteners and elastomeric washers at [24-inch (600-mm) centers] [l6-inch (400-mm) centers] [manufacturer's recommended spacing] <Insert spacing>. ROOF EDGE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install cleats, cant dams, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. B. Anchor roof edgings to resist uplift and outward forces according to performance requirements. MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 9 Copyright 2001 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/01 (R 08/03) 3.4 ROOF EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install [gutters] [downspouts] to produce a complete roof drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Attach gutters to frrmly anchored [gutter brackets] [straps] spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) <Insert dimension> apart. Slope gutters to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet (15.2 m) apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, [removable] [hinged to swing open] for cleaning gutters. C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (l500 mm) O.c. in between. 3.5 COUNTERFLASHING AND REGLET INSTALLATION A. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of cotinterflashings with installation of base flashings. Insert counterflashings in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashings. Extend counterflashings 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (l00 mm) and bed with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant. B. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division [3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete] [4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies]." END OF SECTION 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES 07710 - 10 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports. 3. Roof hatches. 4. Dropout-type heat and smoke vents. 5. Hatch-type heat and smoke vents. 6. Roof walkways. 7. <Insert product.> 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied[ color] finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofmg indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - I Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 2.2 METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated[ and mill phosphatized for field painting]. B. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (i\ZM150) coated. e. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coated. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/ A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class i\ZMl50) coated. 3. Exposed Finishes: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and[ mill] fmish.[ Coil-coat finish as follows:] 1. Factory-Prime Coating: Where painting after installation is indicated, provide pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 lllill). 2. [Clear] [Color] Anodic Finish: Architectural Class II, complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [Champagne] <Insert color>. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss. a. Color and Gloss: <Insert color and gloss>. 4. High-Performance Organic Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. a. Color and Gloss <Insert color and gloss>. 5. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder fmish. a. Color and Gloss: <Insert color and gloss>. E. Stainless-Steel Shapes or Sheet: ASTM A 240/ A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316, No. 2D fmish. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, category as standard with manufacturer, Type UV A (formulated with UV absorber), Finish I (smooth or polished). B. Polycarbonate Glazing: Thermoformable, monolithic polycarbonate sheets manufactured by extrusion process, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with an average impact strength of [12 to 16 ft-Ibflin. (640 to 854 J/m)] <Insert impact strength> of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A (Izod). C. Security Grilles: [3/4-inch- (19-mm-)] <Insert diameter> diameter, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M steel bars spaced [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c. in I direction and [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert spacing> o.c. in the other; factory primed. 2.4 ROOF CURBS A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, with [integral metal cant] [stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation] and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Colony Custom Curbs. b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. c. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. d. Curbs Plus Inc. e. Custom Curb, Inc. f. LM Curbs. g. Loren Cook Company. h. Metallic Products Corporation. 1. Pate Company (The). J. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. k. Roof Products, Inc. 1. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. m. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. n. Uni-Curb, Inc. o. Vent Products Company, Inc. p. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Load Requirements: <Insert load requirements.> 3. Material: [Galvanized] [Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated] steel sheet, [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [0.079 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.090 inch (2.28 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, [0.078 inch (1.98 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. a. Finish: [Prime painted] [Baked enamel] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat]. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) b. Finish: [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 6. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and fmish. 7. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 9. Factory insulate curbs with [1-l/2-inch- (38-mm-)] <Insert thickness> thick, [ cellulosic] [glass] - fiber board insulation. 10. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert height>, unless otherwise indicated. 11. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1 :48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, with [integral metal cant] [stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation] and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Colony Custom Curbs. b. Commodity Products Company, Inc. c. Conn-Fab Sales, Inc. d. Curbs Plus Inc. e. Custom Curb, Inc. f. LM Curbs. g. Loren Cook Company. h. Metallic Products Corporation. 1. Pate Company (The). J. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. k. Roof Products, Inc. I. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. m. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. n. Uni-Curb, Inc. o. Vent Products Company, Inc. p. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Load Requirements: <Insert load requirements.> 3. Material: [Galvanized] [Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated] steel sheet, [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [0.079 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 4. Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.090 inch (2.28 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 5. Material: Stainless-steel sheet, [0.078 inch (1.98 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. a. Finish: [prime painted] [Baked enamel] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat]. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) b. Finish: [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 6. Factory-install continuous wood nailers [3-1/2 inches (90 mm)] [5-1/2 inches (140 mm)] <Insert width> wide at tops of equipment supports. 7. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 9. Fabricate units to minimum height of [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert height>, unless otherwise indicated. lO. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1 :48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.6 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated [single] [double]-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed comer joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bilco Company (The). c. Bristolite Skylights. d. Custom Curb, Inc. e. Dur-Red Products. f. Hi Pro International, Inc. g. J. L. Industries, Inc. h. Metallic Products Corporation. 1. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. J. Nystrom, Inc. k. O'Keeffe's Inc. I. Precision Ladders, LLC. m. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. n. ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation. o. Wasco Products, Inc. p. Western Canwell. q. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand [40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa)] <Insert load> external and [20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa)] <Insert load> internal loads. 3. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, [30 by 36 inches (750 by 900 mm)] [30 by 54 inches (750 by 1370 mm)] [30 by 96 inches (750 by 2440 mm)] <Insert size>. 4. Type and Size: Double-leaflid, [72 by 96 inches (1830 by 2440 mm)] <Insert size>. 5. Curb and Lid Material: [Galvanized] [Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated] steel sheet, [0.079 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 6. Curb and Lid Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.090 inch (2.28 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 7. Curb and Lid Material: Stainless-steel sheet, [0.078 inch (1.98 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. a. Finish: [Prime painted] [Baked enamel] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat]. b. Finish: [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 8. Insulation: [Cellulosic-fiber] [Glass-fiber] [Polyisocyanurate] board. 9. Interior Lid Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and fmish as outer metal lid. 10. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 11. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 12. Fabricate units to minimum height of [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert height>, unless otherwise indicated. 13. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height [constant] [tapered to match slope to level tops of units]. 14. Hardware: [Galvanized steel] [Stainless-steel] spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. a. Provide 2-point latch on covers larger than 84 inches (2130 mill). b. Provide remote-control operation. 15. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position. 16. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard complete system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and all accessories required for a complete installation. 2.7 HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS A. Dropout-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard gravity-operated, automatic smoke and heat vents with integral[ double-wall] insulated curbs and frame with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, integral condensation gutter, cap flashing, and heat-sensitive dome glazing that will deform and drop out of vent opening within 5 minutes of exposure to a simulated fire represented by a time-temperature gradient that reaches an air temperature of 500 deg F (260 deg C) within 5 minutes. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. CIS Group. b. Custom Curb, Inc. c. Dur-Red Products. d. Hi Pro International, Inc. e. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. f. Naturalite Skylight Systems. g. O'Keeffe's Inc. h. Pate Company (The). 1. Plasteco, Inc. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) J . Wasco Products, Inc. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Loads: Fabricate heat and smoke vents to withstand a minimum [40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa)] <Insert load> external live load and [30-lbf/sq. ft. (1.4-kPa)] <Insert load> uplift. a. Dome glazing shall have a thickness capable of resisting [40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa)] <Insert load> external and [20-lbflsq. ft. (0.95-kPa)] <Insert load> internal loads. 3. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with [UL 793] [and] [NFPA 204]. 4. Heat and Smoke Vent Compliance: Provide units that have been tested and [UL listed] [FMG approved]. 5. Integral Curb and Framing Material: [Galvanized] [Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated] steel sheet, [0.079 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 6. Integral Curb and Framing Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.090 inch (2.28 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 7. Integral Curb and Framing Material: Stainless-steel sheet, [0.078 inch (1.98 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. a. Finish: [Prime painted] [Baked enamel] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat]. b. Finish: [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 8. Insulation: [Cellulosic-fiber] [Glass-fiber] (polyisocyanurate] board. 9. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 10. Fabricate integral curbs to minimum height of [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert height>, unless otherwise indicated. 11. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1 :48, fabricate curbs with height [constant] [tapered to match slope to level tops of units]. 12. Dome Glazing: [Single ] [Double] [ acrylic] [polycarbonate] glazing. a. Single-Dome Color: [Colorless, transparent] [White, translucent] [Gray tinted, transparent] [Bronze tinted, transparent]. b. Outer Double-Dome Color: [Colorless, transparent] [White, translucent] [Gray tinted, transparent] [Bronze tinted, transparent]. c. Inner Double-Dome Color: [Colorless, transparent] [White, translucent] [Gray tinted, transparent] [Bronze tinted, transparent]. B. Hatch-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard [single] [double]-leaf, hatch-type heat and smoke vents with integral[ double-wall] insulated curbs and frame, with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, integral condensation gutter, and cap flashing. Fabricate with insulated double-wall lid, continuous weathertight perimeter lid gaskets, and equip with automatic self-lifting mechanisms, UL-listed [fusible links rated at 165 deg.F (74 deg C)] [fire-suppression system] [smoke-detection system], and corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and outside operation of lids. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) a. Babcock-Davis; a Cierra Products Inc. Company. b. Bilco Company (The). c. Bristolite Skylights. d. Custom Curb, Inc. e. Dur-Red Products. f. Hi Pro International, Inc. g. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. h. Naturalite Skylight Systems. 1. Nystrom, Inc. J. O'Keeffe's Inc. k. ThyCurb; Div of Thy bar Corporation. 1. Wasco Products, Inc. m. Western Canwel1. n. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Loads: Fabricate heat and smoke vent to withstand a minimum [40-1bf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa)] <Insert load> external live load and [30-1bf/sq. ft. (l.4-kPa)] <Insert load> uplift. a. When release is actuated, lid shall open against [lO-lbf/sq. ft. (0.5-kPa)] <Insert load> snow or wind load and lock in position. 3. Regulatory Requirements: [UL 793] [and] [NFPA 204]. 4. Heat and Smoke Vent Compliance: Provide units that have been tested and [UL listed] [FMG approved]. 5. Fire Resistance of Lids: UL Class A rating. 6. Integral Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: [Galvanized] [Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated] steel sheet, [0.079 inch (2.0 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 7. Integral Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Aluminum sheet, [0.090 inch (2.28 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. 8. Integral Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Stainless-steel sheet, [0.078 inch (1.98 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. a. Finish: [Prime painted] [Baked enamel] [High-performance organic coating] [Powder coat]. b. Finish: [Mill] [Clear anodic] [Color anodic]. 9. Insulation: [Cellulosic-fiber] [Glass-fiber] lPolyisocyanurate] board. 10. Fabricate integral curbs to minimum height of [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert height>, unless otherwise indicated. 11. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1 :48, fabricate curbs with height [constant] [tapered to match slope to level tops of units]. 2.8 ROOF WALKWAYS A. Roof Walkway: Multiple C-shaped-channel formed-metal planks, as follows, with upper surface punched in serrated diamond or rectangular shapes to produce raised slip-resistant surface and drainage holes. Provide support framing, brackets, connectors, nosings, and other accessories and components needed for complete installation. Include step units for changes in elevation. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 8 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. GS Metals Corp. b. Unistrut Corporation. c. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Plank Width: [4-3/4 inches (121 mm)] [7 inches (178 mm)] [9-1/2 inches (241 mm)] [11-3/4 inches (298 mm)] [18-3/4 inches (476 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] [As indicated] . 3. Walkway Width: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. 4. Channel Depth: [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] [As indicated]. 5. Metal Material: [0.079-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet] [0.108- inch- (2.8-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet] [0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet] [O.078-inch- (l.98-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet] [0.080-inch- (2.03-mm-) thick, mill-finished aluminum sheet] [O.100-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, mill- finished aluminum sheet] <Insert material and thickness>. 6. Provide isolation pads attached to supports so supports are completely isolated from roof membrane surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. e. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of [ uncoated aluminum] [stainless-steel] roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Seal joints with [elastomeric] [butyl] sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 9 Copyright 2002 AlA END OF SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 07720 - 10 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTNE MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes SFRMs applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of sprayed fIre-resistive material for each construction and fire- resistance rating, applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and minimum thicknesses. C. Product [certificates] [test reports]. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. E. Research/evaluation reports. F. Field quality-control test[ and special inspection] reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by SFRM manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fIre-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in fmal application. 3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTNE MATERIALS 07811 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 C. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced frre-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide products identical to those tested for frre resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 2. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. E. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." F. Mockups: Apply mockups to [verify selections made under sample submittals] [and to set quality standards for materials and execution]. 1. Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of surface for each product indicated. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until frre-resistive material dries thoroughly. C. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confme spraying operations and protect the environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of frre-resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 3 . Avoid unnecessary exposure of fIre-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. Do not apply fIre-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fIre-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofmg has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. 5. Do not apply fIre-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed. 6. Do not begin applying fIre-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fIre protection are in place. 7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fIre- resistive material until application of fIre protection is completed. 8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fIre-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. 2. Warranty Period: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCEALED SFRM A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: a. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield. b. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type[ MK-6] [MK-6/HY] [and] [MK-6s]. c. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 d. Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; Type 5. 2. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: a. Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco Blaze-Shield II. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product.> C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> D. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, [as follows] [or either of the following]: 1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. 2. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray nozzle to form a damp, as-applied product. E. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated frre-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: [15 lb/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m)] <Insert value> for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm), per ASTM E 605: a. Where the referenced frre-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch (6 mm). b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch (25 mm) but more than 0.375 inch (9 mm), the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch (9 nun) or 75 percent of the design thickness. c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those frre-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities ofless than 15 lbl cu. f1. (240 kg/cu. m). 3. Bond Strength: [150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa)] <Insert value> minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75- inch (l9-nun) minimum thickness of SFRM. 4. Compressive Strength: [5.21 Ibf/sq. in. (35.9 kPa)] <Insert value> minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch (19 mm) and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 Ib/cu. f1. (240 kg/cu. m). SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 4 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of [0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m)] <Insert value> in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch (19 mm), maximum dry density is 151b/cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m), test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame-Spread Index: [10 or less] <Insert requirement>. b. Smoke-Developed Index: [0] <Insert requirement>. 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fIre-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in frre-resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for frre-test-response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire,.Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM. D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and fmish required to comply with frre-resistance designs indicated and fIre-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, comer beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM. E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with frre-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of SFRM. F. Sealer for Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing by manufacturer of sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Cafco Bond-Seal" by Isolatek International Corp. G. Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: I. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating ftre-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying ftre-resistive material. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed. C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HV AC equipment, and other related work are completed. D. Conduct tests according to ftre-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. E. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of ftre-resistive materials during application. F. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of ftre-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. G. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM. H. Install [metal lath] [and] [reinforcing fabric], as required, to comply with fITe-resistance ratings and fITe-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. Securely attach [lath] [and] [fabric] to substrate in position required for support and reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment of [lath] [and] [fabric] to substrate. 1. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fITe-resistive material where required to achieve fITe-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05/04 J. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course. K. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. L. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over which they are applied. M. Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fIre- resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article. N. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain designated fITe-resistance rating[ and where indicated]. O. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. P. Apply sealer to concealed SFRM[ where indicated]. Q. Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM[ where indicated]. R. Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. S. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and prepare reports: 1. SFRM. 2. <Insert special inspections.> B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fITe-resistance design. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811-7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 05104 1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each lOOO-sq. ft. (93-sq. 111) area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. (O.093-sq. 111) sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches (152 111m) per ASTM E 605. 2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. 3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. (929 sq. m) area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving flre- resistive material. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL frre-resistance criteria, but not less than [150 lbf/sq. ft. (7.2 kPa)] <Insert value> minimum per ASTM E 736. 5. If testing fmds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above. E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 SECTION 07821 - BOARD FIRE PROTECTION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes [calcium silicate] [mineral-fiber] board fIre protection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Determined by testing products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and identified by appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BOARD FIRE PROTECTION A. Calcium Silicate Board: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BNZ Materials, Inc.; Marinite 1. b. Eternit, Inc.; Promat [H] [L]. c. Johns Manville, a Berkshire Hathaway Company; Super Firetemp [L] [M]. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136 and as follows per ASTM C 656: a. Maximum Use Temperature: Type [I] [IT], [1400 deg F (760 deg C)] [1700 deg F (927 deg C)] per ASTM C 411 or ASTM C 518. b. Classification Grade: Grade [4] [5] <Insert grade>, [18 lb/cu. ft. (288 kg/cu. m)] [281b/cu. ft. (449 kg/cu. m)] <Insert value> per ASTM C 656. 4. Thermal Conductivity: [0.81 Btu x in.lh x sq. ft. x deg F (0.12 W/m x K)] <Insert value> at 800 deg F (425 deg C) per ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. BOARD FIRE PROTECTION 07821 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 5. Sheet Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [47-1/4 by 98-7/8 inches (1200 by 2510 mm)] <Insert value> by thickness required to produce fire-resistance rating indicated. 6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 0 per ASTM E 84. 7. Finish: Sanded finish on [both sides] [one side]. B. [Unfaced] [Foil-Faced] [Fiberglass Mat-Faced] Mineral-Fiber Board: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc.; DriClad. b. Isolatek International; Cafco-Board. c. Thermafiber; [CW-90] [FireSpan]. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136; and as follows per ASTM C 612: a. Maximum Use Temperature: Type [III] [IV A] [IVD] [V], [1000 deg F (538 deg C)] [1200 deg F (649 deg C)] [1800 deg F (982 deg C)] per ASTM C 411 or ASTM C 518. b. Maximum Density: [8 lb/cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m)] [12 Ib/cu. ft. (192 kg/cu. m)] <Insert value> per ASTM C 303. 4. Thermal Conductivity: [0.25 Btu x in.lh x sq. ft. x deg}' (0.036 Wlm x K)] <Insert value> at 75 deg F (24 deg C) per ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518. 5. Sheet Size: [12 by 48 inches (305 by1219 mm)] [48 by 72 inches (1219 by 1828)] <Insert value> by thickness required to produce fire-resistance rating indicated. 6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of [25] [0] and [5] [0] , respectively per ASTM E 84. C. Anchorage Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard board-anchorage components complying with related design of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Joint Treatment and Finishing Materials: For exposed calcium silicate board applications, provide joint treatment tape and joint compounds recommended in writing by board manufacturer for finishing surfaces. 1. Prime calcium silicate boards to receive painted finish with an alkaline-resistant water- based paint according to board manufacturer's written instructions. BOARD FIRE PROTECTION 07821 - 2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install board fire protection to comply with requirements for thicknesses, number of courses (layers), construction of joints and corners, and anchorage methods applicable to fire-resistance- rated assemblies indicated. 1. Where welded-stud anchorage system is used, remove rust and scale from steel substrates at locations to receive steel studs. B. Finish exposed calcium silicate board to comply with board manufacturer's written instructions, and as follows: 1. At joints in calcium silicate board, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill, and finish coats over joint compounds, fastener heads, and accessories. 2. Apply a thin, uniform skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. 3. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges. C. Coordinate installation of board fire protection with other construction to minimize cutting into, or removal of, installed fire-resistive materials. As other construction is successively completed, replace or repair board fire protection that has been cut away to facilitate this other construction. Maintain complete coverage of full thickness on members and substrates protected by board fire protection. END OF SECTION 07821 BOARD FIRE PROTECTION 07821 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRES TOP SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through-penetration frrestop systems for penetrations through frre- resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration frrestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration frrestop systems with the following ratings determined per [ASTM E 814] [or] [UL 1479]: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration frrestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding frre-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration frrestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside frre-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. 3. L-Rated Systems: [Where through-penetration flrestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers, provide] [Provide] through-penetration frrestop systems with L-ratings [indicated] [of not more than] [3.0 cfm/sq. ft (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m)] <Insert rating> at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C). C. For through-penetration frrestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture- resistant through-penetration frrestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 nun) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration frrestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 D. For through-penetration frrestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent frre- resistance-rated assembly. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A frrm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval ofFirestop Contractors." B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems [and flre-resistive joint systems ]in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration frrestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is [UL,] [OPL] [ITS,] <Insert name,> or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration frrestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration frrestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Do not cover up through-penetration frrestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by[ Owner's inspecting agency and] building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration frrestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated [in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule] [at the end of Part 3] [on Drawings] [.] [that are produced by one ofthe following manufacturers:] B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration frrestop systems indicated for each application [in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule] [at the end of Part 3] [on Drawings] [.] [that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:] 1. AID Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. RectorSeal Corporation (The). 8. Specified Technologies Inc. 9. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 10. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofmg Division. 11. USG Corporation. 12. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 FIRES TOPPING A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration frrestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through- penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install f11l materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for frrestop systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration frrestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with frrestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of frrestop systems. C. Install fill materials for frrestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve frre-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, fmish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining fmishes. D. Identification: Identify through-penetration frrestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or frrestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration frrestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration frrestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect through- penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration frrestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 B. Where OPL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-numeric design numbers in OPL's "Directory of Listed Building Products, Materials, & Assemblies." C. Where ITS-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in ITS's "Directory of Listed Products," "Firestop Systems" Section. D. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [W-J-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [0001-0999]. 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type G. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> E. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [C-BK-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W-K-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [1001-1999]. 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type A. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> F. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W- L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [2001-2999]. 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type B. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> G. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W- L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [3001-3999]. 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type D. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> H. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-C1assified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-B-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W- K-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [4001-4999]. 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type D. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> 1. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [5001-5999]. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 5 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type C. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> J. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [F-A-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four- digit numbers> [6001-6999]. 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Systems: FS <Insert one or more OPL design numbers> [F] [W], Penetrating Item Type E. 3. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> K. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants[ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [7001-7999]. 2. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> L. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants [ FS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: [C-AJ-] [C-BJ-] [F-A-] [F-C-] [W-J-] [W-L-] <Insert one or more four-digit numbers> [8001-8999]. 2. [Available ]ITS-Listed Systems: <Insert ITS design number(s).> END OF SECTION 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 6 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) SECTION 07842 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes frre-resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Floor-to-floor joints. 2. Floor-to-wall joints. 3. Head-of-walljoints. 4. Wall-to-wall joints. 5. Perimeter frre-resistive joint systems consisting of floor-to-wall joints between perimeter edge of frre-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of frre according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original frre-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the frre-resistance ratings of construction that they join, [and with] [movement capabilities] [and] [L-ratings] indicated as determined by UL 2079. 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test. C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of frre-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings indicated below and those indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as determined by [UBC Standard 26-9] [NFP A 285] and UL 2079. 1. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding frre-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. 2. OPL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems: F-ratings equaling or exceeding frre- resistance ratings of floor or floorlceiling assembly forming one side of joint. D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes ofless than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each frre-resistive joint system. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 1 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) D. E. F. 1.4 A. B. C. Field quality-control test reports. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of frre-resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the ICBO Evaluation Service. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of frre-resistive joint system. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of[ through-penetration f'rrestop systems and] frre-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is [UL] [OPL] <Insert name> or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. E. Do not cover up frre-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until [inspecting agency and] building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, frre-resistive joint systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the frre-resistive joint systems indicated for each application in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3. FIRE-RESISTNE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 2 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide frre-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by frre-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by frre-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install frre-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, fmish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining fmishes. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect frre-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of frre-resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of frre-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected frre-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements. C. Remove and replace frre-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Proceed with enclosing frre-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and frre-resistive joint systems comply with requirements. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 3 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) B. Designation System for Joints at the Intersection of Fire-Resistance-Rated Floor or FloorlCeiling Assembly and an Exterior Curtain-Wall Assembly: Alphanumeric systems listed in [UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHDG] [OPL's "Directory of Listed Building Products, Materials, & Assemblies" as perimeter me-barrier systems]: C. Floor-to-Floor Fire-Resistive Joint Systems[ FRJS-<#>]: 1. [ Available ]UL-Classified Systems: FF -[D] [S]-<Insert separate four-digit number for each system selected to suit Project>. 2. Assembly Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>. 3. [Nominal ]Joint Width: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class [I] [II] [ill] - <Insert number> percent [compression or extension] [compression, extension, or horizontal shear]. 5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than <Insert number> cfm!lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. m). 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. 111). D. Floor-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems[ FRJS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: FW -[D] [S]-<Insert separate four-digit number for each system selected to suit Project>. 2. Assembly Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>. 3. [Nominal ]Joint Width: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class [I] [II] [III] - <Insert number> percent [compression or extension] [compression, extension, or horizontal shear]. S. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than <Insert number> cfm!lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. m). 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. 111). E. Head-of-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems[ FRJS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-C1assified Systems: HW-[D] [S]-<Insert four-digit number for each system selected to suit Project>. 2. Assembly Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>. 3. [Nominal ]Joint Width: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class [I] [II] [ill] - <Insert number> percent[ compression or extension] . 5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than <Insert number> dm/tin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. mls x sq. m). 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. m). F. Wall-to-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems[ FRJS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Systems: WW-[D] [S]-<Insert a four-digit number for each system selected to suit Project>. 2. Assembly Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>. 3. [Nominal ]Joint Width: [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 4 Copyright 2002 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 11/02 (R 08/03) 4. Movement Capabilities: Class [I] [II] [ill] - <Insert number> percent[ compression or extension] . 5. L-Rating at Ambient: Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. m). 6. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m!s x sq. m). G. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems[ PFRJS-<#>]: 1. [Available ]UL-Classified Perimeter Fire-Containment Systems: CW-[D-] [S-] <Insert four-digit numbers>. a. Integrity Rating: [1 hour] [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>. b. Insulation Rating: [0 hour] [1/4 hour] [3/4 hour] [1 hour] <Insert number of hours>. c. Linear Opening Width: [2-1/2 inches (63 mm)] [8 inches (203 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert dimension>, maximum. d. Movement Capabilities: Class [I] [II] [ill] <Insert number> percent[ compression or extension]. e. L-Rating at Ambient Temperature: Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m!s x sq. m). f. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than <Insert number> cfm/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m/s x sq. m). 2. [Available ]OPL-Classified Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems: CEJ-<Insert three-digit number>-P. a. T-Rating: [114 hour] <Insert number of hours>. b. F-Rating: [2 hours] <Insert number of hours>. c. Linear Opening Width: [2-1/2 inches (63 mm)] [8 inches (203 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert dimension>, maximum. d. L-Rating at Ambient Temperature: Less than <Insert number> cfm!lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m!s x sq. m). e. L-Rating at 400 deg F (204 deg C): Less than <Insert number> dIn/lin. ft. (<Insert number> cu. m!s x sq. m). f. Movement Capabilities per ASTM E 1399: <Insert number> percent. END OF SECTION 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 5 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/01 (R 05/06) SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specifled by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. B. See Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing. C. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (l3-nun-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (l50-nun-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement ofVOC content. D. Preconstruction field test reports. E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. F. Product certiflcates. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/01 (R 05/06) 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 or manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints. C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard product warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/01 (R 05/06) 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 gIL. 2. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 gIL. 3. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 gIL. 4. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 gIL. S. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 gIL. 6. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 gIL. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain- Test-Response Characteristics: Where e1astomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where e1astomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant [LS-<#>]: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type 0 P, Grade NF. B. [Available ]Products: 1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 600. 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 3. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 4. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. S. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 6. <Insert manufacturer's name; product.> JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/01 (R 05/06) 2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral- curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Products: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan USl100. c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. d. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal. B. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high- density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. 1. Products: a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emsea12SV. b. illbruck Sealant Systems, Inc.; Wilseal 600. c. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite B. d. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite Standard. e. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. 2.6 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/01 (R 05/06) 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confme primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 Copyright 2001 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/01 (R 05/06) B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal [doors] [and] [frames]. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for frre-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at [positive pressure] [as close to neutral pressure as possible] according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7-2] [or] [UL lOB] [UL 10C]. 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: [Where indicated] [At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways], provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient afler 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to [NFP A 257 or UL 9] [UBC Standard 7-4]. Label each individual glazed lite. C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with [NFPA 105 or UL 1784] [UBC Standard 7- 2]. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. S. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 15. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6S3/A 6S3M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum [A40 (ZF120)] [G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180)] metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A S91/A S91M, Commercial Steel (CS), 402 (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 10081 A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A lS3/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A lS3/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type 1. H. Glazing: Division 8 Section "Glazing." STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 1. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (OA-mm) dry film thickness per coat. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A2S0.8. 1. Design: [Flush panel] [Embossed panel] [As indicated] <Insert design>. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection[ and temperature-rise] ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than [6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (1.057 K x sq. mI\V)] [12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (2.166 K x sq. m/\V)] <Insert R-value> when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: [Beveled edge, 118 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).] [Square edge] [Manufacturer's standard]. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- (l.O-mm-) thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. S. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A2S0.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A2S0.4 for physical performance level: 1. Levell and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)]. a. Width: [1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm)] [1-3/8 inches (34.9 mm)] [As indicated on Drawings] . 2. Level2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)]. 3. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)] [Model 3 (Stile and Rail)]. 4. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)]. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet[ unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated]. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A2S0.4 for physical performance level: 1. Levell and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)]. a. Width: [1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm)] [1-3/8 inches (34.9 mm)] [As indicated on Drawings] . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 2. Level2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)]. 3. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)] [Model 3 (Stile and Rail)]. 4. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A (Maximum Duty), [Modell (Full Flush)] [Model 2 (Seamless)]. D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSIISDI A250.6. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSIISDI A2S0.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as [knocked down] [face welded] [full prof'Ile welded] unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Levell Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (l.O-mm-) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.OS3-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. S. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (l.3-nun-) thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet[ unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated] . 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as [knocked down] [face welded] [full prof'Ile welded] unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Levell Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (l.O-mm-) thick steel sheet. S. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.OS3-inch- (l.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.OS3-inch- (l.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 7. Frames for Level 4 Steel Doors: 0.067-inch- (l.7-mm-) thick steel sheet. 8. Frames for Wood Doors: [O.042-inch- (l.O-mm-)] [O.053-inch- (l.3-mm-)] [O.067-inch- (1.7-mm-)] thick steel sheet. 9. Frames for Borrowed Lights: [0.042-inch- (l.O-mm-) thick steel sheet] [0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet] [O.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet] [Same as adjacent door frame]. D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSIISDI A2S0.6. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T -shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 inches (50 Imll) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 nun) thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9 .5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at fmish floor surface. 2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and fmish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work. 2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as door face sheet. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, same material as frames. D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above fmish floor with a [45] [90]-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. 2.8 LOUVERS A. Provide [sightproof] (lightproof] louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (O.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame. 1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Movable blades closed by actuating fusible link, and listed and labeled for use in frre-rated door assemblies of type and frre-resistance rating indicated. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1I4-inch-thick by l-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 nun) thick. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFP A 80 for frre-performance rating or where indicated. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, f1ll, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. [Sidelight] [and] [Transom Bar] Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. S. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 nun) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 6 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 rom) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 rom) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 111m) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 111m) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (l066 nm1) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in eachjamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSIISDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSIISDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI AIlS Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 16 electrical Sections. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fIxed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fIxed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fIxed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.11 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: ANSIISDI A2S0.l0. B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: ANSIISDI A2S0.3. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 7 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A2S0.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At frre-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFP A 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. S. Concrete Walls: Solidly f11l space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-8 Copyright 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/05 9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from j amb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1116 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 1111n), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 111m). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to [NFPA 105] [UBC Standard 7-2]. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) O.C. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) O.C. from each corner. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 9 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 SECTION 08125 - INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. C. D. 1.3 A. SUMMARY This Section includes interior aluminum frames for [doors] [and] [glazing]. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Samples: For each exposed fmish. Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Rated Door-Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFP A 252 or UL lOB. 2. Test Pressure: Test according to [NFPA 252 or UL 10C] [UBC Standard 7-2]. After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1000 mm) or less above the sill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for interior aluminum frames is based on <Insert manufacturer's name and product>. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Custom Components Company. 2. Dual Lock Partition Systems, Inc. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 08125 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 3. Frameworks Manufacturing. 4. Modulex, Inc. S. RACO Interior Products, Inc. 6. Versatrac. 7 . Western Integrated Materials, Inc. 8. Wilson Partitions. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing, General: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-TS or alloy and temper required to suit structural and fmish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. B. Door Frames: Reinforced for hinges and strikes. C. Glazing Frames: For glazing thickness indicated. D. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum. E. Trim: Removable, snap-in [casing trim] [glazing stops] [and] [door stops] without exposed fasteners. 2.3 ACCESSORIES B. C. D. E. F. 2.4 A. B. A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. Sound Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate [6-mm- ] <Insert glazing thickness> thickglazing. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "[Glazing] [Decorative Glass]." Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 8 door hardware Sections. FABRICATION Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and fastened within frame with concealed screws. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections. INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 08125 - 2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Anodic Finish: Class II, [ Clear] [ Color] complying with AAMA 611. 1. Color: [Light bronze] (Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black].(Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primerltopcoat system complying with AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mils (0.025 mm), medium gloss. 1. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. C. Powder-Coated Finish: Thermosetting, TGIC polyester, polyester urethane, or acrylic urethane powder coating with a cured film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils (0.0463 mm). 1. Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] (Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 .1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with frame manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates. C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to [72 inches (1830 mm)] <Insert length> long must be 1 piece. 1. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum [48-inch (1220-mm)] <Insert number> centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. 2. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 3. Do not secure clips to trim or stops. 4. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. END OF SECTION 08125 INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 08125 - 3 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11104) SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2 A. B. C. D. SUMMARY This Section includes access doors and frames for [walls and ceilings] [floors]. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Samples: For each door face material in specified fmish. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for frre-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. [NFP A 252] [ or] [UL lOB] for vertical access doors and frames. 2. [ASTM E 119] [or] [UL 263] for horizontal access doors and frames. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 361 A 36M. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A lS3/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 1 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11/04) B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 7861 A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 361 A 36M or ASTM A 2831 A 283M, Grade C or D. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153/ A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. C. Steel Sheet: [Uncoated] [or] [electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with] cold- rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6S3/A 6S3M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 (Z180) mill-phosphatized zinc coating. E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer. 2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of2 mils (0.05 mm). 3. Powder-Coat Finish: Thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). F. Drywall Beads: O.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound. G. Plaster Beads: O.0299-inch (O.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet with flange of expanded metal lath. H. Manufacturer's standard finish. 2.2 ALUMINUM MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6, mill finish. B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6, mill fmish. C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 1. Mill fmish. 2. Anodic Finish: [Class II, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611] [Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611]. 3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311-2 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11/04) 3. Bar-Co, Inc. Div.; Alfab, Inc. 4. Cendrex Inc. S. Dur-Red Products. 6. ElmdorlStoneman; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 7. Jensen Industries. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc. 9. Karp Associates, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 11. MIF AB, Inc. 12. Milcor Inc. 13. Nystrom, Inc. 14. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The). 15. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from [steel] [metallic-coated steel] sheet. 1. Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling]. 2. Door: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal with [1-1I4-inch- (32-mm-)] <Insert dimension> wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: [Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type] [Continuous piano]. 5. Latch: [Cam latch] <Insert latch>with interior release. 6. Lock: [Cylinder] [Mortise cylinder]. a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "[Door Hardware] [Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)]." D. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from [steel] [metallic-coated steel] sheet. 1. Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal. 3. Frame: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal with [drywall] [plaster] bead flange. 4. Hinges: [Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type) [Continuous piano]. 5. Latch: [Cam latch] <Insert latch>with interior release. 6. Lock: [Cylinder] [Mortise cylinder]. a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "[Door Hardware] [Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)]." E. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from [steel] [metallic-coated steel] sheet. 1. Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed [5/8 inch (16 mm)] <Insert dimension> for [gypsum board] [plaster] [ acoustical tile] infill. 3. Frame: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal [with drywall bead] [with plaster bead] [designed for insertion into acoustical tile ceiling]. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 3 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11/04) 4. Hinges: [Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type] [Concealed pivoting rod hinge]. 5. Latch: [Cam latch] <Insert latch>with interior release. 6. Lock: [Cylinder] [Mortise cylinder]. a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "[Door Hardware] [Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)]." F. Aluminum Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from aluminum sheet and extruded-aluminum shapes. 1. Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum [O.080-inch- (2.0-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick aluminum sheet. 3. Frame: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick extruded aluminum with 1-l/4-inch- (32-mm-) wide rolled flange. 4. Hinges: Concealed continuous aluminum. S. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch. G. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from [steel] [metallic-coated steel] sheet. 1. Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than [that indicated] [that of adjacent construction] <Insert requirement>. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of [0.036 inch (0.9 mm)] <Insert dimension>. S. Frame: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal with [l-inch- (25-mm-)] <Insert dimension> wide, surface-mounted trim. 6. Hinges: [Concealed-pin type] [Continuous piano]. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by [knurled knob] [flush key] [ring turn] with interior release. 9. Lock: Self-latching device with [cylinder] [mortise cylinder] lock. a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "[Door Hardware] [Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)]." H. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from [steel] [metallic-coated steel] sheet. 1. Locations: [Wall] [Ceiling] [Wall and ceiling] surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than [that indicated] [that of adjacent construction] <Insert requirement>. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of30 minutes. 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of [0.036 inch (0.9 mm)] <Insert dimension>. S. Frame: Minimum [O.060-inch- (1.5-mm-)] <Insert dimension> thick sheet metal with [ drywall] [plaster] bead. 6. Hinges: [Concealed-pin type] [Continuous piano]. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 4 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11/04) 8. Latch: Self-latching device operated by [knurled knob] [flush key] [ring turn] with interior release. 9. Lock: Self-latching device with [cylinder] [mortise cylinder] lock. a. Lock Preparation: Division 8 Section "[Door Hardware] [Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)]." 2.4 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. (aluminum only). 2. Babcock-Davis, A Cierra Products Co. 3. Bilco Company (The). 4. Cendrex Inc. S. Dur-Red Products. 6. Halliday Products (aluminum only). 7. J. L. Industries, Inc. 8. Karp Associates, Inc. 9. Milcor Inc. 10. Nystrom, Inc. 11. U.S.F. Fabrication. 12. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Floor Doors, General: Equip each door with adjustable counterbalancing springs, heavy-duty hold-open arm that automatically locks door open at 90 degrees, release handle with red vinyl grip that allows for one-handed closure, and recessed lift handle. D. Aluminum Floor Door: [Single] [Double]-leaf opening. Extruded-aluminum angle frame with l/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, diamond-pattern, aluminum tread plate door; nonwatertight; loading capacity to support [150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.2-kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load] [300-lbf/sq. ft. (14.4- kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load] [AASHTO H2O concentrated wheel load, without impact]. E. Watertight Aluminum Floor Door: [Single] [Double]-leaf opening. Extruded-aluminum gutter frame with NPS 1-112 (DN 40) drainage coupling and 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, diamond- pattern, aluminum tread plate door; watertight; loading capacity to support [150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.2- kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load] [300-lbf/sq. ft. (14.4-kN/sq. m) pedestrian live load] [AASHTO H2O concentrated wheel load, without impact]. F. Steel Angle-Frame Floor Door: [Single] [Double]-leaf opening. [Prime-painted] [Galvanized] structural-steel frame with [3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-)] [l/4-inch- (6.4-mm-)] thick, diamond-pattern, [prime-painted] [galvanized] structural-steel tread plate door; nonwatertight; loading capacity to support [150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.2-kN/sq. m) pedestrian live] [300-lbf/sq. ft. (14.4-kN/sq. m) pedestrian live] [AASHTO H2O concentrated wheel] load. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311-5 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11/04) 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than [that indicated] [that of adjacent construction] <Insert requirement>. 2. Finish painted in yellow with wording "FIRE DOOR - DO NOT STORE MATERIALS ON SURF ACE." G. Watertight Steel Gutter-Frame Floor Door: [Single] [Double]-leaf opening. [Prime-painted] [Galvanized] structural-steel channel frame forming gutter with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) drainage coupling and [3/16- or 1/4-inch- (4.8- or 6.4-mm-)] [3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-)] [1/4-inch- (6.4- mm-)] thick, diamond-pattern, [prime-painted] [galvanized] structural-steel tread plate door; watertight; loading capacity to support [150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.2-k1\.ilsq. m) pedestrian live] [300- Ibf/sq. ft. (14.4-k.~/sq. m) pedestrian live] [AASHTO H2O concentrated wheel] load. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than [that indicated] [that of adjacent construction] <Insert requirement>. 2. Finish painted in yellow with wording "FIRE DOOR - DO NOT STORE MATERIALS ON SURF ACE." H. Hardware: Provide the following: 1. Hinges: Heavy-duty, [zinc-coated steel] [aluminum] [stainless-steel] [brass] butt hinges with stainless-steel pins. 2. Latch: Stainless-steel slam latch. 3. Lock: [Staple for a padlock] [Recessed hasp] [Keyed deadlock bolt] [Hasp and staple] 4. Hardware Material: [Manufacturer's standard] [Stainless steel, including latch and lifting mechanism assemblies, hold-open arms, and all brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners] . 1. Safety Accessories: Safety [chains] [net] [railing]. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied fmish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 - 6 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 (R 11/04) 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through fmish. F. Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. B. C. 3.2 A. B. INSTALLATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent fmish surfaces. Install doors flush with adjacent fmish surfaces or recessed to receive fmish material. ADmSTING AND CLEANING Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -7 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. [Exterior] [Interior] [Exterior and interior] storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for window walls. 3. Storefront framing for ribbon walls. 4. Storefront framing for punched openings. S. [Exterior] [Interior] [Exterior and interior] manual-swing entrance doors[ and door frame units]. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Wind Loads: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert loads>. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to [edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite] [1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m)] <Insert deflection limit> or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to [L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller] [amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other f'Ixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mill) and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)]. E. Structural-Test Performance: ASTM E 330 as follows: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to 1. When tested at [150] <Insert number> percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding [0.2] <Insert number> percent of span. 2. Test Durations: [10] <Insert number> seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of [0.06 cfmlsq. ft. (0.03 Lis per sq. m)] <Insert rate> of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of [1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pal] [6.24Ibflsq. ft. (300 Pa)] <Insert pressure>. G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than [6.24Ibf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)] <Insert pressure>. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofmg system, including printed statement ofVOC content. C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. D. Samples: For each type of exposed fmish required. E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 2 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. G. Product test reports. H. Field quality-control reports. 1. Maintenance data. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and prof11es of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and] [ICC/ANSI A117.1]. F. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [Two] [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which fmishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 3 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: [Five] [10] [20] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 3. CMI Architectural. 4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. S. EFCO Corporation. 6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc. 8. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc. 9. TRACO. 10. Tubelite. 11. United States Aluminum. 12. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 13. YK.K AP America Inc. 14. <Insert manufacturer's name>. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and fmish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. S. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: A WS AS.! 01 A5.1 OM. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 4 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 361 A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 10081 A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 10111A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: [Nonthermal] [Thermally improved] [Thermally broken] <Insert description> . 2. Glazing System: [Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides] <Insert description> . 3. Glazing Plane: [As indicated] [Front] [Center] [Back] [Multiplane] <Insert description> . B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads[, flnished to match framing system] [, fabricated from stainless steel]. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A lS3/A 153M. E. Concealed Flashing: [Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials] [Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457- mm-) thick stainless steel, ASTM A 2401 A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer]. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: manufacturer for joint type. Manufacturer's standard, recommended by 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofmg system that have a VOC content of [250] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 5 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: [l-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125- inch- (3.2-mm-)] [2-inch (50.8-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.188-inch- (4.8-mm-)] [2- to 2-1I4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, with minimum O.125-inch- (3.2-mm-)] thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. a. Thermal Construction: [High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior] <Insert description>. 2. Door Design: [As indicated] [Narrow stile; 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) nominal width] [Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width] [Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width] <Insert description>. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm) above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: [Beveled] [Square] <Insert description>, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide entrance door hardware[ and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule] [ and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article] for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, fmish or color indicated, and [named manufacturers' products] [products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products] [products complying with BHMA standard referenced] . 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. 3. Opening-Force Requirements: a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than 30 Ibf (133 N) to set the door in motion[ and not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to open the door to its minimum required width]. b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door. B. Opening-Force Requirements: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 6 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 1. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force of not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds. 2. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) required to release latch. C. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade 1. 1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door leaf. D. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner. 1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed. 2. Exterior Hinges: [Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin] [Nonferrous] <Insert material> . 3. Quantities: a. For doors up to [87 inches (2210 mm)] <Insert height> high, provide 3 hinges per leaf. b. For doors more than [87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm)] <Insert range> high, provide 4 hinges per leaf. E. Continuous-Gear Hinges: Manufacturer's standard with stainless-steel bearings between knuckles, fabricated to full height of door and frame. F. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A1S6.S, Grade 1. G. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A1S6.16, Grade 1. H. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A1S6.3, Grade 1. I. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A1S6.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. J. Cylinders: [As specifled in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."] [BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.] 1. Keying: [No master] [Master] key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include notation ["DO NOT DUPLICATE"] [to be furnished by Owner]. K. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. L. Operating Trim: BHMA AlS6.6. M. Removable Mullions: BHMA AlS6.3, extruded aluminum. 1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 7 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used. N. Closers: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation, sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use; adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. O. Concealed Overhead Holders: BHMA A1S6.8, Grade 1. P. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. Q. Door Stops: BHMA A1S6.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location indicated, with integral rubber bumper. R. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components. S. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners on mounting strip. T. Silencers: BHMA A1S6.16, Grade 1. U. Thresholds: BHMA A1S6.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1 :2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch (13 nun). V. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors. 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before fmishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. ALUMINUM~RAMEDENTRANCESANDSTOREFRONTS 08411 - 8 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 S. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from [exterior] [interior] [interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels]. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying fmishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class 1,0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker. B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA- M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker. 1. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Champagne] [Black] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] <Insert color>. C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss> . D. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer fmish complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605] and containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss> . ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 9 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 E. High-Performance Organic Finish: [3] [4]-coat fluoropolymer fmish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss> . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovementjoints. S. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurrmg within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 10 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior fmishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Test Area: [A minimum area of 75 feet (23 m) by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems] <Insert requirements>. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS PRIV ATE tbll Door Hardware Set No. <Insert number> Door No. <Insert designation(s)>; each to have the following: Qty. Item Description Manufacturer Finish * Hanging Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Securing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> (inactive leaf) [#] Securing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> (active leaf) [#] Operating Trim <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert fInish.> [#] Accessories for Pairs <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> of Doors [#] Closing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Protective Trim Units <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Stops and Holders <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Accessories <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Miscellaneous Items <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> * Number of hinges, as specified. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 11 Copyright 2006 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 END OF SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 12 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/04 SECTION 08515 - WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 08515 WINDOWS 08515 - 1 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 02/06) SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes [flxed] [and] [operable] aluminum-framed windows. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size required by AAMAlWDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMAlWDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: [85 mph (38 m/s)] [90 mph (40 m1s)] <Insert value>. b. Importance Factor: <Insert factor>. c. Exposure Category: [A] [B] [C] [D]. d. <Insert factor.> 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMAlWDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from windborne debris, based on the passlfail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to [ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996] [or] [AAMA 506] <Insert test method> and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): [120 deg 1<' (67 deg C), ambient; 180 degl<' (100 deg C) material surfaces] <Insert range>. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 1 MASTERSPEC Short Form Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA 1.3 A. B. e. D. E. F. G. 1.4 A. B. C. D. 1.5 A. 08/04 (R 02/06) SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and installation details Samples: For each exposed fmish. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Field quality-control test reports. Product test reports. Maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference [at Project site] <Insert location>. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air inf11tration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal fmishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: [Two] [Three] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 02/06) b. Glazing: [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: [Five] [10] [15] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. All Seasons Windows & Doors; All Seasons Commercial Division, Inc. 2. Boyd Aluminum Manufacturing. 3. Custom Window Company. 4. DeSCo Windows. S. EFCO Corporation. 6. EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc. 7. Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc. 8. Gerkin Windows and Doors. 9. Graham Architectural Products Corp. 10. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company. 11. Mannix; a division of Interstate Window Corp. 12. Peerless Products Inc. 13. Thermal Windows, Inc. 14. TRACO. 15. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 16. Winco Window Company. 17. Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc. 18. YKK. AP America Inc. 19. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 WINDOW <Insert drawing designation> A. Window Type: [Casement] [Double hung] [Fixed] [Horizontal sliding] [projected] [As indicated on Drawings ] [As indicated in a schedule] <Insert window type>. B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class and Grade: R[15] [20] [25] <Insert grade>. 2. Performance Class and Grade: LC(25] [30] [35] <Insert grade>. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 02/06) 3. Performance Class and Grade: C[30] [35] [40] <Insert grade>. 4. Performance Class and Grade: HC[40] [45] [50] <Insert grade>. 5. Performance Class and Grade: AW[40] [45] [50] <Insert grade>. 6. Performance Class and Grade: As indicated. C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of [45] [52] <Insert value>. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph (24-km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to [AAMA 1503] [ASTM E 1423] [NFRC 100]. 1. U-Factor: [0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.0 W/sq. m x K)] [0.40 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.3 W/sq. m x K)] [0.43 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.5 W/sq. m x K)] [0.60 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.4 W/sq. m x K)] <Insert value appropriate to system of measure> or less. E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of [0.40] [0.50] [0.55] <Insert value>, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. B. Glass <Insert drawing designation>: [Clear, insulating-glass units] [Clear, insulating-glass units, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface,] [Clear, insulating-glass units, argon gas {'dIed, with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface,] <Insert glass type, description, and performance requirements> complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." C. Glazing System: (Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.] (Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal and complies with requirements for windborne-debris resistance.] (Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system as indicated in Division 8 Section II Glazing. "] <Insert glazing requirements.> 2.4 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on [inside] [outside] of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," [Residential R-20] [Architectural C- 24] (Monumental M-32] class. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 02/06) 2.5 A. B. C. D. E. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners,[ adjustable rollers,] and removable PVC splinelanchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Match aluminum window members. 3. Finish: [Anodized aluminum] [Baked-on organic coating] <Insert flnish> in manufacturer's standard color. 4. Finish: [Anodized aluminum] [Baked-on organic coating] <Insert flnish> in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: [18-by-14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) or 18-by-16 (1.0-by-1.1-mm)] [20-by- 20 (0.85-by-O.85-mm) or 20-by-30 (O.85-by-O.42-mm)] <Insert type> mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 1. Mesh Color: [Charcoal gray] [Silver gray] <Insert color>. D. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.1-by-1.3-nun) mesh of O.Oll-inch- (0.28-mm-) diameter, coated aluminum wire. 1. Wire-Fabric Finish: [Natural bright] [Charcoal gray] [Black] <Insert flnish>. E. Wickets: Provide [sliding] [or] [hinged] wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and for durability during handling. FABRICATION Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. F. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 02/06) to match window units. Provide sub frames capable of withstanding design loads of window units. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Aluminum Anodic Finish: [Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611] [Class II, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611] [Class I, color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611] [Class II, color anodic coating complying with AAMA 611]. 1. Color: [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities] . B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic or polyester enamel primer/topcoat system complying with [AAMA 2603] [AAMA 2604 except with a minimum dry fllm thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm)], medium gloss. 1. Color: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. C. High-Performance Organic Finish 2-coat, thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than [50] [70] percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605]. D. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat, thermo cured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, complying with AAMA 2605. 1. Color and Gloss: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adj acent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 6 Copyright 2004 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 02/06) E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. F. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. G. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. H. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. 1. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA 502, Test Method [A] [B], by applying same test pressures required to determine compliance with AAMAIWDMA 101II.S.2/NAFS in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Testing Extent: [Three] [Three mockup] <Insert number or description> windows as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Windows shall be tested immediately after installation. 3. Test Reports: Shall be prepared according to AAMA 502. C. Remove and replace noncomplying aluminum window and retest as specified above. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 08520s ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 7 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY B. 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. See Division 8 door sections for astragals and door silencers. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, including wiring diagrams. Samples: For each exposed fmish. Product certiflcates Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, frre rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and fmish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Building Engineer, detailing Owner's fmal keying instructions for locks. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by Dm as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Proj ect. C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for frre ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFP A 252 and UBC Standard 7-2. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill. E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into fmal keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. B. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confrrm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Electromagnetic Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, fmish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, fmish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function. 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin] [Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads]. 2. Interior Hinges: [Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads] [Steel, with steel pin] [Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin]. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: [Steel, with steel pin] [Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin]. C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for [outswinging exterior doors] [and] [outswinging corridor doors with locks]. D. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For frre-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; [machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors] [wood screws for wood doors and frames]. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1. B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A1S6.7. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). 3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 4. Hager Companies (HAG). S. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 7. PBB, Inc. (PBB). 8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.4 SPRING HINGES A. Self-Closing Hinges: BHMA A1S6.17. B. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 2. Bommer Industries, Inc. (HI). 3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 4. Hager Companies (HAG). S. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 7. PBB, Inc. (PBB). 8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.5 PNOTS AND PNOT HINGES A. Pivots: BHMA A1S6.4. B. Self-Closing Pivot Hinges: BHMA A1S6.17. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BD. 2. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 3. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 4. Hager Companies (HAG). 5. NES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (NS). 6. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). 7. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 8. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.6 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Standard: BHMA A1S6.26. B. General: Minimum 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components fmished after milling and drilling are complete. 1. Fire Pins: Steel pins to hold labeled frre doors in place if required by tested listing. C. Continuous, Barrel-Type Hinges: Hinge with knuckles formed around a pin that extends entire length of hinge. 1. Base Metal for Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel. 2. Base Metal for Interior Hinges: Stainless steel] [Steel] [Aluminum]. 3. Base Metal for Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: [Stainless steel] [Steel]. 4. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HAG). b. Markar Architectural Products, Inc.; a Subsidiary of Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (MP). c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). e. Zero International (ZRO). f. <Insert manufacturer's name.> DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 D. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (Bn. b. Hager Companies (HAG). c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MCK). d. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). e. Select Products Limited (SPL). f. Zero International (ZRO). g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22 N). B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A1S6.25. D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: <Insert model number and description.> 2. Dummy Trim: Match [knob ] [lever] lock trim and escutcheons. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors. F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. 2.8 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks: BHMA A1S6.2. 2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13. 3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA AlS6.12. B. Bored Locks: BHMA A1S6.2[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; Series 4000. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (F AL). f. Marks USA (MKS). g. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED). h. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ). 1. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). J. ScWage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). k. Security Door Controls (SDC). 1. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company (WE!). m. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (Y AL). n. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A1S6.13[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; Series 1000. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. (ALH). b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). d. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). g. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (FAS). h. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (pAL). 1. Marks USA (MKS). J. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ). k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 1. ScWage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). m. Security Door Controls (SDC). n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (VAL). o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A1S6.12[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; Series 5000. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). c. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (pAL). d. ScWage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 7 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.9 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.S[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] . 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL). b. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. (ALH). c. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). d. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). e. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). f. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (pAL). h. Marks USA (MKS). 1. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED). J. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ). k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 1. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). m. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company (WEI). n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (VAL). o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.10 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS A. General: BHMA A1S6.23; electrically powered, of strength and configuration indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door. 1. Type: Full exterior or full interior, as required by application indicated. 2. Strength Ranking: [1500 lbf (6672 N)] [1000 Ibf (4448 N)] [500 lbf (2224 N)]. B. Delayed-Egress Locks: BHMA A1S6.24. 1. Means of Egress Doors: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds, as required by NFP A 101. 2. Security Grade: Activated from secure side of door by initiating device. 3. Movement Grade: Activated by door movement as initiating device. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Door Controls International (DCI). 2. Doorguard Systems, Inc. (DGS). 3. Dortronics Systems, Inc. (DS). 4. DynaLock Corp. (DLC). S. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 6. Rutherford Controls Int'1. Corp. (RCI). 7. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 8. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SMC). 9. Security Door Controls (SDC). DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 8 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 10. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.11 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS A. General: Grade [1] [2] [1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] for type of lock indicated; motor or solenoid driven. B. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL). 2. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 3. Brink, R. R. Locking Systems, Inc. (RRB). 4. DynaLock Corp. (DLC). 5. Folger Adam Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (F AS). 6. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 7. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 8. Security Door Controls (SDC). 9. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (Y AL). 10. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.12 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS A. General: Internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate- plated, wrought-steel case. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock; type and function indicated. 1. Type: [Bored] [Mortise]. 2. Actuating Device: [Digital keypad] [Magnetic-stripe card reader]. 3. Faceplate Material: [Wrought brass] [Wrought bronze] [Stainless steel]. 4. Trim: [Lever] [Knob] [Match trim specifled for mechanical locks]. B. Accessory: Card encoder and software. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). 2. Cypress Computer Systems, Inc. (CYP). 3. Kaba llco Inc.; a Kaba Group company (KAB). 4. Marks USA (MKS). S. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 6. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 7. Security Door Controls (SDC). 8. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (Y AL). 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 9 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.13 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted, battery powered, housed in metal case; with red-and-white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM WILL SOUND." B. Stand-Alone Exit Alarms: BHMA A1S6.29, Grade 1, [surface mounted on door] [mounted separate from door and activated by door movement switch]. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 2. Detex Corporation (DTX). 3. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.14 DOOR BOLTS A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled frre doors. B. DustproofStrikes: BHMAA1S6.16[, Grade 1]. C. Surface Bolts: BHMA A1S6.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] . 1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 112-inch- (13-mm-) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch- (305-mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2134 mm) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2134 mm). 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). c. Door Controls International (DCn. d. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). e. Hager Companies (HAG). f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). h. Trimco (TBM). 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A1S6.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). b. Bums Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 10 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 d. Door Controls International (DC!). e. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). f. Hager Companies (HAG). g. Hiawatha, Inc. (RIA). h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 1. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). J. Trimco (TBM). k. <Insert manufacturer's name.> E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). b. Door Controls International (DC!). c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). d. Hager Companies (HAG). e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). f. Trimco (TBM). g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.15 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA A1S6.3[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22 N). C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for frre and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. F. Removable Mullions: BHMA A1S6.3. G. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for frre and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFP A 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. H. Dununy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 11 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Operation: [Rigid] [Movable] [Movable with monitor switch]. 1. Outside Trim: [Lever] [Lever with cylinder] [Knob] [Knob with cylinder] [Pull] [Pull with cylinder] [Thumb turn with cylinder]; material and fmish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. J. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on [metal doors] [non-flre-rated wood doors] [fIre- rated wood doors]. K. Electronic Exit Bars: Nonlatching electronic releasing device, activated by an adjustable capacitance sensor, with no moving parts; listed and labeled as panic exit hardware. Fabricate bar from extruded aluminum, and provide door and frame transfer device and 16 feet (4.9 m) of cord to route wiring off the door frame. L. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM). 2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). S. Detex Corporation (DTX). 6. Door Controls International (DC!). 7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAR). 8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 9. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LSE). 10. Monarch Exit Devices & Door Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (MON). 11. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). 12. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. (RC!). 13. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 14. Yon Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD). 15. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL). 16. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.16 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A1S6.S[, Grade 1] [, Grade 1A] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 1A is indicated] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. B. High-Security Lock Cylinders: [M, mechanical] [E, electrical]. BHMA A1S6.30[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 3]; 1. Key Control Level: Category [A] [B] [C]. 2. Destructive Test Level: Category [A] [B] [C]. 3. Surreptitious Entry Resistance Level: Category [A] [B] [C]. C. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 12 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Number of Pins: [Five ] [Six] [Seven]. 2. High-Security Grade: BHMA A156.S, Grade lA, listed and labeled as complying with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements in UL 437 (Suffix A). D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; fmish face to match lockset; with [interchangeable] [removable] cores. E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. F. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. G. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ABL). 2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). 3. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ASA). 4. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). S. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). 6. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL). 7. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (MED). 8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 9. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 1 O. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (Y AL). 11. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.17 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A1S6.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into [master] [grand master] [great-grand master] key system. 1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 2. Existing System: Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system. B. Keys: Nickel silver[.] [; permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the notation liDO NOT DUPLICATE. "] 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide three cylinder change keys and five [master] [grand master] [great-grand master] keys. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 13 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.18 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.5, Grade [1] [2]; [multiple-drawer] [wall-mounted] [portable] metal cabinet with baked-enamel fmish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of [150] <Insert number> percent of the number of locks. B. Cross-Index System: [Multiple] [Single]-index system for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by [key control manufacturer] [Installer] . 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Key Control Systems, Inc. (KCS). b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. (LUN). c. MMF Industries (MMF). d. Sunroc Corporation (SUN). e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Key Control System Software: BHMA A1S6.S, Grade 1; multiple-index system for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS). b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). c. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.19 OPERATING TRIM A. Standard: BHMA A1S6.6. B. Materials: Fabricate from [aluminum] [brass] [bronze] [stainless steel], unless otherwise indicated. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 3. Forms + Surfaces (FS). 4. Hager Companies (HAG). 5. Hiawatha, Inc. (RIA). 6. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 8. Trimco (TBM). 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 14 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.20 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used. 1. Material: Polished brass or bronze, with strike plate. 2.21 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. 3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 Ibf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width. C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with frre alarm system. D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide fmish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Match door hardware fmish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor fmish material for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate thickness of floor finish. F. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. G. Surface Closers: BHMA A1S6.4[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (ARW). b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -15 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (YAL). J. <Insert manufacturer's name.> H. Concealed Closers: BHMA A1S6.4[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] . 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). f. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 1. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A1S6.1S. 1. Life-Safety Type: On release of hold open, door becomes self-closing. Automatic release is activated by [smoke detection system] [loss of power]. 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (CR). b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAR). c. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN). d. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> J. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. 2.22 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A1S6.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from [material indicated in door hardware sets.] [the following material:] 1. Material: O.OSO-inch- (l.3-mm-) thick [aluminum] [brass] [bronze] [stainless steel]. 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. (AFP). b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BR). c. Bums Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). d. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). DOOR HARDWARE 08710 -16 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 e. Hager Companies (HAG). f. Hiawatha, Inc. (RIA). g. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. ofInPro Corporation (IPC). h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 1. Pawling Corporation (PAW). J. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). k. Trimco (TBM). 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Plastic Protective Trim Units: BHMA AlS6.6; beveled 4 sides; fabricated from [material indicated in door hardware sets.] [the following material:] 1. Plastic Laminate: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick; NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 2. Rigid Plastic: 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic. 3. Acrylic: 1/8 inch (3.2 illm) thick. 4. Color and Texture: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 5. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. (AFP). b. Balco Inc. (BAL). c. Bums Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). d. Construction Specialties, Inc.; a CIS Group company (CS). e. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). f. Hager Companies (HAG). g. Hiawatha, Inc. (RIA). h. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. ofInPro Corporation (IPC). 1. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). J. Korogard Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of RJF International Corporation (KWS). k. Pawling Corporation (pAW). 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). m. Tepromark International, Inc. (TEP). n. Trimco (TBM). o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.23 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A1S6.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] . 1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A1S6.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. C. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 17 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 D. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A1S6.8[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. E. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.1S. F. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA A1S6.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. G. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). 2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 3. Bums Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 4. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). S. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 6. Door Controls International (DCI). 7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 10. Hager Companies (HAG). 11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RES). 12. Hiawatha, Inc. (RIA). 13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 16. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 18. Trimco (TBM). 19. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.24 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA A1S6.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFP A 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke- control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 18 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. G. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD). 3. National Guard Products (NGP). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). S. Reese Enterprises (RE). 6. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL). 7. Zero International (ZRO). 8. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.25 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: BHMAA1S6.21. B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1 :2. Provide thresholds not more than [1/2 inch (13 mm) high] [3/4 inch (19 IDm) high for exterior sliding doors]. C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch (13 illm) high. D. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies (HAG). 2. M-D Building Products, Inc. (MD). 3. National Guard Products (NGP). 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). S. Reese Enterprises (RE). 6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 7. Sealeze; a unit of Jason Incorporated (SEL). 8. Zero International (ZRO). 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.26 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. General: BHMA A1S6.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 1. Exterior Door Hardware: Galvanized steel or anodized aluminum. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 19 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 B. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Grade 1; rated for minimum door weight of [240 lb (109 kg)] [320 lb (145 kg)] [450 Ib (205 kg)] [560 lb (254 kg)] [640 Ib (290 kg)] [800 lb (363 kg)] [1000 lb (455 kg)] [1500 lb (681 kg)]. C. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to [200 Ib (91 kg)] [1251b (57 kg)] [75 Ib (34 kg)]. D. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to [200 lb (91 kg)] [125 Ib (57 kg)] [75 lb (34 kg)]. E. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc. (ACS). 2. Hager Companies (HAG). 3. Henderson, P. C. Inc.; Div. of Hepworth PLC (PCH). 4. Johnson, L. E. Products, Inc. (LEJ). S. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.27 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. B. Bifolding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to [125 lb (57 kg)] [50 Ib (23 kg) ]. C. Multiple Folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to [75 lb (34 kg)] [30lb (14 kg)]. D. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc. (ACS). 2. Hager Companies (HAG). 3. Henderson, P. C. Inc.; Div. of Hepworth PLC (PCH). 4. Johnson, L. E. Products, Inc. (LEJ). S. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). 6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.28 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with frre alarm systems. B. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA AlS6.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] [, Grade 3]. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 20 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). d. Hager Companies (HAG). e. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. (LB). f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). h. Trimco (TBM). 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.29 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A1S6.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFP A 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications. C. Finishes: BHMA A1S6.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI AIlS Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A2S0.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A11S-W Series. C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated [on Drawings] [as follows] unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Dill's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: Dill WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 21 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 painted or fmished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with fmishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until fmishes have been completed on substrates involved. E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by fmal keying schedule. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, [above accessible ceilings] [in equipment room]. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening. 2. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for fmal operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS PRN ATE tbll Door Hardware Set No. <Insert number> Door No. <Insert designation(s)>; each to have the following: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish * Hanging Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Securing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> (inactive leaf) [#] Securing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert fInish.> (active leaf) [#] Operating Trim <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> [#] Accessories for Pairs of <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> Doors [#] Closing Devices <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 22 Copyright 2003 AIA [#] Protective Trim Units [#] Stops and Holders [ #] Accessories [#] Miscellaneous Items * Number of hinges, as specified. END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 <Insert description.> <Insert description.> <Insert description.> <Insert description.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> <Insert manufacturer.> <Insert flnish.> 08710-23 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 SECTION 08712 - DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY B. 1.2 A. B. C. D. E. A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. See Division 8 door sections for astragals and door silencers. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware including wiring diagrams. Samples: For each exposed fmish. Product [certiflcates] [test reports]. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of [Installer] [Architectural Hardware Consultant], detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format[ and use same door numbers] as in the Contract Documents. b. Content: Include the following infonnation: 1) Identification number, location, hand, frre rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. [ Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.] 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of [Installer] [Architectural Hardware Consultant], detailing Owner's fmal keying instructions for locks. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 1 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware, and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for frre ratings indicated, based on testing according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7-2]. 1. Test Pressure: [Test at atmospheric pressure] [After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches (1016 mm) or less above the sill]. E. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into fmal keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. B. Deliver keys[ and permanent cores] to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1. <Insert name and address of Owner's representative.> 1.5 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 2 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: [Three] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. [Electromagnetic] [Delayed-Egress] Locks: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Concealed Floor Closers: [Five] [10] [25] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Door Hardware: <Insert detailed descriptions and speciflc numbers of units.> 2. Electrical Parts: <Insert detailed descriptions and speciflc numbers of units.> PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, fmish or color indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, fmish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified in Part 2. 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 3 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and outswinging corridor doors with locks. D. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For frre-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 HINGES A. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A1S6.7. B. Manufacturers: 1. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. C. Antifriction-Bearing, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, heavy weight; Grade 1, with 4 ball bearings; button tips; nonrising removable pins. D. Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, heavy weight; Grade 1, with 4 ball bearings button tips; nonrising removable pins; reversible; with 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) swaging. E. Plain-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 3, button tips, nonrising removable pins. F. Plain-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Standard-Weight, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 3, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible. G. Friction-Type, Heavy-Weight, Full-Mortise (Butt) Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 1, with adjustable friction discs or bearings. H. Antifriction-Bearing, Heavy-Weight, Full-Mortise, Slip-in-Type Hinges: BHMA AlS6.1, Grade 1, equipped with 4 ball bearings, with 5/16-inch (7.9-mm) swaging. 1. Antifriction-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Full-Mortise, Slip-in-Type Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 2, equipped with 2 ball bearings, with 5/16-inch (7.9-mm) swaging. J. Plain-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Full-Mortise, Slip-in-Type Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 3, with 5/16-inch (7.9-mm) swaging. K. Antifriction-Bearing, Half-Mortise Hinges: BHMA A156.1, heavy weight; Grade 1, with 4 ball bearings; button tips; nonrising removable pins; reversible. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 4 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 L. Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Heavy-Weight, Half-Mortise Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible, equipped with 4 ball bearings. M. Plain-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Half-Mortise Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 3, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible. N. Antifriction-Bearing, Full-Surface Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, heavy weight; Grade 1, with 4 ball bearings; button tips; nonrising removable pins; reversible. O. Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Heavy-Weight, Full-Surface Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible, equipped with 4 ball bearings. P. Plain-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Full-Surface Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 3, button tips, nonrising removable pins. Q. Antifriction-Bearing, Half-Surface Hinges: BHMA AlS6.1, heavy weight; Grade 1, with 4 ball bearings; button tips; nonrising removable pins; reversible. R. Antifriction-Bearing, Swing-Clear, Heavy-Weight, Half-Surface Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible, equipped with 4 ball bearings. S. Plain-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Half-Surface Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 3, button tips, nonrising removable pins, reversible. T. Pivot-Reinforced Hinge and Hinge Sets: BHMA AlS6.1, Grade 1; consisting of one pivot- reinforced hinge plus two full-mortise hinges; heavy weight, antifriction bearing, handed; nonremovable pins. U. Anchor Hinge and Hinge Sets: BHMA AlS6.1, Grade 1; consisting of one anchor hinge plus two full-mortise hinges; heavy weight, antifriction bearing, handed; nonremovable pins. V. Thrust-Pivot Unit and Hinge Sets: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 1; consisting of one thrust-pivot unit plus three full-mortise hinges; heavy weight, antifriction bearing, handed; nonremovable pins. W. Olive-Knuckle Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, antifriction bearing, full mortise, heavy weight; Grade 1, equipped with bearing unit, handed; only knuckle visible when door is closed. X. Antifriction-Bearing, Heavy-Weight, Pivot Hinges: BHMA A1S6.1, Grade 1, full mortise, equipped with concealed bearing unit, handed; only knuckle visible when door is closed. y. Antifriction-Bearing, Standard-Weight, Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 2, full mortise, equipped with concealed bearing unit, handed; only knuckle visible when door is closed. Z. Pocket Hinges: Heavy weight; antifriction bearing; BHMA A156.1, Grade 1; jamb leaf visible when door is closed and both leaves concealed when door is in pocket; type and size required for application indicated. 2.4 SPRING HINGES 1. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 5 Copyright 2003 AIA 2.5 A. B. C. D. E. MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 B. Single-Acting, Full-Mortise, Spring Hinges: BHMAA1S6.17, Grade 1; listed for use on flre doors. C. Single-Acting, Full-Surface, Spring Hinges: BHMA AlS6.17, Grade 1 with torsion spring. D. Single-Acting, Half-Surface, Spring Hinges: BHMA A1S6.17, Grade 1; listed for use on flre doors. E. Double-Acting, Mortised-in-Door, Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1 surface applied to jamb; adjustable tension, torsion springs. F. Double-Acting, Half-Surface, Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, adjustable tension, torsion springs. PIVOTS AND PIVOT HINGES Manufacturers: 1. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. Double-Acting Door Pivots: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade 2, consisting of one top and one bottom assembly with bearings; nonferrous bottom jamb bracket. Double-Acting, Door Pivots: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade 2, top and bottom, each a walking-type, cam-operated pivot; [surface] [flush] mounted. Single-Acting, Center-Hung, Door Pivots: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade [2] [3], top and bottom units, each containing rack-and-pinion assemblies permitting door to open 105 degrees; reversible. Center Pivot Sets: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application indicated; complying with the following: 1. Top Pivots: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze bearing; mortised into door and frame. 2. Bottom Pivots: [Surface floor mounted,] [Recessed in floor in cement case,] [Mortised into jamb,] and mortised into door; with [thrust ball] [needle] bearing. F. Offset Pivot Sets: BHMA A1S6.4, Grade [1] [2], type and size required for application indicated; complying with the following: 1. Offset: [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)]. 2. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled fire doors where indicated. 3. Top Pivots: Walking-beam type with retractable pin and oil-impregnated bronze bearing; mortised into door and frame[; with asylum-type upper surface]. 4. Bottom Pivots: [Surface floor mounted,] [Recessed in floor in cement case,] [Mortised into jamb,] and mortised into door; with [thrust ball] [needle] bearing. G. Intermediate Pivot Sets: BHMA Al 56.4, Grade 1, type and size required for application indicated; with oil-impregnated bronze bearing; complying with the following: 1. Offset: [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)]. 2. Mounting: [Full mortise] [Half mortise] [Half surface] [Full surface]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 6 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 3. Knuckle: [Standard] [Asylum type]. 4. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled frre doors where indicated. H. Double-Acting, Gate-Spring Pivot: [adjustable] [tlxed] tension. BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, mortise application, 1. Double-Acting, Gravity Pivot: BHMA A1S6.17, Grade 1, surface applied, [adjustable] [flxed] tension. 2.6 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Standard: BHMA Al 56.26[, Grade 1-150] [, Grade 1-300] [, Grade 1-600] [, Grade 2-150] [, Grade 2-300] [, Grade 2-600] [, Grade 3-150] [, Grade 3-300]. B. General: Minimum 0.120-inch- (3.0-mm-) thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches (102 mm); fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components fmished after milling and drilling are complete. 1. Fire Pins: Steel pins to hold labeled fire doors in place if required by tested listing. C. Continuous, Barrel-Type Hinges: Hinge with knuckles formed around a pin that extends entire length of hinge. 1. Base Metal for Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel. 2. Base Metal for Interior Hinges: [Stainless steel] [Steel] [Aluminum]. 3. Base Metal for Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: [Stainless steel] [Steel]. 4. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies. b. Markar Architectural Products, Inc.; a Subsidiary of Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. e. Zero International. f. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. Type: [Fully concealed] [Swing clear] [Full surface, with removable continuous caps over fasteners] [Half surface, with removable continuous cap over fasteners]. 2. [ Available ]Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Companies. c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Pemko Manufacturing Co. e. Select Products Limited. f. Zero International. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 7 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22 N). B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 Ibf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A1S6.2S. D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: <Insert model number and description.> 2. Dununy Trim: Match [knob] [lever] lock trim and escutcheons. 3. Lockset Designs: [Provide design indicated on Drawings] <Insert name(s) of manufacturer(s) and product name(s) designating lockset design(s) that other manufacturers must match> or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled frre doors. F. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated. G. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each 1atchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. 2.8 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks: BHMA A1S6.2. 2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A1S6.13. 3. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A1S6.12. B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; Series 4000. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. f. Marks USA. g. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. PDQ Manufacturing. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 8 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. J. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. k. Security Door Controls. 1. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company. m. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. n. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A1S6.13[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; Series 1000. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Folger Adam Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 1. Marks USA. J. PDQ Manufacturing. k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 1. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. m. Security Door Controls. n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Interconnected Locks: BHMA A1S6.12[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; Series 5000. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. c. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> E. Roller Latches: Rolling plunger that engages socket or catch, with adjustable roller projection, and as follows: 1. Material: [Brass] [Bronze]. 2. Mounting: [Surface] [Mortise]. F. Push-Pull Latches: Consisting of paddle handles that retract latchbolt; capable of being mounted vertically or horizontally; and as follows: 1. Lever and Escutcheon Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Aluminum]. 2. Latch Type: [Bored] [Mortise]. 3. Lettering: Engrave with the words "Pull" and "Push." DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 9 Copyright 2003 AIA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.9 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A1S6.S[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. c. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. d. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. f. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. h. Marks USA. 1. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. J. PDQ Manufacturing. k. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 1. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. m. Weiser Lock; a Masco Company. n. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2. Bored Auxiliary Locks: a. Material: [Aluminum] [Brass ] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Zinc alloy]. b. Deadlatches: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by [key either side] [key outside and turn inside] [turn inside with no cylinder]. c. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by [key either side] [key outside and turn inside] [turn inside, no cylinder] [key outside, no trim inside]. 3. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: a. Material: [Aluminum] [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Zinc alloy]. b. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by key [ either side] [outside and turn inside] [one side]. c. Deadlatches: Latchbolt and auxiliary deadlatch operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside]. d. Deadlocks for Sliding Doors: Expanding- or interlocking-type deadbolt operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside] [one side]. e. Deadlatches for Sliding Doors: Hook-type latchbolt operated by key [either side] [outside and handle inside]. 4. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: a. Material: [Aluminum] [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Zinc alloy]. b. Deadlock: Deadlocking bolt operated as follows: 1) Operation: Key [both sides] [outside and operating trim inside]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 10 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 c. Deadlatch: Latchbolt with auxiliary deadlatch operated by key outside and paddle or lever inside. d. Multipoint Lock: Deadlocking bolt for pairs of swinging doors; operated as follows: 1) Operation: Key [both sides] [outside and turn, lever, or knob inside]. 2) Type: [Two ] [Three] point. e. Latch/Lock: Deadbolt and latchbolt; both operated by key both sides; inside handle operates only latchbolt. 5. Rim Auxiliary Locks: a. Material: [Aluminum] [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Zinc alloy]. b. Latchbolt: Operated by key outside and turn inside. c. Deadlocking Latchbolt: Operated by key outside and turn inside. d. Deadbolt: Operated by key outside and turn inside. e. Rotary Deadbolt: Operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside] [ outside]. f. Interlocking Deadbolt: Operated by key [either side] [outside and turn inside] [ outside]. 2.10 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS A. General: BRMA AI56.23; electrically powered, of strength and configuration indicated; with electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door. 1. Type: Full exterior or full interior, as required by application indicated. 2. Strength Ranking: [1500 Ibf (6672 N)] [1000 Ibf (4448 N)] [500 Ibf (2224 N)]. B. Delayed-Egress Locks: BRMA AI56.24. 1. Means of Egress Doors: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds, as required by NFPA 101. 2. Security Grade: Activated from secure side of door by initiating device. 3. Movement Grade: Activated by door movement as initiating device. C. Configuration: Direct-hold type. 1. Mounting: Lock mounted on bottom of header; strike mounted flush on push side of door. 2. Mounting: Lock mounted on face of header; strike mounted on pull side of door with angle bracket. 3. Mounting: Lock mounted on side of jamb; strike mounted flush on push side of door. D. Configuration: Shear type. 1. Mounting: Lock mounted on face of header; strike mounted on either side of door with angle bracket. 2. Mounting: Lock mortised in header; strike mortised in top of door. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 11 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 3. Mounting: Lock mortised in jamb; strike mortised in edge of door. 4. Mounting: Lock mortised in bottom of door; strike mortised in floor. 5. Mounting: Lock mortised in floor; strike mortised in bottom of door. E. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Door Controls International. 2. Doorguard Systems, Inc. 3. Dortronics Systems, Inc. 4. DynaLock Corp. 5. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 6. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. 7. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 8. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 9. Security Door Controls. 10. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.11 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS A. General: Grade [1] [2] [1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] for type of lock indicated; motor or solenoid driven. B. Type: [Bored] [Mortise latchbolt] [Mortise deadbolt] [Mortise deadlocking latchbolts]. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. 3. Brink, R. R. Locking Systems, Inc. 4. DynaLock Corp. 5. Folger Adam Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 6. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 7. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 8. Security Door Controls. 9. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 10. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.12 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS A. General: Internal, battery-powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate- plated, wrought-steel case. Provide key override, low-battery detection and warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock; type and function indicated. 1. Type: [Bored] [Mortise]. 2. Actuating Device: [Digital keypad] [Magnetic-stripe card reader]. 3. Faceplate Material: [Wrought brass] [Wrought bronze] [Stainless steel]. 4. Trim: [Lever] [Knob] [Match trim specified for mechanical locks]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 12 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 B. Accessory: Card encoder and software. C. Functions: [Latch with] [Deadbolt with] [Latch without] [Deadbolt without] key. D. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2. Cypress Computer Systems, Inc. 3. Kaba llco Inc.; a Kaba Group company. 4. Marks USA. 5. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 6. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 7. Security Door Controls. 8. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.13 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS A. Exit Locks: BRMA AI56.29, Grade 1, surface mounted, battery powered, housed in metal case; with red-and-white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN--ALARM WILL SOUND." B. Stand-Alone Exit Alarms: BHMA AI56.29, Grade 1, [surface mounted on door] [mounted separate from door and activated by door movement switch]. C. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2. Detex Corporation. 3. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.14 DOOR BOLTS, GENERAL A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fIre doors. B. DustproofStrikes: BHMA AI56.16[, Grade 1]. C. Surface Bolts: BHMA AI56.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. 1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch- (305-mm-) long rod for doors up to 84 inches (2134 mm) in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches (2134 mm). 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 13 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 c. Door Controls International. d. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. e. Hager Companies. f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. h. Trimco. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA AI56.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; designed for mortising into door edge. l. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Door Controls International. e. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. f. Hager Companies. g. Hiawatha, Inc. h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 1. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. J. Trimco. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.> E. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA AI56.3[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. b. Door Controls International. c. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. d. Hager Companies. e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. f. Trimco. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.15 DOOR BOLTS A. Half-Round Surface Bolts: 6-inch (152-mm) polished-brass or burnished-steel, half-round rod and knob; minimum 7/8-inch (22-rum) throw; with universal strike. B. Interlocking Surface Bolts: 6-inch (l52-mm) extruded-brass or aluminum, interlocking track and rod; minimum 15/16-inch (24-mm) throw; with universal or mortise strike. C. Fire-Rated Surface Bolts: 8-inch (203-mm) steel bolt with 2 steel guides; minimum I-inch (25- mm) throw; listed and labeled for fIfe-rated doors; with universal strike. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 14 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 D. Automatic Flush Bolts: Fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-activated bolts that automatically retract when active leaf is opened and that automatically engage when active door depresses bolt trigger[; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors]. Provide brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports, wear plates, and shims. E. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: Fabricated from steel and brass components, with spring-activated bolts that automatically engage when active door depresses trigger[; listed and labeled for fire- rated doors]. Bolts are manually retracted by a slide in the bolt face. Provide brass or stainless-steel cover plate, top and bottom strikes, guides, guide supports, wear plates, and shims. F. Manual-Extension Flush Bolts: Fabricated from extruded brass or aluminum, with 12-inch (305-mm) rod actuated by flat lever[; listed and labeled for fire-rated doors]. Provide matching strike. G. Slide Flush Bolts: Cast brass, with rod actuated by slide. Provide matching strike. H. Tubular Bolts: Polished-brass or polished-bronze, oval turn knob and escutcheon; minimum 9/16-inch (14-mm) steel bolt with 1!2-inch (13-mm) throw. I. Dustproof Strikes: Polished wrought brass, with 3/4-inch- (l9-mm-) diameter, spring-tension plunger. 2.16 EXIT DEVICES, GENERAL A. Exit Devices: BHMA AI56.3[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5lbf (22 N). C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fIfe and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFP A 252. F. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFP A 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fIfe and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. G. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 15 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Operation: [Rigid] [Movable] [Movable with monitor switch]. H. Outside Trim: [Lever] [Lever with cylinder] [Knob] [Knob with cylinder] [Pull] [pull with cylinder] [Thumb turn with cylinder]; material and fInish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for 10cksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. I. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on [metal doors] [non-fire-rated wood doors] [fire- rated wood doors]. J. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. 2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 3. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. 4. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 5. Detex Corporation. 6. Door Controls International. 7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. 8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 9. Locknetics; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 10. Monarch Exit Devices & Door Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 11. Precision Hardware, Inc. 12. Rutherford Controls Int'l. Corp. 13. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 14. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 15. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 16. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.17 EXIT DEVICES A. Rim Exit Devices: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 1, rim] [Type 4, narrow stile] [Type 28, incorporating a deadbolt] . 2. Actuating Bar: [Cross bar] [push pad] [Narrow-stile push pad]. 3. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Aluminum] [Wrought steel]. B. Mortise Exit Devices: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 3] [Type 10, narrow stile]. 2. Actuating Bar: [Cross bar] [push pad] [Narrow-stile push pad]. 3. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Aluminum] [Wrought steel]. C. Surface Vertical-Rod Exit Devices: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 2] [Type 5, narrow stile]. 2. Actuating Bar: [Cross bar] [Push pad] [Narrow-stile push pad]. 3. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Aluminum] [Wrought steel]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 16 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 4. Configuration: [Top and bottom rods] [Top rod]. D. Concealed Vertical-Rod Exit Devices: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 6, narrow stile] [Type 7, for wood doors] [Type 8, for metal doors]. 2. Actuating Bar: [Cross bar] [push pad] [Narrow-stile push pad]. 3. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Aluminum] [Wrought steel]. E. Combination Exit Devices: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 9, rim and surface vertical rod] [Type 11, mortise and surface vertical rod] [Type 12, mortise and concealed vertical rod]. 2. Actuating Bar: [Cross bar] [push pad] [Narrow-stile push pad]. 3. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel] [Aluminum] [Wrought steel]. F. Automatic Latching Bolts: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 23, concealed] [Type 24, surface]. 2. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel]. G. Extension Flush Bolts: 1. Type: BHMA AI56.3, [Type 25, automatic] [Type 27, self-latching]. 2. Material: [Brass] [Bronze] [Stainless steel]. H. Electronic Exit Bars: Nonlatching electronic releasing device, activated by an adjustable capacitance sensor, with no moving parts; listed and labeled as panic exit hardware. Fabricate bar from extruded aluminum, and provide door and frame transfer device and 16 feet (4.9 m) of cord to route wiring off the door frame. I. Extruded-Aluminum Removable Mullions: BHMA AI56.3, with malleable-iron top and bottom retainers, and prepared for two standard strikes. J. Tube-Steel Removable Mullions: BHMA AI56.3, with malleable-iron top and bottom retainers, and prepared for two standard strikes. 2.18 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA AI56.5[, Grade 1] [, Grade 1A] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 1A is indicated] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. B. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA AI56.30[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 3]; [M, mechanical] [E, electrical]. 1. Key Control Level: Category [A] [B] [C]. 2. Destructive Test Level: Category [A] [B] [C]. 3. Surreptitious Entry Resistance Level: Category [A] [B] [C]. C. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 17 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Number of Pins: [Five] [Six] [Seven]. 2. High-Security Grade: BHMA AI56.5, Grade lA, listed and labeled as complying with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements in UL 437 (SuffIx A). D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; fInish face to match lockset; with [interchangeable] [removable] cores. E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. F. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. G. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. ABLOY Security, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 3. ASSA, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 4. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. 5. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 6. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 7. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 8. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 9. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 10. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 11. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.19 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA AI56.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into [master] [grand master] [great-grand master] key system. 1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 2. Existing System: Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system. B. Keys: Nickel silver[.] [; permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE."] 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide three cylinder change keys and fIve [master] [grand master] [great-grand master] keys. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 18 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.20 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA AI56.5, Grade [1] [2]; [multiple-drawer] [wall-mounted] [portable] metal cabinet with baked-enamel fInish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, 2 sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of [150] <Insert number> percent of the number of locks. B. Cross-Index System: [Multiple] [Single]-index system for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. Set up by [key control manufacturer] [Installer] . 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Key Control Systems, Inc. b. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. c. MMF Industries. d. Sunroc Corporation. e. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Key Control System Software: BHMA AI56.5, Grade 1; multiple-index system for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.21 OPERATING TRIM, GENERAL A. Standard: BHMA AI56.6. B. Materials: Fabricate from [aluminum] [brass] [bronze] [stainless steel], unless otherwise indicated. C. [ Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. 2. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. 3. Forms + Surfaces. 4. Hager Companies. 5. Hiawatha, Inc. 6. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 7. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 8. Trimco. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 19 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.22 OPERATING TRIM A. Flat Push Plates: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, 4 inches wide by 16 inches high (I 02 mm wide by 406 mm high); with square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws. B. Cold-Forged Push Plates: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick, 4 inches wide by l6 inches high (102 mm wide by 406 mm high); with square corners and beveled edges, secured with exposed screws. C. Push-Pull Plates: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, 4 inches wide by 16 inches high (102 rmn wide by 406 mm high); with square corners, beveled edges, and raised integral lip; secured with exposed screws. D. Straight Door Pulls: 3/4-inch (19-1llin) constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 1- 1/2 inches (38 mm) from face of door; fastened at 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. 1. Mounting: [Surface applied with concealed fasteners] [Through bolted with oval- head machine screws and countersunk washers] [Back to back with threaded sleeves]. E. Offset Door Pulls: 3/4-inch (19-mm) constant-diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 1-1/2 inches (38 lllin) from face of door and offset of 2 inches (51 mm); fastened at 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. 1. Mounting: [Surface applied with concealed fasteners] [Through bolted with oval- head machine screws and countersunk washers] [Back to back with threaded sleeves]. F. Pull-Plate Door Pulls: 0.050-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick plate, 4 inches wide by 16 inches high (102 mm wide by 406 lllin high), with square corners and beveled edges; 3/4-inch (l9-1llin) constant- diameter pull, with minimum clearance of 1-112 inches (38 mm) from face of door; fastened at 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. 1. Mounting: [Surface applied with concealed fasteners] [Through bolted with oval- head machine screws and countersunk washers] [Back to back with threaded sleeves] . G. Straight Push-Pull Door Pulls: Push-pull plate minimum 5 inches wide by 12 inches high (125 mm wide by 300 mm high), with minimum clearance of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from face of door. H. Offset Push-Pull Door Pulls: Push-pull plate minimum 5 inches wide by 12 inches high (125 mm wide by 300 mm high), with minimum clearance of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from face of door, and offset 2 inches (50 mm). I. Single Push Bar: Horizontal bar, with minimum clearance of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from face of door, and as follows: 1. Shape and Size: [I-inch (25-mm) constant-diameter round bar] [Minimum 3/8-by-l- l/4-inch (to-by-32-mm) flat bar]. 2. Mounting: [Surface applied with concealed fasteners] [Through bolted with oval- head machine screws and countersunk washers]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 20 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 J. Double Pull Bar: Two horizontal bars connected by matching vertical pull bar and spaced at 8 inches (200 mm) o.c.; with minimum clearance of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) from face of door, and as follows: 1. Shape and Size: [I-inch (25-mm) constant-diameter round bars] [Minimum 3/8-by- l-l/4-inch (lO-by-32-mm) flat bars]. 2. Mounting: [Surface applied with concealed fasteners] [Through bolted with oval- head machine screws and countersunk washers]. 2.23 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A. Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used. 1. Material: Polished brass or bronze, with strike plate. B. Flat Overlapping Astragals: Flat metal bar, surface mounted on face of door with screws; minimum 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) wide by full height of door. C. Rigid, Housed Astragals: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; fastened to face of door with screws. 1. Gasket Material: [Closed-cell sponge silicone] [Closed-cell sponge neoprene] [Neoprene] [Silicone bulb]. D. Overlapping-with-Gasket Astragals: T-shaped metal, surface mounted on edge of door with screws; with integral gasket. 1. Gasket Material: [Vinyl] [Silicone] [Sponge neoprene] [Brush pile] [polypropylene]. 2.24 CLOSERS, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. 3. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width. C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system. D. Flush Floor Plates: Provide fInish cover plates for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Match door hardware fInish, unless otherwise indicated. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 21 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 E. Recessed Floor Plates: Provide recessed floor plates with insert of floor fInish material for floor closers unless thresholds are indicated. Provide extended closer spindle to accommodate thickness of floor ftnish. F. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet fIeld conditions and requirements for opening force. G. Surface Closers: BHMA AI56.4[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. e. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. f. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 1. Yale Commercial Locks and Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. J. <Insert manufacturer's name.> H. Concealed Closers: BHMA AI56.4[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] . 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. <Insert manufacturer's name.> I. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA AI56.15. 1. Life-Safety Type: On release of hold open, door becomes self-closing. Automatic release is activated by [smoke detection system] [loss of power]. 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. c. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. d. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 22 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 e. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. f. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.> J. Coordinators: BHMA AI56.3. 2.25 CLOSERS A. Traditional Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main arm; enclosed in a cast- aluminum alloy shell; complying with the following: 1. Mounting: [Hinge side] [Opposite hinge side] [Parallel arm] [Bracket]. 2. Type: [Regular arm] [Fusible-link holder arm] [Two-point hold-open arm] [Delayed action closing]. B. Modern-Type-without-Cover Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main arm; enclosed in a cast-aluminum alloy shell; complying with the following: 1. Mounting: [Hinge side] [Opposite hinge side] [Parallel arm] [Bracket] [Hinge side top jamb] [Opposite side top jamb]. 2. Type: [Regular arm] [Fusible-link holder arm] [Slide track arm] [Delayed action closing] . C. Modern- Type-with-Cover Surface Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with forged-steel main arm; enclosed in cover indicated; complying with the following: 1. Mounting: [Hinge side] [Opposite hinge side] [parallel arm] [Bracket] [Hinge side, top jamb] [Opposite side, top jamb]. 2. Type: [Regular arm] [Fusible-link holder arm] [Slide track arm] [Delayed action closing] . 3. Cover Material: [Aluminum] [Plated steel] [Molded plastic]. D. Concealed-in-Door-Type Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; mortised into top rail of minimum 1- 3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick doors and track mortised into head frame; with double lever arm indicated; complying with the following: 1. Type: [Surface shoe] [Mortised soffit plate]. 2. Arm: [Regular] [Hold open]. E. Overhead Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; mortised into head frame; with cast-metal body and exposed cover plate; complying with the following: 1. Type: [Exposed arm with surface shoe, single acting] [Concealed arm and track, butt or pivot hung, single acting] [Concealed arm and track, center pivoted, single acting] [Concealed arm and track, center pivoted, double acting]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 23 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2. Arm: [Regular] [Automatic hold open] [Manually selected hold open] [Fusible-link holder arm]. 3. Track: [Regular] [Automatic hold open] [Manually selected hold open]. 4. Cover Plate Material: [Aluminum] [Plated steel]. F. Floor Concealed Closers: Rack-and-pinion hydraulic type; with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves; with cement case and cast-iron closer body case; for single-acting doors; complying with the following: 1. Type: [Center pivoted] [Butt hinge hung or offset pivoted] [Offset pivoted]. 2. Fire Rated: Listed for use with labeled fIfe doors where indicated. 3. Function: [Regular] [Automatic hold open] [Manually selected hold open] [Delayed action closing]. 4. Cover Plate Material: [Aluminum] [plated steel]. G. Closer Holder Release Devices: Closer connected with separate or integral releasing and fIfe- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on interruption of signal to release device. Comply with the following: 1. Type: [Single-point hold open] [Multiple-point hold open] [Free-swinging release]. 2. Mounting: [Surface mounted on face of door] [Surface mounted on face oftop jamb] [Surface mounted on stop] [Mortised into top rail of door] [Mortised into top jamb] [Recessed into floor]. H. Coordinators: Consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in, adjustable safety release[; and with internal override]. 2.26 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS, GENERAL A. Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA AI56.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from [material indicated in door hardware sets.] [the following material:] 1. Material: 0.050-inch- (l.3-mm-) thick [aluminum] [brass] [bronze] [stainless steel]. 2. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. b. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. d. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. e. Hager Companies. f. Hiawatha, Inc. g. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. ofInPro Corporation. h. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 1. Pawling Corporation. J. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. k. Trimco. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 24 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 l. <Insert manufacturer's name.> C. Plastic Protective Trim Units: BHMA AI56.6; beveled 4 sides; fabricated from [material indicated in door hardware sets.] [the following material:] 1. Plastic Laminate: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick; NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 2. Rigid Plastic: 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick, PVC or acrylic-modifIed vinyl plastic. 3. Acrylic: 1/8 inch (3.2 nun) thick. 4. Color and Texture: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 5. [Available ]Manufacturers: a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. b. Balco, Inc. c. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. d. Construction Specialties, Inc.; a CIS Group Company. e. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. f. Hager Companies. g. Hiawatha, Inc. h. lPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. ofInPro Corporation. 1. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. J. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Div. ofRJF International Corporation. k. Pawling Corporation. 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. m. Tepromark International, Inc. n. Trimco. o. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.27 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Armor Plates: 36 inches (914 mm) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops. B. Kick Plates: 12 inches (305 mm) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops. C. Mop Plates: 6 inches (152mm) high by 1 inch (25 mm) less than door width. D. Stretcher Plates: 8 inches (203 lllin) high by door width, with allowance for frame stops. 2.28 STOPS AND HOLDERS, GENERAL A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA AI56.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] . 1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffIc. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A156.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 25 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 C. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. D. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA AI56.8[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated]. E. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Coordinate with fIfe detectors and interface with fIfe alarm system for labeled fire door assemblies. F. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMAAI56.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. G. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. 2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. 3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. 4. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. 5. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. 6. Door Controls International. 7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America. 8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 10. Hager Companies. 11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 12. Hiawatha, Inc. 13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 16. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 18. Trimco. 19. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.29 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Chain Door Stops: Welded chain, each end attached to compression springs, both covered with protective sleeve. B. Rigid Wall Stops: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) long, with rubber bumper. C. Wall Bumpers: Polished cast brass or aluminum with rubber bumper; 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) diameter, minimum 3/4-inch (l9-mm) projection from wall; with [convex] [concave] bumper configuration. D. Roller-Type Bumpers: Polished cast brass or bronze; minimum 4-3/8-inch (111-1llin) projection from wall. E. Rigid Floor Stop: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum, with rubber bumper. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 26 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 F. Dome-Type Floor Stop: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum, with rubber bumper. 1. Height: Minimum [1 inch (25 mm) high, for doors without threshold] [1-3/8 inches (35 mm) high, for doors with threshold]. G. Lever-Type Door Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; minimum 4-inch- (102- mm-) long arm that swings up and remains in vertical position; with replaceable rubber tip. H. Plunger-Type Door Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; minimum 1-1 IS-inch (29-mm) plunger throw; with replaceable rubber tip. I. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; electromagnet attached to wall or floor as indicated, and strike plate attached to swinging door. 1. Configuration: [Wall-mounted single] [Floor-mounted single] [Floor-mounted double] unit. J. Combination Floor Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; encased spring bumper with metal plunger and stop. 1. Operation: [Semiautomatic hold open] [Automatic hold open and release by pushing door]. K. Manual Combination Floor Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 3-1/2 inches (89 nml) long, with holder, keeper, and rubber bumper. L. Combination Wall Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; encased spring bumper with metal plunger and stop. 1. Operation: [Semiautomatic hold open] [Automatic hold open and release by pushing door]. M. Manual Combination Wall Stop and Holders: Polished cast brass, bronze, or aluminum; 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) long, with holder, keeper, and rubber bumper. 2.30 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Concealed Slide Holders: BHMA AI56.8, Type 1; hold open and release by push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable holding pressure; for [single] [double]-acting doors opening 110 degrees. B. Overhead Concealed Slide Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 1; release by push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable holding pressure; for [single] [double]-acting doors opening 110 degrees. C. Overhead Surface-Mounted Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 2; hold open and release by push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable holding pressure; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 27 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 D. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Concealed Slide Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 2; release by push and pull of door unless control is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable holding pressure; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. E. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Jointed-Arm Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 3; hold open and release by push and pull of door; control capable of being set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. F. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Jointed-Arm Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 3; release by push and pull of door; control capable of being set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. G. Overhead Concealed, Friction Slide Holders: BHMA A156.8, Type 4; consisting of frictional element held under adjustable pressure; with free-acting shoulder pivots and shock absorber; for [single] [double]-acting doors opening 110 degrees. H. Overhead Concealed, Nonfriction Slide Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 4; consisting of nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure; with shock absorber; for [single] [double]-acting doors opening 110 degrees. I. Overhead Concealed, Nonfriction Slide Holders: BHMA AI56.8, Type 4; consisting of nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure; with automatic hold-open and shock absorber; for [single] [double]-acting doors opening 110 degrees. J. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Friction Slide Holders: BHMA AI56.8, Type 5; consisting of frictional element held under adjustable pressure; with free-acting shoulder pivots and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. K. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Nonfriction Slide Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 5; consisting of nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure; with shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. L. Overhead Surface-Mounted, Nonfriction Slide Holders: BHMA AI56.8, Type 5; consisting of nonfrictional element held under adjustable pressure; with automatic hold-open and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. M. Overhead Surface-Mounted Rod Holders: BHMA AI56.8, Type 8; hold open and release by push and pull of door unless roller cam is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable spring tension; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. N. Overhead Surface-Mounted Rod Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 8; release by push and pull of door unless roller cam is set in inactive position; with stop and shock absorber; adjustable spring tension; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. O. Overhead Surface-Mounted Cantilever Holders: BHMA AI56.8, Type 9; hold open and release by push and pull of door or thumb turn; with stop and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. P. Overhead Surface-Mounted Cantilever Stops: BHMA AI56.8, Type 9; release by push and pull of door or thumb turn; with stop and shock absorber; for single-acting doors opening 110 degrees. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 28 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.31 DOOR GASKETING, GENERAL A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFP A 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke- control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. G. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies. 2. M -D Building Products, Inc. 3. National Guard Products. 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. 5. Reese Enterprises. 6. Sealeze; a Unit of Jason Incorporated. 7. Zero International. 8. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.32 DOOR GASKETING A. Adhesive-Backed Perimeter Gasketing: Gasket material applied to frame rabbet with self- adhesive. 1. Gasket Material: [Vinyl bulb] [Sponge silicone] [Silicone] [Neoprene bulb] [Sponge neoprene]. B. Spring-Metal Perimeter Gasketing: Metal gasket material fastened to frame rabbet with nails or screws. 1. Gasket Material: Minimum [0.008-inch- (0.20-mm-) thick brass or bronze] [0.008- inch- (O.20-mm-) thick stainless steel] [O.012-inch- (O.30-mm-) thick aluminum]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 29 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 C. Rigid, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; fastened to frame stop with screws. 1. Gasket Material: [Sponge silicone] [Sponge neoprene] [Silicone bulb] [polyurethane bulb] [Vinyl bulb] [Vinyl brush] [Nylon brush] [Thermoplastic elastomer]. D. Adjustable, Housed, Perimeter Gasketing: Screw-adjustable gasket material held in place by metal housing; fastened to frame stop with screws. 1. Gasket Material: [Sponge silicone] [Sponge neoprene] [Silicone bulb] [polyurethane bulb] [Vinyl bulb] [Vinyl brush] [Nylon brush] [Thermoplastic elastomer]. E. Interlocking Perimeter Gasketing: Metal gasket material consisting of two pieces, one fastened to door and one fastened to frame, that interlock when door is closed; mounted with screws. 1. Gasket Material: Minimum [0.018-incb- (O.46-mm-) thick zinc] [0.015-inch- (0.38- mm-) thick bronze]. F. Door Sweeps: Gasket material held in place by flat metal housing or flange; surface mounted to face of door with screws. 1. Gasket Material: [Neoprene] [Vinyl] [Nylon brush] [Polyurethane] [Silicone]. G. Door Shoes: Gasket material held in place by metal housing; mounted to bottom edge of door with screws. 1. Gasket Material: [Vinyl] [Thermoplastic elastomer] [Neoprene] [Brush pile]. 2. Extended Housing: [One side] [Both sides] of door. 3. Mounting: [Surface mounted on] [Mortised into] bottom edge of door. H. Automatic Door Bottoms: Gasket material held in place by metal housing that automatically drops to form seal when door is closed; mounted to bottom edge of door with screws. 1. Gasket Material: [Sponge neoprene] [Sponge silicone] [Thermoplastic elastomer] [Nylon brush]. 2. Mounting: [Surface mounted on face] [Semimortised into bottom] [Mortised into bottom] of door. 2.33 THRESHOLDS, GENERAL A. Standard: BHMAAI56.21. B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1 :2. Provide thresholds not more than [112 inch (13 mm) high] [3/4 inch (19 mm) high for exterior sliding doors ]. C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFP A 101. Maximum 112 inch (13 Imn) high. D. [Available ]Manufacturers: DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 30 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Hager Companies. 2. M-D Building Products, Inc. 3. National Guard Products. 4. Pemko Manufacturing Co. 5. Reese Enterprises. 6. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 7. Sealeze; a Unit of Jason Incorporated. 8. Zero International. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.34 THRESHOLDS A. Compressing-Top Thresholds: Metal member with compressible vinyl seal on top of threshold that seals against bottom of door. B. Saddle Thresholds: [Smooth top] [Fluted top] [Fluted top and offset] [Thermal break and fluted top] [Applied gasketed stop and fluted top] [Carpet separator with fluted top]. C. Half-Saddle Thresholds: Fluted-top metal member. D. Interlocking Thresholds: Fluted-top metal member with integral lip designed to engage a hook strip applied to door. 1. Type: [Single lip] [Double lip] [Double-lip water return] [Double-lip water return with aluminum pan] [Single lip with thermal barrier]. E. LatchinglRabbeted Thresholds: [Fluted] [Smooth] [Offset with fluted] top. F. LatchinglRabbeted Thresholds with Gasket: Fluted-top metal member with gasket. 1. Type: [Offset] [Thermal barrier]. 2. Gasket Material: [Vinyl] [Silicone] [Neoprene] [Brush pile] [Closed-cell sponge neoprene] . G. Plate Thresholds: Solid metal plate. 1. Top Surface: [Fluted] [Fluted with slip-resistant abrasive]. H. Ramped Thresholds: Modular, interlocking, sloped, fluted-top metal assemblies with closed return ends; 1: 12 slope. 1. Top Surface: [Fluted] [Fluted with slip-resistant abrasive]. I. Saddle Thresholds for Floor Closers: Fluted top. 1. Type: [Type A, for center-hung doors; ends not mitered] [Type B, for offset-hung doors; ends not mitered] [Type C, for center-hung doors; ends mitered] [Type D, for offset-hung doors; ends mitered]. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 31 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 2.35 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL A. General: BHMA AI56.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 1. Exterior Door Hardware: Galvanized steel or anodized aluminum. B. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Grade 1; rated for minimum door weight of [240 lb (109 kg)] [320 lb (145 kg)] [450 Ib (205 kg)] [560 Ib (254 kg)] [640 lb (290 kg)] [800 Ib (363 kg)] [1000 lb (455 kg)] [1500 lb (681 kg)]. C. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to [200 Ib (91 kg)] [125 lb (57 kg)] [75 lb (34 kg)]. D. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to [200 Ib (91 kg)] [125 lb (57 kg)] [751b (34 kg)]. E. [ Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc. 2. Hager Companies. 3. Henderson, P. C. hlC.; Div. of Hepworth PLC. 4. Johnson, L. E. Products, Inc. 5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. 6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.36 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Horizontal Sliding Door Hardware: Wrought steel, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Box Rail: [Without mounting brackets] [With attached mounting brackets] [With attached flashing]. 2. Round Rail: [Without] [With attached] mounting brackets. 3. Rail Supports: a. Single Side-Wall Style: [Intermediate] [End] [Splice] type. b. Double Side-Wall Style: [Intermediate] [End] [Splice] type. c. Triple Side-Wall Style: [Intermediate] [End] [Splice] type. d. Single Overhead Style: [Intermediate] [End] [Splice] type. e. Single Overhead Parallel Style: [Intermediate] [Splice] type. f. Single Overhead Cross-Ear Style: [Intermediate] [Splice] type. g. Double Overhead Cross-Ear Style: [Intermediate] [Splice] type. h. Triple Overhead Cross-Ear Style: [Intermediate] [Splice] type. 4. Hanger Configuration: Four-wheel [truck] [hanger assembly with top mounting plate] [hanger assembly with drop bolt] [hanger assembly with single drop strap] [hanger assembly with double drop strap]. a. Wheel Assembly: Steel wheels with ball bearings. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 32 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 5. Accessories: a. Continuous bottom guide. b. Guide rail. c. Bow Handle: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) in overall length. d. Flush Pull: Minimum 4 by 5-1/2 by 3i4 inch (lOa by 140 by 19 mm), mortised into door. e. Floor Center Stop: Cast iron. f. End guide and stop. g. Parallel door floor guides. h. Door stop. 1. Sliding door latch. J. Bumper Shoe: Minimum 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) thickness. k. Foot Bolt: Wrought steel, cast iron, or malleable iron; minimum [6 inches (ISO mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)]. B. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rails and door hardware that allow vertical adjustment. 1. Rail Material: [Galvanized wrought steel] [Extruded aluminum]. 2. Rail Configuration: [V-grooved double leg] [V-grooved double leg with fascia] [1- beam]. 3. Mounting: [Top hung] [Bottom supporting with overhead guide]. 4. Wheel Assembly: Two wheel or four wheel, with [ball] [roller] bearings. 5. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Nylon]. 6. Accessories: a. Bumper Stops: Wrought steel. b. Pulls: [Flush, mortised into door] [Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze surface-applied type] [Wrought brass or bronze edge type, mortised into edge of door] [Sliding door latch] [Sliding door lock with emergency release]. C. Pocket Sliding Door Hardware: Overhead box rails and door hardware that allows vertical adjustment. 1. Rail Material: [Galvanized wrought steel] [Extruded aluminum]. 2. Door Type: [Single] [Biparting]. 3. Rail Configuration: [V-grooved double leg] [I-beam]. 4. Wheel Assembly: Two wheel or four wheel, with [ball] [roller] bearings. 5. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Nylon]. 6. Accessories: a. Bumper Stops: Wrought steel. b. Pulls: [Flush, mortised into door] [Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze surface-applied type] [Wrought brass or bronze edge type, mortised into edge of door] [Sliding door latch] [Sliding door lock with emergency release]. 2.37 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL A. General: BHMA AI56.14; consisting of complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 33 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 B. Bifolding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to [125 Ib (57 kg)] [50 Ib (23 kg)]. C. Multiple Folding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to [75 Ib (34 kg)] [30 Ib (14 kg)]. D. [Available ]Manufacturers: 1. Cox, Arthur & Sons, Inc. 2. Hager Companies. 3. Henderson, P. C. Inc.; Div. of Hepworth PLC. 4. Johnson, L. E. Products, Inc. 5. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. 6. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.38 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Bifolding Door Hardware: Rails and door hardware that allow horizontal and vertical adjustment. 1. Rail Material: [Galvanized wrought steel] [Extruded aluminum]. 2. Rail Configuration: [V-grooved double leg] [V-grooved double leg with fascia] [1- beam]. 3. Mounting: [Surface mounted overhead] [Top and bottom hung]. 4. Wheel Assembly: Two wheel or four wheel, with [ball] [roller] bearings. 5. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Nylon]. B. Multiple Folding Door Hardware: Rails and door hardware that allows horizontal and vertical adjustment. 1. Rail Material: [Galvanized wrought steel] [Extruded aluminum]. 2. Rail Configuration: [V-grooved double leg] [V-grooved double leg with fascia] [1- beam] . 3. Mounting: [Surface mounted overhead] [Top and bottom hung]. 4. Wheel Assembly: Two wheel or four wheel, with [ball] [roller] bearing. 5. Wheel Material: [Steel] [Nylon]. 2.39 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE, GENERAL A. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; voltage rating and type matching requirements of door hardware served; and listed and labeled for use with fIfe alarm systems. B. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA AI56.16[, Grade 1] [, Grade 2] [, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated] [, Grade 3]. 1. [Available ]Manufacturers: DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 34 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. Lawrence Brothers, Inc. f. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. g. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. h. Trimco. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.40 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE A. Chain Door Guard: Polished cast brass or bronze or extruded brass; consisting of plate slotted to receive 6-inch- (150-mm-) long welded chain secured to an anchor plate. Guard shall allow door to be opened 3 inches (75 mm) with chain engaged in slotted plate. Equip with chain holder. B. Coat Hooks: Two curved hooks with rounded ends; 3-inch (76-mm) projection from wall; surface-screw applied; fabricated from [polished cast brass] [polished cast bronze] [burnished cast aluminum]. C. Rod-Type Door Guards: Straight door-mounted rod that engages U-shaped, jamb-mounted rod. U-shaped rod can swing 180 degrees away from door; guard allows door to be slightly opened when engaged. Fabricated from polished cast [brass] [bronze] [aluminum]. D. Garment Hooks: One long hat hook and one small coat hook; 3-3/4-inch (95-mm) projection from wall with 7-inch (178-mm) overall height; surface-screw applied; fabricated from [polished cast brass] [burnished cast aluminum]. E. Door and Frame Transfer Devices: Steel housing for mortise in hinge stile of door, with flexible tube for wiring bundle; accommodating doors that swing open to 120 degrees. F. Wide-Angle Door Viewers: Solid brass, with optical glass lenses; adjustable to door thickness, and permitting I-way observation with minimum 190-degree viewing angle. G. Fire-Rated Door Viewers: Solid brass, with optical glass lenses; listed and labeled; adjustable to door thickness, and permitting I-way observation with minimum [120] [150] [190]-degree viewing angle. 2.41 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 35 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with fInished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFP A 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications. C. Finishes: BHMA AI56.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated [on Drawings] [as follows] unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fItting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or fInished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with fInishing work specifIed in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until fInishes have been completed on substrates involved. E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by fmal keying schedule. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, [above accessible ceilings] [in equipment room]. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening. 2. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrifIed door hardware. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specifIed in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for fmal operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 36 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 08/03 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches OS mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS Refer to plans PRIVATE tbll DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS) 08712 - 37 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffIts, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffIts, etc.). 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fIfe-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load- bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifIed according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (ZI80), hot-dip galvanized] [manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant] zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-1llill-) diameter wire, or double strand ofO.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [5] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. a. Type: [Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms] [Postinstalled, chemical anchor] [Postinstalled, expansion anchor]. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.l2-1llin) diameter. D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, [in size indicated on Drawings] [1 by 3/16 inch (25.4 by 4.76 mm) by length indicated] <Insert size>. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (l2.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [2 inches (51 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)]. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (l2. 7 -mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (l9.1 mm) deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. b. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [1-5/8 inches (41.3 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm)] [3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm)] <Insert depth>. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: l/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: [Asymmetrical or hat shaped] [Asymmetrical] [Hat shaped]. G. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; [640-C] [Fire Front 650-C] [660-C] [Fire Front 670-C] Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)]. B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[ one of] the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fIt into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm- ) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fIt inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of fInishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); [VertiClip SLD] [VertiTrack VTD] Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 3) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) C. Firestop Track: As specifIed in Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.7 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm)] <Insert depth>. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), O.068-inch- (1.73- mm- ) thick, galvanized steel. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 2. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm)]. G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: [Asymmetrical or hat shaped] [Asymmetrical] [Hat shaped]. H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (l.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum l/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: [As indicated on Drawings] [3/4 inch (19.1 mm)] <Insert depth>. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare- steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (O.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59- mm-) diameter wire, or double strand ofO.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fIt insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide[ one of] the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within [performance limits established by referenced installation standards] <Insert deflection limit>. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems [with hangers used for support] <Insert requirements> . NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fIt into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within [1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m)] <Insert tolerance> measured lengthwise on each member that will receive fInishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive fInishes. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of fInished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at eachjamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (l2.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in fInished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fIfe-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fIfe-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. C. Direct Furring: NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 111m) O.C. D. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specifIed in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from comer and cut insulation to fIt. E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111END OF SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111-7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) SECTION 09210 - GYPSUM PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonstructural steel framing and furring. 2. Gypsum plasterwork on [expanded-metal lath] [and] [solid-] plaster bases. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, including printed statement of VOC content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum plaster assemblies with fIfe-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum plaster assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifIed according to ASTM E 413 by a qualifIed independent testing agency. C. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. 111) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 1 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 842 requirements or gypsum plaster manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specifIed. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 841. For steel sheet components not included in ASTM C 841, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel products with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. B. Cold-Rolled Channels: Base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 111m). 1. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating], unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than O.0475-inch (1.21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS A. Suspended Furring: 1. Main Runners (Carrying Channels): Cold-rolled channels, [in depth indicated] [1-1/2 inches (38.1 IDm) deep] [2 inches (50.8 IDm) deep] [2-1/2 inches (63.5 mID) deep]. 2. Cross Furring: [Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep] <Insert requirements> . B. Direct Furring: [Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch (19.1 IDm) deep] <Insert requirements>. C. Tie Wire: Comply with ASTM C 841. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 2 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) D. Wire Hangers: O.162-inch- (4.12-mm-) diameter wire. E. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: Power-actuated fasteners fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers. Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualifIed independent testing agency. 2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (ZI80), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating], unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.69 mm)] [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)]. B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating], unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.69 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. C. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled channels, [in depth indicated] [1-1/2 inches (38.1- mm) deep]. 1. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-) thick, galvanized steel. D. Vertical Furring: 1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. a. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (ZI80), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating], unless otherwise indicated. b. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. c. Depth: [As indicated] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm)]. 2. Furring Channels: Cold-rolled channels, [in depth indicated] [3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep] <Insert depth>. a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type fabricated from steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 3 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 2.5 EXPANDED-METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath, General: ASTM C 847. 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel products with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. 2. Finish: [Coated with water-barrier fIlm or electrolytically deposited zinc] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating]. 3. Paper Backing: Kraft paper factory bonded to back of lath. B. Diamond-Mesh Lath: [Flat] [Self-furring]. 1. Weight: [2.51b/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m)] [3.41b/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m)]. C. Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch (3.1 mm). 1. Weight: [2.75 Ib/sq. yd. (1.5 kg/sq. m)] [3.4 Ib/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m)]. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 841 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: 1. Cornerite: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath [coated with water-barrier film] [or] [with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating]. 2. Strip lath: Fabricated from expanded-metal lath [coated with water-barrier film] [or] [with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating]. 3. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]. a. [Small-nose ] [Bull-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated. 4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; square- edged style; with expanded flanges. 5. Control Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; one-piece- type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 6. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 7. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch (6 to 16 mm) wide; with perforated flanges. C. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 1. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. [Small-nose] [Bull-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 4 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. [Square-edge] [Bull-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 4. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged [1/2- inch- (13-mm-)] [1-inch- (25-mm-)] [1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-)] <Insert dimension> wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 631. C. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads. D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 841. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fIbers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. F. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.1 nlln) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. G. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant[, with a VOC content of 250 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EP A Method 24),] complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 5 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 1. [Available ]Products: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series, SC 175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable - Latex. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone. c. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremflex 834. d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> H. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant[, with a VOC content of 250 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EP A Method 24),] recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. [Available ]Products: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC 170 Acoustical Sound Sealant - Solvent. b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. c. Tremco, Incorporated; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.8 BASE-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base-Coat Plasters, General: ASTM C 28/C 28M. B. Gypsum Ready-Mixed Plaster: With mill-mixed perlite aggregate. 1. [Available ]Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Gypsolite. b. United States Gypsum Co.; Structo-Lite. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Gypsum Neat Plaster: For use with job-mixed aggregates. 1. [Available ]Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Two-Way Hardwall Plaster. b. United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top [Gypsum] [Two-Purpose] Plaster. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Gypsum Wood-Fibered Plaster: 1. [Available ]Products: a. United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Wood Fiber Plaster. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> E. High-Strength Gypsum Neat Plaster: With a minimum, average, dry compressive strength of 2800 psi (19 MPa) per ASTM C 472 for a mix of 100 lb (45 kg) of plaster and 2 cu. ft. (0.06 cu. m) of sand. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 6 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 1. [Available ]Products: a. United States Gypsum Co.; Structo-Base. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> F. Aggregates for Base-Coat Plasters: ASTM C 35. 2.9 FINISH-COAT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Gypsum Gauging Plaster: ASTM C 28/C 28M. 1. [Available ]Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gauging Plaster (Super-White). b. United States Gypsum Co.; [Champion Gauging] [Red Top Gauging Gypsum] [Star Gauging] Plaster. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. Gypsum Ready-Mixed Finish Plaster: Manufacturer's standard, mill-mixed, gauged, interior fInish. 1. [Available ]Products: a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond [Kal-Kote Smooth] [Kal-Kote Texture] [Uni-Kal] [X-KALibur]. b. United States Gypsum Co.; [Imperial Finish Plaster] [Diamond Brand Interior Finish Plaster] [Red Top Finish]. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. High-Strength Gypsum Gauging Plaster: ASTM C 28/C 28M, with a minimum, average, dry compressive strength of 5000 psi (34 MPa) per ASTM C 472 for a neat mix. 1. [ Available ]Products: a. United States Gypsum Co.; Structo-Gauge. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. Gypsum Keene's Cement: ASTM C 61/C 61M. 1. [Available ]Products: a. United States Gypsum Co.; Red Top Keene's Cement. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> E. Lime: ASTM C 206, hydrated fInishing type 1. Type S: Autoclaved, double-hydrate lime. a. [Available ]Products: 1) United States Gypsum Co.; [Ivory] [Snowdrift] Finish Lime. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 7 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 2) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Type N: Normal, single-hydrate lime. a. [Available ]Products: 1) United States Gypsum Co.; Grand Prize Finish Lime. 2) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> F. Aggregates for Float Finishes: ASTM C 35; graded per ASTM C 842. 2.10 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions for applications indicated. B. Base-Coat Mixes over Expanded-Metal Lath: [High-strength gypsum] [Gypsum neat] plaster with job-mixed sand for scratch and brown coats of three-coat plasterwork. C. Base-Coat Mixes over Expanded-Metal Lath: For three-coat plasterwork, as follows: 1. Scratch Coat: Gypsum wood-fIbered plaster; neat or with job-mixed sand. 2. Brown Coat: Gypsum [wood-fibered plaster with job-mixed sand] [neat plaster with job-mixed sand] [ready-mixed plaster] [neat plaster with job-mixed perlite]. D. Base-Coat Mix over Unit Masonry: Gypsum [wood-fibered plaster with job-mixed sand] [neat plaster with job-mixed sand] [ready-mixed plaster] <Insert mix> for single base coats of two-coat plasterwork. E. Base-Coat Mix over Monolithic Concrete: [Gypsum neat plaster with job-mixed sand] <Insert mix> for single base coats of two-coat plasterwork. F. Finish-Coat Mix for Smooth-Troweled Finishes: [1 part gypsum gauging plaster to 2 parts lime] [Gypsum ready-mixed finish plaster] [1 part high-strength gypsum gauging plaster to 1 part lime] [1 part high-strength gypsum gauging plaster to 2 parts lime] [1 part gypsum Keene's cement to 1 part lime] [1 part gypsum Keene's cement to 2 parts lime] <Insert mix>. G. Finish-Coat Mix for Float Finishes: [1 part gypsum gauging plaster, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts sand] [1 part gypsum Keene's cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts sand] <Insert mix>. H. Finish-Coat Mix for Sprayed Finishes: [Gypsum ready-mixed finish plaster] <Insert mix>. I. Finish-Coat Mix for Textured Finishes: [Gypsum ready-mixed finish plaster] <Insert mix>. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 8 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side. C. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant. 3.2 INSTALLING NON STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 for applications indicated. 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 841. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to support fIxtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. E. SoffIts: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffits to comply with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffits to comply with requirements for partition installation. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to limit deflection to 1/360 of span while supporting ceiling loads. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 9 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05106) 4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Secure to fastener devices that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing [with hangers used for support] <Insert requirements>. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where plaster assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install [asphalt-felt] [or] [foam- gasket] isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. C. Frame door openings with two studs installed at eachjamb, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 3.5 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. General: Install according to ASTM C 841. B. Expanded-Metal Lath: 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install [flat diamond-mesh] [flat rib] lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install [flat diamond-mesh] [flat rib] lath. 3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring diamond-mesh lath. 3.6 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. General: Install according to ASTM C 841. B. Cornerbeads: Install at external corners. C. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plasterwork, except where plaster passes behind and is concealed by other work and where metal screeds, bases, or frames act as casing beads. D. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings.] [with spacing between joints in either direction not exceeding the following and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect:] GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 10 Copyright 2002 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 05/06) 1. Partitions: 30 feet (9 m). 2. Ceilings: [50 feet (15 m)] [30 feet (9 m)]. 3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 842. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on [ unit masonry] [and] [ concrete] plaster bases. C. Finish Coats: 1. Provide troweled fInish[, unless otherwise indicated] [where indicated] <Insert locations> . 2. Provide float fInish[, unless otherwise indicated] [where indicated] <Insert locations>. 3. Provide sprayed fInish[, unless otherwise indicated] [where indicated] <Insert locations> . a. Sprayed Finish: [Match Architect's sample] <Insert requirements>. 4. Provide textured fInish [where indicated] <Insert locations>. a. Textured Finish: [Match Architect's sample] <Insert requirements>. 3.8 CUITING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09210END OF SECTION 09210 GYPSUM PLASTER 09210 - 11 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) SECTION 09215 - GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base for veneer plaster. 2. Gypsum veneer plaster over masonry surfaces. 3. Gypsum veneer plaster over monolithic concrete surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control joints, and reveals and trim; include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch (300-mm) length for each trim accessory. 2. Textured Finishes: [Manufacturer's standard size] <Insert size> for each textured fInish and on rigid backing. D. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement that indicates costs for each product having recycled content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain gypsum veneer plaster products, including gypsum base for veneer plaster, joint reinforcing tape, and embedding material, from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifIed according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08104 (R 05106) D. Mockups: Provide a full-thickness fInish mockup for each type and fInish of gypsum veneer plaster and substrate to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select representative surfaces and conditions for application of each type of gypsum veneer plaster and substrate. 2. Provide mockups of [ceilings] [and] [partitions] in sizes of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). 3. Apply gypsum veneer plaster, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MATERIALS A. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, formulated for application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. G-P Gypsum; [Cameo] [DensArmor Cote Interior] Veneer Plaster. b. National Gypsum Company; [Uni-Kal] [X-KALibur] Plaster. c. USG Corporation; Diamond Interior Finish Plaster. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> B. High-Strength, One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, ready-mixed, smooth, fInish-coat veneer plaster containing mill-mixed, fme silica sand; with a compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) when tested according to ASTM C 472; and formulated for application directly over substrate without use of separate base-coat material. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. USG Corporation; Imperial Finish Plaster. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, with separate formulations; one for base-coat and one for finish-coat application over substrates. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company: GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05/06) 1) 2) Base Coat: Kal-Kote Plaster Base. Smooth Finish Coat: [Kal-Kote Smooth Finish] [Uni-Kal Plaster] [X- KALibur Plaster]. Textured Finish Coat: Kal-Kote Texture Finish. 3) b. USG Corporation: 1) Base Coat: Diamond Veneer Basecoat Plaster. 2) Smooth Finish Coat: [Diamond Interior Finish Plaster] [RED TOP Finish Plaster] <Insert product name>. 3) Textured Finish Coat: Job-Aggregated Diamond Interior Finish. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> D. High-Strength, Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 587, ready-mixed, base- coat plaster and smooth finish-coat veneer plaster containing mill-mixed, fme silica sand; with a compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) when tested according to ASTM C 472. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. USG Corporation: 1) Base Coat: Imperial Basecoat Plaster. 2) Smooth Finish Coat: Imperial Finish Plaster. b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. C. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: ASTM C 588/C 588M. 1. Regular Type: [In thickness indicated] [1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated] <Insert thickness>. 2. Type X: [In thickness indicated] [5/8 inch (16 mm) thick] <Insert thickness>. 3. Foil-Backed, Regular-Type Core: [In thickness indicated] [1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated] <Insert thickness>. 4. Type C: [In thickness indicated] [5/8 inch (16 mm) thick] [1/2 inch (13 mm) thick] <Insert thickness>. 5. Abuse-Resistant Base: With specially reinforced core for greater resistance to surface indentation, [5/8-inch (16-mm) thick, Type X core] [1/2-inch (13-mm) thick, regular- type core] <Insert thickness and core type>. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 6. High-Impact Base: With Type X core, plastic fIlm laminated to back side for greater resistance to through-penetration (impact resistance), and [in thickness indicated] [5/8 inch (16 mm) thick] <Insert thickness>. a. Plastic-Film Thickness: [0.010 inch (0.254 mm)] [0.020 inch (0.508 mm)] [0.030 inch (0.762 mm)] [0.081 inch (2.057 mm)]. 7. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: With moisture- and mold-resistant core, glass-mat facing on both sides of panel, and [in thickness indicated] [5/8-inch (16-mm) thick, Type X core] [1/2-inch (13-mm) thick, regular-type core] <Insert thickness>. a. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273; no mold growth after four weeks' exposure. D. Backing Panels for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C 588/C 588M gypsum base or ASTM C 36/C 36M gypsum board, as recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer, for application method and thicknesses indicated. 1. Core: Matching face layer, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: Matching face layer, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Standard Trim: ASTM C 1047, provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 1. Material: [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper- faced galvanized steel sheet] [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc] [Plastic] [Paper-faced galvanized steel sheet]. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. g. Control joints. B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profIles and dimensions indicated. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063- T5. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard [Architectural Class ll, Clear Anodic Finish AA- M12C22A31, complying with AAMA 611] [chemical conversion coat finish] [prime paint finish] <Insert requirements>. 2.4 JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. General: Comply with joint strength requirements in ASTM C 587 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape: 1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: [As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for applications indicated] [Paper] [Open-mesh, glass fiber]. C. Embedding Material for Joint Tape: 1. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: As recommended by gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer for use with joint-tape material and gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 631, polyvinyl acetate. C. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum base face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fIbers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fIber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) F. Acoustical Sealant: As specifIed in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of [250] <Insert limit> glL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Patching Mortar: Dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fme aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. 2.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER MIXES A. Mechanically mix gypsum veneer plaster materials to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Monolithic Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations and as follows: 1. Clean surfaces to remove dust, loose particles, grease, oil, incompatible curing compounds, form-release agents, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with gypsum veneer plaster. 2. Remove ridges and protrusions greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) and fill depressions greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with patching mortar. Allow to set and dry. 3. Apply bonding agent on dry and cured concrete substrates. B. Masonry Substrates: Prepare according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations and as follows: 1. Clean surfaces to remove dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with gypsum veneer plaster. 2. Apply bonding agent on dry masonry substrates. 3.2 INSTALLING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Apply according to ASTM C 844 unless manufacturer's written recommendations are more stringent. 1. Do not allow gypsum base to degrade from exposure to sunlight as evidenced by fading of paper facing. 2. Erection Tolerance: No more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) offsets between planes of gypsum base panels, and 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m) noncumulative, for level, plumb, warp, and bow. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum base for veneer plaster unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) C. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mill) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints, other than control joints, at corners of framed openings. F. Attach panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges fIfSt. G. Attach panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control joints with space between edges of adjoining panels. I. Cover both sides of steel stud partition framing with panels in concealed spaces, including above ceilings, except in internally braced chases. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fIfe, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. 111) ill area. 2. Fit panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut panels to fIt profIle formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-nnn-) wide joints; seal joints with acoustical sealant. J. Wood Framing: Install panels over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. Do not attach panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. "Float" panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. L. Fastener Spacing: Comply with ASTM C 844, manufacturer's written recommendations, and fIfe-resistance-rating requirements. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. along framing members for wall or ceiling application. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 3.3 INSTALLING PANELS A. Install gypsum base panels for veneer plaster in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: [As indicated on Drawings ] [Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated] . 2. Ceiling Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Ceiling surfaces]. 3. Type X: [As indicated on Drawings] [Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly] [Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated] <Insert requirements>. 4. Type C: [As indicated on Drawings] [Where required for specific fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated] <Insert requirements>. 5. Foil-Backed, Regular-Type Core: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>. 6. Abuse-Resistant Base: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>. 7. High-Impact Base: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>. 8. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements> . B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum base panels before wall panels, to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On walls, apply gypsum base panels [vertically and parallel] [horizontally and perpendicular] to framing, unless otherwise indicated or required by fIfe-resistance- rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other walls higher than 30 feet (9.0 m), install gypsum base panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fIfe-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring, apply gypsum base panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. C. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply backing panels for ceilings before applying backing panels for partitions; apply gypsum-base face layers in same sequence. Apply backing panels at right angles to framing members and offset gypsum-base face-layer joints a minimum of 16 inches (400 mm) from parallel backing panel joints, unless otherwise required by fire- resistance- fIfe-resistance-rated assembly. D. Multilayer Application on Partitions: Apply backing panels indicated and gypsum-base face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of backing panels located over stud or furring members and gypsum-base face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member from backing-panel joints, unless otherwise required by fIfe-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. Z-Furring: Apply backing panels vertically (parallel to framing) and gypsum-base face layer either vertically or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of backing panels over furring members. E. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum base panels to supports with steel drill screws. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) F. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten backing panels [and gypsum-base face layers separately to supports with screws ] [with screws; fasten gypsum-base face layers with adhesive and supplementary fasteners]. G. Curved Partitions: recommendations. Comply with gypsum base manufacturer's written installation 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 844 and in specific locations approved by Architect]. C. Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside comers[, unless otherwise indicated]. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use [at outside corners] [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 3. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] <Insert requirements>. 4. L-Bead: Use [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 5. U-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Aluminum Trim: 1. Install aluminum trim according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Apply and embed joint tape over flanges of aluminum trim accessories if recommended by trim manufacturer. 3.5 INSTALLING JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Gypsum Base for Veneer Plaster: Reinforce interior angles and flat joints with joint tape and embedding material to comply with ASTM C 843 and with gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Abuse-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between abuse-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to panel manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Impact-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between impact-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to panel manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Base: Reinforce joints between moisture- and mold-resistant panels with joint tape and embedding material according to panel manufacturer's written recommendations. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 9 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 3.6 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING A. Bonding Agent: Apply bonding agent on dry [monolithic concrete] [masonry] [abuse- resistant base panels] <Insert substrate> according to gypsum veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Application: Comply with ASTM C 843 and with veneer plaster manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. One-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.6 to 2.4 mm). Fill all voids and imperfections.[ Allow plaster to set, then scratch and immediately double back with gypsum veneer plaster to uniform total thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mID).] 2. Two-Component Gypsum Veneer Plaster: a. Base Coat: Trowel apply base coat over substrate to uniform thickness of l/16 to 3/32 inch (1.6 to 2.4 mm). Fill all voids and imperfections. b. Finish Coat: Trowel apply fInish-coat plaster over base-coat plaster to uniform thickness of 1/16 to 3/32 inch (1.6 to 2.4 mm). 3. Where gypsum veneer plaster abuts only metal door frames, windows, and other units, groove fInish coat to eliminate spalling. 4. Do not apply veneer plaster to gypsum base if paper facing has degraded from exposure to sunlight. Before applying veneer plaster, use remedial methods to restore bonding capability to degraded paper facing according to manufacturer's written recommendations [and as approved by Architect]. C. Concealed Surfaces: Do not omit gypsum veneer plaster behind cabinets, furniture, furnishings, and similar removable items. Omit veneer plaster in the following areas where it will be concealed from view in the completed Work unless otherwise indicated or required to maintain fIfe-resistance and STC ratings: 1. Above suspended ceilings. 2. Behind wood paneling. 3. <Insert requirements.> D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Finish: [Smooth-troweled finish, unless otherwise indicated] [Textured finish matching Architect's sample and approved mockups] <Insert textured finish requirements>. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed gypsum veneer plaster from damage from weather, condensation, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace gypsum veneer plaster and gypsum base panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that gypsum base panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 10 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 2. Indications that gypsum base panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09215END OF SECTION 09215 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING 09215 - 11 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Nonstructural steel framing and furring. 2. Interior portland cement plasterwork on [metal lath] [and] [solid-] plaster bases. 3. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on [metal lath] [and] [solid-] plaster bases. B. See Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of [factory-prepared] [colored] [textured] fInish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For portland cement plaster assemblies with fIfe-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of fInish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate fInished lighting conditions for review ofmockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specifIed. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specifIed. 2.2 NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 1063. For steel sheet components not included in ASTM C 1063, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cold-Rolled Channels: Base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. C. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (L21-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS A. Suspended Furring: 1. Main Runners (Carrying Channels): Cold-rolled channels, [in depth indicated] [1-112 inches (38.1 mm) deep] [2 inches (50.8 mm) deep] [2-112 inches (63.5 mm) deep]. 2. Cross Furring: [Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep] <Insert requirements> . B. Direct Furring: [Cold-rolled channels, 3/4 inch (19.1 mID) deep] <Insert requirements>. C. Tie Wire: 1. For tying main runners directly to beams or joists (where wire hangers are used between beams or joists), use double loop of0.1205-inch- (3.06-mm-) diameter wire. 2. For tying furring directly to concrete structure without main runners, use O.0800-inch- (2.03-mm-) diameter wire. 3. For tying furring directly to steel or wood structure without main runners, use double loop of 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or quadruple loop of 0.0475-inch- (1.21- mm-) diameter wire. 4. For saddle tying cross furring to main runners use 0.0625-inch- (1.59-1mn-) diameter wire, or double strand ofO.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. D. Wire Hangers: 0.162-inch- (4. 12-mm-) diameter wire. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) E. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: Power-actuated fasteners fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, and with clips or other devices for attaching hangers. Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insert number> times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualifIed independent testing agency. 2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR PARTITIONS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating]. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.69 mm)] [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)]. B. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating]. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.027 inch (0.69 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. C. Channel Bridging: Cold-rolled channels, [in depth indicated] [1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) deep]. 1. Clip Angle: 1-112 by l-1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 nun), 0.068-inch- (1.73-111m-) thick, galvanized steel. D. Vertical Furring: 1. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. a. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating] [Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibiting coating]. b. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0312 inch (0.79 mm)] <Insert thickness>. c. Depth: [As indicated] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm)]. 2. Furring Channels: Cold-rolled channels, [in depth indicated] [3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep] <Insert depth>. a. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type fabricated from steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 2.5 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: [Flat] [Self-furring]. a. Weight: [2.5Ib/sq. yd. (1.4 kg/sq. m)] [3.4lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m)]. 2. Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch (3.1nID1). a. Weight: [2.75Ib/sq. yd. (1.5 kg/sq. m)] [3.4lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m)]. B. Wire-Fabric Lath: 1. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933; self-furring. a. Weight: [1.4 lb/sq. yd. (0.8 kg/sq. m)] [1.951b/sq. yd. (1.1 kg/sq. m)]. 2. Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032; self-furring, with stiffener wire backing. a. Weight: [1.11b/sq. yd. (0.6 kg/sq. m)] [1.4lb/sq. yd. (0.8 kg/sq. m)]. C. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I [Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper] [Grade B, Style 1a vapor-retardant paper] <Insert requirements>. 1. Provide paper-backed lath [unless otherwise indicated] [at exterior locations] [in locations indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: 1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 6531 A 653M, G60 (ZI80), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]. a. [Small-nose] [Bull-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated. 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; square- edged style; with expanded flanges. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; one-piece- type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 7. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 8. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel]; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from li4- to-5/8-inch (6.34-to-16-mm) wide; with perforated flanges. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) C. Plastic Trim: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 1. Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges. a. [Small-nose] [Bull-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated. 2. Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange length required to suit applications indicated. a. [Square-edge] [Bull-nose] style; use unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 4. Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged [1/2- inch- (13-mm-)] [l-inch- (25-mm-)] [1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-)] <Insert dimension> wide reveal; with perforated concealed flanges. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fIbers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads. E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fIbers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: assembly. Comply with mineral-fIber requirements of G. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.1 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) H. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. [Available ]Products: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series, SC 175 Acoustical Sound Sealant Non-Flammable - Latex. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. d. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. e. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> I. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. [Available ]Products: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC 170 Acoustical Sound Sealant - Solvent. b. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2.8 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type [I] [II]. 1. Color for Finish Coats: [White] [Gray]. B. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish-Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce fInish plaster color [to match Architect's sample] <Insert requirements>. C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: [White] [In color matching Architect's sample]. E. Exposed Aggregates for Finish Coats: [For marblecrete finish, clean, sound, crushed marble matching color and size gradation of Architect's sample] <Insert requirements>. F. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients. 1. [Available ]Products: a. California Stucco Products Corp.; Conventional Portland Cement Stucco. b. ChemRex; Thoro Stucco. c. Florida Stucco Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 6 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) d. Highland Stucco & Lime Products, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. e. United States Gypsum Co.; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco. f. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Color: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. G. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fme aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based fInishes. 1. [Available ]Products: a. BonsaI, W. R. Co.; <Insert product name or designation>. b. ChemRex, SonoWall Stucco Systems; <Insert product name or designation>. c. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. d. Parex Incorporated; <Insert product name or designation>. e. Pleko Products, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. f. Senergy, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. g. Sto Corp.; <Insert product name or designation>. h. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 2. Color: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.9 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fIber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fIber manufacturer's written instructions for fIber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed [lib offiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg offiber/cu. m)] <Insert value> of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. Portland Cement Base-Coat Mixes: 1. Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and [0 to 3/4] [3/4 to 1-1/2] parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and [0 to 3/4] [3/4 to 1-1/2] parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 2. Over [Brick] [and] [Monolithic Concrete]: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 7 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-112 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 3. Over [Brick] [and] [Concrete Unit Masonry]: Single base coats for two-coat plasterwork as follows: a. For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-112 parts lime. Use 2-112 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). C. Portland Cement Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and [3/4 to 1-112] [1-112 to 2] parts lime. Use 1-112 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). D. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For [ready-mixed fInish-coat plasters] [acrylic-based fInish coatings], comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. B. Prepare solid-plaster bases that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side. B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting construction with acoustical sealant. 3.3 INSTALLING NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 for applications indicated. 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of items not addressed in ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in plaster assemblies to support fIxtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 8 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. E. SoffIts: Unless otherwise detailed on Drawings, install furred or suspended soffIts to comply with requirements for ceiling installation; install framed soffIts to comply with requirements for partition installation. 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR CEILINGS A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free of contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to limit deflection to 1/360 of span while supporting ceiling loads. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and tying, either directly to structure or directly to fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Secure to fastener devices that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect steel framing to or suspend it from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing [with hangers used for support] <Insert requirements>. C. Install steel framing components for ceilings in sizes and spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION FRAMING A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where plaster assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install [asphalt-felt] [or] [foam- gasket] isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. C. Frame door openings with two studs installed at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 9 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) 1. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 3.6 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install [flat diamond-mesh] [flat rib] [welded- wire] [woven-wire] lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install [flat diamond-mesh] [flat rib] [welded- wire ] [woven-wire] lath. 3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install [flat diamond-mesh] [welded-wire] [flat woven-wire] lath. 4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring [diamond-mesh] [welded- wire] [woven-wire] lath. 3.7 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior[ and exterior] locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings.] [in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect as follows:] 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. (13.4 sq. 111). b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m). 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2: 1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.8 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on [ unit masonry] [and] [ concrete] plaster bases. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 10 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/02 (R 02/06) C. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide [float] [dash] [scraped trowel-textured] [skip trowel- textured] [brocade (knock-down dash)] [trowel sweep] [combed] [sacked (California mission)] [English] [marblecrete] <Insert requirements> fInish to match Architect's sample. D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, fInish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing (check cracking), dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. END OF SECTION 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 11 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffIts. 3. Tile backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: [Manufacturer's standard size] <Insert size> for each textured fInish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives used to laminate gypsum board panels to substrates, including printed statement ofVOC content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fIfe-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classifIed according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board ftnish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture fInish indicated. 2. Apply or install fmal decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate fInished lighting conditions for review ofmockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF GYPSUM PANELS A. Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. P ABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: [Tapered] [Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling]. C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 nml). 2. Long Edges: [Tapered] [Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling]. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) D. Special Type X: Having improved fIre resistance over standard Type X, and complying with requirements of fIfe-resistance-rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 1. Thickness: As required by fIfe-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fIt radii and to be more flexible than standard regular- type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. F. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12. 7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. G. Foil-Backed Type: 1. Core: [As indicated on Drawings] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm), regular type] [112 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [Special Type X as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings]. 2. Long Edges: [Tapered] [Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling]. H. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration (impact resistance) than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board. 1. Core: [As indicated on Drawings] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X]. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. I. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Exterior Gypsum SoffIt Board: ASTM C 931/C 931M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) e. National Gypsum Company. f. P ABCO Gypsum. g. 1rernple. h. USG Corporation. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 rnm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X]. B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum. 2. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mrn), Type X]. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 13961C 1396M. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. P ABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. 1. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. Core: [As indicated on Drawings] [1/2 inch (12.7 rnm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [Special Type X as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings]. B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: 1. Complying with ASTM C 1 178/C 1178M. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensShie1d Tile Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 2. Complying with ASTM CII77/C 1177M. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "DensArmor Plus Interior Guard" by G-P Gypsum. 3. Core: [As indicated on Drawings] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X]. C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI AI08.1. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Custom Building Products; W onderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Thickness: [As indicated on Drawings] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper- faced galvanized steel sheet] [Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc] [Plastic] [paper-faced galvanized steel sheet]. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: [Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc] <Insert material>. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V -shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. 4. Finish: [Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified] <Insert requirements for Class II anodic finishes and factory- painted, baked-enamel finishes>. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-1O glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that lS compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. PrefIlling: At open joints[, rounded or beveled panel edges,] and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and fIrSt coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use [setting-type taping] [drying-type, aU-purpose] compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping] [drying-type, aU- purpose] compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use [setting-type, sandable topping] [drying-type, all- purpose] compound. 5. Skim Coat: For fmal coat of Level 5 fInish, use [setting-type, sandable topping compound] [drying-type, all-purpose compound] [high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 flnish]. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 1. Exterior Gypsum SoffIt Board: sandable topping compound. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing manufacturer. Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, 2. Board: As recommended by sheathing board E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting- type, sandable topping compound. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fIbers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineraI-fIber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specifIed in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of [250] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EP A Method 24). F. Thermal Insulation: As specifIed in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specifIed in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured fInish manufacturer. B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate ftnish with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-PacifIc Regency Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene. b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Texture: [Fine] [Medium] [Coarse]. C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture fInish for spray application. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Paciftc Ceiling TexturesNermiculite. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated). c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Texture: [Light spatter] [Spatter knock-down] <Insert texture>. D. Acoustical Finish: Water-based, chemical-setting or drying-type, job-mixed texture fInish for spray application. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. International Cellulose Corp.; SonaSpray "fc." b. USG Corporation; USG Acoustical Plaster Finish. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> 3. Application Thickness: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] <Insert thickness>. 4. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Indices when tested according to ASTM E 84 as follows: a. Flame Spread: Less than [25] <Insert index>. b. Smoke Developed: Less than [450] <Insert index>. 5. NRC: [0.55] <Insert NRC> according to ASTM C 423. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1!2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-1llin-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. D. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated] . 2. Type X: [As indicated on Drawings] [Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly] [Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated] <Insert requirements>. 3. Special Type X: [As indicated on Drawings] [Where required for specific f"rre- resistance-rated assembly indicated]. 4. Flexible Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Apply in double layer at curved assemblies]. 5. Ceiling Type: [As indicated on Drawings] [Ceiling surfaces]. 6. Foil-Backed Type: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>. 7. Abuse-Resistant Type: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>. 8. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements> . 3.3 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with l/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 9 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile]. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI AI08.1, at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile]. D. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. E. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect]. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners[, unless otherwise indicated]. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use [at outside corners] [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 3. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] <Insert requirements>. 4. L-Bead: Use [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 5. U-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Comerbead: Use at outside comers. 2. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] <Insert requirements>. E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations [indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 10 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 3.7 3.8 B. PrefIll openjoints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. Levell: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: [Panels that are substrate for tile] [Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile] [Where indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. 3. Level 3: [Where indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. 4. Level 4: [At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated] <Insert locations>. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specifIed in other Division 9 Sections. 5. Level 5: [Where indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specifIed in other Division 9 Sections. E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply fInish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture[ matching approved mockup and] free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. c. Prevent texture fInishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture fInish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene fIlm, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture fInishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-fInish manufacturer's written recommendations. PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 11 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05106) 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 12 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Shaft-wall enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Stair enclosures. 4. Horizontal enclosures. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement ofVOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1[ and Credit MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fIfe-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classifIed according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum Company. 2. BPB America Inc. 3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. P ABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation. 8. USG Corporation. 9. <Insert manufacturer's name.> 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations. 2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. B. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. 2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels and with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273. a. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. C. Gypsum Base for Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specifIed in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering. " D. Gypsum Board: As specifIed in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. 2. Protective Coating: [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120)] [ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180)] [Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120)], hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specifIed in Division 9 Section "[Gypsum Veneer Plastering] [Gypsum Board]" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated. C. Gypsum Base Joint-Reinforcing Materials: As specifIed in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering. " D. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: As specifIed in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plastering." E. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specifIed in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board." F. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels[ and gypsum-base face-layer panels] to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. H. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualifIed testing agency. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualifIed testing agency. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) I. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineraI-fIber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. J. Acoustical Sealant: As specifIed in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of [250] <Insert limit> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES <Insert drawing designation; e.g., SW- 1> A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualifIed testing agency. B. Fire-Resistance Rating: [As indicated] [1 hour] [2 hours] [3 hours] [4 hours] <Insert rating> . C. STC Rating: [As indicated] [51, minimum] <Insert rating>. D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profIle for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fIfe-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: [As indicated] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)] [6 inches (152 mm)]. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0220 inch (0.55 mm)] [0.0329 inch (0.84 mID)] <Insert value>. E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profIle track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least [2 inches (51 mm)] <Insert dimension> long and in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [As indicated] [Matching steel studs] [0.0179 inch (0.45 mm)] [0.0220 inch (0.55 mm)] [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] <Insert value>. F. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dietrich Metal Framing; The System by Metal-Lite, Inc. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) b. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak[ attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip]. c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> G. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-prof11e strut with long-leg length of 3 inches (76 mm), in depth matching studs, and not less than [0.0329 inch (0.84 mm)] <Insert thickness> thick. H. Room-Side Finish: [As indicated] [Gypsum board] [Gypsum veneer plaster]. I. Shaft-Side Finish: [As indicated] [As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation] . J. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fIfe-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specifIed in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610 mm) O.c. B. After sprayed fIfe-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fIfe-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fIfe-resistive materials from damage. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire- resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 9 Section "[Gypsum Veneer Plastering][Gypsum Board]" for applying and fInishing panels. B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support. C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fIxtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft- wall assembly framing. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with [0.0312-inch (O.79-mm)] <Insert thickness> minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 [gypsum base for veneer plaster] [gypsum board] face-layer panel. D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods. E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fIre-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fIfe protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items. F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fIfe-rated construction. G. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of frre-resistance-rated assembly indicated. H. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect], while maintaining fIfe- resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies. I. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches (l02 mm) of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- (l3- or 16-mm-) thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing. K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/04 (R 05106) 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09265END OF SECTION 09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05104 (R 05106) SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation with hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items: C. Samples: For each exposed fInish. D. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 [ and MR 4.2]: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. E. Product test reports. F. Research/evaluation reports. G. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency QualifIcations: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fIfe resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class [A] [B] [C] materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05106) a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic Zones 0-2." 3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies-- Seismic Zones 3 & 4." 4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings." 5. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 6. <Insert requirement of authorities having jurisdiction.> D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identifIed with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to [2.0] <Insert number> percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to [2.0] <Insert number> percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. 1. Recycled Content: Provide acoustical panels with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of <Insert number> percent by weight. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05106) 1. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. C. Attachment Devices: Size for fIve times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: [Cast-in-place] [Expansion] [Bonded] anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to [five] <Insert safety factor> times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualifIed testing and inspecting agency. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to [10] <Insert safety factor> times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualifIed testing and inspecting agency. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic struts, and seismic clips. F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profIle indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, fInish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 2. BPB USA; <Insert product name or designation>. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation; <Insert product name or designation>. 4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 5. Tectum Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 6. USG Interiors, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05104 (R 05106) C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> D. ClassifIcation: Provide[ frre-resistance-rated] panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form [1, nodular] [2, water felted] [4, cast or molded]. 2. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 1, nodular; with [glass-fiber cloth] [washable vinyl-fIlm] overlay. 3. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with [vinyl overlay on face] [vinyl overlay on face and back] [vinyl overlay on face, back, and sealed edges] [fiberglass-fabric overlay on face]. 4. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form [1, plastic] [2, cloth] [3, other]. 5. Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral- base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 6. Type and Form: <Insert type and form.> E. Color: [White] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect's sample] [As indicated by manufacturer's designation] [As indicated on Drawings] [As indicated in a schedule] <Insert color>. F. LR: Not less than <Insert LR>. G. NRC: Not less than <Insert NRC>, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. H. CAC: Not less than <Insert CAC>. I. AC: Not less than <Insert AC>. J. Edge/Joint Detail: [Square] [Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members] [Flush reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members] [Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted] <Insert manufacturer's special proprietary edge detail>. K. Thickness: [5/8 inch (15 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [7/8 inch (22 mm)] [As indicated on Drawings] [As indicated in a schedule] <Insert thickness>. L. Modular Size: [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm)] [600 by 600 mm] [600 by 1200 mm] [As indicated on Drawings] [As indicated in a schedule] <Insert size>. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/04 (R 05106) B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong Wodd Industries, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 2. BPB USA; <Insert product name or designation>. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation; <Insert product name or designation>. 4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 5. USG Interiors, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 6. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> D. Double-Web,[ Fire-Rated] Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefmished [15/16- inch- (24-mm-)] [9/16-inch- (15-mm-)] wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural ClassifIcation: [Intermediate] [Heavy]-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: [Override (stepped)] [Butt-edge] [Override (stepped) or butt-edge] type. 3. Cap Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [Steel or aluminum] cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: [Painted white] [Painted in color as selected from manufacturer's full range] [Painted to match color indicated by manufacturer's designation] [Painted to match color of acoustical unit] [plated with metallic finish, as selected from manufacturer's full range] [Plated with metallic fInish indicated by manufacturer's designation] [Natural finish for aluminum]. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with [ASTM C 636] [UBC Standard 25-2] and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required[ and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings,] to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05104 (R 05106) 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs[ or to steel roof deck]. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 nm1) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter comers accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fIt accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 09511END OF SECTION 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 6 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 SECTION 09681 - CARPET TILE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular, [fusion-bonded] [tufted] <Insert carpet tile construction> carpet tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 2. Existing flooring materials to remain. 3. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Insets and borders. 6. Edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 7. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each color and texture required. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. D. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.3: a. For carpet tile, documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program. b. For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content. E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer QualifIcations: An experienced installer who is certifIed by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certifIcation program requirements. CARPET TILE 09681 - 1 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 B. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, [loss of tuft bind strength,] [dimensional stability,] [excess static discharge,] <Insert failure characteristic> and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). CARPET TILE 09681 - 2 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE <Insert designation> A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> a. Color: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color>. b. Pattern: [Match Architect's samples] <Insert pattern>. c. Source: <Insert carpet tile supplier's name and contact information.> C. Fiber Content: [100 percent nylon 6, 6] [100 percent nylon 6] [100 percent polypropylene] [100 percent wool] [80 percent wool; 20 percent nylon 6, 6] [80 percent wool; 20 percent nylon 6] <Insert fiber and content by percentage.> D. Fiber Type: <Insert proprietary fiber type.> E. Pile Characteristic: [Level-loop] [Cut] [Cut-and-Ioop] <Insert construction> pile. F . Yam Twist: <Insert twist in TPI (TPCM).> G. Yam Count: <Insert yarn count.> H. Density: <Insert oz./cu. yd. (g/cu. em.)> I. Pile Thickness: <Insert inches (mm)> for finished carpet tile[ per ASTM D 6859]. J. Stitches: <Insert stitches per inch (mm).> K. Gage: <Insert gage in ends per inch (mm).> L. Surface Pile Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. 01).> M. Total Weight: <Insert oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m)> for finished carpet tile. N. Primary Backing/Backcoating: [Manufacturer's standard composite materials] [PVC] [Fiberglass-reinforced PVC] [Fiberglass-reinforced amorphous resin] [Reinforced polyurethane composite cushion] [Reinforced polyurethane composite] [Reinforced thermoplastic copolymer] <Insert specific primary backing materials; consult manufacturers> . O. Secondary Backing: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert specific secondary backing material>. P. Backing System: <Insert proprietary name.> CARPET TILE 09681 - 3 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 Q. Size: [18 by 18 inches (457 by 457 mm)] [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [18 by 36 inches (457 by 914 mm)] [36 by 36 inches (914 by 914 mm)] <Insert dimension>. R. Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: treatment> . [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert S. Antimicrobial Treatment: [Manufacturer's standard material] <Insert treatment>. T. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than [0.45 W/sq. cm] [0.22 W/sq. cm]. 2. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 Ibf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646. 3. Tuft Bind: Not less than [3 tbf (13 N)] [5 lbf (22 N)] [6.2 lbf (28 N)] [8 lbf (36 N)] [10 lbf (45 N)] <Insert tuft bind> per ASTM D 1335. 4. Delamination: Not less than [3.5 lbf/in. (15 N/mm)] [4 lbf/in. (18 N/mm)] <Insert force> per ASTM D 3936. 5. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. 6. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 7. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24. 8. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): <Insert NRC> per ASTM C 423. 9. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165. 10. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after [40] [60] <Insert number> AFU (AATCC fading units) per AATCC 16, Option E. 11. Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria; not less than l-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per AATCC 174. 12. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than [3.5] [2] <Insert number> kV per AATCC 134. 13. Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives with VOC content not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EP A method 24). CARPET TILE 09681 - 4 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 11/03 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: [As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer] [Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasabte, pressure-sensitive adhesive] [Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive] [Free lay; install carpet tiles without adhesive]. C. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. D. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. END OF SECTION 0968 1 END OF SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE 09681 - 5 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl wall covering. 2. Woven glass-fiber wall covering. 3. Textile wall covering. 4. Wallpaper. B. Owner-Furnished Materials: <Insert wall-covering materials>. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC content[ and chemical components]. C. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate [pattern placement,] seams and termination points. D. Samples: Full width by [36-inch- (914-mm-)] <Insert dimension> long section of wall covering from same print run or dye lot to be used for the Work, with specified [treatments] [paint] applied.[ Show complete pattern repeat.] Mark top and face of fabric. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for wall covering. F. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: [25] <Insert value> or less. WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 1 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 b. Smoke-Developed Index: [50] [450] <Insert value> or less. 2. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria of UBC Standard 8-2. 3. Fire-Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to [NFPA 265] [NFP A 286] and complying with test protocol and criteria in the 2003 mc. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERINGS A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot. 2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING <Insert drawing designation> A. Vinyl Wall-Covering Standards: Provide[ mildew-resistant] products complying with the following: 1. [FS CCC-W-408D and ]CFFA-W-lOl-D for [Type I, Light] [Type II, Medium] [Type m, Heavy]-Duty products. 2. ASTM F 793 for [peelable] [strippable] wall coverings that qualify as [Category I, Decorative Only] [Category II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability] [Category m, Decorative with High Serviceability] [Category IV, Type I, Commercial Serviceability] [Category V, Type II, Commercial Serviceability] [Category VI, Type m, Commercial Serviceability] products. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Total Weight Excluding Coatings: <Insert weight>. C. Width: [27 inches (686 mill)] [54 inches (1372 mm)] <Insert width>. D. Backing: [Scrim] [Osnaburg] [Drill] [Nonwoven] fabric. 1. Fiber Content: [Cotton] [Polyester] [Polycotton] [Polyester cellulose] <Insert fiber content>. WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 2 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 E. Repeat: [Random] <Insert horizontal and vertical dimensions of repeat>. F. Stain-Resistant Coating: <Insert coating manufacturer's name; product name or designation> . G. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.3 WOVEN GLASS-FillER WALL COVERING <Insert drawing designation> A. General: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Total Weight: <Insert weight>. 1. Width: [39 inches (991 m)] <Insert width>. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.4 TEXTILE WALL COVERING <Insert drawing designation> A. Wall-Covering Standard: Provide [mildew-resistant] [peelable] [strippable] wall coverings that comply with ASTM F 793 for [Category I, Decorative Only] [Category II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability] [Category m, Decorative with High Serviceability] [Category IV, Type I, Commercial Serviceability] [Category V, Type II, Commercial Serviceability] [Category VI, Type m, Commercial Serviceability] products. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Test Responses: 1. Colorfastness to Wet and Dry Crocking: Passes AATCC 8, Grade 3, minimum. 2. Colorfastness to Light: Passes AATCC 16, Option 1 or 3, Grade 4, minimum, at 40 hours. C. Total Weight Excluding Coatings: <Insert weight>. D. Width: <Insert width>. E. Repeat: [Random] <Insert horizontal and vertical dimensions of repeat>. WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 3 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 F. Applied Backing Material: [Acrylic ] [Paper]. G. Stain-Resistant Coating: <Insert coating manufacturer's name; product name or designation> . H. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.5 WALLPAPER <Insert drawing designation> A. Wall-Covering Standard: Provide [mildew-resistant] [peelable] [strippable] wallpaper that complies with ASTM F 793 for [Category I, Decorative Only] [Category II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability] [Category m, Decorative with High Serviceability] products. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. B. Total Weight: <Insert weight>. C. Width: [20-112 inches (520.7 mm)] [28 inches (711.2 mm)] <Insert width>. D. Repeat: [Random] <Insert horizontal and vertical dimensions of repeat>. E. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining[, strippable] adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer and with a VOC content of [50] <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Division 9 Section "[Interior Painting] <Insert Section title>" and recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended by wall- covering manufacturer. D. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 4 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. B. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 4. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 5. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. D. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. E. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for fInished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. F. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. G. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. H. Install reversing every other strip. I. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. J. Match pattern 72 inches (1830 mm) above the fInish floor. K. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and [3 inches (75 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] from inside comers unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted. L. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. M. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 5 Copyright 2006 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 05/06 N. Remove excess adhesive at fInished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. O. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 09720 WALL COVERINGS 09720 - 6 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) SECTION 09771 - FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fabric-wrapped [wall] [and] [ceiling] panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For fabric-wrapped panels. Include mounting devices and details. 1. Field Measurements: Verify locations of fabric-wrapped panels by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Coordination Drawings: Show intersections with adjacent work. D. Samples: For each fabric and panel. E. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For [medium-density fiberboard] [and] [particleboard], documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. F. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabric-wrapped panels with the following surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per [ASTM E 84] [UBC Standard 8-1] by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] <Insert requirement> or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: [450] <Insert requirement> or less. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. I. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. F ABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09771 - 1 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fabric-wrapped panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge; or warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to [10] <Insert number> percent of amount installed, but no fewer than [10 yards (9 m)] <Insert quantity> . 2. Fabric-Wrapped Panel Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount installed, but no fewer than [5] <Insert number> attachment devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORE MATERIALS A. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and ill; density as specified, unfaced, dimensionally stable, molded rigid board, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. B. Glass-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types I, II, and ill; or ASTM C 665[, Type I; unfaced,] [; with tackable, thermally bonded white glass-fiber mesh facing,] flexible, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. C. Mineral-Fiber Board: With maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 5, respectively. D. Tackable, hnpact-Resistant, High-Density Face Layer: 1/8-inch- (3.2-rnm-) thick layer of compressed molded glass-fiber board with a minimum nominal density of 16 to 18 Ib/cu. ft. (256 to 288 kgicu. In) laminated to face of core. E. Polyester Batting Core Overlay: Flame-retardant, compressible, fiberfill. F. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade [MD] [MD-Exterior Glue] [, made without urea formaldehyde]. FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09771 - 2 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 1. Fire-Retardant Medium-Density Fiberboard: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of200 or less per [ASTM E 84] [UBC Standard 8-1]. G. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade [M-2] [M-2-Exterior Glue][, made without urea formaldehyde]. 1. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of25 or less per [ASTM E 84] [UBC Standard 8-1]. 2.2 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANEL <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. <Insert, ill separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> C. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect's samples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [as indicated on Drawings]. 1. Applied Treatments: [Stain resistance] [Polymer flame resistance] [Acrylic backing, single coat] [Acrylic backing, double coat] (Latex backing] [Foam backing] [Knit backing] <Insert treatment>. D. Lining Material: Fabric [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect's samples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [as indicated on Drawings]. E. Panel Core: 1. Glass-Fiber Board: [4- to 7-lb/cu. ft. (64- to 112-kg/cu. m)] [6- to 7-tb/cu. ft. (96- to 112-kg/cu.m)] <Insert density> nominal core density and [1/2-inch (13-mm)] [I-inch (25-mm)] [1-l/2-inch (38-mm)] [2-inch (51-mm)] <Insert thickness> nominal core thickness. 2. Glass-Fiber Blanket: [3- to 4-lb/cu. ft. (48- to 64-kg/cu. m)] <Insert density> nominal core density and [3/8-inch (10-mm)] [l/2-inch (13-mm)] [l-inch (25-mm)] [1-l/2-inch (38-mm)] [2-inch (51-mm)] <Insert thickness> nominal core thickness. 3. Mineral-Fiber Board: Not less than [13-lb/cu. ft. (208-kg/cn. m)] [20-lb/cu. ft. (320- kg/cu. 01)] nominal density and [1/2-inch (13-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] <Insert thickness> nominal core thickness. 4. Medium-Density Fiberboard: [1/2-inch (13-mm)] [3/4-inch (l9-mm)] <Insert thickness> nominal core thickness. 5. Particleboard: [1/2-inch (13-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] [I-inch (2S-mm)] <Insert thickness> nominal core thickness. F. Core Overlay: Polyester batting; [1/2 inch (13 mOl) thick] [Manufacturer's standard thickness] <Insert thickness>. FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09771 - 3 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) G. Panel Width and Height: [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimensions>. H. Panel Edge: Resin-hardened, glass-fiber board. 1. Edge Detail: [Square] [Bullnosed (radiused)] [Chamfered (beveled)] [Mitered] [Custom as indicated on Drawings] <Insert profIle>. 2. Corner Detail: [Square] [Round, radius as indicated] [Off square, dimensions as indicated] <Insert description> to form continuous profile to match edge detail. I. Panel Edge and Frame: [Extruded-aluminum or zinc-coated, rolled-steel shape] [Extruded PVC] [Hardwood, rabbeted, and splined with glued joints and machined corners] [Core self-edge with no frame]. 1. Edge and Corner Detail: [Square] [Custom as indicated on Drawings] <Insert profIle> . 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabric Facing: Stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other foreign matter. Applied with visible surfaces fully covered. B. [Core-Face Layer] [Core Overlay] [Core Lining]: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags. 1. Provide double thickness of overlay at panel edges. C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. 5. Chords, radii, and diameters. D. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of panel, recommended to support weight of panel,[ with base-support bracket system where recommended by manufacturer for additional support of panels,] and as follows: 1. Adhesive.[ Use only adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g!L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).] 2. Hook-and-Ioop tape. 3. Impaling clips. 4. Magnetic strip or devices. 5. Metal "Z" Clips: Two-part panel clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to wall substrate, designed to allow for panel removal. 6. As recommended by manufacturer. 7. <Insert device.> F ABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09771 - 4 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Wall Panels: Install fabric-wrapped panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. B. Ceiling Panels: Install fabric-wrapped panels in locations indicated with surfaces and edges plumb to surface, edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. C. Anchor panels securely to supporting substrate. D. Match and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent panels. E. Installation Tolerances: As follows: 1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than [1/16 inch (1.6 rom)] [1/32 inch (0.79 mm)] wide. F. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. G. Clean panels with fabric facing, on completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09771 END OF SECTION 09771 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS 09771 - 5 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) SECTION 09841 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes [spline] [back]-mounted acoustical wall panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For acoustical wall panels. Include mounting devices and details. I. Field Measurements: Verify locations of acoustical wall panels by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Coordination Drawings: Show intersections with adjacent work. D. Samples: For each fabric and sample panels. E. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For installation adhesive, including printed statement of VOC content. F. Product [certificates] [test reports]. G. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with the following surface- burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per [ASTM E 84] [UBC Standard 8-1] by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] <Insert requirement> or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: [450] <Insert requirement> or less. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. 1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 1 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at (project site] <Insert location>. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of acoustical wall panels that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failure in performance includes, but is not limited to, acoustical performance. 2. Failures in materials include, but are not limited to, fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge; or warping of core. 3. Warranty Period: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. . 1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, provide length equal to [10] <Insert number> percent of amount installed, but no fewer than [10 yards (9 m)] <Insert quantity> . 2. Acoustical Wall Panel Mounting Devices: Full-size units equal to [5] <Insert number> percent of amount installed, but no fewer than [5] <Insert number> attachment devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORE MATERIALS A. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and ill; density as specified, unfaced, dimensionally stable, molded rigid board, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. B. Mineral-Fiber Board: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 5, respectively. C. Cementitious-Fiber Board Core: Density of not less than 20 Ib/cu. ft. (320 kg/cu. m). D. Tackable, Impact-Resistant, High-Density Face Layer: 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick layer of compressed molded glass-fiber board with a minimum nominal density of 16 to 18 Ib/cu. ft. (256 to 288 kg/cu. m) laminated to face of core. E. Impact-Resistant, Acoustically Transparent, Copolymer Face-Sheet Layer for High-Abuse Applications: 1/16- to 1/8-inch- (1.6- to 3.2-mm-) thick layer of perforated, noncombustible, copolymer sheet laminated to face of core. F. Wood: Clear, vertical grain, straight, kiln-dried hardwood of manufacturer's standard species, A WP A C20, Interior Type A, fIre-retardant treated, low-hygroscopic-type formulation. Use ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 2 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) fIre-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment to 5 to 10 percent moisture content. 2.2 SPLINE-MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS WITH PERFORATED MINERAL- FillER BOARD CORE OR CEMENTITIOUS-FillER BOARD CORE <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> C. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face of a [perforated, water-felted, mineral-fiber board] [cementitious- fiber board] [perforated, water-felted, mineral-fiber board or a cementitious-fiber board] core; with long edges kerfed and rabbeted to receive splines. 1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Not less than [13-lb/cu. ft. (20S-kg/cu. m)] [20-lb/cu. ft. (320- kg/cu. 01)] nominal density; with perforated surface. D. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect's samples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [as indicated on Drawings]. 1. Applied Treatments: [Stain resistance] <Insert treatment>. E. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] <Insert thickness>. F. NRC: For Type A mounting per ASTM E 795, [NRC 0.50 to NRC 0.90] [NRC 0.60 to NRC 0.70] [NRC 0.65 to NRC 0.75] <Insert NRC range>. G. Panel Width: [24 inches (610 mm)] [30 inches (762 mm)] [48 inches (1220 mm)] [600 mm] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. H. Panel Height: Fabricated from units [96 inches (2438 mm)] [108 inches (2743 mm)] [120 inches (3048 mm)] <Insert dimension> in height[ as indicated on Drawings]; mounting height[ as indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. I. Panel Edge: Core self-edge. J. Panel Short Edge Detail: [Square] <Insert profIle>. 2.3 SPLINE-MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS WITH GLASS-FillER BOARD CORE <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 3 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> C. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face of a dimensionally stable, rigid glass-fiber board core with a nominal density of 6 to 7 Ib!cu. ft. (96 to 112 kg/cu. 111); with long edges kerfed and rabbeted to receive splines. D. Core-Face Layer: [Tackable, impact-resistant, high-density board] [Impact-resistant, acoustically transparent, copolymer face-sheet]. E. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect's samples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [as indicated on Drawings]. 1. Applied Treatments: [Stain resistance] <Insert treatment>. F. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: [3/4 inch (19 IDm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 IDID)] [2 inches (51 IDm)] <Insert thickness>. G. NRC: For Type A mounting per ASTM E 795, not less than [NRC 0.20] [NRC 0.80] [NRC 0.95] <Insert minimum NRC>. H. Panel Width: [Manufacturer's standard] [24 inches (610 mm)] [30 inches (762 mm)] [48 inches (1220 IDm)] [600 mm] [1200 mm] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. I. Panel Height: Fabricated from units [96 inches (2438 mm)] [108 inches (2743 mm)] [120 inches (3048 mID)] <Insert dimension> in height[ as indicated on Drawings]; mounting height[ as indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. J. Panel Edge: Manufacturer's standard short edge. K. Panel Short Edge Detail: [Square] <Insert prof"de>. 2.4 BACK-MOUNTED, EDGE-REINFORCED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS WITH GLASS- FillER BOARD CORE <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> C. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable, rigid glass-[ or rock- fiber/slag- ] fiber board core; with edges chemically hardened[ or impact resistant and resilient] to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 4 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) D. Nominal Core Density: [4 to 7 lb/cu. ft. (64 to 112 kg/cu. ID)] [6 to 7 lb/cu. ft. (96 to 112 kg/cu. 01)]. E. Core-Face Layer: [Tackable, impact-resistant, high-density board] [Impact-resistant, acoustically transparent, copolymer face-sheet]. F. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect's samples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [as indicated on Drawings]. 1. Applied Treatments: [Stain resistance] <Insert treatment>. G. Nominal Core Thickness and Overall System NRC: [3/4 inch (19 mm) and not less than NRC 0.65] [1 inch (25 mID) and not less than NRC 0.80] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and not less than NRC 0.85] [2 inches (51 IDm) and not less than NRC 0.90] [2 inches (51 IDm) and not less than NRC 1.00] <Insert thickness and minimum NRC>, for Type A mounting per ASTM E 795. H. Panel Width: [Manufacturer's standard] [24 inches (610 mID)] [30 inches (762 mID)] [48 inches (1220 IDm)] [600 mm] [1200 mm] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. I. Panel Height: Fabricated height [as indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>; mounting height [as indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. J. Panel Edge Detail: [Square] [Bullnosed (radiused)] [Chamfered (beveled)] [Mitered] [Custom as indicated on Drawings] <Insert prof"Ile>. K. Corner Detail: [Square] [Round, radius as indicated] [Off-square, dimensions as indicated] <Insert description> to form continuous prof11e to match edge detail. 2.5 BACK-MOUNTED, EDGE-FRAMED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS WITH GLASS- FillER BOARD CORE <Insert drawing designation> A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> C. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material stretched over front face of edge-framed, dimensionally stable, rigid glass-fiber board core and bonded or attached to edges and back of frame. D. Nominal Core Density: [4 to 7 tb/cu. ft. (64 to 112 kg/cu. m)] [6 to 7 tb/cu. ft. (96 to 112 kg/cu. 01)]. E. Core-Face Layer: [Tackable, impact-resistant, high-density board] [Impact-resistant, acoustically transparent, copolymer face-sheet]. ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 5 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) F. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern [as indicated by manufacturer's designations] [matching Architect's samples] [as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [as indicated on Drawings]. 1. Applied Treatments: [Stain resistance] <Insert treatment>. G. Nominal Core Thickness and Overall System NRC: [1 inch (25 mm) and not less than NRC 0.80] [1-1/2 inches (38 IDm) and not less than NRC 0.85] [2 inches (51 mID) and not less than NRC 0.90] <Insert thickness and minimum NRC>, for Type A mounting per ASTM E 795. H. Panel Width: [Manufacturer's standard] [24 inches (610 IDm)] [30 inches (762 mm)] [48 inches (1220 IDm)] [600 mm] [1200 mm] [As indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. I. Panel Height: Fabricated height [as indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>; mounting height [as indicated on Drawings] <Insert dimension>. J. Panel Edge and Frame: [Extruded-aluminum or zinc-coated, rolled-steel shape] [Extruded PVC] [Hardwood, rabbeted, and splined with glued joints and machined corners]. 1. Panel Edge Detail: [Square] <Insert profile>. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabric Facing: Stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other foreign matter. Applied with visible surfaces fully covered. B. Core-Face Layer: Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags. C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from corner to corner. 5. Chords, radii, and diameters. D. Spline-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard concealed, extruded-aluminum or plastic connecting splines designed and fabricated for screw attachment to walls, with other moldings and trim for interior and exterior corners, leveling and base support with factory- applied fInish on exposed items. 1. Finish Color: [White ] [Black] [Match color of facing material] [Match Architect's sample] . E. Back-Mounting Devices: Concealed on backside of panel, recommended to support weight of panel,[ with base-support bracket system where recommended by manufacturer for additional support of panels,] and as follows: ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 6 Copyright 2003 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/03 (R 05/06) 1. Adhesive.[ Use only adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 gIL or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).] 2. Hook-and-loop tape. 3. Impaling clips. 4. Magnetic strip or devices. 5. Metal "Z" Clips: Two-part panel clips, with one part of each clip mechanically attached to back of panel and the other part to wall substrate, designed to allow for panel removal. 6. As recommended by manufacturer. 7. <Insert device.> PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut edge to match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly. B. Anchor panels securely to supporting substrate. C. Match and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent panels. D. Installation Tolerances: As follows: 1. Variation from Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than [1116 inch (1.6 mm)] [1132 inch (0.79 mID)] wide. E. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. F. Clean panels with fabric facing, on completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Replace acoustical wall panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09841 END OF SECTION 09841 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09841 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 7. Wood. 8. Plastic trim fabrications. 9. Exterior portland cement (stucco). 10. Exterior gypsum board. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each fInish and for each color and texture required. C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed ill "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and fInish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. 111). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional [5] <Insert number> percent, but not less than [1 gal. (3.8 L)] <Insert number> of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect's samples] [As indicated in a color schedule] <Insert requirements>. 2.2 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI #17. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. C. Bonding Primer (Solvent Based): MPI #69. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. D. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. C. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE1. D. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. E. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Exterior Alkyd Wood Primer: MPI #5. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. C. Exterior Oil Wood Primer: MPI #7. 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE2. 2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Levell). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. C. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of65 units at 60 deg). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.7 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Flat): MPI #8 (Gloss Levell). 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE1. B. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. C. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. 2.8 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Quick-Drying Enamel (High Gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.9 TEXTURED AND HIGH-BUILD COATINGS A. Latex Stucco and Masonry Textured Coating: MPI #42. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. B. High-Build Latex (Exterior): MPI #40. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E3]. 2.10 ALUMINUM PAINT A. Aluminum Paint: MPI # I. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 2.11 FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. C. Interior/Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. D. ExteriorlInterior Alkyd Floor Enamel (Gloss): MPI #27 (Gloss Leve16). 1. VOCContent: E Range of [El] [E2]. 2. Additives: Manufacturer's standard additive to mcrease skid resistance of painted surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Plaster: 12 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refInishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Aggregate/Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1 B. a. Prime Coat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 3.1K. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. High-Build Latex System: MPI EXT 3.1L, applied to form dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: High-build latex (exterior). EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 5. Latex Aggregate System: MPI EXT 3.1N. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating. B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Paint System: MPI EXT 3.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). 2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: MPI EXT 3.2D. a. Prime Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). c. Topcoat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). 3. Clear Sealer System: MPI EXT 3.2G. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based). b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based). 4. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI EXT 3.2H. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). C. Clay-Masonry Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.1A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. High-Build Latex System: MPI EXT 4.1H, applied to form dry film thickness of not less than lO mils (0.25 mm). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: High-build latex (exterior). 3. Latex Aggregate System: MPI EXT 4.1B. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02104 D. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 4.2L. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. High-Build Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2K, applied to form dry film thickness of not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: High-build latex (exterior). 4. Latex Aggregate System: MPI EXT 4.2B. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating. E. Steel Substrates: 1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI EXT 5.1A. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel [(semigloss)] [(high gloss)]. 2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.ID. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Aluminum Paint System: MPI EXT 5.1K. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H. a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. G. Aluminum Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.4H. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. H. Glue-Laminated Beam and Column Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.1 L. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.1A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 6.1B. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. I. Dressed Lumber Substrates: description> . Including [architectural woodwork] [doors] <Insert EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 9 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.3A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 6.3B. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. J. Wood Panel Substrates: Including [plywood siding] [fascias] [soffits] <Insert description>. 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.4G. a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 6.4B. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. K. Wood Shingle and Shake Substrates (Excluding Roofs): 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.6E. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.6A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 10 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 6.6B. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. L. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including [board siding] [fencing] [undersides of decking] <Insert description>. 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.2M. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.2A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 6.2C. a. Prime Coat: Exterior [alkyd] [oil] wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. M. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: Including [lumber decking] [stairs] <Insert description> . 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.5E. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). 1) With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI EXT 6.5A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior alkyd wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch (low gloss). I) With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface. 3. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: MPI EXT 6.5B. a. Prime Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). c. Topcoat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 11 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1) With additive to increase skid resistance of painted surface. N. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.8A. a. Prime Coat: Bonding primer [(water based)] [(solvent based)]. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 6.8B. a. Prime Coat: Bonding primer [(water based)] [(solvent based)]. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. O. Stucco Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.1A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System: MPI EXT 9.1J. a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. High-Build Latex System: MPI EXT 9.IH, applied to form dry fIlm thickness of not less than 10 mils (0.25 nun). a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: High-build latex (exterior). P. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. END OF SECTION 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 12 Copyright 2004 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART I-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Clay masonry. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 4. Steel. 5. Galvanized metal. 6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 7. Wood. 8. Gypsum board. 9. Plaster. 10. Spray-textured ceilings. 11. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required. C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. D. LEED Submittal: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC content[ and chemical components]. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed m "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and fInish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional [5] <Insert number> percent, but not less than [1 gal. (3.8 L)] <Insert number> of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content ofField-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or fInishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 gIL. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 gIL. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 gIL. 4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 gIL. 5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 gIL. 6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 gIL. 7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 gIL. 8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 gIL. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 gIL. 10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 gIL. 11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 gIL. 12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 gIL. 13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 14. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 gIL. 15. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 gIL. 16. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 gIL. C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or fInishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. 1. Di-n-octyl phthalate. J. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. 1. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1, I-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. D. Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect's samples] [As indicated in a color schedule] <Insert requirements>. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 2.2 BLOCK FILLERS A. InteriorlExterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. B. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. C. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. D. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE1. E. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. F. Vinyl Wash Primer: MPI #80. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. G. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. 2.6 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Levell). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 0.5] [EPR 1.5] [EPR 2.5]. B. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. C. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. D. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1.5] [EPR 2] [EPR 2.5] [EPR 3.5]. E. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 2] [EPR 3] [EPR 4]. F. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 2] [EPR 3] [EPR 4]. G. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex (Flat): MPI #143 (Gloss Levell). 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 4] [EPR 5.5]. H. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #144 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) I. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. J. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex (Semigloss): MPI #147 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range ofE3. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 3] [EPR 5.5]. K. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #138 (Gloss Level 2). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 4] [EPR 5] [EPR 6]. L. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Eggshell): MPI #139 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 5] [EPR 6]. M. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin): MPI #140 (Gloss Level 4). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 4.5] [EPR 6.5]. N. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Semigloss): MPI #141 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 5] [EPR 6] [EPR 7]. O. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Levell). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. P. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. Q. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of65 units at 60 deg). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.7 ALKYD PAINTS A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Levell). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Interior Alkyd (Eggshell): MPI #51 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form C. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. D. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. 2.8 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. B. Quick-Drying Enamel (High Gloss): MPI #96 (Gloss Level 7). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.9 TEXTURED COATING A. Latex Stucco and Masonry Textured Coating: MPI #42. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. 2.10 DRY FOG/FALL COATINGS A. Latex Dry Fog/Fall: MPI #118. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. B. Waterborne Dry Fall: MPI #133. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1] [EPR 2] [EPR 3]. C. Interior Alkyd Dry Fog/Fall: MPI #55. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2.11 ALUMINUM PAINT A. Aluminum Paint: MPI #1. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. INTERIOR PAINTING 02/04 (R 05/06) 09912 - 7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 2.12 FLOOR COATINGS A. Interior Concrete Floor Stain: MPI #58. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. B. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Water Based): MPI #99. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2] [E3]. C. Interior/Exterior Clear Concrete Floor Sealer (Solvent Based): MPI #104. 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. D. Interior/Exterior Latex Floor and Porch Paint (Low Gloss): MPI #60 (maximum Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [E2] [E3]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. E. ExteriorlInterior Alkyd Floor Enamel (Gloss): MPI #27 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of [El] [E2]. 2. Additives: Manufacturer's standard additive to mcrease skid resistance of painted surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3 . Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing fInishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 8 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Apply paints to produce surface f1lms without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed m equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied fmal ftnishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed ftnish for field painting. h. <Insert mechanical items to be painted.> 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed ftnish for field painting. d. <Insert electrical items to be painted.> E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and reftnishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 9 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1E. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 3.1A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Latex Over Latex Aggregate System: MPI INT 3.1B. a. Prime Coat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex [(flat)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Alkyd System: MPI INT 3.1D. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 5. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1M. a. Prime Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional 10w-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 6. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 3.1C. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)]. B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Enamel System: MPI INT 3.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 10 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: MPI INT 3.2B. a. Prime Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). c. Topcoat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). 3. Concrete Stain System: MPI INT 3.2E. a. First Coat: Interior concrete floor stain. b. Topcoat: Interior concrete floor stain. 4. Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2F. a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based). b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (solvent based). 5. Water-Based Clear Sealer System: MPI INT 3.2G. a. First Coat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). b. Topcoat: Interior/exterior clear concrete floor sealer (water based). C. Clay-Masonry Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.1 A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.1D. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Latex Aggregate System: MPI INT 4.IB. a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Latex stucco and masonry textured coating. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.IM. a. Prime Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.1L. a. Prime Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 11 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ ( semigloss)]. D. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.2C. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd Over Latex Sealer System: MPI INT 4.2N. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Sealer Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. c. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.2E. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block f11ler. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional 10w-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 4.2D. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] . E. Steel Substrates: 1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel [(semigloss)] [(high gloss)]. 2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.1e. a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] [Quick-drying alkyd] metal primer. b. Topcoat: [Latex dry fog/fall] (Waterborne dry fall]. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 12 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 3. Alkyd Dry-Fall System: MPI!NT 5.1D. a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] [Quick-drying alkyd] metal primer. b. Topcoat: Interior alkyd dry fog/fall. 4. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI!NT 5.IQ. a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] [Quick-drying alkyd] metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 5. Alkyd System: MPI!NT 5.lE. a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] [Quick-drying alkyd] metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 6. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.1M. a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] [Quick-drying alkyd] metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint. 7. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI!NT 5.1S. a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based). b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional 10w-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [ (eggshell)] [ (semigloss)]. 8. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.1R. a. Prime Coat: [Alkyd anticorrosive] [Quick-drying alkyd] metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)]. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI!NT 5.3H. a. Prime Coat: Waterbome dry fall. b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall. 2. Alkyd Dry-Fall System: MPI!NT 5.3F. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Topcoat: Interior alkyd dry fog/fall. 3. Latex System: MPI!NT 5.3A. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 13 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 5. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 6. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.3G. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint. 7. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.3N. a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 8. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.3M. a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)]. G. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI!NT 5.4H. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Alkyd Over Vinyl Wash Primer System: MPI!NT 5.4A. a. Prime Coat: Vinyl wash primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 14 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd Over Quick-Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.4D. a. Prime Coat: Vinyl wash primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint. 5. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.4G. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [ (eggshell)] [ (semigloss)] . 6. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 5.4F. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] . H. Glue-Laminated Beam and Column Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.1M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.1A. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI!NT 6.1B. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.1 Q. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 15 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [ ( semigloss)] . 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.1N. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ ( semigloss)]. I. Dressed Lumber Substrates: description> . Including [architectural woodwork] [doors] <Insert 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3D. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.3B. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.3V. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 5. High-Performance Architectmal Latex System: MPI INT 6.3A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ (semigloss)]. J. Wood Panel Substrates: Including [painted plywood] [medium-density fiberboard] [hardboard] <Insert description>. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 16 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.4A. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.4B. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.4T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional 10w-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.4S. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ ( semigloss)]. K. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Including [exposed joists] [exposed beams] <Insert description>. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.2D. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.2C. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-17 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.2L. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.2B. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ ( semigloss)]. L. Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: 1. Latex Floor Paint System: MPI INT 6.5G. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). c. Topcoat: Interior/exterior latex floor and porch paint (low gloss). 2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System: MPI INT 6.5A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). c. Topcoat: Exterior/interior alkyd floor enamel (gloss). M. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex [primer/sealer] [matching topcoat]. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [ ( semigloss)] . INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 -18 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) 4. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ (semigloss)]. N. Plaster Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex [primer/sealer] [matching topcoat]. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 9.2K. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional 10w-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. 5. High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: High-performance architectural latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High-performance architectural latex [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [ (semigloss)] . O. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: 1. Latex (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1A, spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex [primer/sealer] [(flat)]. b. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). 2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.1E, spray applied. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 19 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC Short Form 02/04 (R 05/06) a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)]. 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 9.1B. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 4. Alkyd (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1C. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd (flat). b. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). 5. Alkyd System: MPI INT 9.ID. a. Prime Coat: Interior alkyd primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. P. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including [pipe and duct coverings] <Insert description>. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 1O.1A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex [primer/sealer] [matching topcoat]. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(satin)] [(semigloss)] [ (gloss)]. 2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 10.1B. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd [(flat)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)] [(gloss)]. 3. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 10.1 C. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint. c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 1O.ID. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutionallow-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex [(flat)] [(low sheen)] [(eggshell)] [(semigloss)]. END OF SECTION 099 1 2END OF SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 20 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 SECTION 10531 - AWNINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fixed awnings. 2. Retractable awnings, [manually operated] [motorized]. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and install awnings to withstand loads from gravity, wind,[ snow,] ponding, drift, [seismic, land structural movement, including thermally induced movement; and to resist, without failure, other conditions of in-service use, including exposure to weather. 1. Determine wind loads based on uniform pressure of <Insert number> 1bf/sq. ft. (<Insert number> Pa), acting upward or downward. B. Seismic Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."] <Insert applicable code requirement.> C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, tearing of fabric, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (l00 deg C), material surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of awning indicated. 1. Motorized Awning Operators: Include operating instructions. 2. Motors: Show nameplate data, ratings, characteristics, and mounting arrangements. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and operational clearances. Show colors and graphic layout and content. 1. 2. Include wiring diagrams. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. AWNINGS 10531 - 1 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 3. Show text message, font, character sizes, and other graphic forms, character spacing, word spacing, line spacing, margin widths, position of copy, and other information related to graphic design. C. Samples: For each colored or fInished awning component. D. Welding certificates. E. Research/Evaluation reports for anchors and fasteners. F. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing awnings and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [A WS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."] [AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."] C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide awning fabrics with the frre-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes [NFPA 701] [California Code of Regulations, Title 19]. 2. <Insert fire-test-response characteristic>: <Insert f"Ire-test-response requirements and test method>. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFP A 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Mockups: Before installing awnings, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and fabricator agree to repair or replace components of awnings that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: AWNINGS 10531 - 2 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 a. Structural failures including framework. b. Faulty operation of operator. c. Deterioration of fabric including seam failure. d. Deterioration of metals, metal fInishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Awning Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering awnings that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide awnings by one of the following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the awning indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; awning name or designation> or a comparable awning by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> 2.2 AWNING FABRICS <Insert product designation> A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name; product name or designation.> C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, manufacturer's name.> D. Fabric Fiber Content: [Vinyl-laminated or -coated polyester mesh] [Vinyl-laminated or - coated polyester] [Acrylic-coated polyester] (Resin-coated polyester] (Vinyl-coated polyester/cotton blend] [Acrylic-coated polyester/cotton blend] [Resin-coated polyester/cotton blend] [Solution-dyed acrylic] [Solution-dyed modacrylic] <Insert description> . E. Fiber Type: <Insert description.> AWNINGS 1053l-3 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 F. Style: <Insert description.> 1. Fabric Weight: <Insert value.> 2. Width: <Insert dimension.> 3. Bottom Hem: [Straight] [Scalloped, evenly spaced pattern] [As indicated by manufacturer's designation] [As indicated in an awning schedule] <Insert description> . 4. Color: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [As indicated in an awning schedule] <Insert color>. 5. Applied Treatment: [Stain resistant] [Mildew resistant] [polymer, flame resistant] [Water repellent] [Lamination] <Insert description>. G. Graphic Application: [Hand painting] [Silk-screen printing] [Heat color transfer] [Vinyl tllm with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing] [PVDF tllm with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing] [PVF tllm with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing] [Radio-frequency, heat-sealed vinyl film] [Eradication] [Cut-out lettering] <Insert description>. 1. Vinyl Film: [Calendered-vinyl film, not less than 3 mils (0.076 mm) thick, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing] [Cast-vinyl film, not less than 2 mils (0.051 mm) thick, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing] [Cast-vinyl reflective tllm, not less than 2 mils (0.051 mm) thick, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing] <Insert description> . H. Inset Fabric: [Heat-sealed] [Sewn-in] process, and as follows: 1. Fiber Content: <Insert percentage.> 2. Pattern: <Insert description.> 3. Style: <Insert description.> 4. Fabric Weight: <Insert value.> 5. Width: <Insert dimension.> 6. Colors: [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [As indicated in an awning schedule] <Insert colors>. 7. Applied Treatment: [Stain resistant] [Mildew resistant] [polymer, flame resistant] [Water repellent] <Insert description>. I. Thread: [100 percent expanded PTFE] [100 percent bonded polyester], UV-light, mildew, and rot resistant. 2.3 AWNING FRAMES A. Steel Frames: 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/ A 36M. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, grade as required by structural loads. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/ A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Steel Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-we1ded carbon or alloy steel tubing complying with ASTM A 513 or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/A 101lM and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500. 1. 2. 3. AWNINGS 10531 - 4 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 5. Steel Finish: [Manufacturer's standard galvanized and corrosion-resistant mill] [Manufacturer's standard decorative] [Baked-enamel] [Powder-coat] <Insert finish> fInish complying with fInish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. B. Aluminum Frames: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and fInish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper required by structural loads. 1. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. 4. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M). 5. Aluminum Finish: [Mill] [Manufacturer's standard decorative] [Baked-enamel] [Powder-coat] <Insert finish> fInish complying with fInish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. C. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, Hardware, and Installation Accessories: Complying with performance requirements indicated and suitable for exposure conditions, supporting structure, anchoring substrates, and installation methods indicated. Corrosion-resistant or noncorrodible units; weather-resistant, [tamperproof, vandal- and theft-resistant, ]compatible, nonstaining materials. Provide as required for awning assembly, mounting, and secure attachment. Number as needed to comply with performance requirements and to maximize appearance; evenly spaced. Where exposed to view, with fInish and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds ill steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.4 AWNING FABRICATION A. Fabrics: Reinforce wear points and hardware attachment points with [nonwoven] [mesh] [polypropylene mesh] <Insert description> webbing. B. Fabric Edges and Seams: [Folded and stitched] [Hot cut and sealed] [Radio-frequency welded] [Adhesively bonded] [Manufacturer's standard methods]. C. Decorative Trims: [Borders] [Braid and bindings] [Cords] [Fringe] [Patterned edge; scalloped] (patterned edge; V-shaped] [Streamers] [Tassels] [Welting] <Insert description> . 1. Colors: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [Matching or coordinating with awning fabric color] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [As indicated in an awning schedule] <Insert colors>. D. Frames: Preassemble awning frames in the shop to greatest extent possible. AWNINGS 10531 - 5 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 1. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Fabricate slip-fit connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 4. Weld corners and connections continuously. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed comers and connections, fInish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after fInishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications in place and to properly transfer loads. E. Colors of Metal and Plastic Components Exposed to View: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [Matching or coordinating with awning fabric color] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [As indicated in an awning schedule] <Insert colors>. 2.5 RETRACT ABLE AWNING OPERATORS <Insert product designation> A. Manual Operation: With gear and crank operator. 1. Manual Operation Assist Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard spring assist for operating heavy awnings. 2. Crank Handle: [One] [Two] <Insert number>, detachable. B. Motorized Operation: Provide factory-assembled, motorized, retractable awning operation systems designed for retracing awnings of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provide operation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for Project conditions and recommended by awning manufacturer, complete with electric motors and factory-prewired motor controls, remote- control stations, remote-control devices, power disconnect switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, and accessories required for reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6[ with NFP A 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24- V ac or dc]. E. Electric Motors: UL-approved or -recognized, totally enclosed, insulated motor, complying with NEMA MG 1, with thermal-overload protection and internal limit switches; sized by awning manufacturer to start and operate size and weight of awning considering service factor or considering Project's service conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings. 1. 2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. Motor Characteristics: Single phase, [24] [110] [220] <Insert voltage rating> V, 60 Hz. AWNINGS 10531 - 6 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 F. Remote Controls: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type [1] [4] <Insert number> enclosure for [surface] [recessed or flush] <Insert description> mounting. [Keyed switch] [Toggle-style, wall switch] [Rocker-style, wall switch] [Rocker-style, group-control wall switch] [Rocker-style, individual/group-control wall switch] [Sun sensor] [Radio] [Timer] [Microprocessor] . G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop awning at fully raised and fully lowered positions. H. Awning Hood: Sheet metal enclosure sized to fit awning roller and operating hardware inside and designed for UV -light, dust, weather, and vandal protection. Finish and color [to match awning framing] [as indicated on Drawings] [as indicated in an awning schedule] <Insert description> . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install awnings[ and motor controls] at locations and in position indicated, securely connected to supports, free of rack, and in proper relation to adjacent construction. Use mounting methods of types described and in compliance with Shop Drawings and fabricator's written instructions. B. Install awnings after other finishing operations, including joint sealing and painting, have been completed. C. Attach fabric to frames as recommended by fabricator, [by stapling into slotted track in frame] [using lacing method as required to conceal ends of lacing] [using fabric hem pockets] <Insert method> to ensure tight, wrinkle-free fit of fabric to frame. D. Slip fit frame connections accurately together to form hairline joints and tighten to secure. E. Weld frame connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 1. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, fInish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adj acent surface. F. Anchoring to In-Place Construction: Use anchors, fasteners, fittings, hardware, and installation accessories where necessary for securing awnings to structural support and for properly transferring load to in-place construction. AWNINGS 10531 -7 Copyright 2004 AlA MASTERSPEC - SHORT FORM 02/04 G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. H. Coordinate awning installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall and roof assemblies. I. Connections: Connect motorized operators to building electrical system. J. Adjust awnings to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. K. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with same or compatible material as used for shop- applied ftnish painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (O.05-mm) dry film thickness. L. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain awnings. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training. " END OF SECTION 10531 AWNINGS 10531-8